HAMPTON INN AND SUITES AT D.I.A. - Superior...

JANUARY 3, 2009 (REVISED JUNE 1, 2009)

PROJECT MANUAL FOR

HAMPTON INN AND SUITES AT D.I.A. PARK IV WEST KITTREDGE EAST 4310 AIRPORT WAY DENVER, COLORADO 80239 PROJECT NO. 0708 TED R. LOCKE, ARCHITECT 1365 GARDEN OF THE GODS ROAD, SUITE 130 COLORADO SPRINGS, COLORADO 80907

[This page intentionally left blank]

TRL 0708 1

PROJECT DIRECTORY HAMPTON INN & SUITES AT D.I.A. PARK IV WEST KITTREDGE EAST 4310 AIRPORT WAY DENVER, COLORADO 80239 Highlands Hospitality, LLC Owner/Developer 595 Genoa Way Castle Rock, Colorado 80104 303/814-8800 303/814-8864 Fax Ted R. Locke Architect 1365 Garden of the Gods Road, Suite 130 Colorado Springs, Colorado 80907 719/831-7779 719/831-7433 Fax Martin / Martin, Inc. Civil Engineer 12499 West Colfax Avenue P.O. Box 151500 Lakewood, Colorado 80215 303/431-6100 303/431-4028 Fax Michael L. Stahl, Inc. Landscape Architect 9581 Silver Hill Circle Lone Tree, Colorado 80124 303/779-8801 303/925-1380 Fax Jirsa Hedrick & Associates, Inc. Structural Engineer 1245 East Colfax Avenue, Suite 301 Denver, Colorado 80216 303/839-1963 303/839-1983 Fax DC Engineering Mechanical / Electrical 440 East Corporate Drive, Suite 103 and Plumbing Engineer Meridian, Idaho 83642 208/288-2181 208/288-2182 Fax CTL/THOMPSON Geotechnical 1971 Wet 12th Avenue Denver, Colorado 80204 303/825-0777 303/825-4252 Fax

TRL 0708 2

Specifications Consultants, Inc. Specifications 611 North Weber, Suite 103 Colorado Springs, Colorado 80903 719/577-9414 719/577-9455 Fax END OF SECTION

TRL 0708 1

TABLE OF CONTENTS

FOR

PROJECT MANUAL

FOR

HAMPTON INN & SUITES AT D.I.A. PARK IV WEST KITTREDGE EAST

4310 AIRPORT WAY DENVER, COLORADO 80239

PROJECT NO. 0708

3 JANUARY 2009

(REVISED 1 JUNE 2009) BIDDING AND CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS 00205 Instructions to Subcontract Bidders 1-3 00300 Information Available to Bidders 1 00700 General Conditions 1 00800 Supplementary Conditions 1-9 SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01100 Summary 1-2 01312 Project Meetings 1-2 01330 Submittal Procedures 1-5 01410 Regulatory Requirements 1 01420 References 1-4 01450 Quality Control 1-3 01500 Temporary Facilities and Controls 1-5 01600 Product Requirements 1-5 01722 Field Engineering 1-2 01732 Cutting and Patching 1-2 01741 Final Cleaning 1 01770 Closeout Procedures 1 01780 Closeout Submittals 1-3 01900 Furniture, Fixtures and Equipment 1-3 DIVISION 2 SITE CONSTRUCTION 02230 Site Clearing 1-6 02270 Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control 1-6 02300 Earthwork 1-14 02317 Trenching 1-10 02466 Drilled Concrete Piers and Shafts 1-9 02510 Water Distribution 1-2 02530 Sanitary Sewerage 1-2

TRL 0708 2

02630 Storm Drainage 1-2 02741 Hot Mix Asphalt Paving 1-10 02751 Cement Concrete Paving 1-16 02752 Pavement Markings 1-3 02755 Cast-in-Place Concrete (Other than Paving) 1-15 02764 Pavement Joint Sealants 1-6 02782 Brick Paving – Setting Bed 1-3 02891 Post-Mounted Signs 1-2 DIVISION 3 – CONCRETE 03300 Cast-in-Place Concrete 1-20 03381 Unbonded Post-Tensioned Concrete 1-12 DIVISION 4 - MASONRY 04060 Masonry Mortar 1-2 04070 Masonry Grout 1-3 04080 Masonry Anchorage and Reinforcement 1-2 04090 Masonry Accessories 1-2 04810 Unit Masonry Assemblies 1-8 DIVISION 5 – METALS 05120 Structural Steel 1-10 05310 Steel Decking 1-6 05400 Cold-Formed Metal Framing 1-11 05500 Metal Fabrications 1-6 05510 Metal Stairs 1-3 DIVISION 6 – WOOD AND PLASTICS 06100 Rough Carpentry 1-10 06200 Finish Carpentry 1-2 06410 Custom Cabinets 1-4 06416 Lavatory Countertops 1-2 DIVISION 7 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07111 Bituminous Dampproofing 1-2 07133 Modified Bituminous Sheet Waterproofing 1-4 07194 Siloxane Water Repellants 1-3 07210 Building Insulation 1-2 07240 Exterior Insulation and Finish System 1-3 07261 Underslab Vapor Barriers 1-3 07270 Air Barriers 1-2 07538 Fully Adhered EPDM Membrane Roofing 1-7 07600 Flashing and Sheet Metal 1-3 07610 Sheet Metal Roofing 1-3 07720 Roof Accessories 1-2 07840 Firestopping 1-4 07920 Joint Sealants 1-5 DIVISION 8 – DOORS AND WINDOWS 08110 Steel Doors and Frames 1-3 08210 Wood Doors 1-3 08310 Access Doors and Panels 1-2 08348 Mirrored Closet Doors 1

TRL 0708 3

08411 Aluminum-Framed Storefronts 1-3 08460 Automatic Entrance Doors 1-3 08710 Door Hardware 1-4 08800 Glazing 1-5 DIVISION 9 – FINISHES 09253 Gypsum Sheathing 1-2 09263 Gypsum Board Partitions and Walls 1-5 09264 Gypsum Board Ceilings and Soffits 1-4 09300 Tile 1-9 09384 Stone Countertops 1-2 09510 Acoustical Ceilings 1-4 09650 Resilient Flooring 1-3 09680 Carpet with Stretch Pad 1-3 09681 Carpet with Glue-Down Pad 1-3 09720 Wall Covering 1-2 09900 Paints and Coatings 1-5 09943 Textured Ceiling Coatings 1-2 DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES 10210 Wall Louvers 1 10262 Wall and Corner Guards 1 10310 Fireplace Specialties and Accessories 1 10350 Flagpoles 1 10520 Fire Protection Specialties 1-2 10810 Toilet and Bath Accessories 1-2 10823 Shower Doors 1 DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT See Drawings DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS None Used DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 13157 Swimming Pool and Whirlpool (Gunite) 1-12 DIVISION 14 – CONVEYING SYSTEMS 14241 Electric Traction Elevator 1-10 14564 Laundry and Linen Chute 1-2 DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL See Notes on Drawings DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL See Notes on Drawings END OF SECTION

TRL 0708 00205-1

DOCUMENT 00205

INSTRUCTIONS TO SUBCONTRACT BIDDERS 1. CONTRACTS The General Contractor for this project is:

Except as indicated otherwise, all work under this contract will be under the direction of the General Contractor. The successful bidder(s) will execute a subcontract or purchase order with the General Contractor on the General Contractor's standard forms. Wherever the words Contractor or General Contractor are used in the Project Manual, they shall mean .

2. STATE AND LOCAL LAWS

Bidders are expected to familiarize themselves with the laws and acts of the State of Colorado and the ordinances of the city or county in which the project is located.

3. INTERPRETATION OF DOCUMENTS No interpretation of the meaning of the plans, specifications or other pre-bid documents

will be made to any bidder orally.

Only interpretations made in conformity with the following procedure will be valid. Interpretations either written or oral by any of the Architect's consultants will not be valid.

Every request for such interpretation should be in writing addressed to the Architect and to

be given consideration must be received by the Architect before:

12:00 Noon, Seven Calendar Days Before Date set by the Contractor for Receipt of Bids

Any and all such interpretations and any supplemental instructions will be in the form of

written addenda that, if issued, will be mailed to the respective addresses furnished for such purposes. Failure of any bidder to receive any such addenda or interpretation shall not relieve such bidder from any obligation under his bid as submitted. All addenda so issued shall become a part of the Contract Documents.

4. CONSULTANTS As a matter of identification, the names of consultants employed by the Architect or

Owner for various phases of the work are listed on the drawings and in the Project Manual. Bidders or material suppliers shall not communicate directly with any of the consultants

without the permission of the Architect.

TRL 0708 00205-2

All questions and requests for decisions and interpretations shall be directed to the Architect, who if he deems it advisable, will confer with his consultants regarding same.

See Article 3 regarding Interpretations of Documents. 5. PARTIAL INFORMATION At the request of parties interested in submitting sub-bids on portions of the work, the

Contractor may from time to time issue portions of the drawings and specifications as a convenience to said parties. The Architect disclaims any and all responsibility for errors or omissions made by parties using such partial information in compiling their proposals.

6. CHANGES AND SUBSTITUTIONS Items herein specified under manufacturers' names and catalog numbers are intended as

a basis of quality and not as a closed specification unless noted otherwise. Items other than those specifically named in the specifications or as shown on the

drawings will be considered provided request for approval of such items is received by the Architect in writing by;

12:00 Noon, Seven Calendar Days Before Date Set by

the Contractor for Receipt of Bids Each request for substitution must be accompanied by complete catalog sheets and

other pertinent data, which will make it possible to properly evaluate the items proposed for use. If, in the Architect's opinion the item or items proposed for use are equal to the items specified in design, quality, material and function, he will issue an Addendum listing all such items approved for use. Requests for approval received after the above time and date will not be considered.

Requests for substitution of mechanical and electrical items may be sent directly to

respective consulting engineers with copy to the Architect. Bidders shall base their bid upon the use of any of the items specifically named in the

specifications or on the drawings, or as approved in an Addendum issued by the Architect. Changes or substitutions will not be considered after the award of the contract except

those that will result in a better job, a savings to the Owner, or both. 7. PROPOSALS Proposals shall be submitted by subcontractors and suppliers on forms designated by the

General Contractor. Reference this Project Manual and accompanying drawings and submit bid proposal as

follows: a. Per drawings and specifications, itemize costs by each specification section. Show

total costs (taxes, freight, etc.) b. List any specification item exclusion separately c. Note all addenda included in bid.

TRL 0708 00205-3

d. Indicate the number of working days required to complete bid work. If work is phased, provide time schedule for each phase of work. (i.e. electrical - electrical rough-in and electrical trim work would be different phases of work.)

Return drawings and Project Manual with bid to the General Contractor not later than

date requested. Any bid returned to the General Contractor incomplete including any and all information

herein requested, will be rejected upon such determination by the Project Manager. If the party bidding is an incorporated body, the proposal shall be signed by the, president

and secretary or a duly authorized agent and be accompanied by the corporation seal. If not a corporation, all interested bidders must sign the proposal.

The proposal form and all attached documents together with any required proposal

guaranty, shall be placed in a sealed envelope marked for identification and delivered to the place indicated by the Contractor prior to the date and hour stipulated.

8. SALES AND USE TAXES Bidders shall include all applicable sales and use taxes. 9. PLANS FOR REFERENCE Complete sets of plans and specifications for all portions of the work may be examined by

Contractors, subcontractors and material suppliers at the offices of the General Contractor and/or Architect.

END OF INSTRUCTIONS TO SUBCONTRACT BIDDERS

TRL 0708 00300-1

DOCUMENT 00300

INFORMATION AVAILABLE TO BIDDERS 1.01 SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION Each affected Bidder shall be fully familiar with the following document that has been

prepared for the Owner by its separate Consultant: A. Subsurface Investigation (Geotechnical Report): Geotechnical INvestigation4 Hampton Inn & Suites by Hilton 4310 North Airport Way Denver, Colorado CTL/Thompson Denver, Colorado Project No. DN44, 44-200 March 31, 2008 B The above document will be available for examination at the offices of the Architect. In

preparing his bid, each affected Bidder shall consider and evaluate data contained in the above document as well as the drawings and Project Manual prepared by the Architect.

C. Such data is offered solely for reference and is not to be considered a part of the

Contract Documents. The data contained in the above listed document is believed to be reliable; however, the Architect does not guarantee its accuracy or completeness.

END OF INFORMATION AVAILABLE TO BIDDERS

TRL 0708 00700-1

DOCUMENT 00700 GENERAL CONDITIONS FORM OF GENERAL CONDITIONS 1. The "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction” AIA Document A201-1997,

issued by the American Institute of Architects, is hereby made a part of this Project Manual to the same extent as if written herein in full.

2. Copies of the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction are on file and may

be referred to at the office of the Architect or may by purchased at a nominal charge from any dealer in architect supplies.

END OF DOCUMENT

TRL 0708 00800-1

DOCUMENT 00800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS SC.1 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS The following supplements modify, change, delete from or add to the "General

Conditions of the Contract for Construction", AIA Document A201-1997, Fifteenth Edition. Where any article of the General Conditions is modified or any paragraph, subparagraph or clause thereof is modified or deleted by these supplements, the unaltered provisions of that article, paragraph, subparagraph or clause shall remain in effect.

All divisions of the specifications shall be subject to the General Conditions and

Supplementary Conditions. SC.2 MODIFICATIONS TO ARTICLES OF THE GENERAL CONDITIONS 2.1 ARTICLE 1 –GENERAL PROVISIONS, 1.2 CORRELATION AND INTENT OF THE CONTRACT

DOCUMENTS Add the following to 1.2.1: Where a conflict occurs between or within standards, specifications, and drawings, the

more stringent or higher quality requirements shall apply. The precedence of the Construction Documents is in the following sequence:

1. Addenda and modifications to the drawings and specifications take precedence over the original construction documents.

2. Should there be a conflict within the specifications or on the drawings, the Architect shall decide which stipulation will provide the best installation and his decision shall be final.

3. Should a conflict arise between the drawings and the specifications, the specifications shall have precedence over the drawings.

4. In the drawings, the precedence shall be drawings of a larger scale over those of a smaller scale, figured dimensions over scaled dimensions, and noted materials over graphic indications.

2.2 ARTICLE 3 - CONTRACTOR, 3.4 LABOR AND MATERIALS Add the following: 3.4.4 Bidders shall base their bid upon the use of any of the items specifically named

in the specifications or on the drawings, or as approved in an Addendum issued by the Architect. No changes or substitutions will be considered after the award of the contract except those that will result in a better job, a savings to the Owner, or both.

TRL 0708 00800-2

2.3 ARTICLE 3 - CONTRACTOR, 3.7 PERMITS, FEES AND NOTICES 3.7.1 Add the following: Building permits shall be obtained by the General Contractor. Electrical and

mechanical permits shall be obtained by the mechanical and electrical subcontractors.

The mechanical contractor shall pay for any required sewer, water and gas

tap fees. The Owner will pay for plant investment fees and connection charges based on the cost of mains serving the site.

The Contractor shall call for all inspections required by the local building

inspection authority. Assessments against the property are the obligation of the Owner and will be

paid by the Owner as necessary to assure issuance of permits specified above. This includes sewer and water charges for capital improvements and line extensions.

2.4 ARTICLE 3 - CONTRACTOR, 3.10 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES 3.10.1 Add the following: The schedule shall indicate the start and completion of each of the elements

on the Schedule of Values. The schedule shall indicate the major dependencies among elements on the schedule. The completion time shall be as specified in the Agreement. The schedule shall be revised when the completion time is revised by change order.

See Specifications, Division 1, for detailed procedures. 2.5 ARTICLE 3 - CONTRACTOR, 3.11 DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES AT THE SITE See Specifications, Division 1, for record documents requirements. 2.6 ARTICLE 3 - CONTRACTOR, 3.12 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES See Specifications, Division 1, for detailed procedures. 2.7 ARTICLE 3 - CONTRACTOR, 3.14 CUTTING AND PATCHING See Specifications, Division 1, for additional requirements. 2.8 ARTICLE 3 - CONTRACTOR, 3.15 CLEANING UP See Specifications, Division 1, for additional requirements. 2.9 ARTICLE 4 - ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT, 4.3 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES 4.3.2 Time Limits on Claims Change "21 days" to read "ten days".

TRL 0708 00800-3

2.10 ARTICLE 4 - ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT, 4.3 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES 4.3.7 Claims for Additional Time. 4.3.7.2 Delete and substitute the following: Extension of the contract completion time will be made for delays due to

weather conditions only when such conditions are more severe and extended then those reflected by the ten year average for the month as evidenced by the Climatological Data, U.S. Department of Commerce, for the project area and only if a request for such an extension of time is received within ten (10) days of the first date of delay.

It is understood that delays due to weather conditions will be allowed on a

tentative basis only and that a final decision by the Architect will be reserved until the project is substantially completed. In allowing delays for weather, the Architect will be entitled to consider weather conditions prevailing throughout the entire contract period.

Extensions of time due to weather or other allowable reasons will be granted

on the basis of 1.4 calendar days for every working day lost with each separate extension figured to the nearest whole calendar day. No more than 30 calendar days extension for weather will be allowed during the total construction period. Extensions for other reasons allowed by the General Conditions shall not be limited.

2.11 ARTICLE 7 - CHANGES IN THE WORK, 7.2 CHANGE ORDERS 7.2.2 Change the word "may" to "shall". 2.12 ARTICLE 7 - CHANGES IN THE WORK, 7.3 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVES 7.3.3 Delete and substitute the following: 7.3.3 The cost or credit to the Owner resulting from a construction change directive

shall be determined in one of the following ways: 1. By unit prices named in the bid or subsequently agreed upon. Unit prices

shall include all Contractor's costs, including materials, labor, supervision, taxes, insurance, bond overhead and profit, and shall be applied directly to the quantities or the differences in quantities for which unit prices are requested.

2. By reasonable estimated cost of: a. Labor, including foremen (labor costs shall be direct costs) b. Social Security and old age and unemployment contributions c. Materials entering permanently into the work (including taxes) d. The ownership or rental cost of construction plant and equipment

during the time of use on the extra work. 3. The Contractor may include a sum up to 15% of the total of the foregoing

items as compensation to cover the cost of supervision, overhead, bond, insurance, profit and any other general expenses; subcontractor and second level subcontractors may include a sum up to 10% for such expenses. When both additions and credits are involved in any one change, the allowance for mark-up shall be figured on the basis of net increase, if any.

TRL 0708 00800-4

4. The Contractor's proposal shall include an itemized breakdown showing quantities, unit costs, hours and rates of labor, and any other costs in such detail as may be required to allow the reasonableness of costs to be established. Similar cost information covering subcontractor's work shall be included as part of the Contractor's proposal. Minimum charges for "handling" will not be acceptable. Request for quotations shall be returned to the Architect within ten (10) calendar days of receipt by the Contractor.

2.13 ARTICLE 8 - TIME, 8.2 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION Add the following subparagraphs: 8.2.4 The Contractor must agree to commence work within seven (7) days following

receipt of a written "Notice to Proceed". 8.2.5 Owner and Contractor recognize that time is of the essence and that the

Owner will suffer financial loss and substantial damages if the work is not completed within the time stated in the Agreement, such time commencing from the Notice to Proceed, plus any extensions thereof allowed by Change Order.

2.14 ARTICLE 8 - TIME, 8.3 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME 8.3.1 Delete the words "or other causes beyond the Contractor's control". 2.15 ARTICLE 9 - PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION, 9.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES 9.2.1 Add the following: The Schedules of Values shall be prepared in such a manner that each major

item of subcontract work is shown as a single line item on AIA Document 6702A, Application and Certificate for Payment, Continuation sheet. As a guide, each section of the Project Manual should be shown as a single line item.

2.16 ARTICLE 9 - PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION, 9.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 9.3.1 Change to read as follows: On or before the fifth day of each month, the Contractor shall submit to the

Architect an itemized Application for Payment for all work completed through the last day of the previous month. Application for Payment shall be supported by such data substantiating the Contractor's right to payment as the Owner or Architect may require and reflecting retainage as provided elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

The form of Application for Payment shall be AIA Document G702, Application

and Certification for Payment, supported by AIA Document G702A, Continuation Sheet.

TRL 0708 00800-5

9.3.2 Add the following: In order to facilitate and better assure prompt deliveries of materials, the

Owner will advance payment to the Contractor for the full value of all materials, less the contract retained percentage safely stored within the county where the project is located for delivery as needed to the site of the work. Such stored materials must be properly tagged as to material and job identification, must be available for inspection by the Architect, and such requests for payment must be accompanied by documentary evidence as to quantity and value of materials.

Add the following subparagraph: 9.3.4 With each application for payment, the Contractor shall submit monthly

Progress Charts comparing the "work in place" progress to the Progress Schedule.

2.17 ARTICLE 9 - PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION, 9.5 DECISIONS TO WITHHOLD CERTIFICATION 9.5.1 Add the following: 8. Failure of the Contractor to submit Progress Charts in comparison to

Progress Schedule with application for payment. 9. Failure to comply with any laws, ordinances, regulations or orders of any

public authority governing the performance of the work. The Owner shall make monthly progress payments as described in 9.6 until the

scheduled (including time extensions made by change order) time for substantial completion. If the project is not substantially complete at this time, the Owner will not make further progress payments until the project is substantially complete.

2.18 ARTICLE 9 - PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION, 9.6 PROGRESS PAYMENTS 9.6 Progress Payments 9.6.1 Change to Read: Provided the Architect has issued a certificate on or before the 12th day of the

month, the Owner shall make payment on or before the 25th day of the month.

Until final payment, the Owner will pay 90% of the amount due the Contractor

on account of each line item of each progress payment. If the manner of completion of the work and its progress are and remain satisfactory to the Architect, and in the absence of other good and sufficient reasons, for work category shown to be 50% or more complete in the application for payment, the Owner, may, without reduction of previous retainage, certify any remaining progress payments for each line item to be paid in full. The full contract retainage may be reinstated if the manner of completion of the work and its progress do not remain satisfactory to the Architect or for other good and sufficient reasons.

TRL 0708 00800-6

2.19 ARTICLE 9 - PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION, 9.8 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 9.8.1 Add the following: ...all major systems are operational and all safety features are completed. 2.20 ARTICLE 9 - PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION, 9.9 PARTIAL OCCUPANCY OR USE 9.9.1 Change to read as follows: 9.9.1 The Contractor agrees to the use and occupancy of a portion or unit of the

project before formal acceptance by the Owner under the following conditions:

1. A Certificate of Substantial Completion shall be prepared and executed as provided in Paragraph 9.8 of the accompanying General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, except that when, in the opinion of the Owner, the Contractor is chargeable with unwarranted delay in completing work or other contract requirements, the signature of the Contractor will not be required. The Certificate of Substantial Completion shall be accompanied by a written endorsement of the Contractor's insurance carrier and surety permitting occupancy by the Owner during the remaining period of project work.

2. Occupancy by the Owner shall not be construed by the Contractor as being acceptance of that part of the project to be occupied.

3. The Contractor shall not be held responsible for any damage to the occupied part of the project resulting from the Owner's occupancy.

4. Occupancy by the Owner shall not be deemed to constitute a waiver of existing claims in behalf of the Owner or Contractor against each other.

Use and occupancy by the Owner prior to project acceptance does not

relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to maintain all insurance and bonds required of the Contractor under the Contract until the project is completed and accepted by the Owner.

2.21 ARTICLE 9 - PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION, 9.10 FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT 9.10.1 Add the following: If the work shall be completed, but final completion thereof shall be prevented

through delay or correction of minor defects or unavailability of materials, other causes beyond the control of the Contractor, the Owner at his discretion may release to the Contractor such amounts as may be in excess of three times the cost of completing the unfinished work or the cost of correcting the defective work.

9.10.2 Add the following to the first sentence: 6) all guarantees, warranties and certificates, 7) operating and maintenance

manuals, 8) identification lists of materials and equipment, 9) Inspection Certificates and 10) record documents; and the Contractor has demonstrated to the Owner the proper operation and maintenance of all equipment.

TRL 0708 00800-7

Upon completion of the above, the project shall be advertised by "Notice of Contractor's Settlement", in accordance with State Statute.

On the date of final settlement thus advertised, and after the Contractor has

submitted a written notice to the Owner that no claims have been filed, final payment and settlement shall be made in full.

If any unpaid claim for labor, materials, supplies or equipment is filed before

payment in full of all sums due the Contractor, the Owner shall withhold from the Contractor sufficient funds to insure the payment of such claim, until the same shall have been paid or withdrawn, such payment or withdrawal to be evidenced by filing a receipt in full or an order for withdrawal to be evidenced by filing a receipt in full or an order for withdrawal signed by the claimant or his duly authorized agent or assignee. However, as provided by statute, such funds shall not be withheld longer than ninety (90) days following the date fixed for final settlement with the Contractor, as set forth in the published notice of Contractor's Settlement unless such action at law shall be commenced within that time to enforce such unpaid claim and a notice of such action at law shall have been filed with the Owner. At the expiration of the ninety (90) day period, the Owner shall release to the Contractor all monies as are not the subject of such action at law.

9.10.3 Delete. See revised subparagraph 9.10.1. 2.22 ARTICLE 11 - INSURANCE AND BONDS, 11.1 CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY INSURANCE 11.1.2 Delete and substitute the following: 11.1.2 The Contractor shall obtain and maintain throughout the life of the project, the

following insurance: 1) Workmen's Compensation: Amounts and coverage as required by law. 2) Comprehensive General Liability (to include complete operation): a) Bodily Injury: $1 million single limit. b) Property Damage: $1 million single limit. 3) Comprehensive Automobile Liability (including owned, non-owned and

hired vehicles); a) Bodily Injury: $1 million single limit. b) Property Damage: $1 million single limit. 4) Excess Liability (umbrella) coverage: $5 million Add the following: 11.1.4 Certificates of Insurance shall include the statement that the hold harmless

clause as required under General Conditions Article 3.18 is included in the policy.

2.23 ARTICLE 11 - INSURANCE AND BONDS, 11.4 PROPERTY INSURANCE Delete subparagraphs 11.4.1 through 11.4.10 and substitute the following: 11.4.1 The Owner shall procure and maintain at his own expense, until completion of

all work and acceptance thereof, a builder's risk insurance policy insuring against all risks of physical loss or damage" as the term is commonly construed

TRL 0708 00800-8

in the insurance industry, insuring the entire project against such physical loss or damage.

If other special insurance not provided for herein is desired by the Contractor,

the Contractor shall purchase such insurance at his expense. 11.4.2 Such insurance shall be written on a "Completed Value" form in an amount not

less than the final completed value of the project; less cost of site preparation (including fences necessary to secure work area) and excavation, foundations below the lowest basement floor, underground pipes and wiring, sidewalks, curbs and gutters; and shall name as insured the Owner and Contractor. It shall be understood that subcontractors and second level subcontractors are insured as to their interests in the partially completed project.

11.4.3 Any insured loss is to be adjusted with the Owner and made payable to the

Owner as trustee for the insured, as their interest may appear. 11.4.4 The insurance policy shall provide for necessary access to the project by

Owner as follows: "Permission is hereby granted for the Owner to occupy such portion of the premises completed or suitable for occupancy prior to final acceptance of the entire project, any provision of the policy to the contrary notwithstanding."

11.4.5 The Owner and Contractor waive all rights against each other for damages

caused by fire or other perils to the extent covered by insurance provided under this Paragraph 11.3 except such rights as they may have to the proceeds of such insurance held by the Owner as Trustee. The Contractor shall require similar waivers by subcontractors and sub-subcontractors.

11.4.6 The following are specific exclusions: This insurance does not cover glass

breakage, any tools owned by mechanics, any tools, equipment, scaffolding, staging, towers and forms owned or rented by the Contractor, the capital value of which is not included in the cost of the work, or any temporary structures or trailers used by the Contractor or any subcontractor or material supplier.

11.4.7 The General Contractor shall pay the deductible amount when making a

claim against the property insurance policy. Deductible shall not exceed $1,000.

2.24 ARTICLE 11 - INSURANCE AND BONDS, 11.5 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND 11.5.1 Delete and substitute the following: 11.5.1 General Contractor shall furnish prior to beginning work, a performance bond

in the amount equal to one hundred percent (100%) of the contract amount as security for the faithful performance of this contract and also a labor and material payment bond in an amount not less than one hundred percent (100%) of the contract amount as security for the payment to all persons performing labor on the project under this contract and furnishing all materials in connection with this contract. The bonds shall be issued by a surety licensed to contract business in the State of Wyoming and approved by the Owner.

TRL 0708 00800-9

2.25 ARTICLE 13 - MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS, 13.1 GOVERNING LAW 13.1.1 Delete and substitute the following: The contract shall be governed by the laws of the State of Wyoming. 2.26 ARTICLE 13 - MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS, 13.5 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS 13.5.1 Add the following: The Contractor shall not use any material or equipment represented by

samples found to be unacceptable. See Specifications, Division 1, for detailed procedures and cost of testing.

SC.3 ADDITION TO ARTICLES OF GENERAL CONDITIONS 3.1 ARTICLE 15 - MEASUREMENTS Before ordering any material or doing any work, the Contractor shall verify all

measurements at the project and shall be responsible for the correctness of same. No extra charge or compensation shall be allowed on account of difference between actual dimensions and the measurements indicated on the drawings.

3.2 ARTICLE 16 - LEGAL ACTIONS As a condition precedent to and as additional consideration for the award of any

contract or subcontract pursuant to these specifications, the Contractor and all subcontractors, suppliers, engineers, and other parties to the performance of the work required by these specifications, do agree that in the event any party institute a suit against any party because of any alleged failure to perform properly hereunder, or any alleged error, omission, breach of warranty, negligence or mere malpractice hereunder; and if such suit is not successfully prosecuted to a judgment in favor of the party plaintiff, or if it is dismissed, or if a judgment is rendered for any defendant or defendants, the party instituting the suit hereby agrees to pay in full all actual costs of defense, including but not limited to attorney fees, expert witness fees, costs of investigations in preparation for trial, professional time expended by principals and employees of the prevailing party and that the same shall be taxed as cost in said action and judgment entered thereon.

END OF SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS

TRL 0708 01100-1

DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 01100

SUMMARY 1.01 CONDITIONS AND REQUIREMENTS A. Division 1 - General Requirements govern work under all divisions of specifications. 1.02 SCHEDULE OF DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS AND ADDENDA A. Drawings: See index on drawings. B. Project Manual: Hampton Inn & Suites at D.I.A., Park IV West Kittredge East, 4310 Airport

Way, Denver, Colorado 80239, dated January 3, 2009. C. Addenda: All Addenda issued prior to bidding. 1.03 EXAMINATION OF SITE A. Failure to Visit Site: Will not relieve Contractor from necessity of furnishing materials or

performing work that may be required to complete work in accordance with drawings and specifications without additional cost to Owner.

1.04 CONTRACTS A. Single Contract: All work under this contract will be executed under one prime contract

between Owner and General Contractor. 1.05 WORK FURNISHED BY OWNER A. See Section 01900. 1.06 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES A. Operations of Contractor: Limited to areas where work is indicated. 1.07 COORDINATION A. General: Coordinate work of various sections of specifications to assure efficient and

orderly sequence of installation of construction elements, with provisions for accommodating items installed later.

B. Equipment: Verify that characteristics of elements of interrelated operating equipment

are compatible; coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment.

1. Electrical Requirements: a. Comply with NEC. b. Provide UL listed and labeled products where applicable.

TRL 0708 01100-2

C. Spaces: Coordinate space requirements and installation of mechanical and electrical work that are indicated diagrammatically. Follow routing indicated for pipes, ducts, and conduits as closely as practicable; make runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs.

D. Finished Areas: In finished areas conceal pipes, ducts and wiring in the construction.

Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements. END OF SECTION

TRL 0708 01312-1

SECTION 01312 PROJECT MEETINGS 1.01 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCES A. Preconstruction and Contract Accomplishment Conference: Meeting will be scheduled

by Architect after Notice of Award. 1. Contractor will submit executed bonds and insurance certificates and will sign

contract at this meeting. 2. Administrative requirements such as products lists, schedule of values, payment

applications, progress charts, change order procedures and project closeout will be reviewed in detail.

B. Site Mobilization Conference: Meeting will be scheduled by Architect at site immediately

prior to Contractor move-in. Representatives of Contractor, Mechanical and Electrical Subcontractors, Geotechnical Engineer, Owner, Architect and Architect's Consultants will be present. Job site procedures to include following items will be discussed:

1. Procedures for maintaining project record documents. 2. Owner's requirements. 3. Construction facilities and controls. 4. Temporary utilities. 5. Security and housekeeping procedures. 6. Materials testing. 7. Services of the Geotechnical Engineer. 8. Requirements of start-up trades. 9. Building layout. 10. Communications with Architect's consultants. 11. Access to and use of site in relation to continued use of existing facilities. 1.02 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. Meetings: Contractor will schedule regular periodic meetings at Contractor's job site

field office. Representatives of Owner and Architect will be invited to attend. Also invited as appropriate to items under discussion, will be selected subcontractors and suppliers and Architect's consultants. Following items will be discussed:

1. Review of work progress since previous meetings. 2. Field observations, problems, and conflicts. 3. Problems that impede construction schedule. 4. Review of off-site fabrication, delivery schedules. 5. Corrective measures and procedures to regain projected schedule. 6. Revisions to construction schedule. 7. Plan progress, schedule during succeeding work period. 8. Coordination of schedules. 9. Maintenance of quality standards. 10. Review submittal schedules; expedite as required. 11. Review proposed changes for effect on other trades, construction schedule and

completion date. 12. Coordination of separate contracts. 13. Other business as required.

TRL 0708 01312-2

B. Agenda and Minutes: Contractor shall establish agenda, subject to Owner and Architect review, and keep and distribute minutes of progress meetings and lists of those present and others as directed.

1. Contractor: Advise Architect at least 24 hours in advance of meeting regarding items added to agenda.

C. Persons Representing Contractor at Meetings: Have authority to commit Contractor to

solutions agreed upon in meetings. To maximum extent possible, assign same person or persons to represent Contractor at meetings throughout progress of work.

D. Coordination Meetings: Progress meetings shall in no way be considered substitute for

Contractor/subcontractor coordination meetings. END OF SECTION

TRL 0708 01330-1

SECTION 01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 1.01 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. List of Subcontractors: 1. Instructions to Bidders. 2. General Conditions. B. Products List: 1. Section 01600 Product Requirements C. Progress Schedule: 1. General and Supplementary Conditions. D. Schedule of Values: 1. General and Supplementary Conditions. E. Performance Bond/Labor and Material Payment Bond: 1. Instructions to Bidders. 2. General and Supplementary Conditions. F. Insurance Certificates: 1. General and Supplementary Conditions. G. Applications for Payment: 1. General Conditions. H. Project Record Documents: 1. Section 01780 Closeout Submittals I. Warranties: 1. Section 01780 Closeout Submittals. J. Final Paperwork: 1. Section 01780 Closeout Submittals. K. Contractor's Quality Control System: 1. Section 01450 Quality Control. 1.02 GENERAL A. Submittals: Made early enough to account for processing described below and

reasonable period for review by Architect and Engineers. 1.03 PROGRESS SCHEDULE A. Schedule: In form of chart and indicate start and completion of each of elements on

Schedule of Values. 1. Completion Time: As specified in Agreement. Revise schedule when completion

time is revised by change order.

TRL 0708 01330-2

B. Schedule Submittal: Within ten days after receipt of Notice to Proceed, submit one reproducible copy and four prints of preliminary construction schedule.

1. Within 10 days after receipt of review comments on preliminary schedule, submit one reproducible and four prints of construction schedule.

2. With each monthly application for payment, submit four prints of updated construction schedule indicating actual work progress in comparison to scheduled progress.

C. Estimated Payments: Prepare and submit estimate of partial payments as reflected by

estimated work progress with submittal of construction schedule. D. Monthly Reports: 1. With each monthly application for payment, submit itemized report of delivery

status of major and critical items of purchased equipment and material, including shop drawings and status of shop and field fabricated work.

2. If completion of any part of work or delivery of materials is behind construction schedule, submit plan for bringing work up to schedule.

3. Owner shall have right to withhold progress payments for work if Contractor fails to update and submit progress schedule and reports as specified.

E. Contractor's Responsibility: Nothing in these requirements shall be deemed to be

usurpation of Contractor's authority and responsibility to plan and schedule work as he sees fit, subject to all other requirements of Contract Documents.

1.04 SUBMITTALS LIST, SCHEDULE AND PROCEDURES A. Submittal: Within 30 days after award of contract, and before any items are submitted

for review, submit to Architect two copies of submittal list and schedule. B. Schedule: Compile complete schedule of all submittals anticipated to be made during

progress of work. 1. Include list of each type of item for which Contractor's drawings, shop drawings,

product data, Certificates of Compliance, samples, warranties or other types of submittals are required.

2. On acceptance by Architect, Contractor shall adhere to schedule except when specifically otherwise permitted.

C. Code Designation: On schedule, designate each item with number code utilizing

specification section five digit numbers. 1. Each Submittal: Marked with same code designation. D. Coordination: Coordinate schedule with subcontractors and materials suppliers. E. Revisions: Revise and update schedule on monthly basis as necessary to reflect

conditions and sequences. Promptly submit any revised schedules to Architect for review.

F. Transmittals: Include transmittal letter with each submittal, identify item by above code

designation and reference to specification section. Use separate transmittal for each submittal.

1. Each Submittal: Have chronological submittal number. 2. Resubmittals: Have original submittal number and letter in alphabetical order for

each resubmittal.

TRL 0708 01330-3

3. Mechanical and Electrical Submittals: Broken down into parts so that individual parts can be resubmitted without confusion.

G. Deviations: Clearly mark and note any deviations from Contract Documents in

submittals. 1.05 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Shop Drawings: Make particular note of field-measured dimensions, as-built conditions,

and conditions requiring special coordination with other contractors and requirements of activities of Owner.

B. Subcontractor: Submit one reproducible tracing and two prints per shop drawing sheet

and specified number of samples to Contractor. C. Contractor: 1. Review shop drawings for accuracy, completeness, and conformity with Contract

Documents. Make notes and corrections on reproducible tracings and prints. 2. Stamp with Contractor's stamp/date. Signature of individual who reviewed shop

drawings is required below Contractor's stamp. 3. Print as required for Contractor's record. 4. Send reproducible tracings and three prints to Architect. 5. Shop drawings not stamped and signed by Contractor will be returned. D. Architect: 1. Check drawings by making notes and corrections on reproducible tracings and

prints, stamp "No Exceptions Taken", "Revise and Resubmit", "Rejected", etc. as required.

2. In event that shop drawings require consultant's check, route reproducible and print through consultant and back to Architect as necessary. Consultant will retain one set of prints.

3. Retain one set of prints for record and transmit one set to Owner if required. 4. Return marked reproducibles to Contractor. E. Contractor: 1. Send reproducible tracings to subcontractor. F. Subcontractor: 1. Print necessary copies for record, distribution, etc. G. Resubmittal: In event shop drawings have to be resubmitted to Architect, original

reproducible tracings and prints shall be returned directly to Contractor. Subcontractor shall make his corrections and re-route new reproducible tracings and prints as outlined above.

H. References: Reference shop drawings to applicable drawings and specification sections

to facilitate ease and accuracy of checking. 1.06 PRODUCT DATA A. Subcontractor: Submit six copies of brochure material and any required samples.

TRL 0708 01330-4

B. Routing: Routing will be as indicated above for shop drawings with Architect and Engineer retaining three copies for file and returning three copies to Contractor for his file and distribution to subcontractor as applicable.

C. Reference: Reference product data to applicable drawings and specification sections

to facilitate ease and accuracy of checking. D. When contents of submitted literature from manufacturers includes data not pertinent to

submittal, clearly indicate which portion of contents is being submitted for review. 1.07 JOB SITE DOCUMENTS A. Documents: Keep complete set of accepted shop drawings or product data at jobsite. 1.08 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Field Measurements: Responsibility of Contractor. 1.09 SAMPLES A. Checklist: Architect will provide Contractor with checklist indicating materials where

color, texture or finish is subject to selection by Architect. Certain other samples may also be requested for use by Architect in preparation of color and material sample presentations for Owner.

B. Submittal: Promptly after receipt of checklist, assemble and deliver to Architect

complete collection of required samples. Unless otherwise specified, submit samples in quantity that is required to be returned plus one that will be retained by Architect.

C. Samples: Bear tag or label providing following information: 1. Project name and location. 2. Manufacturer, supplier. 3. Name, finish, and composition of material. 4. Location of where material is to be used. 5. Specification section number. 6. Labels: Large enough for acceptance stamp. D. Selection: Upon receipt of complete collection of samples, Architect will, with

reasonable promptness, make selections and prepare and deliver to Contractor schedule covering items subject to selection. Architect reserves right not to make individual determination or selections until all samples of all materials are submitted.

1.10 CERTIFICATES OF COMPLIANCE A. Certificates: 1. Where Certificates of Compliance are specified, show on each certification name

and location of work, name and address of Contractor, quantity and date or dates of shipment or delivery to which certificate applies, and name of manufacturer.

2. Certification: In form of letter or company standard forms. 3. Certificates: Signed by officer of manufacturer.

TRL 0708 01330-5

4. Laboratory Test Reports: Show date of testing, specified requirements for which testing was performed, and results of tests.

END OF SECTION

TRL 0708 01410-1

SECTION 01410 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 1.01 PERMITS AND FEES A. See General and Supplementary Conditions. 1.02 CODES AND ORDINANCES A. Compliance: All contractors shall comply with all applicable codes, ordinances and

regulations in effect at time of bid opening including but not necessarily limited to following:

Applicable local codes and ordinances International Building Code, 2003 Edition International Mechanical Code, 2003 Edition International Plumbing Code, 2003 Edition International Electrical Code, 2003 Edition Governing fire department requirements Utility company requirements State Department of Health Requirements National Fire Protection Association Standards State and Federal Safety and Health Laws NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code Americans with Disabilities Act/Accessibility Standards B. Discrepancies: If discrepancies occur between Contract Documents, local codes, local

utility requirements, etc., most stringent requirements shall apply. END OF SECTION

TRL 0708 01420-1

SECTION 01420 REFERENCES 1.01 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Drawing or Schedule Abbreviations: As noted on Drawings or schedules. 1.02 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS A. Reference in Contract Documents to trade associations, technical societies,

recognized authorities and other institutions include following organizations that are sometimes referred to only by corresponding abbreviations or acronyms:

AA Aluminum Association AAMA American Architectural Manufacturer's Association AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials ACI American Concrete Institute AF&PA American Forest and Paper Association AIA American Institute of Architects AISC American Institute of Steel Construction AISI American Iron and Steel Institute AITC American Institute of Timber Construction ANSI American National Standards Institute APA APA - The Engineered Wood Association ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers ASTM ASTM INTERNATIONAL AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute AWPA American Wood Preservers Association AWC American Wood Council AWS American Welding Society BIA Brick Industry Association CDA Copper Development Association, Inc. CRA California Redwood Association CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute CSI Construction Specifications Institute DFPA Douglas Fir Plywood Association EPA Environmental Protection Agency FGMA Flat Glass Marketing Association FM Factory Mutual Engineering Division FSC Forest Stewardship Council GA Gypsum Association ICBO International Conference of Building Officials ICC International Code Council MIA Marble Institute of America MLMA Metal Lath Manufacturer's Association NAAMM The National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers NBS National Bureau of Standards NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association NEMA National Electrical Manufacturer's Association NFPA National Fire Protection Association NLGA National Lumber Grades Authority

TRL 0708 01420-2

NOFMA National Oak Flooring Manufacturer's Association NPVLMA National Paint, Varnish and Lacquer Manufacturer's Association NTMA The National Terrazzo and Mosaic Association NWWDA National Wood Window and Door Association OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration PCA Portland Cement Association PCI Prestressed Concrete Institute PEI Porcelain Enamel Institute PTI Post-Tensioning Institute RTI Roof Tile Institute SDI Steel Deck Institute SJI Steel Joist Institute SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association SPC Southern Pine Council SPI The Society of the Plastics Industry, Inc. SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau SSPC Society for Protective Coatings SWI Steel Window Institute TCA Tile Council of America TIMA Thermal Insulation Manufacturers Association TPI Truss Plate Institute UL Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. USGBC U.S. Green Building Council USTC&TBA United States Tennis Court and Track Builders Association WCLA West Coast Lumbermen's Association WRI Wire Reinforcement Institute WRCLA Western Red Cedar Lumberman Association WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau WWPA Western Wood Products Association B. Other Abbreviations and Acronyms: ADA Americans with Disabilities Act ADAAG Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines AESS Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel CMU Concrete Masonry Unit CS Commercial Standard (U.S. Department of Commerce) EPDM Ethylene Propylene Diene Monomer FS Federal Specification HDPE High Density Polyethylene HVAC Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning IBC International Building Code IEQ Indoor Environmental Quality LEED Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design MDF Medium Density Fiberboard MIL Military Specification NEC National Electric Code (of NFPA) OSB Oriented Strand Board PS Product Standard (U.S. Department of Commerce) SIP Structural Insulated Panel SPR Simplified Practice Recommendation (U.S. Department of Commerce) PVC Polyvinyl Chloride

TRL 0708 01420-3

UBC Uniform Building Code VOC Volatile Organic Content 1.03 SPECIFICATION LANGUAGE EXPLANATION A. These Specifications are of abbreviated, simplified or streamlined type and include

incomplete sentences. 1. Omissions of words or phrases such as "the contractor shall", "in conformity

therewith", "shall be", "as noted on the Drawings", "a", "the", are intentional. 2. Supply omitted words or phrases by inference. 3. Supply words "shall be" or "shall" by inference when colon is used within sentences or

phrases. 4. Supply words "on the Drawings" by inference when "as indicated" is used with

sentences or phrases. 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. "Provide" shall mean supply and install. 1.05 STANDARDS REFERENCED BY SPECIFICATIONS A. Reference Standards: For products or workmanship specified by association, trade or

federal standards, comply with requirements of standard, except when more stringent requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes.

1. No provision of any referenced standard specification, manual or code (whether or not specifically incorporated by reference in the Contract Documents) shall be effective to change duties and responsibilities of Owner, Contractor or Architect or any of their consultants, agents or employees from those set forth in Contract Documents, nor shall it be effective to assign to Architect or any of Architect's consultants, agents or employees any duty or authority to supervise or direct furnishing or performance of work or any duty or authority to undertake responsibilities contrary to provisions of General and Supplementary Conditions.

B. Effective Date: Version of standard referenced shall be that current and in effect as of

date of issue of Project Manual, except when specific date is specified or when standard is part of applicable code which includes edition date, in which case the governing version shall be established as follows:

1. Date of standard adopted or referenced by code shall govern, unless a later version is referenced by date in the Specifications, in which case the more current version shall govern.

2. For standards not adopted or referenced by code but referenced by date in the Specifications, the version referenced in the Specifications shall govern over a later version adopted by an association or trade group and in effect as of the date of issue of the Project Manual.

C. Copies: When required by individual sections, obtain copy of standard. Maintain copy

at job site during work governed by reference standard. 1. ASTM International Standards: For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM

website, www.astm.org, or contact ASTM Customer Service at [email protected]. For Annual Book of ASTM Standards volume information, refer to the standard's Document Summary page on the ASTM website.

mailto:[email protected]�

TRL 0708 01420-4

1.02 UL FIRE RESISTANCE DIRECTORY A. Where UL design numbers are referenced on Drawings, assemblies shall comply with

Underwriters Laboratories Inc. Fire Resistance Directory, Volumes 1 and 2, latest edition, in addition to requirements of applicable specification sections.

B. Maintain copy of Underwriters Laboratories Inc. Fire Resistance Directory, Volumes 1 and

2, latest edition, on site during all work on UL classified systems. END OF SECTION

TRL 0708 01450-1

SECTION 01450 QUALITY CONTROL 1.01 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Cost of Testing: General and Supplementary Conditions. 1.02 TESTING - GENERAL A. Contractor: Provide equipment and facilities as required, subject to Architect's review,

for conducting field tests and for collecting and forwarding samples. 1. Do not use materials or equipment represented by samples until tests, if required,

have been made and materials or equipment found to be acceptable. 2. Do not incorporate any product into work which becomes unfit for use after

acceptance thereof. B. Testing: Materials or equipment proposed for use may be tested at any time during their

preparation or use. Furnish required samples without charge and give sufficient notice of placing of orders to permit testing. Products may be sampled either prior to shipment or after being received at site of work.

C. Tests: Made by accredited testing laboratory selected by Owner. Except as otherwise

provided, sampling and testing of materials and laboratory methods and testing equipment shall be in accordance with latest standards and tentative methods of ASTM.

1. Specific information concerning testing methods, sample sizes, etc., is included under applicable sections of specifications.

2. Any modification of, or elaboration on, these test procedures included for specific materials under their respective sections in specifications shall take precedence over these procedures.

1.03 TESTS PAID FOR BY OWNER A. Control Tests of Fill and Backfill: At such times and in such numbers as specified in Section

02300 Earthwork. B. Control Test of Asphalt Paving Base and Finish Courses: At such times and in such

numbers as specified in Section 02741 Hot Mix Asphalt Paving. C. Control Tests of Concrete Work: At such times and in such numbers as specified in

Sections 02751 Cement Concrete Pavement, 02755 Cast-in-Place Concrete (Other Than Pavement), and 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete.

D. Control Tests of Masonry Mortar and Grout: At such times and in such numbers as

specified in Sections 04060 Mortar, 04070 Masonry Grout and 04810 Unit Masonry Assemblies.

E. Control Tests of Welding: At such times and in such numbers as specified in Section 05100

Structural Steel. F. Refer to Section 02317 Trenching for additional requirements and details.

TRL 0708 01450-2

1.04 OTHER TESTING A. Following Testing: Performed at expense of installing contractor: 1. Other Tests: Any other tests required by Contract Documents not listed in article

above. 2. Any additional tests required because of any tests that fail subject to following

conditions: a. Quantity and Nature of Tests: Determined by Architect. b. Tests: Taken in presence of Architect. c. Proof of Noncompliance: Contractor liable for corrective action that Architect

feels is required including complete removal and replacement of defective material.

3. Material Substitution: Any tests of material or equipment offered as substitute for specified item on which test may be required in order to prove its compliance with specifications.

B. Contractor: May have tests performed on material and equipment for his own

information and job control so long as Owner does not assume responsibility for costs or for giving them consideration when appraising quality of materials.

1.05 TEST REPORTS A. Reports of tests made by testing laboratories shall be distributed by testing laboratory as

follows: 1 Copy - Contractor 1 Copy - Applicable Supplier or Subcontractor 1 Copy - Owner 1 Copy - Applicable Engineer 1 Copy - Architect Other Copies - As Directed 1.06 CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY CONTROL SYSTEM A. Quality Control: Establish system to perform sufficient inspection and tests of all items of

work, including that of subcontractors, to ensure conformance to Contract Documents for materials, workmanship, construction, finish, functional performance and identification.

1. Control System: a. Establish for all construction except where Contract Documents provide for

specific compliance tests by testing laboratories and engineers employed by Owner.

b. Specifically include all testing required by various sections of Specifications. B. Quality Control System: Means by which Contractor assures himself that construction

complies with requirements of Contract Documents. Controls shall be adequate to cover all construction operations and keyed to proposed construction schedule.

C. Records: Maintain correct records on appropriate form for all inspections and tests

performed, instructions received from Architect and actions taken as result of those instructions.

1. Records: Include evidence that required inspections or tests have been performed (including type and number of inspections or tests, nature of defects, causes for rejection, etc.) proposed or directed remedial action, and corrective action taken.

TRL 0708 01450-3

2. Document inspections and tests as required by each section of Specifications. END OF SECTION

TRL 0708 01500-1

SECTION 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 1.01 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY AND LIGHTING A. General: 1. General Contractor: a. Provide temporary electrical service to site including installation of meter. b. Remove temporary service to site upon completion of work. c. Pay for electricity used through temporary and permanent systems up to date

of Notice of Substantial Completion. 2. Division 16 Contractor: a. Provide temporary wiring, outlets, lights, etc. from load side of meter as

required for construction power and lighting during construction period. b. Remove temporary service and distribution system from load side of meter and

distribution upon completion of work. 3. Service and Distribution System: a. Properly ground in accordance with NEC. b. Provide ground fault interrupters as required by code. B. Temporary Power Distribution: 1. Division 16 Contractor: a. Provide, install, and maintain temporary overhead wiring to building and

temporary loop providing temporary power and lighting service as specified. b. Provide minimum of one double duplex 120V outlet for every 100 lineal feet of

temporary loop. 2. Each Contractor: a. Provide extension cords necessary to convey electricity from temporary loop

outlets to locations of work. b. Provide special power required for welders or other special equipment. 3. Distribution equipment and wiring devices for temporary power and lighting need

not be new, however, installation shall conform to safe general practice as required by OSHA.

C. Temporary Lighting: 1. Division 16 Contractor: Provide one light for every interior room regardless of square

footage area except closets and pipe chases. In larger rooms, provide one light for every 750 sq. ft.

2. Each Contractor: Provide plug-in portable lights as required for task lighting. D. Use of Permanent Systems: 1. After work is completed to extent that permanent electric service into building is

installed and permanent outlets are available, permanent system may be used as necessary for power and light.

2. Permanent branch circuit wiring may be used to supply pigtail lights if protected by properly sized circuit breaker or fuse. Do not use permanent receptacles for construction power.

3. Each Contractor: a. Be responsible for damage to permanent wiring or fixtures as result of

temporary use. b. Replace receptacles and device plates showing wear or abuse.

TRL 0708 01500-2

4. Division 16 Contractor: a. Provide lamps necessary to temporarily light work in permanently installed

fixtures. b. Clean permanently installed light fixtures that are used for temporary lighting

during construction using methods and materials recommended by manufacturer.

c. Remove lamps used temporarily in permanent fixtures and replace with new lamps at completion of work.

1.02 TEMPORARY HEAT AND ENCLOSURES A. Temporary Heat: Provide temporary heat necessary for execution of work. Install,

maintain and operate temporary heating apparatus in manner to facilitate work, so work can continue and so finished work will not be damaged.

B. Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures necessary for holding temporary heat for

masonry and concrete work and for thawing frozen ground. C. Use of Permanent System: 1. After building is entirely permanently enclosed, glazing of exterior openings

completed, permanent or temporary doors on exterior openings and permanent heating system installed and capable of being adequately controlled, permanent heating system may be used to provide heat for building.

2. Division 15 Contractor: a. In using permanent heating system, assume complete responsibility for its

proper operation and for any damage that may occur to heating apparatus or any phase of work except such wear and tear that would ordinarily result from normal usage.

b. At completion and before work is accepted by Owner, clean air vents and coils, clean cleanable filters and replace replacement air filters.

3. General Contractor: Pay for gas and electricity used in connection with operation of permanent system up to date of Notice of Substantial Completion.

4. General Contractor and Division 15 Contractor: If permanent heating system is used during construction, remain responsible for full mechanical warranty from date of Notice of Substantial Completion.

1.03 TEMPORARY WATER A. Temporary Water: Provide as required for execution of work. 1. Provide service, temporary connections, plumbing, piping, etc. necessary to convey

same to places needed. 2. Pay for water used through temporary and permanent systems up to date of Notice

of Substantial Completion. 1.04 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES A. Toilet Facilities: Provide and maintain, in neat and sanitary condition, adequate

chemical toilet facilities for use of employees engaged on work, in compliance with requirements of applicable codes, regulations, laws and ordinances.

1. Toilets in existing buildings shall not be used.

TRL 0708 01500-3

1.05 FIELD OFFICE AND OTHER TEMPORARY STRUCTURES A. Field Office: Provide and maintain suitable temporary field office. 1. Telephone Service: Install telephone in field office. Pay for installation,

maintenance, removal and other charges for use of telephone. 2. Make office and telephone available for use by Owner and Architect. B. Temporary Structures: Provide temporary structures and storage areas as required. 1. Remove offices and other temporary structures from site upon completion of work. 2. Locate on site in orderly manner as determined by Contractor. 1.06 TEMPORARY PROTECTIVE FACILITIES A. Provide and maintain protective devices and facilities for protection of public and

general protection of workmen on project. 1. Provide warning signs against hazards created by such items as protruding nails,

hoists, well holes, window openings, stairways and falling materials. a. Danger lights: Keep lighted each night from sundown to sunrise. 2. Provide and maintain fire extinguishers and active fire hydrants where required.

Maintain fire lanes to hydrants and other equipment as necessary for proper fire protection during construction.

3. Provide temporary walks, roadways, trench covers, barricades, bulkheads, railings, danger lights and signals, etc. required for work by applicable safety laws and building codes.

4. Maintain temporary protective facilities in good condition throughout term of work. Remove at completion of work. Repair and replace work damaged by temporary protective facilities.

B. Each Subcontractor: 1. If in performance of his subcontract, it becomes necessary, convenient or advisable

to remove, replace or interfere with any safety devices or controls installed by Contractor or another subcontractor; subcontractor shall replace or restore such devices at his expense.

2. In event such safety devices or controls are not so replaced or restored, subcontractor shall reimburse Contractor for doing so for subcontractor's account, or by deduct change order to his subcontract.

1.07 SCAFFOLDING AND RUNWAYS A. Scaffolding: Provide as necessary for work. B. Runways, Guard Rails, Platforms and Similar Temporary Construction: Provide and

maintain for safe performance of contract. 1. Provide facilities of type and arrangement as required for their specific use,

substantially constructed, strongly supported, and well secured. 2. Comply with applicable safety laws and codes. 1.08 CLOSURES A. Temporary Closures: Erect over openings when weather conditions render such action

necessary for proper installation of work.

TRL 0708 01500-4

1.09 PROTECTION FOR WORK IN PLACE A. Work in Place: When subject to injury because of operations being carried on adjacent,

cover, board up, or substantially enclose with adequate protection. 1. Block and board heads, jambs and sills of permanent openings used as

thoroughfares for introduction of work and materials. 2. Construct forms of protection in manner that, upon completion, entire work will be

delivered to Owner in undamaged condition. 1.10 CONSTRUCTION FENCE A. Construction Fence: Provide as required for security and protection of the public. 1. Fence: 6'-0" high chain link fencing with steel posts 8'-0" o.c. 2. Gates: Provide where indicated and required. Keep gates closed and locked after

working hours. 3. At completion of exterior work (except site development work), remove fences from

the site. Patch asphalt damaged by fence posts after removal. 4. See Section 01100 regarding restrictions on use of site. 1.11 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGN A. Sign: Furnish and install painted project identification sign consisting of 4' x 8' x 3/4"

plywood with exterior glue on 2x and 4x supporting structure. 1. Exact Design, Text and Colors: Provided by Architect, including name of building

and Owner, any emblem selected by Owner, Architect's name, names of Architect's principal consultants, Contractor's name, and names of firms executing principal parts of the work.

2. Place in location directed by Architect and maintain for duration of project. 1.12 ACCESS A. Limit access to necessary routes to perform the work. 1.13 TEMPORARY CONTROLS A. General: Comply with local codes, ordinances and regulations. B. Noise: Minimize noise near residential areas. Properly muffle equipment. Do not operate

noisy equipment after hours. C. Dust: Control when construction procedures result in dust that becomes nuisance to

Owner, private property or traffic. D. Water: Control flow of water at site to prevent damage to Owner's private and public

facilities. E. Debris: Continually police work to prevent collection and scattering of debris

uncovered, loosened, or caused by prosecution of work. F. Pollution: Take precautions to prevent spilling and littering of water polluting substances.

Do not dump any foreign materials into sewer and storm sewer collection systems. 1. Burning of debris or any other air polluting methods or equipment not allowed.

TRL 0708 01500-5

G. Erosion: Provide facilities necessary to prevent erosive damage to Owner's property and to adjacent properties.

1.14 CLEAN UP A. General: Maintain project and site in clean and orderly condition. Periodically clean

interior areas. Regularly remove waste materials, debris and rubbish from site. B. Each Subcontractor: Cleanup work on daily basis. Failure to clean up will result in

cleanup by others with such costs being backcharged to Subcontractor by deduct change order to his subcontract.

C. Interior Areas: Clean prior to start of finish work and continue cleaning as required.

Control cleaning operations so that dust and other particles will not adhere to newly coated surfaces.

D. Final Cleaning: See Section 01741. END OF SECTION

TRL 0708 01600-1

SECTION 01600 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 1.01 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. General and Supplementary Conditions. 1.02 PRODUCTS A. Products: Include material, equipment and systems. 1. Comply with specifications and referenced standards as minimum requirements. a. Components of Specified UL Design Assemblies: Products supplied shall be

limited to products listed in UL Fire Resistance Directory. 2. Components Supplied in Quantity within a Specification Section: Same and

interchangeable. 3. Do not use materials and equipment removed from existing structure, except as

specifically required, or allowed, by Contract Documents. 1.03 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING A. Transportation: Transport products by methods to avoid product damage; deliver in

undamaged condition in manufacturer's unopened containers or packaging, dry. B. Handling: Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent

soiling or damage. C. Inspection: Inspect shipments to assure products comply with requirements, quantities

are correct, and products are undamaged. 1. Reject damaged and defective items. D. Each Subcontractor: Be responsible for hoisting and stocking of his materials and

equipment on site. 1. Material Stocked on Floors: Palletized or packaged in appropriate containers on

floor-by-floor basis. 2. Material Stocking: Coordinated with Contractor's superintendent. 1.04 STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. Storage: Store products in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, with

seals and labels intact and legible. Store sensitive products in weathertight enclosures; maintain within temperature and humidity ranges required by manufacturer's recommendations.

1. Store loose granular materials on solid surfaces in well drained area; prevent mixing with foreign matter.

B. Exterior Storage Protection: 1. Fabricated Products: Place on sloped supports above ground. 2. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering; provide

ventilation to avoid condensation.

TRL 0708 01600-2

C. Inspection: Arrange storage to provide access for inspection. Periodically inspect to assure products are undamaged, and are maintained under recommended conditions.

1.05 INSTALLATION A. Pre-Installation Conferences: Hold pre-installation meeting at site before installation of

each unit of work that requires coordination with other units of work. Installer and manufacturer's representatives of particular work and affected work shall attend.

1. Notify Architect of meeting time. 2. Discuss coordination of work with other work including shop drawings, product data,

possible conflicts, compatibility concerns, acceptability of substrates, protection, etc.

3. Record significant discussions at each meeting, agreements, disagreements and final plan of action. Distribute record to those in attendance and to Architect.

4. Do not proceed with unit of work until pre-installation meeting is successfully concluded with agreed upon plan of action.

B. Inspection of Substrates: Require installer of each major unit of work to inspect substrate

to receive work and conditions under which work is to be performed. 1. Installer: Report unsatisfactory conditions to General Contractor in writing with copy

to Architect. 2. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected to

satisfaction of installer. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Where installations include manufactured products, comply

with manufacturer's applicable instructions and recommendations for installation, to extent that these instructions and recommendations are more explicit or more stringent than requirements specified or indicated.

1. Notify Architect of any conflicts between manufacturer's instructions or recommendations and requirements specified or indicated.

D. Attachment: Provide attachment and connection devices and methods for securing

work. 1. Secure work true to line and level, and within specified tolerances, or if not

specified, industry recognized tolerances. 2. Allow for expansion and building movement. 3. Exposed Joints: a. Provide uniform joint width. b. Arrange joints to obtain best visual effect. c. Refer questionable visual-effect choices to Architect for final decision. E. Measurements and Dimensions: Recheck as integral step of starting each installation. F. Climatic Conditions and Project Status: Install each unit of work under conditions to

ensure best possible results in coordination with entire project. 1. Isolate each unit of work from incompatible work as necessary to prevent

deterioration. 2. Coordinate enclosure of work with required inspections and tests to minimize

necessity of uncovering work for those purposes. G. Mounting Heights: Where not indicated, mount individual units of work at industry

recognized standard-mounting heights for particular application indicated. 1. Refer questionable mounting heights choices to Architect for final decision.

TRL 0708 01600-3

1.06 PRODUCTS LIST A. Submittal: Within 30 days after Notice of Award, transmit three copies of list of major

products that are proposed for installation, including name of manufacturer. 1. Tabulate products by specifications section number, title, and article number. 2. For products specified only by reference standards, give manufacturer, trade

name, model or catalog designation, and reference standards. B. Architect: Will promptly reply in writing whether there is reasonable objection to listed

items. Failure to object to listed item shall not constitute waiver of requirements of Contract Documents.

1.07 PRODUCTS OPTIONS A. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Any product meeting

those standards. B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with Substitution Paragraph:

Products of named manufacturers meeting specifications. Submit request for substitution for any manufacturer not specifically named.

1. Products of acceptable manufacturers are subject to requirements of specifications for specified product.

C. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers: Products of named

manufacturers meeting specifications; no options, no substitutions. 1. Products of acceptable manufacturers are subject to requirements of specifications

for specified product. D. Products Specified by Naming Only One Manufacturer: No option, no substitution

allowed. 1.08 LIMITATION ON SUBSTITUTIONS A. During Bidding Period: Instructions to Bidders specifies times for submitting requests for

substitutions. Submit requests to Architect allowing adequate time for review prior to bid and in compliance with requirements of this section.

B. After Bidding Period: Requests for substitutions of products after date of Owner-

Contractor Agreement will be considered only in case of product unavailability or other conditions beyond control of Contractor.

C. Substitutions: 1. Will not be considered when indicated on shop drawings or product data submittals

without separate formal request, when requested directly by subcontractor or supplier, or when acceptance will require substantial revision of Contract Documents.

2. Do not order or install substitute products without written acceptance. 3. Only one request for substitution for each product will be considered. When

substitution is not accepted provide specified product. 4. Architect will determine acceptability of substitutions.

TRL 0708 01600-4

1.09 REQUESTS FOR SUBSTITUTIONS A. Submittal: Submit two copies of each request. Submit separate request for each

substitution. 1. Identify products by specifications section and article numbers. 2. Provide manufacturer's name and address, trade name of products, and model or

catalog number. 3. List fabricators and suppliers as appropriate. B. Documentation: Document each request with complete data substantiating

compliance of proposed substitution with requirements of Contract Documents: 1. Attach Product Data as specified in Section 01330. 2. Give itemized comparison of proposed substitution with specified product, listing

variation, and reference to specification section and article numbers. 3. Give quality and performance comparison between proposed substitution and

specified product. 4. List availability of maintenance services and replacement materials. 5. State effect of substitution on construction schedule, and changes required in other

work or products. 6. Reference UL Fire Resistance Directory design number if applicable. 1.10 CONTRACTOR REPRESENTATION A. Request for Substitution: Representation that Contractor has investigated proposed

product and has determined that it is equal to or superior in all respects to specified product:

1. Contractor will provide same warranty for substitution as for specified product. 2. Contractor will coordinate installation of accepted substitute, making such changes

as may be required for work to be complete in all respects. 3. Contractor waives claims for additional costs related to substitution that may later

become apparent. B. Replacement: If substituted products do not meet or exceed above requirements,

whether before, during, or after incorporated into work, Contractor shall, at no additional cost to Owner, replace substituted products with products originally specified.

1.11 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Architect: Will review Contractor's requests for substitutions with reasonable promptness. 1. If accepted by Architect, products proposed for substitution will be accepted

subject to modifications by manufacturer, if necessary, to meet detailed requirements of drawings and specifications.

2. Architect will not make exhaustive attempt to determine that products proposed for substitution are equal to, or can be modified in order to be equal to specified products.

B. Architect's Acceptance: 1. During Bidding Period: Architect will record acceptable substitutions in Addenda.

Acceptances of substitutions during bid period are conditional upon further investigation after award of contract.

2. After Award of Contract: Architect will notify Contractor, in writing, of decision to accept or reject requested substitution.

TRL 0708 01600-5

C. For Accepted Products: Submit shop drawings, product data, and samples in accordance with Section 01330.

END OF SECTION

TRL 0708 01722-1

SECTION 01722 FIELD ENGINEERING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Field engineering services required for proper execution and

completion of work under this contract. B. Related Sections: 1. Record Documents: Section 01780 Closeout Submittals. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Quality Control Submittals: 1. Surveyor or Engineer: Submit name and address of surveyor or professional engineer

to be employed by Contractor to Architect for acceptance before beginning work at site.

2. Documentation and Records: Surveyor or engineer shall maintain complete and accurate log of control and survey work as it progresses. On request of Architect, submit documentation to verify accuracy of field engineering work.

3. Completion Certificate: Upon completion of work, submit certificate to Architect signed by surveyor or engineer certifying that elevations and locations are in conformance with Contract Documents. Note any items of non-conformance.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: Employ land surveyor or professional engineer registered in State of

Wyoming and acceptable to Owner and Architect. B. Surveyor or Engineer: Responsible for location of building and major site elements;

establishment of building horizontal and vertical controls; installation of control stakes as required; and final certification that finish grading has been completed within tolerances specified.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Applicable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PROJECT SURVEY REQUIREMENTS A. Reference Points: Architect will identify existing control points and property line stakes

indicated on drawings and site survey. Immediately upon entering project, locate and maintain benchmarks and all other grades, lines, levels and dimensions. Report any errors or inconsistencies to Architect before commencing work.

B. Permanent Bench Marks: Surveyor or engineer shall establish minimum of two permanent

benchmarks on site, referenced to data established by survey control points.

TRL 0708 01722-2

C. Batter Boards and Levels: Surveyor or engineer shall stake out building and provide and rigidly set batter boards.

1. Contractor: Remain responsible for their maintenance and accuracy. 2. From permanent benchmarks surveyor or engineer shall ascertain grades and levels

to building as needed. D. Preservation of Monuments and Stakes: Carefully preserve monuments, benchmarks,

property markers, reference points, and stakes. 1. In case of his destruction of these, the Contractor shall be charged with expense of

replacement and shall be responsible for any mistake or loss of time that may be caused.

2. Protect permanent monuments or bench marks which must be removed or disturbed until properly referenced for relocation.

3. Furnish materials and assistance for proper replacement of such monuments or benchmarks.

E. Layout and Control by Surveyor or Engineer: 1. Building: Establish building horizontal and vertical controls by instrumentation. 2. Site: Establish lines, levels and locations by instrumentation. Set control stakes for

finish grading. Reset stakes as required during progress of work. F. Completion: Upon completion of work, surveyor or engineer shall survey site to verify that

locations and elevations required by Contract Documents have been achieved within specified tolerances.

G. Each Subcontractor: Provide complete engineering layout for work to be performed

under his subcontract, including grades, elevations, and all other engineering required to perform his scope of work.

1. General Contractor: Provide building horizontal controls and elevation controls. END OF SECTION

TRL 0708 01732-1

SECTION 01732 CUTTING AND PATCHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: All cutting, fitting and patching including related excavation and

backfill, required to complete work and to: 1. Make its parts fit together properly. 2. Uncover portions of work to provide for installation of ill-timed work. 3. Remove and replace defective work. 4. Remove and replace work not conforming to requirements of Contract Documents. 5. Remove samples of installed work as specified for testing. 6. Provide routine penetrations of non-structural surfaces for installation of piping and

electrical conduit. B. Related Requirements: 1. Excavation and Backfill: Section 02300 Earthwork. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Notification of Architect: Notify Architect well in advance of executing any cutting or

alteration that affects: 1. Work of Owner or any separate contractor. 2. Structural value or integrity of any element of project. 3. Integrity of effectiveness of weather-exposed or moisture-resistant elements or

systems. 4. Efficiency, operational life, maintenance or safety of operational elements. 5. Visual qualities of sight-exposed elements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. General: Comply with specifications and standards for each specific product involved. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Existing Conditions: 1. Examine existing conditions of project, including elements subject to damage or to

movement during cutting and patching. 2. After uncovering work, examine conditions affecting installation of products or

performance of work. B. Notification: Report unsatisfactory or questionable conditions to Architect. Do not

proceed with work until Architect has provided further instructions.

TRL 0708 01732-2

3.02 PREPARATION A. Protection: Provide adequate temporary support as necessary to assure structural value

and integrity of affected portion of work. Provide devices and methods to protect other portions of project from damage.

1. Provide protection from elements for that portion of project that may be exposed by cutting and patching work.

2. Maintain excavations free from water. 3.03 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. General: Provide openings in construction that are required for later work. 1. Various Contractors: Be responsible to supply in advance, proper and sufficiently

detailed information for openings. 2. In event of failure to supply this advance information, required cutting shall be done

only after concurrence of Architect and at expense of negligent party. B. Cutting: 1. Execute cutting and demolition by methods that will prevent damage to other

work, and will provide proper surfaces to receive installation or repairs. 2. Execute excavating and backfilling by methods which will prevent settlement or

damage to other work. Comply with Section 02300. 3. Employ the original installer or fabricator to perform cutting and patching for: a. Weather-exposed or moisture-resistant elements. b. Sight-exposed finished surfaces. 4. Cut asphalt, concrete or masonry using masonry saw or core drill as applicable.

Pneumatic tools will not be allowed unless accepted by Architect. C. Fitting: Execute fitting and adjustment of products to provide finished installation to

comply with specified products, functions, tolerances and finishes. Fit work airtight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit and other penetrations through surfaces.

D. Patching: Wherever any pipe, conduit, duct, steel member, bracket, equipment, or

other material penetrates or passes through fire-resistant wall, ceiling or floor, completely seal voids in construction with cement grout, plaster, or fire-resistant material, embedding sealing material full thickness of wall, ceiling or floor.

E. Finishing: Where surfaces are exposed, finish with same materials specified in finish

schedule or material that is on constructed surfaces. 1. Work: Accomplish with mechanics skilled in finish trade. 2. Refinish entire surfaces as necessary to provide even finish to match adjacent

finishes: a. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection. b. For assembly, refinish entire unit. END OF SECTION

TRL 0708 01741-1

SECTION 01741 FINAL CLEANING 1.01 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Clean-up during construction: Section 01500 Temporary Facilities and Controls. 1.02 CLEANERS A. Cleaners: Professional cleaners with exception of clean up of site and cleaning

specifically assigned to installers and applicators under various sections of Specifications. 1.03 FINAL CLEANING A. Exterior: In addition to items specified below, carefully and thoroughly clean all surfaces

on exterior: concrete, metal, etc. B. Glass: Carefully and thoroughly clean both sides of glass and leave absolutely clean

and free from paint, labels, grease, dirt, etc. 1. Cleaners: Professional window cleaners. C. Hardware: Clean and polish hardware and leave clean and free from paint, grease,

dirt, etc. D. Plumbing: Clean and polish plumbing fixtures, fittings and exposed plated piping. Leave

clean and free from paint, grease, dirt, etc. Remove labels. E. Electrical: Clean and polish electric fixtures, including glassware, switchplates, etc., and

leave clean and free from paint, grease, dirt, etc. F. Equipment: Carefully and thoroughly clean items of equipment, mechanical, electrical,

cabinets, ductwork, etc. G. Floors: 1. Resilient Floor Coverings: Mop with warm water and mild detergent as

recommended by manufacturer of flooring, then thoroughly machine buff. 2. Carpeting: Vacuum and clean. Remove all spots as recommended by

manufacturer. 3. Concrete Floors: Damp mop or scrub concrete floors as required. 4. Floors: Leave them thoroughly clean when building is turned over to Owner. H. Ceramic and Quarry Tile: Remove grout haze, observing tile manufacturer's

recommendations. Rinse tile work thoroughly with clean water. 1.04 COMPLETION A. Entire Work Inside and Out: First-class clean condition upon completion before being

accepted by Owner. END OF SECTION

TRL 0708 01770-1

SECTION 01770 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 1.01 FINAL SITE REVIEW A. Procedures: Following project closeout procedure defines responsibilities of Contractor,

Owner and Architect in closing project: Step 1 Contractor advises Architect in writing that he has reached "Substantial

Completion" and provides list of items to be completed or corrected. Closeout may be conducted by areas or portions of work if requested by Owner.

Step 2 Architect inspects work to determine if it is substantially complete, and issues Certificate of Substantial Completion plus "Punch List" of items to be completed or corrected.

Step 3 Contractor completes and/or corrects all punch list items and notifies Architect in writing that his work is ready for final inspection. At this time, final application for payment is submitted.

Step 4 Architect makes final inspection. When work is found to be acceptable under Contract Documents, and contract fully performed, Architect will issue final Certificate for Payment.

END OF SECTION

TRL 0708 01780-1

SECTION 01780 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 1.01 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Project Site Record Documents: Maintain at project site one record copy of following: 1. Drawings 2. Specifications 3. Addenda 4. Accepted Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples 5. Change Orders 6. Other Modifications to Contract 7. Field Test Records B. Record Documents: Do not use record documents for construction purposes. Maintain

documents in clean, dry legible condition, apart from documents used for construction. C. Record Information: Label each document "Record Document". 1. Mark information with contrasting color using ink. 2. Keep each record current. Do not permanently conceal any work until required

information is recorded. D. Drawings: Record following information on drawings: 1. Depth of foundation elements. 2. Horizontal and vertical location of underground utilities. 3. Location of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction. 4. Field changes of dimension and detail. 5. Changes by change order or field order. 6. Details not on original contract drawings. E. Specifications: Record following information on specifications: 1. Manufacturer, trade name, catalog number and supplier of products and items of

equipment actually installed. 2. Changes by change order or field order. 3. Other matters not originally specified. F. Shop Drawings: Maintain shop drawings as record documents recording changes made

after review as specified for drawings above. G. Submittal: At completion of project, deliver record documents to Architect with

transmittal letter containing date, project title and number, Contractor's name and address, title and number of each record document, and certification that each document is complete and accurate. Submittal shall be signed by Contractor.

1.02 FINAL PAPERWORK A. Final Paperwork: Prior to release of final payment, Contractor shall deliver following items

to Architect: 1. Inspection Certificates, as applicable. 2. Contractor's Warranty of Materials and Workmanship. 3. Maintenance Manuals and Parts Lists, as specified.

TRL 0708 01780-2

4. All Guaranties, Warranties and Submittals, as specified. 5. Receipts for Extra Materials Delivered to the Owner. 6. Miscellaneous Keys, Switches, Etc. 7. Final Application for Payment. 8. Consent of Surety (if any) to Final Payment. 9. Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens (AIA Form G-706A). 10. Project Record Documents The above items are described in following articles or applicable sections of the

specifications. 1.03 INSPECTION CERTIFICATES Each subcontractor shall, upon completion of the work, secure in triplicate, certificates

from any state or local governing bodies having jurisdiction in dictating that the work is in strict accordance with the applicable codes and deliver same to the Contractor for transmittal to the Owner.

1.04 WARRANTIES A. One Year Correction Period: Remedy any defects due to faulty materials or

workmanship and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom, which shall appear in work within a period of one year from the date of Notice of Substantial Completion and in accordance with the terms of any special warranties provided in the Contract Documents. The Owner shall give notice of observed defects with reasonable promptness.

B. Warranty: Upon completion of work, the Contractor shall deliver to the Architect, in

duplicate, a written warranty based on the provisions of the Contract Documents properly signed and notarized.

1. Warranty shall be addressed to the Owner. 2. Provide separate written warranties from mechanical and electrical subcontractors. C. Subcontractor Warranties: Include labor and materials signed by manufacturer or

subcontractor as case may be and countersigned by subcontractor. 1. Address warranty to Owner. 2. Deliver to Architect upon completion of project and before or with submission of

request for final payment. D. Extended Warranties: Deliver in duplicate extended warranties as specified and dated

from the date of Notice of Substantial Completion and signed by subcontractors and manufacturers.

E. Manufacturer Warranties: Deliver in duplicate manufacturer's warranties as specified

and dated from date of Notice of Substantial Completion signed by manufacturer. 1. Manufacturer's Warranties: Supplement and not replace implied and express

warranties provided for by Uniform Commercial Code. Any statements in manufacturer's warranties denying or limiting responsibility for such implied and express warranties shall be void.

TRL 0708 01780-3

1.05 MISCELLANEOUS KEYS, SWITCHES AND WRENCHES A. Submittal: At completion of project, account for all loose keys for hose bibs, adjustment

keys and wrenches for door closers and panic hardware, keys for electric switches, electrical panels, etc. and turn over to Contractor for transmittal to Owner.

1.06 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Equipment Manuals: Upon completion of work, submit three typed and bound copies of

operating and maintenance manual or manuals. 8-1/2" x 11" in size, to Architect for his acceptance.

1. Manual: Have index with tab dividers for each major equipment section to facilitate locating information on specific piece of equipment.

2. Identify data within each section with identification numbers as they appear on drawings and by specification section and article number.

B. Data: Include as minimum following data: 1. Alphabetical list of all system components, with name, address and 24-hour phone

number of company responsible for servicing each item during first year of operation.

2. Operating instructions for complete system including: a. Emergency procedures for fire or failure of major equipment. b. Major start, operation and shutdown procedure. 3. Maintenance instructions including: a. Proper lubricants and lubricating instructions for each piece of equipment. b. Necessary cleaning, replacement and adjustment schedule. 4. Manufacturer's product data on each piece of equipment including: a. Installation instructions. b. Drawings and specifications. c. Parts lists. d. Complete wiring diagrams (as-built). e. Marked or changed prints locating all concealed parts and all variation from

original system design. 5. Schematic diagram showing component parts of system. 6. Simplified system description and preventative maintenance program. C. Operating and Maintenance Data: See following sections for equipment requiring

operating and maintenance data manuals: 1. Door Hardware: Section 08710. 2. Carpet: Section 09680. 3. Elevators: Section 14240. 4. Mechanical: Division 15. 5. Electrical: Division 16.

See above sections for specific requirements of operating and maintenance data for

each group of equipment. END OF SECTION

TRL 0708 01900-1

SECTION 01900 FURNITURE, FIXTURES AND EQUIPMENT (FF&E) PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Contractor shall be responsible for the following:

1. Scheduling of delivery of Owner-furnished FF&E to the job site. 2. Temporary storage at or near the job site if required for timely installation. 3. Unloading of FF&E when delivered at the job site or temporary storage. 4. Any required transportation of FF&E from temporary storage to the job site. 5. All uncrating and assembly of FF&E and disposal of crating materials. 6. Installation of FF&E in final locations shown on the Drawings including mechanical

and electrical connections by qualified subcontractors. 7. Assembly of all installation and operating instructions to Owner’s Representative

as required under Section 01785 Operation and Maintenance Data. 8. Start up of mechanical and electrical equipment and connection of all lamps

and other electrical equipment to building systems. B. Related requirements:

1. Section 01600 Product Requirements. 2. Mechanical Connections: Division 15. 3. Electrical Connections: Division 16.

1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Will be furnished by Owner for each Contractor-installed item.

1. Will include data to indicate standard mounting and utility connection details. 2. Will include information for factory finishes, hardware, glass, sealants, accessories

and other required components. 3. Includes wiring diagrams and rough-in requirements for items requiring electrical

connections.

B. Shop Drawings: Furnished by Owner for non-standard custom-fabricated items to be installed by Contractor.

1. Will indicate typical layout including dimensions, mounting locations and sizes, service accesses, utility connections, mounting sequences, and division of installation responsibilities.

2. Will include detail drawings of non-standard mounting details and utility connections.

3. Will include detail drawings of special accessory components not included in manufacturer’s product data.

C. Informational Submittals: Submit following packaged separately from other submittals:

1. Manufacturer’s Instructions: Manufacturer’s printed installation instructions will be furnished by Owner.

TRL 0708 01900-2

D. Closeout Submittals: Submit following in accordance with Section 01780. 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: Manufacturer’s printed, recommended

operation and maintenance data when furnished with equipment. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Acceptable to manufacturer with experience on at least five

projects of similar nature in past five years. 1. Where required by manufacturer, Contractor shall provide factory-trained

installers. 1.04 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE

A. Conduct pre-installation conference in accordance with Section 01312. B. Convene pre-installation conference one week prior to commencing work of this Section

when specified under product description. C. Attendance Required: Contractor, manufacturer’s representative, and installer. D. Agenda: Discuss and agree upon acceptable substrate and mounting conditions,

preparatory work, utility connections, and methods of installation. 1.05 SEQUENCING

A. General: Schedule work in accordance with Section 01100. B. Prior to fabrication of mounting plates, furnish mounting plate templates to trades

installing structure to support mounting plates. C. Install mounting plates to structural supports prior to covering-up by subsequent

construction operations.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Comply with Section 01600. Protect all equipment from dust and damage during storage, installation and subsequent construction operations.

1. Contractor shall become responsible for safety and protection of Owner-furnished equipment upon delivery.

2. Contractor shall furnish temporary storage in a protected and insured location acceptable to the Owner if required by delivery schedules.

PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 FF&E

A. Description: See Equipment Schedules on Drawings B. Storing of any item in the open is prohibited.

TRL 0708 01900-3

PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine conditions and proceed with work in accordance with Section 01450.

1. Verify utility connections are installed. 2. Verify mounting brackets, plates, and supports are installed.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions. B. Install equipment plumb, level, square, and free from warp or twist while maintaining

dimensional tolerances and alignment with surrounding construction. C. Refer to Equipment Schedule for:

1. Mounting heights. 2. Mounting and anchoring details.

3.03 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION

A. Adjusting: Adjust parts for smooth, uniform operation. B. Cleaning: Comply with Section 01741. Remove protective covering from pre-finished

items. 1. Clean as recommended by manufacturer. Do not use materials or methods that

may damage finish or surrounding construction. 2. Touch-up minor surface coating damaged during installation; replace damaged

units as directed by Architect.

C. Protect finished work in accordance with Section 01500. END OF SECTION

HAMPTON INN AND SUITES AT DIA MARTIN/MARTIN PROJECT # 18090.C.10 January 9, 2009 SECTION 02230 - SITE CLEARING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Protecting existing trees, shrubs, groundcovers, plants, grass, and other vegetation to remain or as designated by Owner in pre-construction conference.

2. Removing existing trees, shrubs, groundcovers, plants, grass, and other vegetation. 3. Clearing and grubbing. 4. Stripping and stockpiling topsoil. 5. Removing above- and below-grade site improvements. 6. Disconnecting, capping or sealing, abandoning site utilities in place and removing site

utilities. 7. Removing existing fill.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for soil materials, excavating, backfilling, and site grading.

2. Division 2 Section “Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control” for storm water erosion and sediment mitigation.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Topsoil: Natural or cultivated surface-soil layer containing organic matter and sand, silt, and clay particles; friable, pervious, and black or a darker shade of brown, gray, or red than underlying subsoil; reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, gravel, and other objects more than 2 inches (50 mm) in diameter; and free of subsoil and weeds, roots, toxic materials, or other nonsoil materials.

B. Tree Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees or groups of trees to be protected during construction, and defined by the drip line of individual trees or the perimeter drip line of groups of trees, unless otherwise indicated.

1.4 MATERIAL OWNERSHIP

A. Except for stripped topsoil or other materials indicated to be stockpiled or to remain on Owner's property, cleared materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from Project site.

SITE CLEARING 02230 - 1

HAMPTON INN AND SUITES AT DIA MARTIN/MARTIN PROJECT # 18090.C.10 January 9, 2009 1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Photographs or videotape, sufficiently detailed, of existing conditions of trees and plantings, adjoining construction, and site improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused by site clearing.

B. Record drawings, identifying and accurately locating capped utilities and other subsurface structural, electrical, and mechanical conditions. Information required may also be included in Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents."

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Preconstruction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site as directed by Owner’s Representative prior to start of construction. Contractor to comply with requirements, which may also be included in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination."

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities during site-clearing operations.

1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Improvements on Adjoining Property: Authority for performing indicated removal and alteration work on property adjoining Owner’s property will be obtained by Owner before award of Contract. Authority and permits for performing indicated removal and alteration work on adjacent rights-of-way shall be obtained by Contractor.

1. Do not proceed with work on adjoining property until directed in writing by Owner’s Representative.

C. Protect improvements on adjacent and Owner’s property.

D. Salvable Improvements: Carefully remove items indicated to be salvaged and store on Owner's premises where indicated.

E. Utility Locator Service: Notify utility locator service for area where Project is located before site clearing.

F. Do not commence site clearing operations until temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures are in place.

G. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to parties having jurisdiction.


HAMPTON INN AND SUITES AT DIA MARTIN/MARTIN PROJECT # 18090.C.10 January 9, 2009 PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SOIL MATERIALS

A. Satisfactory Soil Materials: Requirements for satisfactory soil materials are specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork," (PART 2 – PRODUCTS).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Protect and maintain benchmarks, survey control points, monuments, property line pins and other reference points from disturbance during construction. If disturbed or destroyed, restore or replace at no cost to Owner.

B. Provide erosion control measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust from leaving project site.

C. Locate and clearly flag trees and vegetation to remain or to be relocated.

D. Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction.

1. Restore or replace damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to Owner.

3.2 TREE PROTECTION

A. Erect and maintain temporary fencing around drip line of individual trees or around perimeter drip line of groups of trees to remain before starting site clearing. Remove fence when construction is complete.

1. Do not store construction materials, debris, or excavated material within fenced area. 2. Do not permit vehicles, equipment, or foot traffic within fenced area. 3. Maintain fenced area free of weeds and trash.

B. Do not excavate within tree protection zones, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Where excavation for new construction is required within drip line of trees, hand clear and excavate to minimize damage to root systems. Use narrow-tine spading forks, comb soil to expose roots, and cleanly cut roots as close to excavation as possible.

1. Cover exposed roots with burlap and water regularly. 2. Temporarily support and protect roots from damage until they are permanently relocated

and covered with soil. 3. Coat cut faces of roots more than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) in diameter with an emulsified

asphalt or other approved coating formulated for use on damaged plant tissues. 4. Cover exposed roots with wet burlap to prevent roots from drying and backfill with soil

as soon as possible.


HAMPTON INN AND SUITES AT DIA MARTIN/MARTIN PROJECT # 18090.C.10 January 9, 2009

D. Repair or replace trees and vegetation indicated to remain that are damaged by construction operations, in a manner approved by Owner’s Representative.

1. Employ a qualified arborist, licensed in jurisdiction where Project is located, to submit details of proposed repairs and to repair damage to trees and shrubs.

2. Replace trees that cannot be repaired and restored to full-growth status, as determined by the qualified arborist.

3.3 UTILITIES

A. Contractor will locate, identify, arrange for disconnect and seal or cap off utilities indicated to be removed before site clearing.

1. Verify that utilities indicated as abandoned have been disconnected and capped before proceeding with site clearing.

2. Arrange with utility companies having jurisdiction to shut off indicated utilities.

B. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner’s Representative not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.

2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Owner’s Representative’s written permission.

C. Excavate for and remove underground utilities indicated to be removed.

D. Removal of underground utilities may also be included in Division 2 Sections covering site utilities. Removal of underground utilities may also be included in Division 15 Mechanical or Division 16 Electrical Sections.

E. After removal of underground utilities, as indicated, properly cap and/or plug existing lines to remain in accordance with authorities having jurisdiction.

3.4 CLEARING AND GRUBBING

A. Remove obstructions, trees, shrubs, grass, and other vegetation to permit installation of new construction. Removal includes digging out stumps and obstructions and grubbing roots.

1. Do not remove trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or to be relocated. 2. Cut minor roots and branches of trees indicated to remain in a clean and careful manner

where such roots and branches obstruct installation of new construction. 3. Grind stumps and completely remove roots, obstructions, and debris extending to a depth

of 18 inches (450 mm) below exposed subgrade. 4. Use only hand methods for grubbing within drip line of remaining trees. 5. Chip removed tree branches and dispose of off-site.



B. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated.

1. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding a loose depth of 8 inches (200 mm), and compact each layer to a density equal to adjacent original ground.

3.5 TOPSOIL STRIPPING

A. Remove sod and grass before stripping topsoil.

B. Strip topsoil to whatever depths are encountered or as determined by Geotechnical Engineer in a manner to prevent intermingling with underlying subsoil or other waste materials.

1. Remove subsoil and nonsoil materials from topsoil, including trash, debris, weeds, roots, and other waste materials.

C. Stockpile topsoil materials away from edge of excavations without intermixing with subsoil. Grade and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.

1. Limit height of topsoil stockpiles to 72 inches (1800 mm) unless authorized by Owner’s Representative.

2. Do not stockpile topsoil within drip line of remaining trees. 3. Dispose of excess topsoil as specified for waste material disposal. 4. Stockpile surplus topsoil to allow for respreading a thicker layer of topsoil.

3.6 SITE IMPROVEMENTS

A. Remove existing above and below grade improvements as indicated and as necessary to facilitate new construction.

B. Remove slabs, paving, curbs, gutters, and aggregate base as indicated on plans.

1. Unless existing full-depth joints coincide with line of demolition, neatly saw-cut length of existing pavement to remain before removing existing pavement. Saw-cut faces vertically.

2. Paint cut ends of steel reinforcement in concrete to remain to prevent corrosion.

C. Remove existing fill. Refer to Geotechnical Investigation and/or drawings for information regarding suitability for re-use and estimates of location/extent of existing fill.

3.7 DISPOSAL

A. Disposal: Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished materials, and waste materials including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.




1. Separate recyclable materials produced during site clearing from other nonrecyclable materials. Store or stockpile without intermixing with other materials and transport them to recycling facilities.

END OF SECTION 02230

HAMPTON INN AND SUITES AT DIA MARTIN/MARTIN PROJECT # 18090.C.10 January 9, 2009 Revised May 13, 2009

SECTION 02270 - TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED WORK


B. Additional information concerning temporary erosion and sedimentation control may be found on the civil drawings and City and County of Denver construction standards. In case of conflict between the drawings, jurisdictional criteria and the information specified herein, the more stringent requirements shall govern.

C. Additional information concerning erosion may be found in the geotechnical investigation report by CTL/Thompson dated March 31, 2009. All requirements of this report shall be followed unless stated otherwise.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Work Included. Furnish, install, maintain, and remove temporary erosion and sedimentation controls as shown on the drawings or specified herein, or as required to complete the work.


1. Division 2 Section "Site Clearing" site stripping, grubbing, stripping and stockpiling topsoil, and removal of above- and below-grade improvements and utilities.

2. Division 2 Section “Earthwork” for soil materials, site excavating, filling and grading. 3. Division 2 Section “Trenching” for excavating and backfilling of utilities.

B. Permits and Fees: Obtain and pay for all permits and fees required for the work of this section, including erosion and sediment control and water quality permits required by the authority having jurisdiction and the Colorado Department of Public Health and Environment, Water Quality Control Division.

C. Erosion Control: The Erosion and Sedimentation Control Drawings included in the Contract Documents is the minimum requirement to be implemented. Provide additional control as necessary to meet applicable local and State criteria.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Backfill: Soil material used to fill an excavation.

1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to support sides of pipe.

TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL 02270 - 1


2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench.

B. Unclassified Excavation: Removal of all material of whatever character required for the work encountered above subgrade elevations and to lines and dimensions indicated, including boulders.

C. Fill: Fill is all material placed to raise the grade of the site or to backfill excavation, upon which the Soils Engineer has made sufficient tests and observations to enable him to issue a written statement that, in his opinion, the fill has been placed and compacted in accordance with the requirements of these specifications.

D. BMP: Best Management Practice. Erosion and sediment control devices, which may consist of silt fence, crates, filter fabric, riprap, etc.

E. SWMP: Storm Water Management Plan. Identifies BMPs, which are erosion and sediment control measures for the project.

F. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the ground surface.

G. Subgrade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, or topsoil materials.

H. Utilities: Include on-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground services to buildings.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittal Procedures: All submittals are to be made to the Owner’s Representative. If provided refer to Division 1 section “Submittals.”

B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s published descriptive literature and complete specifications for manufactured products specified herein and utilized on the project.

1. Geotextiles. 2. Erosion Control Fabric.

C. Storm Water Management Plan:

1. The Engineer will provide a Storm Water Management Plan (SWMP) and report addressing erosion and sediment control measures for all sites with over one acre of disturbed ground. The Engineer may also assist in preparation of the General Permit application.

2. The Contractor is responsible for obtaining all required permits including a General Permit application for Storm Water Discharges associated with construction activities at least ten (10) days prior to start of construction. Permits are to be filed with the Colorado Department of Public Health and Environment, Water Quality Control Division.



3. Contractor shall have the Storm Water Management Plan (SWMP) and report available on-site at all times.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE:

A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable local, State and Federal ordinances, rules and regulations concerning sedimentation control and storm water runoff.

B. In case of conflict between the above codes, regulations, references and standards and these specifications, the more stringent requirements shall govern.

C. Preconstruction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site as directed by Owner’s Representative prior to start of construction. Contractor to comply with requirements, which may also be included in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination."

1.6 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS

A. Existing Conditions: Verify all existing conditions affecting the work of this section prior to submitting bids or proposals. Additional compensation will not be allowed for revisions or modification of work resulting from failure to verify existing conditions.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control measures shall be maintained until permanent measures are in place. All damaged, disturbed or devices filled with sediment, which may occur within the specified project warranty period, shall be corrected at no cost to the Owner. Any devices damaged by erosion or sediment shall be restored to their original condition by the Contractor, at no cost to the Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Erosion and Sedimentation Control Materials: Provide one or more of the following materials, as shown on the plans or as applicable for site conditions:

1. Sand bags. 2. Clean, seed-free, certified, grain straw bales. 3. Silt fences. 4. Rock riprap. 5. Temporary seeding. 6. Biodegradable wood excelsior, straw, or coconut-fiber mat enclosed in a photodegradable

plastic mesh. 7. Biodegradable twisted jute or spun-coir mesh, 0.92 lb/sy minimum, with 50 to 65 percent

open area.



8. Drainage geotextile. 9. Impervious fill. 10. Other materials proposed for use on-site.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. General:

1. Determine the existing ground elevations, drainage patterns, and changes to such patterns during excavation in order to satisfactorily plan and provide materials for adequate erosion and sediment control devices.

3.2 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL

A. Provide temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and rights-of-way according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Inspect, repair, and maintain erosion and sedimentation control measures during construction until permanent vegetation has been established.

C. Remove erosion and sedimentation controls, and restore and stabilize areas disturbed during removal.

D. Secure grading permit from agency have jurisdiction prior to commencing grading operations.

3.3 EXAMINATION

A. Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which the work of this section will be performed. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Commencement of work implies acceptance of all areas and conditions.

3.4 INSTALLATION A. Erosion and Sedimentation Control Devices. Erosion and sedimentation control measures to be

taken during construction include, but are not necessarily limited to the following:

1. Apply soil stabilization within 14 days to all disturbed areas that are to be dormant for a period longer than 30 calendar days after reaching grade. Stabilize soil with mulch anchored per criteria of authorities having jurisdiction. Temporarily revegetate areas that will remain in an interim condition for more than 60 days.

2. Roads and parking areas indicated to be paved may be covered with an appropriate aggregate base course in lieu of mulch. Temporary mulching or aggregate base course is



not required if final pavement construction will take place within 30 days after grading to final contours.

3. Soils that will be stockpiled for more than 30 days must be mulched and seeded within 14 days after stockpile construction.

4. Prevent sediment from leaving the project site by installing a silt fence or other BMPs as indicated on the plans. Protect existing storm inlets adjacent to the site by an approved gravel filter.

5. Excavate the future detention/water quality pond and construct the outlet structure/storm sewer such that the pond may function as a temporary sediment basin during development of the site. Construct the sediment basin in accordance with authority having jurisdiction’s criteria. Provide temporary swales to convey site runoff to the pond.

6. Locate stone stabilization pads at all points of vehicular ingress and egress to the construction site.

7. Provide temporary erosion controls consisting of berms at the top of slopes and interceptor ditches at ends of berms and at those locations which will eliminate or minimize erosion during construction, along with temporary seeding, temporary diversion, chutes, and down pipes and lining of water courses.

8. Temporary sedimentation controls shall consist of silt dams, traps, silt fence, barriers, and appurtenances at the top of spoil and borrow area slopes and where runoff water exits the site.

9. Maintain the available silt holding capacity of silt dams, fence traps and barriers until no longer needed. The sediment capacity of sediment retainage areas shall be at a minimum, the capacity shown on the plans in conformance with Urban Drainage Criteria Manual, Volume 3. Prior to removal, obtain concurrence of the Owner and Engineer.

10. Remove accumulated sediment and debris from a BMP when the sediment level reaches one-half the height of the BMP, or at any time the sediment or debris adversely impacts the functioning of the BMP.

11. Remove hay bales which have deteriorated and filter stone or cloth which has become dislodged. Place new hay bales and new filter and fence.

12. The erosion/sediment control plan shows the minimum required for the project. If it becomes apparent that additional controls are necessary, the Engineer shall be notified and with approval of the Owner’s Representative additional controls shall be installed.

B. Chemicals and Pollutants:

1. Store construction materials and chemicals that could contribute pollutants to the runoff within an enclosure, container, or dike located around the perimeter of the storage area, to prevent discharge of these materials into runoff from the construction site.

2. Locate areas used for collection and temporary storage of solid and liquid waste away from the storm drainage system. Provide covering or fencing as required to prevent windblown materials; construct perimeter dike to contain liquid runoff. These measures may not be necessary if materials are immediately placed in covered waste containers.

3. Perform equipment maintenance in designated areas using measures such as drip pans to control petroleum products spillage.

4. Immediately clean up and properly dispose of spills of construction related materials such as paints, solvents, or other chemicals.




C. Final Stabilization and Long-Term Management: City and County of Denver Wastewater Management Division.

1. Final stabilization shall be achieved through permanent vegetation and landscaping after construction of all buildings and paved surfaces.

2. With approval of City and County of Denver Wastewater Management Division temporary erosion and sediment control measures may be removed within 30 days after final site stabilization is achieved or after temporary measures are no longer needed.

D. Inspection and Maintenance: Inspect erosion and sediment control measures weekly during construction. In addition, inspect all facilities immediately after any significant runoff or snowmelt which results in runoff. Repair or otherwise mitigate any damage to the erosion and sediment control facilities at no additional cost to the Owner.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Removal of Controls: Remove controls upon completion of that portion of the work for which controls were furnished. Leave the site and work area in a clean condition.



EARTHWORK 02300 - 1

SECTION 02300 - EARTHWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. Additional information concerning earthwork may be found on the civil drawings, in the project geotechnical report and City and County of Denver construction standards. In case of conflict between the drawings, jurisdictional criteria and the information specified herein, the more stringent requirements shall govern.

C. Additional information concerning earthwork may be found in the geotechnical investigation report by CTL/Thompson dated March 31, 2009. All requirements of this report shall be followed. The information shown in this report is for information and it shall be the contractors responsibility to field verify conditions indicated.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Preparing and grading subgrades for walks, pavements, lawns and grasses, and exterior plants.

2. Excavating and backfilling for structures including over excavation of existing unsatisfactory on-site soil materials and replacement with structural fill.

3. Sub grade and base course for Asphalt or Concrete Paving.


1. Division 2 Section "Site Clearing" site stripping, grubbing, stripping and stockpiling topsoil, and removal of above- and below-grade improvements and utilities.

2. Division 2 Section “Trenching” for excavating and backfilling of utilities. 3. Division 2 Section “Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control” for erosion and

sedimentation control measures.

C. Permits and Fees: Obtain and pay for all permits and fees required for the work of this section, including erosion and sediment control and water quality permits required by the City and County of Denver and the Colorado Department of Public Health and Environment, Water Quality Control Division.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Backfill: Soil material used to fill an excavation.



EARTHWORK 02300 - 2


B. Base Course: Course placed between the subbase course and hot-mix asphalt paving.

C. Bedding Course: Course placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe.

D. Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill approved by Geotechnical Engineer.

E. Drainage Course: Course supporting the slab-on-grade that also minimizes upward capillary flow of pore water.

F. Excavation: Removal of all material of whatever character required for the work encountered above subgrade elevations and to lines and dimensions indicated, including boulders. See Section 3.4 for definition of unclassified and classified excavation.

G. Authorized Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions as directed or approved by Owners Representative and the testing and inspections agency to correct unsatisfactory conditions. Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract Provisions for changes in the Work.

H. Bulk Excavation: Excavation more than 10 feet (3 m) in width and more than 30 feet (9 m) in length.

I. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions without direction by Owners Representative. Unauthorized excavation including disposition of overexcavated materials and other work resulting from slides, cave-ins, swelling, upheaval, or remedial work, as well as remedial work directed by Owners Representative, shall be without additional compensation.

J. Fill: Fill is all material placed to raise the grade of the site or to backfill excavation, upon which the Geotechnical Engineer has made sufficient tests and observations to enable him to issue a written statement that, in his opinion, the fill has been placed and compacted in accordance with the requirements of these specifications.

K. Structural Fill: Select granular material for use below floor slabs and to 5’-0” beyond building lines. On-site material may be used if approved by the Geotechnical Engineer.

L. Underslab Gravel: Imported Class 6 road base per Colorado Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction (1999) or material approved by Geotechnical Engineer.

M. Rock Excavation: Rock material in beds, ledges, unstratified masses, conglomerate deposits, and boulders of rock material that exceed 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m) for Bulk Excavation or 3/4 cu. yd. (0.57 cu. m) for footing, trench, and pit excavation which in the Geotechnical Engineer’s opinion cannot be removed by rock excavating equipment equivalent to the following in size and performance ratings, without systematic drilling, ram hammering, ripping, or blasting, when permitted:


EARTHWORK 02300 - 3

1. Excavation of Footings, Trenches, and Pits: Late-model, track-mounted hydraulic excavator; equipped with a 42-inch- (1065-mm-) wide, maximum, short-tip-radius rock bucket; rated at not less than 138-hp (103-kW) flywheel power with bucket-curling force of not less than 28,090 lbf (125 kN) and stick-crowd force of not less than 18,650 lbf (83 kN); measured according to SAE J-1179.

2. Bulk Excavation: Late-model, track-mounted loader; rated at not less than 210-hp (157-kW) flywheel power and developing a minimum of 48,510-lbf (216-kN) breakout force with a general-purpose bare bucket; measured according to SAE J-732.

N. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the ground surface.

O. Subbase Course: Course placed between the subgrade and base course for hot-mix asphalt pavement, or course placed between the subgrade and a cement concrete pavement or a cement concrete or hot-mix asphalt walk.

P. Subgrade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, or topsoil materials.

Q. Utilities: Include on-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground services within buildings.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Material Test Reports: Provided by Owner from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance of the following with requirements indicated:

1. Classification according to ASTM D 2487 of each on-site or borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill.

2. Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D 698 for each on-site or borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill.

B. Preexcavation Photographs or Videotape: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements, including finish surfaces that might be misconstrued as damage caused by earthwork operations. Submit before earthwork begins.


A. Comply with applicable codes, ordinances, regulations, references and standards in effect at bid date:

1. Uniform Building Code (UBC) or International Building Code (IBC) per jurisdiction cri-teria.

2. American Society for Testing and Materials (test methods as specified hereafter)(ASTM). 3. State and local codes.

B. In case of conflict between the above codes, regulations, references and standards and these specifications, the more stringent requirements shall govern.


EARTHWORK 02300 - 4

C. Testing Agency: The Owner will employ a qualified independent Geotechnical testing agency. Contractor shall furnish testing agency access to work, facilities and incidental labor required for testing. Notify the testing and inspection agency not less than 48 hours in advance of all work requiring testing.

D. Geotechnical Engineer: All materials and operations under this section of the specifications shall be executed under the supervision of a Geotechnical Engineer who will place qualified personnel on the site during earthwork operations as necessary.

The Geotechnical Engineer shall approve all foundation excavations and give written approval of the completed foundations to the Owner’s Representative at the following times:

1. When excavations are first open. 2. Just prior to placing of concrete, shall test and control the fill compaction, approve the

materials and method of placing and compacting and give written approval to the Owner’s Representative that all bearing surfaces and fill requirements have been in-spected.

3. The Contractor shall be responsible to notify the Geotechnical Engineer when tests are to be made.

E. For approval of imported or on-site fill material, notify the Geotechnical Engineer at least four (4) working days in advance of intention to import material, designate the proposed borrow area and permit the Geotechnical Engineer to sample as necessary from the borrow area for the pur-pose of making acceptance tests to prove the quality of the material. The Geotechnical Engi-neer report on the acceptability shall be final and binding.

F. Reference Standards:

Compaction Standard: Standard Proctor Density ASTM D698.

G. Preconstruction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site as directed by Owner’s Representative prior to start of construction. Contractor to comply with requirements, which may also be included in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination."


A. Existing Utilities: Locations, sizes and depths or invert elevations of existing utilities as shown on the drawings are based on information provided by others, and believed to be correct, but may not be absolutely so. Such information is therefore presented only as approximations, and should be verified prior to construction. Protect from damage any sewer, water, gas, electric, phone or other pipe lines or conduits uncovered during the work until they have been examined by the Owner’s Representative. If such lines are found to be abandoned and not in use, remove affected sections without extra cost. If such lines are found to be in use, carefully protect and carry on work around them. If Owner’ Representative deems it advisable to move such lines, Owner will pay cost of moving. Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted in writing by Owner’s Representative and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated.

1. Contact utility-locator service for area where project is located before excavating.


EARTHWORK 02300 - 5


3. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Owner’s Representative's written permission.

B. Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities indicated to be re-moved. Coordinate with utility companies to shut off services if lines are active.

C. Remove all existing fill deemed by Geotechnical Engineer to be unsatisfactorily placed.

D. Existing Contours and Elevations: Contours and spot elevations of existing ground elevations at the site, and approximate elevations of finish grade cuts, fills, and excavations for the Work are shown on Drawings. Contours and elevations for existing ground lines are based on infor-mation provided by others, and are believed to be correct, but may not be absolutely so. Exist-ing contours and elevations should therefore be considered approximate, and should be verified at the site prior to construction.

E. Verification of Existing Conditions: Visit the site prior to submission of bids. Verify existing conditions, elevations, and contours. In the event of discrepancies between existing conditions and those indicated on the Contract Documents or survey, contact the Owner’s Representative for clarification.

F. Existing Benchmarks: Carefully preserve and maintain existing benchmarks, monuments, property line pins, and other reference points. If disturbed or destroyed, restore or replace by a Professional Land Surveyor at no additional cost to Owner.

G. Frost Protection: When freezing temperatures may be expected, do not excavate to the full depth indicated unless the footing or slabs are to be poured immediately after the excavation has been completed. If placing of concrete is delayed, protect the bottoms of excavations from frost until concrete is placed.

1.7 WARRANTY

Settlement in backfill, fill or in structures built over backfill or fill, which may occur within the specified project warranty period, shall be corrected at no cost to the Owner. Any structures damaged by settlement shall be restored to their original condition by the Contractor, at no cost to the Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SOIL MATERIALS

A. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not available from excavations.

B. Satisfactory Soils: Shall meet approval of Geotechnical Engineer and shall be free of rock or gravel larger than 3 inches (75 mm) in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials,


EARTHWORK 02300 - 6

vegetation, and other deleterious matter. Clean, on-site, natural soils, or imported materials, as approved by the Geotechnical Engineer.

C. Unsatisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups GP, SP, CH, MH, OL, CH, MH, OH, and PT according to ASTM D 2487, or a combination of these groups, as identified by the Geotechnical Engineer.

1. Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent of optimum moisture content at time of compaction.

D. Backfill and Fill: Approved by Geotechnical Engineer.

E. Structural Fill: Approved by Geotechnical Engineer.

F. Subbase Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 1 ½-inch (37.5-mm) sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve.

G. Base Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 95 percent passing a 1 ½-inch (37.5-mm) sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve.

H. Engineered Fill: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 1 ½-inch (37.5-mm) sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve.

I. Bedding Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; except with 100 percent passing a 1-inch (25-mm) sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve.

J. Sand: ASTM C 33; fine aggregate, natural, or manufactured sand.

K. Impervious Fill: Clayey gravel and sand mixture capable of compacting to a dense state.

2.2 GEOTEXTILES

A. Subsurface Drainage and Separation Geotextile: Nonwoven needle-punched geotextile, manufactured for subsurface drainage applications, made from polyolefins or polyesters; with elongation greater than 50 percent; complying with AASHTO M 288. Utilize Mirafi 140N or as recommended by Geotechnical Engineer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork operations.


EARTHWORK 02300 - 7

B. Preparation of subgrade for earthwork operations including removal of vegetation, topsoil, debris, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface is specified in Division 2 Section "Site Clearing."

C. Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls, which are specified in Division 2 Section "Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control," during earthwork operations. Provide erosion control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and rights-of-way.

D. Protect subgrades and foundation soils against freezing temperatures or frost. Provide protective insulating materials as necessary.

E. Cold Weather Work: Prevent frost from entering bearing stratus upon which construction will take place or in areas where fill will be placed in that season.

3.2 DEWATERING

A. Prevent surface water and subsurface ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area.

B. Protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain or water accumulation.

1. Reroute surface water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as temporary drainage ditches.

2. Install a dewatering system to keep subgrades dry and convey ground water away from excavations. Maintain until dewatering is no longer required.

3. Obtain and comply with all provisions of the Colorado Department of Public Health and Environment, Water Quality Control Division, Construction Dewatering Permit.

C. Protection of Persons and Property:

1. Provide all necessary measures to protect workmen and passersby. Barricade open exca-vations occurring as part of the Work, as required by municipal or other authorities hav-ing jurisdiction.

2. Protect adjacent streets, roadways, and properties throughout the entire operation. Protect newly graded areas from destruction by weather or runoff. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other improvements from damage caused by settlement, lat-eral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork opera-tions.

3.3 EXPLOSIVES

A. Explosives: Do not use explosives.


EARTHWORK 02300 - 8

3.4 EXCAVATION, GENERAL

A. Unclassified Excavation: All excavation (other than rock excavation) is considered as unclassified and is defined as removal of all material encountered, regardless of soil type. Excavate to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of surface and subsurface conditions encountered. Unclassified excavated materials may include soil materials, and obstructions. Unclassified excavation is considered normal excavation and no extra costs will be allowed.

1. If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materials and rock, replace with satisfactory soil materials.

2. Remove material of every nature or description encountered in obtaining required lines and grades. Excavate and/or place and compact fill to provide for building pad eleva-tion(s) required by drawings.

3. Excavate wide enough at foundations and retaining walls to permit erection and removal of forms, application of dampproofing or waterproofing.

4. Pitch grading around excavations to prevent water from running into excavated areas. 5. Pre-rip hardpan and soft bedrock with single-tooth ripper or other suitable equipment to

facilitate excavation with conventional earth-moving equipment. 6. Bearing soils disturbed by excavating equipment must be recompacted to 95 percent of

maximum Standard Proctor Density (ASTM D698) prior to placing concrete. 7. Exposed areas which will receive fill once properly cleaned, shall be scarified to a mini-

mum depth of 8”, conditioned to near optimum moisture content, and compacted.

B. Classified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations. Material to be excavated will be classified as earth excavation and rock excavation. Do not excavate rock until it has been classified and cross sectioned by Owner’s Representative.

1. Earth excavation includes excavating pavements and obstructions visible on surface; underground structures, utilities, and other items indicated to be removed; together with soil, boulders, and other materials not classified as rock or unauthorized excavation.

a. Intermittent drilling; ram hammering; or ripping of material not classified as rock excavation is earth excavation.

C. Stability:

1. Slope sides of excavations in compliance with OSHA requirements and local codes or ordinances. Shore and brace where sloping is not possible because of space restrictions or stability of material excavated.

2. Continuously monitor cut slopes for distress. Take all necessary precautions to safeguard workers, structures, and utilities.

3. Provide all necessary shoring, sheeting, or bracing of sides of excavations required to prevent caving, erosion, and gullying. Provide underpinning of existing structures or other improvements adjacent to excavations which are subject to damage.

D. Unanticipated Conditions: Notify the Owner’s Representative immediately upon finding evidence of previous structures or filled materials which penetrate below designated excavation levels, groundwater or water-bearing strata, or other conditions which are not shown or which


EARTHWORK 02300 - 9

cannot be reasonably assumed from existing surveys and geotechnical reports. Secure the Owner’s Represenative instruction before proceeding with further work in such areas.

E. Rock Excavation: Includes removal and disposal of rock. Remove rock to lines and subgrade elevations indicated to permit installation of permanent construction. Rock excavation in unconfined areas is defined as removal and disposal of material which in the Geotechnical Engineer’s opinion, cannot be excavated without continuous and systematic drilling and blasting, or continuous use of a suitable ripper or other special equipment.

1. Unanticipated Rock Excavation: Rock excavation that is not indicated on existing surveys or which cannot be reasonably assumed from geotechnical studies of the site and which could not have been anticipated without extensive investigations. Unanticipated rock excavation shall be subject to change order procedures or previously agreed upon unit prices.

3.5 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES (CIVIL ONLY)

A. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 0.10-foot. If applicable, extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections.

1. Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work.

B. Existing man-made fill shall be removed under structures as required by the Geotechnical Engineer.

3.6 EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS

A. Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and subgrades.

B. Scarify subgrade soils beneath exterior slabs, sidewalks and pavements to a minimum depth of 8-inches, moisture condition and recompact as specified.

C. Existing man-made fill shall be removed under walks and pavements as required by the Geotechnical Engineer.

3.7 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES

A. Refer to Division 2 Section “Trenching”, for excavating and backfilling of utilities.

3.8 SUBGRADE INSPECTION

A. Notify Geotechnical Engineer when excavations have reached required subgrade.


EARTHWORK 02300 - 10

B. If Owner’s Representative and Geotechnical Consultant determines that unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation and replace with compacted backfill or fill material as directed.

C. Proof-roll subgrade below pavements with heavy pneumatic-tired equipment to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Remove and replace soft areas. Do not proof-roll wet or saturated subgrades.

1. Completely proof-roll subgrade in one direction, repeating proof-rolling in direction perpendicular to first direction. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph (5 km/h).

2. Proof-roll with a loaded 10-wheel, tandem-axle dump truck weighing not less than 15 tons.

3. Excavate soft spots, unsatisfactory soils, and areas of excessive pumping or rutting, as determined by Owner’s Representative, and replace with compacted backfill or fill as directed.

D. Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work.

E. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or construction activities, as directed by Owner’s Representative, without additional compensation.

3.9 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION

A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean concrete fill, with 28-day compressive strength of 2500 psi (17.2 MPa), may be used when approved by Geotechnical Engineer. If approved by Geotechnical Engineer, structural fill placed at 100 percent ASTM D698, 2 percent below to 1 percent above optimum moisture may be used.

1. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction or utility pipe as directed by Owner’s Representative.

3.10 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS

A. Stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials in approved locations without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.

1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees.

3.11 BACKFILL

A. Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly, but not before completing the following:

1. Construction below finish grade including, where applicable, subdrainage, dampproofing, waterproofing, and perimeter insulation.



2. Surveying locations of underground utilities for Record Documents. 3. Testing and inspecting underground utilities. 4. Removing concrete formwork. 5. Removing trash and debris. 6. Removing temporary shoring and bracing, and sheeting. 7. Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported walls. 8. Acceptance of subgrade by Geotechnical Engineer.

B. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

3.12 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL

A. Refer to Division 2 Section “Trenching”, for excavating and backfilling of utilities.

3.13 SOIL FILL

A. Preparation: Remove vegetation, topsoil, debris, unsatisfactory soil materials, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface before placing fills.

1. Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so

fill material will bond with existing material. 2. In areas of fill, scarify natural soil following removal of unsatisfactory material, to a

depth of 8”.

B. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations per the geotechnical report and as follows:

1. Under grass and planted areas, use satisfactory soil material. 2. Under walks and pavements, use satisfactory soil material. 3. Under steps and ramps, use engineered fill or structural fill as approved by Geotechnical

Engineer. 4. Under building slabs, use engineered fill or reconditioned on-site soils or imported fills of

native soils as approved by Geotechnical Engineer. 5. Under footings and foundations, use engineered fill or reconditioned on-site soils or

imported fills of native soils as approved by Geotechnical Engineer.

C. Place soil fill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

3.14 SOIL MOISTURE CONTROL

A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill soil layer before compaction to optimum or to 3 percent over optimum moisture content for clay soils, or within 2 percent of optimum moisture content for granular soils. Refer to geotechnical study for additional recommendations.

1. Do not place backfill or fill soil material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice.



2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry otherwise satisfactory soil material that exceeds optimum moisture content beyond the tolerances described above and is too wet to compact to specified dry unit weight.

3.15 COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILLS AND FILLS

A. Place backfill and fill soil materials in layers not more than 8 inches (200 mm) in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches (100 mm) in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers.

B. Place backfill and fill soil materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and uniformly along the full length of each structure.

C. Compact soil materials to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698:

1. Under exterior flatwork, slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify and recompact top 8 inches (300 mm) of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 95 percent.

2. Under lawn or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 6 inches (150 mm) below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 90 percent.

3. Compact foundation wall backfill to 95 percent. 4. Compact scarified subgrade soils to 95 percent. 5. Compact retaining wall backfill to 95 percent.

3.16 GRADING

A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free of irregular surface changes. Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated.

1. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades. 2. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required surface

tolerances.

B. Site Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances:

1. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 0.10 feet. 2. Walks: Plus or minus 0.10 feet. 3. Pavements: Plus or minus 0.10 feet.

3.17 SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES

A. Place subbase and base course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

B. On prepared subgrade, place subbase and base course under pavements and walks as follows:



1. Install separation geotextile, if requested by Geotechnical Engineer, on prepared subgrade according to manufacturer's written instructions, overlapping sides and ends.

2. Place base course material over subbase course under hot-mix asphalt pavement. 3. Shape subbase and base course to required crown elevations and cross-slope grades. 4. Place subbase and base course 6 inches (150 mm) or less in compacted thickness in a

single layer. 5. Place subbase and base course that exceeds 6 inches (150 mm) in compacted thickness in

layers of equal thickness, with no compacted layer more than 6 inches (150 mm) thick or less than 3 inches (75 mm) thick.

6. Compact subbase and base course at optimum moisture content to required grades, lines, cross sections, and thickness to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698.

C. Pavement Shoulders: Place shoulders along edges of subbase and base course to prevent lateral movement. Construct shoulders, at least 12 inches (300 mm) wide, of satisfactory soil materials and compact simultaneously with each subbase and base layer to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698.

3.18 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent geotechnical engineering testing agency to perform field quality-control testing.

B. Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with subsequent earthwork only after test results for previously completed work comply with requirements.

C. Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, at least one test of each soil stratum will be performed to verify design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other footing subgrades may be based on a visual comparison of subgrade with tested subgrade when approved by Owner’s Representative.

D. Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556, ASTM D 2167, ASTM D 2922, and ASTM D 2937, as applicable. Perform field moisture tests in accordance with ASTM D3017. Tests will be performed at the following locations and frequencies at a minimum:

1. Paved and Building Slab Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill layer, at least 1 test for every 2000 sq. ft. (186 sq. m) or less of paved area or building slab, but in no case fewer than 3 tests.

2. Foundation Wall Backfill: At each compacted backfill layer, at least 1 test for each 100 feet (30 m) or less of wall length, but no fewer than 2 tests.

E. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to depth required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained.



3.19 PROTECTION

A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris.

B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions.

1. Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Owner’s Representative; reshape and recompact.

C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing.

1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible.

3.20 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS

A. Disposal: Transport surplus satisfactory soil to designated storage areas on Owner's property. Stockpile or spread soil as directed by Owner’s Representative.

1. Remove waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dis-pose of it off Owner's property.



TRENCHING 02317 - 1

SECTION 02317 - TRENCHING

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. Additional information concerning trenching and backfilling may be found on the civil drawings, in the project geotechnical study/report and City and County of Denver construction standards. In case of conflict between the drawings, jurisdictional criteria and the information specified herein, the more stringent requirements shall govern.

C. Additional information concerning earthwork may be found in the geotechnical investigation report by CTL/Thompson dated March 31, 2009.. All requirements of this report shall be followed unless noted otherwise. The information shown in this report is for information and it shall be the contractors responsibility to field verify conditions indicated.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Subsurface drainage backfill for walls and trenches. 2. Excavating and backfilling for utility trenches. 3. Excavating and backfilling trenches for buried mechanical and electrical utilities and pits

for buried utility structures. 4. Excavating and backfilling trenches within building lines.


1. Division 2 Section "Site Clearing" for site stripping, grubbing, stripping and stockpiling topsoil, and removal of above- and below-grade improvements and utilities.

2. Division 2 Section “Earthwork” for soil materials, site excavating, filling and grading. 3. Division 2 Section “Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control” for erosion and

sediment control. 4. Divisions 15, and 16 Sections for installing underground mechanical and electrical

utilities and buried mechanical and electrical structures, if available. 5. Division 2 Section “Water Distribution System” for water main installation. 6. Division 2 Section “Storm Drainage” for storm sewer system installation. 7. Division 2 Section “Sanitary Sewer System” for sanitary sewer main installation.

C. Shoring Design: Provide the services of a professional engineer to design all shoring, bracing, and underpinning required to protect the safety of workers and integrity of adjacent existing structures or other improvements.


TRENCHING 02317 - 2

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Backfill: Soil material or controlled low-strength material used to fill an excavation.



B. Base Course: Course placed between the subbase course and hot-mix asphalt paving.

C. Bedding Course: Course placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe.

D. Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as backfill approved by Geotechnical Engineer.

E. Unclassified Excavation: Removal of all material of whatever-character required for the work encountered above subgrade elevations and to lines and dimensions indicated, including boulders.

F. Authorized Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions as directed or approved by Owner’s Representative and the testing and inspections agency to correct unsatisfactory conditions. Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work.

G. Bulk Excavation: Excavation more than 10 feet (3 m) in width and more than 30 feet (9 m) in length.

H. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions without direction by Owners Representative. Unauthorized excavation including disposition of overexcavated materials and other work resulting from slides, cave-ins, swelling, upheaval, or remedial work, as well as remedial work directed by Owners Representative, shall be without additional compensation.

I. Rock Excavation: Rock material in beds, ledges, unstratified masses, conglomerate deposits, and boulders of rock material that exceed 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m) for bulk excavation or 3/4 cu. yd. (0.57 cu. m) for footing, trench, and pit excavation that cannot be removed by rock excavating equipment equivalent to the following in size and performance ratings, without systematic drilling, ram hammering, ripping, or blasting, when permitted:

1. Excavation of Footings, Trenches, and Pits: Late-model, track-mounted hydraulic excavator; equipped with a 42-inch- (1065-mm-) wide, maximum, short-tip-radius rock bucket; rated at not less than 138-hp (103-kW) flywheel power with bucket-curling force of not less than 28,090 lbf (125 kN) and stick-crowd force of not less than 18,650 lbf (83 kN); measured according to SAE J-1179.

2. Bulk Excavation: Late-model, track-mounted loader; rated at not less than 210-hp (157-kW) flywheel power and developing a minimum of 48,510-lbf (216-kN) breakout force with a general-purpose bare bucket; measured according to SAE J-732.


TRENCHING 02317 - 3

J. Subbase Course: Course placed between the subgrade and base course for hot-mix asphalt pavement, or course placed between the subgrade and a cement concrete pavement or a cement concrete or hot-mix asphalt walk.

K. Subgrade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, or topsoil materials.

L. Utilities: Includes on-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground services within buildings.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Each type of plastic warning tape.

B. Samples: Contractor to submit representative samples of all materials proposed for use in bedding and trench backfilling operations to the testing and inspections agency for analysis and determination of compliance with the requirements specified herein.

C. Material Test Reports: Provided by Owner from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance of the following with requirements indicated:

1. Classification according to ASTM D 2487 of each on-site or borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill.

2. Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D 698 for each on-site or borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill.

D. Pre-Excavation Photographs or Videotape: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements, including finish surfaces that might be misconstrued as damage caused by earthwork operations. Submit before earthwork begins.


A. Testing Agency:

1. All testing and inspections required herein will be performed by an independent testing and inspection agency employed by the Owner.

2. Notify the testing and inspection agency not less than 48 hours in advance of all work re-quiring testing or inspection services.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with all applicable requirements of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration and local and State rules, regulations, and ordinances concerning shoring, bracing, or sloping of excavations and safety of workers. Safety of workers is the re-sponsibility of the Contractor.

C. Coordination: Coordinate scheduling and procedures for trench excavation, bedding, and back-filling with other Sections whose work relates to or is affected by this work.


TRENCHING 02317 - 4

D. Pre-Construction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site as directed by Owner’s Representative prior to start of construction. Contractor to comply with requirements, which also may be included in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination."


A. Existing Utilities: Locations, sizes and depths or invert elevations of existing utilities as shown on the drawings are based on information provided by others, and are believed to be correct, but may not be absolutely so. Such information is therefore presumed only as approximations and should be verified prior to construction. Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted in writing by Owner’s Representative and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated.


2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Owner’s Representative's written permission.

3. Contact utility-locator service for area where Project is located before excavating.

B. Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities indicated to be removed. Coordinate with utility companies to shut off services if lines are active.

C. Existing Bench Marks: Carefully preserve and maintain existing bench marks, monuments, property line pins, and other reference points. If disturbed or destroyed, restore or replace them at no additional cost to the Owner.

D. Verification of Existing Conditions: Visit the site prior to submission of bids. Verify existing conditions, elevations, and utility locations. In the event of discrepancies between existing conditions and those indicated on the Contract Documents or survey, contact the Owner’s Representative for clarification.

1.7 WARRANTY

Settlement in backfill, fill or in structures built over backfill or fill, which may occur within the specified project warranty period, shall be corrected at no cost to the Owner. Any structures damaged by settlement shall be restored to their original condition by the Contractor, at no cost to the Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Utility Trench Bedding Materials: 1. Agency Requirements: Bedding requirements shall be in accordance with jurisdiction

having control over utility.


TRENCHING 02317 - 5

B. Utility Trench Backfill Materials:

1. Existing soils obtained from trench excavations, including granular or aggregate base course from removed pavements, broken and pulverized claystone or claystone-sandstone bedrock may be used for backfilling trenches, provided it meets any special requirements of the Utility Agency and Geotechnical Engineer. Bedrock must be processed and bro-ken or pulverized so that the maximum particle or fragment size does not exceed three-inches (3”).

A. Unsuitable Utility Trench Materials: Materials unsuitable for bedding and backfilling include highly organic soils, ASTM D2487 Group PT topsoil, and soils containing roots, vegetable matter, trash, and debris.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Shoring and Bracing: Provide all materials for shoring and bracing, such as sheet piling, uprights, stringers, and cross-braces, in good and serviceable condition, as required for safety and by governing authorities.

B. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) wide and 4 mils (0.1 mm) thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility; colored as follows:

1. Red: Electric. 2. Yellow: Gas, oil, steam, and dangerous materials. 3. Orange: Telephone and other communications. 4. Blue: Water systems. 5. Green: Sewer systems.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which the work of this Section will be performed. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been cor-rected. Commencement of work implies acceptance of all areas and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork operations.

B. Preparation of subgrade for earthwork operations including removal of vegetation, topsoil, debris, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface is specified in Division 2 Section "Site Clearing."


TRENCHING 02317 - 6

C. Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls, which are specified in Division 2 Section "Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control," during earthwork operations.

D. Existing Utilities:

1. General: Location of existing utilities shown on the plans are approximate only. The Contractor shall be responsible to locate all existing underground utilities in areas of the work. If utilities are to remain in place, provide protection during excavation and back-filling operations. Should uncharted or incorrectly charted piping or other utilities be en-countered during excavations, consult the Owner’s Representative immediately for direc-tion. Cooperate with the Utility Agency in keeping respective services and facilities in operation. Repair damaged utilities to the satisfaction of the Utility Agency.

2. Active Utilities: Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied and used by the Owner or by adjacent properties, except when permitted in writing by the Owner’s Representative, and then only after acceptable temporary utility services have been pro-vided. Remove or relocate utilities only as indicated or specified.

3. Inactive Utilities: Report inactive or abandoned utilities encountered in excavating or grading operations, and remove, plug, or cap as required. In the absence of specific re-quirements, plug or cap such utility lines at least 5’-0” outside new building walls, or as required by local requirements.

4. Removal: Demolish and completely remove from the project site all existing under-ground utilities indicated to be removed. Coordinate with Utility Agencies for discon-tinuance of services if lines are active.

E. Protection of Persons and Property:

1. Provide all necessary measures to protect workmen and passersby. Barricade open exca-vations occurring as part of the work, as required by municipal or other authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Protect adjacent streets, structures, and other improvements from damage caused by set-tlement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by trench excavations.

F. Protect subgrades and trench bottoms soils against freezing temperatures or frost. Provide protective insulating materials as necessary.

G. Cold Weather Work: Prevent frost from entering bearing strata upon which construction will taken place or in areas where fill will be placed in that season.

3.3 DEWATERING

A. Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area.

B. Provide and maintain pumps, well points, sumps, suction and discharge lines, and other dewatering system components necessary to convey water away from excavations and to collection or runoff areas. Establish and maintain temporary drainage ditches and diversions away from trench excavations. Do not use trench excavations as temporary drainage ditches.


TRENCHING 02317 - 7

C. Protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain or water accumulation.

1. Reroute surface water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as temporary drainage ditches.

2. Install a dewatering system to keep subgrades dry and convey ground water away from excavations. Maintain until dewatering is no longer required.

3. Obtain and comply with all provisions of the Colorado Department of Public Health and Environment, Water Quality Control Division, Construction Dewatering Permit.

3.4 SHORING AND BRACING

A. Provide shoring and bracing of excavations as required for safety and by governing authorities. Carry down shoring and bracing as excavation progresses. Maintain shoring and bracing in excavations regardless of time period excavations will be open.

3.5 PAVEMENT REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT

A. Where trenches or other utility excavations are made in existing paved areas, saw-cut pavement surface to create a clean break line. Cut pavement a minimum of 12” beyond trench width on each side of trench; remove and dispose of existing surface course and aggregate base course, leaving a 12” wide undisturbed subgrade lip on each side of trench.

B. After trench has been backfilled and compacted, place new pavement in accordance with applicable requirements of Division 2 Sections as applicable, for Asphaltic or Portland cement concrete pavement and in accordance with Authorities having jurisdiction.

3.6 EXPLOSIVES

A. Explosives: Do not use explosives.

3.7 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES

A. Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations.

1. Beyond building perimeter, excavate trenches to allow installation of top of pipe below frost line.

B. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide the following clearance on each side of pipe or conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches (300 mm) higher than top of pipe or conduit, unless otherwise indicated on the drawings.

C. Clearance: 18 inches (300 mm) each side of pipe or conduit.

1. Slope sides of trenches or provide shoulders in accordance with OSHA requirements and as required by Utility Agency standards.


TRENCHING 02317 - 8

2. Continuously monitor cut slopes and trenches for distress or movement. Provide all necessary shoring and bracing required to protect the life and safety of workmen performing excavation or installing piping or conduit.

D. Trench Bottoms: Excavate trenches a minimum of 3 inches (75 mm) deeper than bottom of pipe elevation to allow for bedding course. Hand excavate for bell of pipe.

1. Excavate trenches 6 inches (150 mm) deeper than elevation required in rock or other unyielding bearing material to allow for bedding course and backfill with a 6” layer of crushed stone or gravel prior to installing pipe.

3.8 BEDDING OF PIPES:

A. After completion of trench excavation and before installation of piping, install not less than 3” of approved bedding material in trench bottom for support of pipe. Dig bell holes in bedding deep enough to provide a minimum of 2” clearance between the bell and bedding material. Fully support pipe on bedding material for the full length of the pipe barrel.

B. After pipe is adjusted for line and grade, and all jointing is complete, carefully place and tamp bedding material under the haunches of the pipe and in the previously dug bell holes.

C. Install bedding to a minimum depth of 12” above top of pipe prior to starting placement of compacted backfill. Lightly compact or tamp bedding material in a manner to avoid displacement of or damage to the pipe.

3.9 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS

A. Stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials in approved locations without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.

1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees.

3.10 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL

A. After installation of utility piping or lines have been completed, locations recorded, trash or other debris removed from excavations, and bedding placed and approved, backfill promptly as work and weather conditions permit. Do not backfill trenches until all required pipe system tests and inspections have been made, unless partial backfilling is required to restrain pipe under test pressures. Use care in backfilling to avoid damage or displacement of pipe systems.

B. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

C. Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape bedding course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits.


TRENCHING 02317 - 9

D. Place backfill materials in layers not more than 8” in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4” in loose depth for material compacted by hand operated tampers. Use hand held tools or compacting devices for trench backfill, until a minimum compacted thickness of 3’-0” above top of pipe is achieved. Mechanical or power compactors may be used thereafter.

E. Before compaction, moisten or aerate each layer of backfill to specifications.

F. Compact each layer to not less than 95% of maximum standard Proctor density (ASTM D698). Thoroughly compact by means of mechanical tampers areas which cannot be properly compacted by means of rolling equipment.

G. Backfill to subgrade elevation shown for finish grading, topsoil placement, or paving.

H. Place and compact initial backfill of satisfactory soil, free of particles larger than 1 inch (25 mm) in any dimension, to a height of 12 inches (300 mm) over the utility pipe or conduit.

1. Carefully compact initial backfill under pipe haunches and compact evenly up on both sides and along the full length of utility piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement of piping or conduit. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing.

I. Backfill voids with satisfactory soil while installing and removing shoring and bracing.

J. Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil to final subgrade elevation.

K. Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches (300 mm) below finished grade, and 6 inches (150 mm) below subgrade under pavements and slabs.


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent geotechnical engineering testing agency to perform field quality-control testing.

B. Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with subsequent earthwork only after test results for previously completed work comply with requirements.

C. Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556, ASTM D 2167, ASTM D 2922, and ASTM D 2937, as applicable. Perform field moisture tests in accordance with ASTM D3017. Tests will be performed at the following locations and frequencies at a minimum:

1. Trench Backfill: At each compacted initial and final backfill layer, at least 1 test for each 150 feet (46 m) or less of trench length, but no fewer than 2 tests. At a minimum, test intervals and quantities shall meet or exceed the requirements of the local utility agency.

D. When testing agency reports that backfills have not achieved degree of compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to depth required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained.


TRENCHING 02317 - 10

3.12 PROTECTION

A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris.

B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions.

1. Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Owner’s Representative; reshape and recompact.

C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing.

1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible.

3.13 CLEANING AND ADJUSTMENT:

A. Reconditioning Compacted Areas: When completed compacted areas are disturbed by subse-quent construction operations or adverse weather, scarify surface, reshape, and recompact to required density prior to further construction.

B. Cleanup: Remove excess materials not required for backfilling purposes, including excess spoil material, accumulated debris, and rubbish from site. Burning of waste material is prohib-ited.

3.14 RESTORATION:

A. Adjacent Improvements: Restore all fences, irrigation ditches, yards, lawns, and other struc-tures or surfaces to condition equal to or better than before work began.

3.15 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS

A. Disposal: Transport surplus satisfactory soil to designated storage areas on Owner's property. Stockpile or spread soil as directed by Owner’s Representative.

1. Remove waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dis-pose of it off Owner's property.


SECTION 02466 - DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS AND SHAFTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Dry-installed drilled piers.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 31 Section "Site Clearing" for preparation of subgrade for drilled-pier operations including removal of vegetation, topsoil, debris, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface.

1.3 UNIT PRICES

A. Unit prices are included in Division 01 Section "Unit Prices."

B. Drilled Piers: Actual net volume of drilled piers in place and approved. Actual length and shaft diameter may vary, to coincide with elevations where satisfactory bearing strata are encountered. These dimensions may also vary with actual bearing value of bearing strata determined by an independent testing and inspecting agency. Adjustments will be made on net variation of total quantities, based on design dimensions for shafts.

1. Base bids on indicated number of drilled piers and, for each pier, the design length from top elevation to bottom of shaft and the diameter of shaft.

2. Unit prices include labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals required for excavation, trimming, shoring, casings, dewatering, reinforcement, concrete fill, testing and inspecting, and other items for complete drilled-pier installation.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.

1. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site.

DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS AND SHAFTS 02466 - 1

C. Shop Drawings: For concrete reinforcement detailing fabricating, bending, supporting, and placing.

D. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer land surveyor and testing agency.

E. Welding certificates.

F. Material Certificates: For the following, from manufacturer:

1. Cementitious materials. 2. Admixtures. 3. Steel reinforcement and accessories.

G. Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency, indicating compliance with requirements:

1. Aggregates.

H. Field quality-control reports.

I. Other Informational Submittals:

1. Record drawings.


A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer that has specialized in drilled-pier work.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1077, ASTM D 3740, and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.

C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 2. AWS D1.4, "Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel."

D. Drilled-Pier Standard: Comply with ACI 336.1 unless modified in this Section.

E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Review methods and procedures related to drilled piers including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Review geotechnical report. b. Discuss existing utilities and subsurface conditions. c. Review coordination with temporary controls and protections.



A. Existing Utilities: Locate existing underground utilities before excavating drilled piers. If utilities are to remain in place, provide protection from damage during drilled-pier operations.

1. Should uncharted or incorrectly charted piping or other utilities be encountered during excavation, adapt drilling procedure if necessary to prevent damage to utilities. Cooperate with Owner and utility companies in keeping services and facilities in operation without interruption. Repair damaged utilities to satisfaction of utility owner.

B. Interruption of Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt any utility to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Architect no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of utility. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of utility without Architect's written permission.

C. Project-Site Information: A geotechnical report has been prepared for this Project and is available for information only. The opinions expressed in this report are those of geotechnical engineer and represent interpretations of subsoil conditions, tests, and results of analyses conducted by geotechnical engineer. Owner will not be responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn from this data.

1. Make additional test borings and conduct other exploratory operations necessary for drilled piers.

2. The geotechnical report is included elsewhere in the Project Manual.

D. Survey Work: Engage a qualified land surveyor or professional engineer to perform surveys, layouts, and measurements for drilled piers. Before excavating, lay out each drilled pier to lines and levels required. Record actual measurements of each drilled pier's location, shaft diameter, bottom and top elevations, deviations from specified tolerances, and other specified data.

1. Record and maintain information pertinent to each drilled pier and cooperate with Owner's testing and inspecting agency to provide data for required reports.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed.

B. Low-Alloy-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 706/A 706M, deformed.

C. Plain-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, as drawn.

D. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), plain. Cut bars true to length with ends square and free of burrs.


2.2 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of same type, brand, and source, throughout Project:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150.See Concrete Mix Matrix on drawings.

a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or Class F. b. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120.

B. Normal-Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33, graded, 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) nominal maximum coarse-aggregate size. Provide aggregate from a single source with documented service record data of at least 10 years' satisfactory service in similar applications and service conditions using similar aggregates and cementitious materials.

1. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.

C. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M.

D. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride.

1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 2. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. 3. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M,

Type G. 4. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.

E. Sand-Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type II; clean natural sand, ASTM C 404; and water to result in grout with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 1000 psi (6.9 MPa), of consistency required for application.

2.3 CONCRETE MIXTURES

A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301.

B. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement according to ACI 301 limits as if concrete were exposed to deicing chemicals.

C. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.15 percent by weight of cement.

D. Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture according to ACI 211.1 and ACI301. See Concrete Mix Matrix.

1. Air Content: Do not air entrain concrete.


2.4 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT

A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."

2.5 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M, and furnish batch ticket information.

1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F (30 and 32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, vibration, and other hazards created by drilled-pier operations.

3.2 EXCAVATION

A. Unclassified Excavation: Excavate to bearing elevations regardless of character of surface and subsurface conditions encountered. Unclassified excavated materials may include rock, soil materials, and obstructions.

1. Obstructions: Unclassified excavation may include removal of unanticipated boulders, concrete, masonry, or other subsurface obstructions. No changes in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time will be authorized for removal of obstructions.

2. Obstructions: Unclassified excavated materials may include removal of unanticipated boulders, concrete, masonry, or other subsurface obstructions. Payment for removing obstructions that cannot be removed by conventional augers fitted with soil or rock teeth, drilling buckets, or underreaming tools attached to drilling equipment of size, power, torque, and downthrust necessary for the Work will be according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work.

B. Prevent surface water from entering excavated shafts. Conduct water to site drainage facilities.

C. Excavate shafts for drilled piers to indicated elevations. Remove loose material from bottom of excavation.

1. Excavate bottom of drilled piers to level plane within 1:12 tolerance. 2. Remove water from excavated shafts before concreting. 3. Excavate rock sockets of dimensions indicated. 4. Cut series of grooves about perimeter of shaft to height from bottom of shaft, vertical

spacing, and dimensions indicated.


D. Notify and allow testing and inspecting agency to test and inspect bottom of excavation. If unsuitable bearing stratum is encountered, make adjustments to drilled piers as determined by Architect.

1. Do not excavate shafts deeper than elevations indicated unless approved by Architect. 2. Payment for additional authorized excavation will be according to Contract provisions for

changes in the Work.

E. Excavate shafts for closely spaced drilled piers and for drilled piers occurring in fragile or sand strata only after adjacent drilled piers are filled with concrete and allowed to set.

F. Tolerances: Construct drilled piers to remain within ACI 336.1 tolerances.

1. If location or out-of-plumb tolerances are exceeded, provide corrective construction. Submit design and construction proposals to Architect for review before proceeding.


A. Comply with recommendations in CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement.

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, and other materials that reduce or destroy bond with concrete.

C. Fabricate and install reinforcing cages symmetrically about axis of shafts in a single unit.

D. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement during concreting. Maintain minimum cover over reinforcement.

E. Use templates to set anchor bolts, leveling plates, and other accessories furnished in work of other Sections. Provide blocking and holding devices to maintain required position during final concrete placement.

F. Protect exposed ends of extended reinforcement, dowels, or anchor bolts from mechanical damage and exposure to weather.

3.4 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Place concrete in continuous operation and without segregation immediately after inspection and approval of shaft by Owner's independent testing and inspecting agency.

1. Construct a construction joint if concrete placement is delayed more than one hour. Level top surface of concrete and insert joint dowel bars. Before placing remainder of concrete, clean surface laitance, roughen, and slush concrete with commercial bonding agent or with sand-cement grout mixed at ratio of 1:1.

B. Dry Method: Place concrete to fall vertically down the center of drilled pier without striking sides of shaft or steel reinforcement.


1. Where concrete cannot be directed down shaft without striking reinforcement, place concrete with chutes, tremies, or pumps.

2. Vibrate top 60 inches (1500 mm) of concrete.

C. Coordinate withdrawal of temporary casings with concrete placement to maintain at least a 60-inch (1500-mm) head of concrete above bottom of casing.

1. Vibrate top 60 inches (1500 mm) of concrete after withdrawal of temporary casing.

D. Screed concrete at cutoff elevation level and apply scoured, rough finish. Where cutoff elevation is above the ground elevation, form top section above grade and extend shaft to required elevation.

E. Protect concrete work, according to ACI 301, from frost, freezing, or low temperatures that could cause physical damage or reduced strength.

1. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.

2. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other mineral-containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators.

F. If hot-weather conditions exist that would seriously impair quality and strength of concrete, place concrete according to ACI 301 to maintain delivered temperature of concrete at no more than 90 deg F (32 deg C).

1. Place concrete immediately on delivery. Keep exposed concrete surfaces and formed shaft extensions moist by fog sprays, wet burlap, or other effective means for a minimum of seven days.


A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage a special inspector and qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Inspections:

1. Drilled piers. 2. Excavation. 3. Steel reinforcement placement. 4. Steel reinforcement welding. 5. Verification of use of required design mixture. 6. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing.

C. Drilled-Pier Tests and Inspections: For each drilled pier, before concrete placement.

1. Soil Testing: Bottom elevations, bearing capacities, and lengths of drilled piers indicated have been estimated from available soil data. Actual elevations and drilled-pier lengths and bearing capacities will be determined by testing and inspecting agency. Final evaluations and approval of data will be determined by Architect.


D. Reinforcing Inspection: 1. Reinforcing shall be inspected prior to placing reinforcing in the pier or placing of

concrete. Inspect all reinforcing for conformance with Contract requirements with regard to bar size, grade, placement, splice lengths, clearance from soil or formwork, supports, and attachment of accessories and embedded items. Inspection shall be according to ACI 318 and IBC, chapter 19. Inspect all reinforcing steel that is welded according to AWS D1.4, IBC chapter 10, and ACI 318.

2. Inspect all bolts and embedded items that will be cast into concrete. Verify size, spacing, embedment length, and location according to IBC chapter 19.

E. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements:

1. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one composite sample for each truck load. 2. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample. 3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; one test for

each composite sample. 4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is

40 deg F and below and when 80 deg F and above, and one test for each composite sample.

5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M.

a. Cast and laboratory cure four standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample.

6. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M.

a. One specimen will be tested at 7 days, 2 specimens will be tested at 28 days, and 1 specimen will be retained in reserve for later testing if required.

b. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a set of two specimens obtained from the same composite sample and tested at age indicated.

7. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi.

8. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests.

9. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete.

10. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency



may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42/C 42M or by other methods as directed by Architect.

a. Sonic testing or continuous coring of drilled piers may be required, at Contractor's expense, if temporary casings have not been withdrawn within specified time limits or if observations of placement operations indicate deficient concrete quality, presence of voids, segregation, or other possible defects.

11. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

12. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not comply with the Contract Documents.

F. An excavation, concrete, or a drilled pier will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

G. Prepare test and inspection reports for each drilled pier as follows:

1. Actual top and bottom elevations. 2. Actual drilled-pier diameter at top and bottom. 3. Description of soil materials. 4. Description, location, and dimensions of obstructions. 5. Final top centerline location and deviations from requirements. 6. Variation of shaft from plumb. 7. Shaft excavating method. 8. Levelness of bottom and adequacy of cleanout. 9. Properties of slurry and slurry test results at time of slurry placement and at time of

concrete placement. 10. Ground-water conditions and water-infiltration rate, depth, and pumping. 11. Description, purpose, length, wall thickness, diameter, tip, and top and bottom elevations

of temporary or permanent casings. Include anchorage and sealing methods used and condition and weather tightness of splices if any.

12. Description of soil or water movement, sidewall stability, loss of ground, and means of control.

13. Date and time of starting and completing excavation. 14. Inspection report. 15. Condition of reinforcing steel and splices. 16. Position of reinforcing steel. 17. Concrete placing method, including elevation of consolidation and delays. 18. Elevation of concrete during removal of casings. 19. Locations of construction joints. 20. Concrete volume. 21. Concrete testing results. 22. Remarks, unusual conditions encountered, and deviations from requirements. 23. Record of shear key installation.

3.6 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS A. Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including unsatisfactory soil,

trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off Owner's property. END OF SECTION 02466

HAMPTON INN AND SUITES AT DIA MARTIN/MARTIN PROJECT # 18090.C.10 January 9, 2009 SECTION 02510 - WATER SYSTEM

PART 1 – GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections apply to this Section.

B. Additional information concerning water distribution systems may be found on the Civil Drawings. In case of conflict between the drawings and the information specified herein, the more stringent requirements shall govern.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Work Included: Excavation, trenching, exploratory excavation (pothole), backfill, bedding, soil stabilization, ground water removal, connection to existing mains, and installation of pipe, fire hydrants, taps, valves, fittings, valve boxes, and all necessary appurtenances. Also includes removal and replacement of existing paving or concrete where required, haul and import of adequate backfill material to meet compaction requirements and removal of existing thrust blocks where necessary.



2. Division 2 Section “Earthwork” for soil materials, site excavating, filling and grading. 3. Division 2 Section Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control” for erosion and sediment

mitigation. 4. Division 2 Section “Trenching” for excavating and backfilling of utilities. 5. Division 2 Section “Hot Mix Asphalt Paving” for asphalt pavement removal, replacement,

materials and testing. 6. Division 2 Section “Cement Concrete Pavement” for concrete pavement removal,

replacement, materials and testing.

C. Permits and Fees: Contractor to obtain and pay for all permits required for work in this Section. Pay all fees for inspections by local authorities and utility agency for work specified in this Section.

1.3 REFERENCE TO DENVER WATER DEPARTMENT STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS

All work of this section shall be performed in conformance to the current published Denver Water, Engineering Standards, Tenth Edition, effective July 1, 2002 and as subsequently revised, which are incorporated into these specifications by reference. Supplementary requirements may be developed by the Engineer to address project-specific conditions, which may supersede the above-referenced

WATER SYSTEM 02510-1


WATER SYSTEM 02510-2

specification.


HAMPTON INN AND SUITES AT DIA MARTIN/MARTIN PROJECT # 18090.C.10 January 9, 2009 SECTION 02530 - SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provision of the contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Additional information concerning the sanitary sewer distribution systems may be found on the Civil Drawings. In case of conflict between the drawings and the information specified herein, the more stringent requirements shall govern.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Work Included: Excavation, trenching, removal of existing manholes and piping, backfill, compaction, bedding, soil stabilization, groundwater removal, connection to existing manholes, and installation of pipe, manholes, aggregate base course and gravel where required, service wyes, service lines, asphalt removal and replacement, and all necessary appurtenances and safety precautions. Also includes removal and replacement of existing paving, concrete, topsoil and landscaping where required.

B. Related Sections: 1. Division 2 Section "Site Clearing" for site stripping, grubbing, stripping and stockpiling

topsoil, and removal of above- and below-grade improvements and utilities. 2. Division 2 Section “Earthwork” for soil materials, site excavating, filling and grading. 3. Division 2 Section Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control” for erosion and

sediment mitigation. 4. Division 2 Section “Trenching” for excavating and backfilling of utilities. 5. Division 2 Section “Hot Mix Asphalt Paving” for asphalt pavement removal,

replacement, materials and testing. 6. Division 2 Section “Cement Concrete Pavement” for concrete pavement removal,



1.3 REFERENCE TO CITY AND COUNTY OD DENVER WASTEWATER MANAGEMENT DIVISION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS

All work of this section shall be performed in conformance to the current published City and County of Denver, Department of Public Works, Wastewater Management Division, standards and specifications and as subsequently revised, which are incorporated into these specifications by reference. Supplementary requirements may be developed by the Engineer to address project-specific conditions, which may supersede the above-referenced specification.

SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM 02530-1


SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM 02530-2


HAMPTON INN AND SUITES AT DIA MARTIN/MARTIN PROJECT # 18090.C.10 January 9, 2009 SECTION 02630 – STORM DRAINAGE

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provision of the contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Additional information concerning storm water distribution systems may be found on the Civil Drawings. In case of conflict between the drawings and the information specified herein, the more stringent requirements shall govern.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Work Included: Excavation, trenching, removal of existing manholes and piping, backfill, compaction, bedding, soil stabilization, ground water removal, connection to existing manholes, and installation of pipe, manholes, inlets, outfalls, aggregate base course and gravel where required, asphalt removal and replacement, and all necessary appurtenances and safety precautions. Also includes removal and replacement of existing paving, concrete, topsoil and landscaping where required.



2. Division 2 Section “Earthwork” for soil materials, site excavating, filling and grading. 3. Division 2 Section Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control” for erosion and

sediment mitigation. 4. Division 2 Section “Trenching” for excavating and backfilling of utilities. 5. Division 2 Section “Hot Mix Asphalt Paving” for asphalt pavement removal,

replacement, materials and testing. 6. Division 2 Section “Cement Concrete Pavement” for concrete pavement removal,



1.3 REFERENCE TO CITY AND COUNTY OF DENVER WASTEWATER MANAGEMENT DIVISION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS

All work of this section shall be performed in conformance to the current published City and County of Denver, Storm Drainage Design and Technical Manual, revised through January 2006 and Wastewater Management Division standards and specifications as subsequently revised, which are incorporated into these specifications by reference. Supplementary requirements may be developed by

STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM 02630-1


STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM 02630-2

the Engineer to address project-specific conditions, which may supersede the above-referenced specification.



HOT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING 02741 - 1

SECTION 02741 - HOT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. Additional information concerning asphalt paving may be found on the civil drawings, in the project geotechnical report and City and County of Denver construction standards. In case of conflict between the drawings, jurisdictional criteria and the information specified herein, the more stringent requirements shall govern.

C. Additional information concerning asphalt paving may be found in the geotechnical investigation report by CTL/Thompson dated March 31, 2009. All requirements of this report shall be followed unless noted otherwise. The information shown in this report is for information and it shall be the contractors responsibility to field verify conditions indicated.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Hot-mix asphalt paving. 2. Hot-mix asphalt patching. 3. Hot-mix asphalt paving overlay. 4. Asphalt surface treatments. 5. Cold milling of existing hot-mix asphalt pavement.


1. Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for soil materials, excavating, backfilling and site grading.

2. Division 2 Section “Pavement Markings” for pavement striping and symbols.

C. References:

1. City and County of Denver Standard Specifications for Design and Construction, latest edition.

2. Colorado Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, current edition and all appropriate standard special provisions.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Hot-Mix Asphalt Paving Terminology: Refer to ASTM D 8 for definitions of terms.

B. CDOT: State of Colorado Department of Transportation.



C. CDOT Specifications: Colorado Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, current edition and all appropriate standard special provisions.

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Provide hot-mix asphalt paving in accordance with Section 401 of the CDOT Specifications.

1. Standard Specification: CDOT Specifications. 2. Measurement and payment provisions and safety program submittals included in CDOT

Specifications do not apply to this Project.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, include technical data and tested physical and performance properties.

B. Job-Mix Designs: For each job mix proposed for the Work.

C. Material Test Reports: For each paving material.

D. Material Certificates: For each paving material, signed by providers.


A. Manufacturer and Installer Qualifications:

1. Manufacturer Qualifications: Engage a firm experienced in manufacturing hot-mix asphalt similar to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.

2. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed hot-mix asphalt paving similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Testing Agency: 1. All testing and inspections required herein will be performed by an independent testing and

inspection agency employed by the Owner. 2. Notify the testing and inspection agency not less than 48 hours in advance of all work

requiring testing or inspection services.

C. Testing Requirements: Asphalt Paving shall be tested for gradation, asphalt content and in-place density in accordance with CDOT Specifications, the current edition of CDOT Field Materials Manual, and local Regulatory Agency requirements, whichever are the most stringent.

D. Preconstruction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site as directed by Owner’s Representative. Contractor to comply with requirements, which may also be included in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination."




A. Environmental Limitations: Do not apply asphalt materials if subgrade is wet or excessively damp or if the following conditions are not met:

1. Tack Coats: Minimum surface or air temperature in the shade of 60 deg F (15 deg C). 2. Slurry Coat: Comply with weather limitations of ASTM D 3910. 3. Asphalt Base Course: Minimum surface or air temperature in the shade of 40 deg F and

rising at time of placement. 4. Asphalt Surface Course: Minimum surface or air temperature in the shade of 50 deg F

and rising at time of placement.

B. Coordination and Scheduling:

1. Cooperate with other trades and arrange scheduling to avoid damage to other work, including grading, site utilities and piping, exterior concrete, landscaping and irrigation systems.

2. Before commencing pavement operations, ascertain that utility lines, site lighting and wiring, piping, curb and gutter work, general grading and heavy trucking is complete so that such operations will not damage paving work.

3. Mask off and protect exposed building surfaces and abutting concrete from damage or staining by tack coat and paving operations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 AGGREGATES

A. General: Use materials and gradations that have performed satisfactorily in previous installations meeting the requirements of the CDOT Specifications.

B. Asphalt Concrete Aggregate: Clean, hard, durable particles of crushed stone, crushed slag, crushed gravel, or natural gravel conforming to the requirements of Subsection 703.04 of the CDOT Specifications, Item 703.04, Grading SX and S (Table 703-3).

C. Mineral Filler: Rock dust, slag dust, hydrated lime, hydraulic cement, or other suitable mineral material conforming to the requirements of Subsection 703.06 of the CDOT Specifications. Item 703.06.

2.2 ASPHALT MATERIALS

A. Asphalt Cement: The asphalt cement to be used on this project shall be PG 64-22 conforming to the requirements of Subsection 702.01 of the CDOT Specifications.

B. Tack Coat: AASHTO M 140, emulsified asphalt or AASHTO M 208, cationic emulsified asphalt, slow setting, diluted in water, of suitable grade and consistency for application.



C. Fog Seal: AASHTO M 140, emulsified asphalt or AASHTO M 208, cationic emulsified asphalt, slow setting, diluted at the factory in water, of suitable grade and consistency for application.

D. Water: Potable.

2.3 MIXES

A. Hot-Mix Asphalt: Dense, hot-laid, hot-mix asphalt plant mixes. Furnish job-mix formulas for each pavement type, conforming to the requirements of Subsection 401.02 of the CDOT Specifications. Mix aggregates and bituminous materials in accordance with the requirements of Subsection 401.15 of the CDOT Specifications. Use approved job mix formulas. Mix to comply with the following requirements:

1. Provide mixes with a history of satisfactory performance in geographical area where Project is located.

2. Base Course: Grading S (75). 3. Surface Course: Grading SX (75).

B. Emulsified-Asphalt: Shall conform to AASHTO M140 or M208 in accordance with Subsection 702.03 of the CDOT Specifications.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that subgrade is unfrozen, free of water, snow, and ice otherwise in suitable condition to support paving and imposed loads.

B. Proof-roll subbase using heavy, pneumatic-tired rollers to locate areas that are unstable or that require further compaction. Scarify, regrade and recompact surface of subgrade that is pumping or deforming as required to provide true levels, uniform slopes and proper total thickness of paving as required in Division 2 Section “Earthwork.”

C. Proceed with paving only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 COLD MILLING

A. Clean existing pavement surface of loose and deleterious material immediately before cold milling. Remove existing asphalt pavement by cold milling to grades and cross sections indicated.

1. Mill to a depth of a minimum 1 ½-inches or as indicated on the plans. 2. Mill to a uniform finished surface free of gouges, grooves, and ridges. 3. Control rate of milling to prevent tearing of existing asphalt course. 4. Repair or replace curbs, manholes, and other construction damaged during cold milling. 5. Excavate and trim unbound-aggregate base course, if encountered, and keep material

separate from milled hot-mix asphalt.



6. Transport milled hot-mix asphalt to asphalt recycling facility. 7. Keep milled pavement surface free of loose material and dust.

3.3 PATCHING

A. Hot-Mix Asphalt Pavement: Saw cut perimeter of patch and excavate existing pavement section to sound base. Excavate rectangular or trapezoidal patches, extending 12 inches (300 mm) into adjacent sound pavement, unless otherwise indicated. Cut excavation faces vertically. Remove excavated material. Recompact existing unbound-aggregate base course to form new subgrade.

B. Tack Coat: Apply uniformly to vertical surfaces abutting or projecting into new, hot-mix asphalt paving at a rate of 0.05 to 0.2 gal./sq. yd. (0.2 to 0.8 L/sq. m).

1. Allow tack coat to cure undisturbed before applying hot-mix asphalt paving. 2. Avoid smearing or staining adjoining surfaces, appurtenances, and surroundings.

Remove spillages and clean affected surfaces.

C. Patching: Partially fill excavated pavements with hot-mix asphalt base mix and, while still hot, compact. Cover asphalt base course with compacted, hot-mix surface layer finished flush with adjacent surfaces.

3.4 REPAIRS

A. Leveling Course: Install and compact leveling course consisting of hot-mix asphalt surface course to level sags and fill depressions deeper than 1 inch (25 mm) in existing pavements.

B. Crack and Joint Filling: Remove existing joint filler material from cracks or joints to a depth of 1/4 inch (6 mm).

1. Clean cracks and joints in existing hot-mix asphalt pavement. 2. Use emulsified-asphalt slurry to seal cracks and joints less than ¼ inch (6 mm) wide. Fill

flush with surface of existing pavement and remove excess. 3. Use hot-applied joint sealant to seal cracks and joints more than ¼ inch (6 mm) wide.

Fill flush with surface of existing pavement and remove excess.

3.5 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. General: Immediately before placing asphalt materials, remove loose and deleterious material from substrate surfaces. Ensure that prepared subgrade is ready to receive paving.

1. Sweep loose granular particles from surface of unbound-aggregate base course. Do not dislodge or disturb aggregate embedded in compacted surface of base course.

B. Herbicide Treatment: Apply herbicide according to manufacturer's recommended rates and written application instructions. Apply to dry, prepared subgrade or surface of compacted-aggregate base before applying paving materials.



C. Tack Coat: Apply uniformly to surfaces of existing pavement at a rate of 0.05 to 0.20 gal./sq. yd. (0.2 to 0.8 L/sq. m).

1. Allow tack coat to cure undisturbed before applying hot-mix asphalt paving. 2. Avoid smearing or staining adjoining surfaces, appurtenances, and surroundings.

Remove spillages and clean affected surfaces.

3.6 PAVING GEOTEXTILE INSTALLATION

A. Apply asphalt binder uniformly to existing pavement surfaces at a rate of 0.25 gal./sq. yd. (1.0 L/sq. m) per in accordance with Subsection 420.04 of the CDOT Specifications. item 420.04.

B. Place paving geotextile promptly according to manufacturer's written instructions. Broom or roll geotextile smooth and free of wrinkles and folds. Overlap longitudinal joints 4 inches (100 mm) and transverse joints 6 inches (150 mm).

1. Protect paving geotextile from traffic and other damage and place hot-mix asphalt paving overlay the same day.

3.7 HOT-MIX ASPHALT PLACING

A. Machine place hot-mix asphalt on prepared surface, spread uniformly, and strike off. Place asphalt mix by hand to areas inaccessible to equipment in a manner that prevents segregation of mix. Place each course to required grade, cross section, and thickness when compacted.

1. Place hot-mix asphalt base course in number of lifts and thicknesses indicated on the plans or as directed by Geotechnical Report. Maximum lift thickness shall be 3-inches. Minimum lift thickness shall be 1½-inches for Grading SX and 2-inches for Grading S.

2. Place hot-mix asphalt surface course in single lift. Maximum lift thickness shall be 2-inches.

3. Spread mix at minimum temperature of 235 deg F (113 deg C) per in accordance with Subsection 401.15 of the CDOT Specifications, Table 401-4.

4. Begin applying mix along centerline of crown for crowned sections and on high side of one-way slopes, unless otherwise indicated.

5. Regulate paver machine speed to obtain smooth, continuous surface free of pulls and tears in asphalt-paving mat.

B. Place paving in consecutive strips not less than 10 feet (3 m) wide unless infill edge strips of a lesser width are required.

1. After first strip has been placed and rolled, place succeeding strips and extend rolling to overlap previous strips. Complete a section of asphalt base course before placing asphalt surface course.

C. Promptly correct surface irregularities in paving course behind paver. Use suitable hand tools to remove excess material forming high spots. Fill depressions with hot-mix asphalt to prevent segregation of mix; use suitable hand tools to smooth surface.



3.8 JOINTS

A. Construct joints to ensure a continuous bond between adjoining paving sections. Construct joints free of depressions with same texture and smoothness as other sections of hot-mix asphalt course.

1. Clean contact surfaces and apply tack coat to joints. 2. Offset longitudinal joints, in successive courses, a minimum of 6 inches (150mm). 3. Offset transverse joints, in successive courses, 6 to 12 inches (150-300 mm). 4. Construct transverse joints as described in AI MS-22, "Construction of Hot Mix Asphalt

Pavements." 5. Compact joints as soon as hot-mix asphalt will bear roller weight without excessive

displacement. 6. Compact asphalt at joints to a density within 2 percent of specified course density.

3.9 COMPACTION

A. General: Begin compaction as soon as placed hot-mix paving will bear roller weight without excessive displacement. Compact hot-mix paving with hot, hand tampers or vibratory-plate compactors in areas inaccessible to rollers.

1. When paving surface temperature falls below 185 deg F (85 deg C) no further compaction effort will be permitted unless approved.

B. Breakdown Rolling: Complete breakdown or initial rolling immediately after rolling joints and outside edge. Examine surface immediately after breakdown rolling for indicated crown, grade, and smoothness. Correct laydown and rolling operations to comply with requirements.

C. Intermediate Rolling: Begin intermediate rolling immediately after breakdown rolling while hot-mix asphalt is still hot enough to achieve specified density. Continue rolling until hot-mix asphalt course has been uniformly compacted to the following density in accordance with Subsection 401.17 of the CDOT Specifications.

1. Pavement shall be compacted to a density of 92% to 96% of the maximum theoretical density, determined according to Colorado procedure 51. Field density determination will be in accordance with Colorado Procedure 44 or 81.

D. Finish Rolling: Finish roll paved surfaces to remove roller marks while hot-mix asphalt is still warm.

E. Edge Shaping: While surface is being compacted and finished, trim edges of pavement to proper alignment. Bevel edges while asphalt is still hot; compact thoroughly.

F. Repairs: Remove paved areas that are defective or contaminated with foreign materials and replace with fresh, hot-mix asphalt. Compact by rolling to specified density and surface smoothness.

G. Protection: After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on pavement until it has cooled and hardened.



H. Erect barricades to protect paving from traffic until mixture has cooled enough not to become marked.

3.10 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES

A. Thickness: Compact each course to produce the thickness indicated within the following tolerances:

1. Base Course: Plus or minus ¼ inch (6 mm). 2. Surface Course: Plus ¼ inch (6 mm), no minus.

B. Surface Smoothness: Compact each course to produce a surface smoothness within the following tolerances as determined by using a 10-foot (3-m) straightedge applied transversely or longitudinally to paved areas:

1. Base Course: ¼ inch (6 mm). 2. Surface Course: 3/16 inch (5 mm). 3. Crowned Surfaces: Test with crowned template centered and at right angle to crown.

Maximum allowable variance from template is ¼ inch (6 mm).

3.11 MANHOLE FRAME ADJUSTMENTS

A. Set frames for manholes and other such units within areas to be paved to ¼-inch minimum to ½-inch maximum below final grade as part of this work. Include existing frames or new frames furnished under other sections of these specifications.

B. Set cover frames to ¼-inch minimum and ½-inch maximum below surface of adjacent pavement. Surround frames set to grade with a ring of compacted asphaltic concrete base prior to paving. Place asphaltic concrete mixture up to 1-inch below top of frame, slope to grade, and compact with hand tamping. Adjust frames as required for paving.

C. Provide temporary closures over openings until completion of rolling operations. Remove closures at completion of work.

3.12 ASPHALT CURBS

A. Construct hot-mix asphalt curbs over compacted pavement surfaces. Apply a light tack coat unless pavement surface is still tacky and free from dust. Spread mix at minimum temperature of 250 deg F (121 deg C).

1. Asphalt Mix: Same as pavement surface-course mix.

B. Place hot-mix asphalt to curb cross section indicated or, if not indicated, to local standard shapes, by machine or by hand in wood or metal forms. Tamp hand-placed materials and screed to smooth finish. Remove forms after hot-mix asphalt has cooled.



3.13 SURFACE TREATMENTS

A. Fog Seals: Apply fog seal at a rate of 0.10 to 0.15 gal./sq. yd. (0.45 to 0.7 L/sq. m) to existing asphalt pavement and allow to cure. With a fine sand, lightly dust areas receiving excess fog seal.

B. Slurry Seals: Apply slurry coat in a uniform thickness according to ASTM D 3910 and allow to cure.

1. Roll slurry seal to remove ridges and provide a uniform, smooth surface.


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and to prepare test reports.

1. Testing agency will conduct and interpret tests and state in each report whether tested work complies with or deviates from specified requirements.

B. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

C. Thickness: In-place compacted thickness of hot-mix asphalt courses will be determined according to ASTM D 3549.

D. Surface Smoothness: Finished surface of each hot-mix asphalt course will be tested for compliance with smoothness tolerances.

E. In-Place Density: Testing agency will take samples of uncompacted paving mixtures and compacted pavement according to ASTM D 979.

1. Reference maximum theoretical density will be determined by averaging results from four samples of hot-mix asphalt-paving mixture delivered daily to site, prepared according to ASTM D 2041, and compacted according to job-mix specifications.

2. In-place density of compacted pavement will be determined by testing core samples according to ASTM D 1188 or ASTM D 2726.

a. One core sample will be taken for every 350 sq. yd. or less of installed pavement, with no fewer than 3 cores taken.

b. Field density of in-place compacted pavement may also be determined by nuclear method according to ASTM D 2950 and correlated with ASTM D 1188 or ASTM D 2726.

F. Asphalt Content and Gradation. Testing agency will take sample of uncompacted paving mixtures at a minimum frequency of every 1,000 tons according to Colorado Procedure – Laboratory CPL-5120 and Colorado Procedure CP-31.



G. Remove and replace or install additional hot-mix asphalt where test results or measurements indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements. Conforming to the specified requirements will be in according with Subsection 105.03 of the CDOT Specifications.

3.15 DISPOSAL

A. Except for material indicated to be recycled, remove excavated materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill.

1. Do not allow excavated materials to accumulate on-site.



CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02751- 1

SECTION 02751 - CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. Additional information concerning cement concrete pavement may be found in the geotechnical investigation report by CTL Thompson, dated Mary 31, 2009. All requirements of this report shall be followed unless otherwise noted. The information shown in this report is for information, and is shall be the contractor’s responsibility to field verify conditions indicated.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes constructing exterior cement concrete pavement on prepared subgrade or base course in accordance with these specifications. This work shall be in conformity with the lines, grades, thicknesses and typical cross-sections shown on the plans for the following:

1. Driveways and roadways. 2. Parking lots. 3. Curbs and gutters. 4. Sidewalks, steps, ramps. 5. Base material for unit paver. 6. Dumpster and loading dock pads. 7. As detailed on the plans.


1. Divisions 2 Section "Earthwork" for subgrade preparation, grading, and subbase course. 2. Division 2 Section “Pavement Marking” for pavement striping and symbols. 3. Division 2 Section “Pavement Joint Sealants” for expansion and contraction joints.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. City and County of Denver Standard Specifications for Design and Construction, latest edition.

B. Colorado Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, current edition.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of blended hydraulic cement, expansive hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated blast-furnace slag, and silica fume.



B. CDOT: State of Colorado Department of Transportation.

C. CDOT Specifications: Colorado Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, current edition.

D. ADA Handbook: Americans with Disabilities Act Standards for Accessible Design, U.S. Department of Justice.

E. ANSI A117.1: Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities, American National Standard Institute.

F. Refer to ACI 301: (American Concrete Institute – Standard Specifications for Structural Concrete), for additional definitions.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of manufactured material and product indicated.

B. Design Mixes: For each concrete pavement mix, and includes alternate mix designs when characteristics of materials, project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.

C. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance of the following with requirements indicated, based on comprehensive testing of current materials:

1. Aggregates. 2. Cement. 3. Admixtures.

D. Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that each of the following materials used in the project complies with requirements:

1. Cementitious materials and aggregates. 2. Steel reinforcement and reinforcement accessories. 3. Fiber reinforcement. (If selcected by Owner) 4. Admixtures. 5. Curing compounds. 6. Applied finish materials. 7. Bonding agent or adhesive. 8. Joint fillers.

E. Field quality-control test reports.

F. Pavement Joint Layout Plan: Plan to show joint locations and typical dimensions for review and approval by engineer.

G. Traffic Control Plan: For work in the public right-of-way.




A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed pavement work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer of ready-mixed concrete products complying with ASTM C 94/C 94 M requirements for production facilities and equipment.

1. Manufacturer must be certified according to the National Ready Mix Concrete Association's (NRMCA) Plant Certification Program.

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to ASTM C1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.

1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-01 or an equivalent certification program.

D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant and each aggregate from one source.

E. ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," unless modified by the requirements of the Contract Documents.

F. Concrete Testing Service: The Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures.

G. Preconstruction Conference: Conduct conference at project site as directed by Owner’s Representative prior to start of construction. Contractor to comply with requirements, which may also be included in Division 1 Section “Project Management and Coordination.”

H. Regulatory Requirements:

I. Comply with City and County of Denver standards for sidewalks, curbs, ramps, gutters, and driveway approaches or aprons, including standard dimensions, profiles, thicknesses, reinforcing, and compressive strength. In the event of conflict between the Contract Documents and the standards, the more stringent requirements will apply.

1. Comply with applicable requirements of ADA Handbook, ANSI A117.1, and local and State codes and ordinances regarding walks, steps, ramps and curb ramps.


A. Traffic Control: Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other construction activities.

B. Coordination and Scheduling: Coordinate with other trades and arrange scheduling to avoid damage to other work including grading, site utilities and piping, asphalt paving, landscaping and irrigation systems.



C. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions and existing conditions shown on the drawings by taking field measurements prior to start of work. Report discrepancies to the Owner’s Representative for clarification and make minor adjustments in layout as required by field conditions and as approved by the Owner’s Representative, at no additional cost to the Owner.

D. Environmental Requirements: Perform work only under suitable weather conditions. Comply with the environmental requirements of Section 3.6 for concrete placement.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified.

2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified. 3. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified.

4. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified.

2.2 FORMS

A. Form Materials: Plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood, or other approved panel-type materials to provide full-depth, continuous, straight, smooth exposed surfaces.

1. Use flexible or curved forms for curves of a radius 100 feet or less.

B. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.


A. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Fabric: CDOT Section 709 and ASTM A 185, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets.

B. Reinforcement Bars: CDOT Section 709 and ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed. Cut bars true to length with ends square and free of burrs.

C. Joint Dowel Bars: Plain steel bars, CDOT Section 709 and ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60. Cut bars true to length with ends square and free of burrs.

D. Tie Bars: CDOT Section 709 and ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed.



E. Supports for Reinforcement: Chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcement bars, welded wire fabric, and dowels in place. Manufacture bar supports according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete or fiber-reinforced concrete of greater compressive strength than concrete, and as follows:

1. Equip wire bar supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base material will not support chair legs.

2.4 COLORED ADMIXTURE

Colored Admixture: L.M. Scofield Co. “Chromix” or Rockwood Industries “Davis Colors”, color as selected by Owner’s Representative. Use for colored concrete where indicated on the drawings.

2.5 EXPANSION JOINT FILLER

A. Sealed Joints: Preformed, compressible fiber or cork filler material complying with ASTM D1751 or D1752, Type II, guaranteed compatible with expansion joint sealant materials, ½” thick unless otherwise indicated. Provide high-impact polystyrene removable “void cap” to create ½” deep reveal for installation of sealant.

B. Self-Sealing Joints: Preformed, compressible asphalt fiber joint filler complying with ASTM D994, ½” thick unless otherwise indicated. Do not use asphalt fiber filler in joints to receive elastomeric joint sealants.


A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source throughout the Project:

1. Portland Cement: CDOT Section 701 and ASTM C 150, Type I/II gray

a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or F. Type C will not be premitted where sulfate resistance is recommended.

b. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120.

B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: CDOT Section 703 and ASTM C 33, coarse aggregate, uniformly graded. Provide aggregates from a single source.

1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch (19 mm) nominal. 2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement. 3. Do not use fine or coarse aggregates containing substances that cause spalling.

C. Water: CDOT Section 712 and ASTM C 94/C 94M potable.



2.7 ADMIXTURES

A. General: Admixtures certified by manufacturer to contain not more than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride ions by mass of cement and to be compatible with other admixtures.

B. Air-Entraining Admixture: CDOT Section 711 and ASTM C 260.

C. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and to contain not more than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride ions by mass of cementitious material.

1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B. 3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. 4. Water-Reducing and Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C494, Type E. 5. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F. 6. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G. 7. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.

2.8 FIBER REINFORCEMENT (IF SELECTED BY OWNER)

A. Synthetic Fiber: Monofilament polypropylene fibers engineered and designed for use in concrete pavement, complying with ASTM C 1116, Type III, 1/2 to 1-1/2 inches (13 to 38 mm) long.

2.9 CURING MATERIALS: CDOT SECTION 711

A. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq.yd. (305 g/sq.m) dry.

B. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, waterproof paper, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.

C. Water: Potable.

D. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming; manufactured for application to fresh concrete.

E. Clear Waterborne Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type I, Class B.

1. Provide material that has a maximum volatile organic compound (VOC) rating of 350 g/L.

F. White Waterborne Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type II, Class B.

1. Provide material that has a maximum volatile organic compound (VOC) rating of 350 g/L.



2.10 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Color Pigment: ASTM C 979, synthetic mineral-oxide pigments or colored water-reducing admixtures; color stable, free of carbon black, nonfading, and resistant to lime and other alkalis.

1. Manufacturers: a. Bayer Corporation. b. ChemMasters. a. Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co., Inc. b. Davis Colors. c. Elementis Pigments, Inc. d. Hoover Color Corporation. e. Lambert Corporation. f. Scofield, L. M. Company. g. Solomon Colors.


A. Prepare design mixes, proportioned according to ACI 211.1 and ACI 301, for each type and strength of normal-weight concrete determined by either laboratory trial mixes or field experience.

1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs for the trial batch method.

2. Do not use Owner's field quality-control testing agency as the independent testing agency.

B. Proportion mixes to provide concrete with the following properties:

1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 4,000 psi (27.6 MPa. 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio at Point of Placement: 0.45. 3. Slump Limit: 4 inches (100 mm). 4. Minimum 564 lb. Cement per cubic yard.

C. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having an air content of 4.0 to 7.0 percent.

D. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.30 percent by weight of cement.

E. Chemical Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use water-reducing admixture, plasticizing and retarding admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability.

2. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.



F. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement according to ACI 301 requirements for concrete exposed to deicing chemicals as follows:

1. Fly Ash or Pozzolan: 20 percent CDOT Section 601.05. 2. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: 50 percent. 3. Combined Fly Ash or Pozzolan, and Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: 50 percent,

with fly ash or pozzolan not exceeding 20 percent.

G. Synthetic Fiber: If selected by Owner, uniformly disperse in concrete mix at manufacturer's recommended rate, but not less than 1.0 lb/cu. yd.

H. Color Pigment: Add color pigment to concrete mixture according to manufacturer’s written instructions.

2.12 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M and ASTM C 1116. Furnish batch certificates for each batch discharged and used in the Work.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine exposed subgrades and subbase surfaces for compliance with requirements for dimensional, grading, and elevation tolerances.

B. Proof-roll prepared subbase surface below concrete pavements with heavy pneumatic-tired equipment to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding.

1. Completely proof-roll subbase in one direction and repeat in perpendicular direction. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph (5 km/h).

2. Proof-roll with a loaded 10-wheel tandem-axle dump truck weighing not less than 15 tons. 3. Subbase with soft spots and areas of pumping or rutting exceeding depth of 1/2 inch (13

mm) require correction according to requirements in Division 2 Section "Earthwork."

C. Subgrade shall be tested by Geotechnical Engineer and pass required tests prior to concrete pavement placement.

D. Proceed with concrete pavement operations only after non-conforming conditions have been corrected and subgrade is ready to receive pavement.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before placing concrete.



3.3 EDGE FORMS AND SCREED CONSTRUCTION

A. Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides for pavement to required lines, grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work and so forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement.

B. Clean forms after each use and coat with form release agent to ensure separation from concrete without damage.


A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating reinforcement and with recommendations in CRSI's "Placing Reinforcing Bars" for placing and supporting reinforcement.

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, or other bond-reducing materials.

C. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement. Maintain minimum cover to reinforcement.

D. Install welded wire fabric in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh, and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction.

E. Install fabricated bar mats in lengths as long as practicable. Handle units to keep them flat and free of distortions. Straighten bends, kinks, and other irregularities, or replace units as required before placement. Set mats for a minimum 12-inch (300-mm) overlap of adjacent mats.

3.5 JOINTS

A. General: Construct/install construction, isolation, and contraction joints and tool edgings true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles to centerline, unless otherwise indicated.

1. When joining existing pavement, place transverse joints to align with previously placed joints, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Contractor to provide plan of joint placement for the Engineers approval. 3. The distance between joints shall not exceed in feet, twice the pavement thickness in

inches. (i.e.: 6” PCC pavement to utilize maximum 12-foot joint spacing.)

B. Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of pavement and at locations where pavement operations are stopped for more than one-half hour, unless pavement terminates at expansion joints.

1. Contractor may utilize preformed galvanized steel or plastic keyway-section forms or bulkhead forms with keys, unless otherwise indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches into concrete.



2. Continue reinforcement across construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of pavement strips, unless otherwise indicated.

3. Provide tie bars at sides of pavement strips where indicated. 4. Keyed Joints: Provide preformed keyway-section forms or bulkhead forms with keys,

unless otherwise indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) into concrete.

C. Expansion Joints: Form expansion joints of preformed joint-filler strips abutting concrete curbs, catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, walks, other fixed objects, and where indicated.

1. Locate expansion joints in pavement where indicated on plans. 2. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint. 3. Terminate joint filler no less than 1/2 inch or no more than 1 inch below finished surface

for joint sealant. 4. Furnish joint fillers in one-piece lengths. Where more than one length is required, lace or

clip joint-filler sections together. 5. Protect top edge of joint filler during concrete placement with metal, plastic, or other

temporary preformed cap. Remove protective cap after concrete has been placed on both sides of joint.

D. Contraction Joints: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of the concrete thickness, as follows:

1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint with groover tool to the indicated radius. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover marks on concrete surfaces.

2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before developing random contraction cracks.

3. Tied Contraction Joints: Install deformed bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated.


A. Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, reinforcement steel, and items to be embedded or cast in. Notify other trades to permit installation of their work.

B. Remove snow, ice, or frost from subbase surface and reinforcement before placing concrete. Do not place concrete on frozen surfaces.

C. Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition at the time concrete is placed. Do not place concrete around manholes or other structures until they are at the required finish elevation and alignment.



D. Comply with ACI 301 and ACI 304R requirements and recommendations for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete.

E. Do not add water to concrete during delivery to the project site.

F. Do not add water to fresh concrete after testing.

G. Do not add water to concrete surface during finishing operations.

H. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints. Do not push or drag concrete into place or use vibrators to move concrete into place.

I. Consolidate concrete according to ACI 301 by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand spading, rodding, or tamping. Use equipment and procedures to consolidate concrete according to recommendations in ACI 309R.

1. Consolidate concrete along face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with an internal vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies, reinforcement, or side forms. Use only square-faced shovels for hand-spreading and consolidation. Consolidate with care to prevent dislocating reinforcement, dowels, and joint devices.

J. Screed pavement surfaces with a straightedge and strike off.

K. Commence initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form an open textured and uniform surface plane before excess moisture or bleed water appears on the surface. Do not further disturb concrete surfaces before beginning finishing operations or spreading dry-shake surface treatments.

L. Curbs and Gutters: Produce curbs and gutters to required cross section, lines, grades, finish, and jointing as specified with expansion joints at intervals of approximately 100 feet and tooled contraction joints at 10-foot intervals When automatic machine placement is used for curb and gutter placement, submit revised mix design and laboratory test results that meet or exceed requirements.

M. Walks: Minimum 4” thick, with expansion joints at intervals of approximately 100 feet and tooled contraction joints at intervals equal to width of walks or maximum 5-foot intervals. Tool edges to rounded profile and finish as noted herein or shown on the drawings. Contractor may utilize sawed contraction joints. Pitch walks ¼” per foot for drainage unless otherwise indicated.

N. Ramps: Construct ramps similar to walks. Comply with applicable ADA Handbook, ANSI A117.1, and local and State codes, ordinances, and details including maximum allowable slope not to exceed 1 foot vertical in 12 foot horizontal, with maximum rise not to exceed 30” between level landings.

O. Steps: Minimum 6” thick at intersection of treads and risers, reinforced as indicated. Slope treads ¼” to nosing, and tool nosings to uniform ½” radius. Finish as specified below.



P. Paving: Minimum 6” thick unless otherwise indicated. Provide expansion joints as indicated on the drawings, and contraction joints at a minimum 12’-0” EWW. Provide fibermesh reinforcing (if selected by Owner). Place concrete paving over compacted subgrade as specified in Division 2 Section “Earthwork”. Provide minimum 1% slope for drainage unless otherwise indicated.

Q. Driveway Approaches: Minimum 6” thick, unless otherwise indicated or required by local public works standards or building codes. Construct to radius of flare indicated, and taper or warp into alignment with adjacent curbs, gutters, and walks. Place approaches over compacted subgrade as specified in Division 2 section “Earthwork.” Refer to drawing and details for any reinforcing requirements.

R. Slip-Form Pavers: When automatic machine placement is used for pavement, submit revised mix design and laboratory test results that meet or exceed requirements. Produce pavement to required thickness, lines, grades, finish, and jointing as required for formed pavement.

Compact subbase and prepare subgrade of sufficient width to prevent displacement of paver machine during operations.

S. When adjoining pavement lanes are placed in separate pours, do not operate equipment on concrete until pavement has attained 85 percent of its 28-day compressive strength.

T. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures.

1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F, uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F and not more than 80 deg F at point of placement.

2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. 3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or

chemical accelerators, unless otherwise specified and approved in mix designs.

U. Hot-Weather Placement: Place concrete according to recommendations in ACI 305R and as follows when hot-weather conditions exist:

1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of placement below 90 deg F. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.

2. Cover reinforcement steel with water-soaked burlap so steel temperature will not exceed ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete.

3. Fog-spray forms, reinforcement steel, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.

V. Wet-Weather Placement: Do not begin to place concrete while rain, sleet, or snow is falling unless adequate protection is provided and, when required, acceptance of protection is obtained.



3.7 FLOAT FINISHING

A. General: Do not add water to concrete surfaces during finishing operations.

B. Edging: Tool edges of pavement, gutters, curbs, and joints in concrete after initial floating with an edging tool to a 1/4-inch (6-mm) radius. Repeat tooling of edges after applying surface finishes. Eliminate tool marks on concrete surfaces.

C. Float Finish: Begin the second floating operation when bleed-water sheen has disappeared and the concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. Float surface with power-driven floats, or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to true planes. Cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Refloat surface immediately to uniform granular texture.

1. Medium-to-Fine-Textured Broom Finish: Draw a soft bristle broom across float-finished concrete surface perpendicular to line of traffic to provide a uniform, fine-line texture.

2. Medium-to-Course-Textured Broom Finish: For use on roadways and streets only. Provide a coarse finish by striating float-finished concrete surface 1/16 to 1/8 inch deep with a stiff-bristled broom, perpendicular to line of traffic.

3. Burlap Drag Finish: For use on roadways and streets only. Provide a course finish by dragging a clean, unused, section of burlap fabric longitudinally across pavement.

3.8 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures.

B. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and follow the recommendations of ACI 305R for hot-weather protection during curing.

C. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.

D. Begin curing after finishing concrete, but not before free water has disappeared from concrete surface.

E. Curing Methods: Cure concrete by moisture curing, moisture-retaining-cover curing, curing compound, or a combination of these as follows:

1. Moist Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials:

a. Water. b. Continuous water-fog spray. c. Absorptive cover, water saturated and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete

surfaces and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers.



2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape.

3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

3.9 PAVEMENT TOLERANCES

A. Comply with tolerances of ACI 117 and as follows:

1. Elevation: 1/4 inch. 2. Thickness: Plus 3/8 inch, minus 1/4 inch. 3. Surface: Gap below 10-foot- long, unleveled straightedge not to exceed 1/4 inch. 4. Lateral Alignment and Spacing of Tie Bars and Dowels: 1 inch. 5. Vertical Alignment of Tie Bars and Dowels: 1/4 inch. 6. Alignment of Tie-Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Pavement Edge: 1/2 inch. 7. Alignment of Dowel-Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Pavement Edge: Length of

dowel 1/4 inch per 12 inches. 8. Joint Spacing: 3 inches. 9. Contraction Joint Depth: Plus 1/4 inch, no minus. 10. Joint Width: Plus 1/8 inch, no minus.


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing and inspection agency to sample materials, perform tests, and submit test reports during concrete placement.

B. Testing Services: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements:

1. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least 1 composite sample for each 100 cu. yd. 5000 sq. ft. or fraction thereof of each concrete mix placed each day. a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests

for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.

2. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each type of concrete mix. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change.

3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method; one test for each compressive strength test, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each type of concrete mix.

4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F and below and when 80 deg F and above, and one test for each set of compressive strength specimens.

5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M; one set of four standard cylinders for each compressive-strength test, unless otherwise indicated. Cylinders shall be molded



and stored for laboratory-cured test specimens unless field-cured test specimens are required.

6. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; one set for each day's pour of each concrete class exceeding 5 cu. yd., but less than 25 cu. yd., plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd.. One specimen shall be tested at 7 days and two specimens at 28 days; one specimen shall be retained in reserve for later testing if required.

7. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-cured cylinders, current operations shall be evaluated and corrective procedures shall be provided for protecting and curing in-place concrete.

C. Strength of each concrete mix will be satisfactory if average of any 3 consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi (3.4 MPa).

D. Test results shall be reported in writing to Owner’s Representative, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 24 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in pavement, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests.

E. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Owner’s Representative, but will not be used as the sole basis for approval or rejection.

F. Additional Tests: Testing agency shall make additional tests of the concrete when test results indicate slump, air entrainment, concrete strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Owner’s Representative. Testing agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by other methods as directed.

G. Remove and replace concrete pavement where test results indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements.

H. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor’s expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

3.11 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A. Remove and replace concrete pavement that is broken, damaged, or defective, or does not meet requirements in this Section.

B. Drill test cores where directed by Owner’s Representative when necessary to determine magnitude of cracks or defective areas. Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory pavement areas with portland cement concrete bonded to pavement with epoxy adhesive.

C. Protect concrete from damage. Exclude traffic from pavement for at least 14 days after placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain pavement as clean as possible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur.



D. Maintain concrete pavement free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material. Sweep concrete pavement not more than two days before date scheduled for Substantial Completion inspections.


HAMPTON INN AND SUITES AT DIA MARTIN/MARTIN PROJECT # 18090.C.10 January 9, 2009 SECTION 02752 - PAVEMENT MARKING

PART 1 – GENERAL


Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, and Division 1 specification. Sections apply, to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: Furnish and install all painted lines, directional arrows, handicapped symbols, or similar markings on paved surfaces, as shown on the drawings or specified herein, as required by jurisdiction having authority, and as required to complete the work.

B. Related Work:

1. Division 2 Section “Hot-Mix Asphaltic Paving” for materials, installation and minimum requirements.

2. Division 2 Section “Cement Concrete Paving” for materials, installation and minimum requirements.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. Reference Standards: Comply with the requirements of the reference standards noted herein, except where more stringent requirements are described herein or otherwise required by the Contract Documents.

B. City and County of Denver Standard Specifications for Design and Construction, latest edition.

C. Colorado Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, current edition.

D. “Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices” latest edition.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s published descriptive literature and complete specifications for products specified herein.


A. Qualifications: Pavement marking applicator shall be regularly engaged in this type of work, and shall provide adequate, experienced manpower and proper equipment to complete the work.

PAVEMENT MARKING 02752-1


B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions of Colorado State Department of Highways Specification Sections 627, 708, and 713.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Packing and Shipping: Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened containers, with labels intact and legible.


A. Environmental Requirements: Do not apply pavement marking when ambient air and pavement surface temperature is below 40°F for paint and below 50°F for epoxy and thermoplastic marking materials, or when moisture in any form is present on the pavement surface.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Traffic Marking Paint: Alkyd-based, lead and chromate free, ready-mixed, cold-applied traffic marking paint complying with FS TT-P-115E and AASHTO M-248, Type N or F as determined by traffic requirements, white or yellow color as designated on the plans for striping and lane markings, white and blue at international handicapped parking symbols. Acceptable products include Devoe “Traffic Line” and Sherwin Williams “ProMar Traffic Marking Paint.”

B. Thermoplastic Marking Material: Reflectorized thermoplastic pavement striping materials composed of pigment, filler, resins, and glass reflecting spheres, conforming to AASHTO M-249, white or yellow as designated on the plans or as required by applicable public works requirements.

C. Epoxy Pavement Markings: Heated epoxy pavement marking compounds previously approved by the CDOT Product Evaluation Process per CDOT Section 627.05 and 713.17.

D. Preformed Thermoplastic Pavement Marking: Markings shall consist of a resilient white or yellow thermoplastic product with glass beads uniformly distributed. Capable of being affixed to bituminous pavement by heating and applied to concrete per manufacture recommendations.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which the work of this Section will be performed. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Commencement of work implies acceptance of all areas and conditions.




3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Allow fresh pavement surfaces to weather at least 30 days prior to application of traffic marking paint.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Traffic Marking Paint: Unless otherwise indicated, apply traffic marking paint in nominal 4” wide stripes at the rate of 100 to 110 sf/gal.

B. Thermoplastic Marking Material:

1. Apply in molten state or by flame-spray methods as applicable for material type. 2. Apply molten material to uniform dimension and line thickness of 1/8” to 3/16”. 3. Apply flame-spray powder at the rate of 14 to 21 oz per 30 seconds.

C. Epoxy Pavement Marking: Heat individual components to a temperature of 27° to 60° C (80° to 140° F). Apply to a minimum thickness of 15 mills and with an application rate of 100 to 110 sf per gallon.

D. Preformed Plastic Pavement Marking: Apply per manufacturers recommendations.

E. Patterns and Symbols:

1. Unless otherwise indicated, apply traffic markings in nominal 4” wide stripes with clear and sharp dimensions. See drawings for striping patterns, directional arrows and symbols.

2. Unless otherwise indicated, use yellow markings at lane striping and directional symbols, white markings at parking striping and white and blue markings at international handicapped symbols.

3. Comply with ANSI 117.1 and ADA requirements for graphic symbols, stall widths, and access aisles at handicapped parking spaces. Provide approved templates for symbols and directional arrows.


HAMPTON INN AND SUITES AT DIA MARTIN/MARTIN PROJECT # 18090.C.10 January 9, 2009 Revised 13 May 2009

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 02755 - 1

SECTION 02755 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE (OTHER THAN PAVEMENT)

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. Additional information concerning cement concrete pavement may be found in the geotechnical investigation report by CTL Thompson, dated Mary 31, 2009. All requirements of this report shall be followed unless otherwise noted. The information shown in this report is for information, and is shall be the contractor’s responsibility to field verify conditions indicated.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies cast-in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes for the following:

1. Drainage Structures. 2. Retaining Walls. 3. Box Base Manholes. 4. As indicated on the plans.

B. Related sections include the following:

1. Division 2 Section “Earthwork” for excavation and backfill. 2. Division 2 Section “Joint Sealants”. 3. Division 2 Section “Storm Drainage”.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated blast-furnace slag, and silica fume; subject to compliance with requirements.

1.4 SUBMITTALS



C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing, and supports for concrete reinforcement.



D. Samples: For waterstops.

E. Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency, indicating compliance with requirements:

1. Aggregates. Include service record data indicating absence of deleterious expansion of concrete due to alkali aggregate reactivity.

F. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers:

1. Cementitious materials. 2. Admixtures. 3. Form materials and form-release agents. 4. Steel reinforcement and accessories. 5. Fiber reinforcement. 6. Waterstops. 7. Curing compounds. 8. Floor and slab treatments. 9. Bonding agents. 10. Adhesives. 11. Vapor retarders. 12. Semirigid joint filler. 13. Joint-filler strips. 14. Repair materials.

G. Minutes of preinstallation conference.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.

1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities."

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from one source, and obtain admixtures through one source from a single manufacturer.

C. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents:

1. ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," Sections 1 through 5. 2. ACI 308, “Standard Practice for Curing Concrete”. 3. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials."

D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination."



1. Before submitting design mixtures, review concrete design mixture and examine procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials. Require representatives of each entity directly concerned with cast-in-place concrete to attend, including the following:

a. Contractor's superintendent. b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures. c. Ready-mix concrete manufacturer. d. Concrete subcontractor.

2. Review special inspection and testing and inspecting agency procedures for field quality control, concrete finishes and finishing, cold- and hot-weather concreting procedures, curing procedures, concrete repair procedures, and concrete protection.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage.

B. Waterstops: Store waterstops under cover to protect from moisture, sunlight, dirt, oil, and other contaminants.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FORM-FACING MATERIALS

A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints.

1. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials. 2. Exterior-grade plywood panels, suitable for concrete forms, complying with DOC PS 1,

and as follows:

a. High-density overlay, Class 1 or better. b. Medium-density overlay, Class 1 or better; mill-release agent treated and edge

sealed. c. Structural 1, B-B or better; mill oiled and edge sealed. d. B-B (Concrete Form), Class 1 or better; mill oiled and edge sealed.

B. Void Forms: Biodegradable paper surface, treated for moisture resistance, structurally sufficient to support weight of plastic concrete and other superimposed loads.

C. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch (19 by 19 mm), minimum.

D. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.

1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials.



E. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off metal or glass-fiber-reinforced plastic form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal.

1. Furnish units that will leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch (25 mm) to the plane of exposed concrete surface.

2. Furnish ties that, when removed, will leave holes no larger than 1 inch (25 mm) in diameter in concrete surface.

3. Furnish ties with integral water-barrier plates to walls indicated to receive dampproofing or waterproofing.



2.3 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES

A. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater compressive strength than concrete and as follows:

1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports.


A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source, throughout Project

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I/II Type I Portland cement will not be permitted where sulfate resistant cement is required.

The following materials may be used to supplement the portland cement in accordance with ACI 301, Section 4.

a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or F. Class C fly ash will not be permitted where Type II or I/II Portland cement is required.

b. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120.

B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, graded, 3/4-inch nominal maximum coarse-aggregate size.

1. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.

C. Water: ASTM C 94 and potable.

D. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.



E. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride.

1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A. 2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type B. 3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D. 4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type F. 5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type G. 6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017, Type II.

2.5 WATERSTOPS

A. Flexible PVC Waterstops: CE CRD-C 572, for embedding in concrete to prevent passage of fluids through joints. Factory fabricate corners, intersections, and directional changes.

1. Manufacturer and Type:

a. As indicated on plans.

2.6 CURING MATERIALS

A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete.

B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. when dry.

C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.

D. Water: Potable.

E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, dissipating.

F. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, nondissipating.


A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber, ½” thick unless indicated otherwise on the plans.




A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301.

1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture designs based on laboratory trial mixtures.

B. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement in concrete as follows:

1. Fly Ash: 25 percent.

C. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use water-reducing, high-range water-reducing or plasticizing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability.


3. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy-use industrial slabs and parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a water-cementitious materials ratio below 0.50.

D. Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi at 28 days. 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45. 3. Slump Limit: 4 inches, plus or minus 1 inch. 4. Air Content: 6 ½ Percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery.




A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94 and ASTM C 1116, and furnish batch ticket information to Owner’s Representative.

1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

2.11 CONCRETE MIXTURES FOR STRUCTURE ELEMENTS

A. Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4500 psi (31 MPa) at 28 days.



2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45. 3. Slump Limit: 5 inches (125 mm), plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm). 4. Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 3/4-inch (19-

mm) nominal maximum aggregate size.




A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M and ASTM C 1116, and furnish batch ticket information.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FORMWORK

A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork according to ACI 301 to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such loads.

B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.

C. Provide ¾-inch chamfer at exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete, unless indicated otherwise on the plans.

D. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347R as abrupt or gradual, as follows:

1. Class A, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) for smooth-formed finished surfaces.

E. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar.

F. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical.

1. Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal. 2. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.

G. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.



H. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations.

I. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete.

J. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items.

K. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete.

L. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment.

M. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written instructions, before placing reinforcement.

3.2 EMBEDDED ITEMS

A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

3.3 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS

A. General: Formwork for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work that does not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) for 24 hours after placing concrete, if concrete is hard enough to not be damaged by form-removal operations and curing and protection operations are maintained.

1. Leave formwork for beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements that supports weight of concrete in place until concrete has achieved at least 80 percent of its 28-day design compressive strength.

2. Remove forms only if shores have been arranged to permit removal of forms without loosening or disturbing shores.

B. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form-release agent.

C. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless approved by Owner’s Representative.




A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement.

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that would reduce bond to concrete.

C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars.

D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.

E. Install welded wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with wire.

3.5 JOINTS

A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.

B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by the Owner’s Representative.

1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement, continue reinforcement across construction joints, unless otherwise indicted.

3.6 WATERSTOPS

A. Flexible Waterstops: Install in construction joints and at other joints indicated to form a continuous diaphragm. Install in longest lengths practicable. Support and protect exposed waterstops during progress of the Work. Field fabricate joints in waterstops according to manufacturer's written instructions.


A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed.

B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unless approved by Owner’s Representative.

C. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to limitations of ACI 301.

1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to mixture.



D. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.

1. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth to not exceed formwork design pressures and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints.

2. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301. 3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators

vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches (150 mm) into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate.

E. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete.

1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.

2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement. 3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations. 4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. 5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured

surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations.

F. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures.

1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) for three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature range required by ACI 301.


3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs.

G. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows:

1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F (32 deg C) at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.

2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.



3.8 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES

A. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities.

1. Apply to all formed concrete surfaces.

B. Rubbed Finish: Apply the following to smooth-formed finished as-cast concrete where indicated on the drawings.

1. Smooth-Rubbed Finish: Not later than one day after form removal, moisten concrete surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive until producing a uniform color and texture. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing process.

2. Grout-Cleaned Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply grout of a consistency of thick paint to coat surfaces and fill small holes. Mix one part portland cement to one and one-half parts fine sand with a 1:1 mixture of bonding admixture and water. Add white portland cement in amounts determined by trial patches so color of dry grout will match adjacent surfaces. Scrub grout into voids and remove excess grout. When grout whitens, rub surface with clean burlap and keep surface damp by fog spray for at least 36 hours.

3. Cork-Floated Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply a stiff grout. Mix one part portland cement and one part fine sand with a 1:1 mixture of bonding agent and water. Add white portland cement in amounts determined by trial patches so color of dry grout will match adjacent surfaces. Compress grout into voids by grinding surface. In a swirling motion, finish surface with a cork float.

C. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.

3.9 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS

A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.

B. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture.

1. Apply float finish to all horizontal top slab surfaces unless indicated otherwise.

C. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to all surfaces exposed to pedestrian use unless otherwise indicated.



3.10 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for hot-weather protection during curing.

B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h (1 kg/sq. m x h) before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.

C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for the remainder of the curing period.

D. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces.

E. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods:

1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials:

a. Water. b. Continuous water-fog spray. c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete

surfaces and edges with 12-inch (300-mm) lap over adjacent absorptive covers.

2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches (300 mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape.

a. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings.

b. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive penetrating liquid floor treatments.

c. Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture-retaining cover or a curing compound that the manufacturer certifies will not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project..


a. After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound manufacturer.



3.11 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS

A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Owner’s Representative. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Owner’s Representative's approval.

B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to two and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing.

C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning.

1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than 1/2 inch (13 mm) in any dimension in solid concrete, but not less than 1 inch (25 mm) in depth. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent.

2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface.

3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and structural performance as determined by Owner’s Representative.

D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template.

1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch (0.25 mm) wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of width, and other objectionable conditions.

2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding. 3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing

operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete.

4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment. Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations.

5. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch (6 mm) to match adjacent floor elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface.



6. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4-inch (19-mm) clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original concrete except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.

7. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in diameter with patching mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours.

E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Owner’s Representative's approval, using epoxy adhesive and patching mortar.

F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Owner’s Representative's approval.


A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Testing Services: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements:

1. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least 1 composite sample for each 100 cu. yd. or fraction thereof of each concrete mix placed each day. a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests

for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.

2. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each type of concrete mix. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change.

3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method; one test for each compressive strength test, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each type of concrete mix.

4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F and below and when 80 deg F and above, and one test for each set of compressive strength specimens.

5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M; one set of four standard cylinders for each compressive-strength test, unless otherwise indicated. Cylinders shall be molded and stored for laboratory-cured test specimens unless field-cured test specimens are required.

6. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; one set for each day's pour of each concrete class exceeding 5 cu. yd., but less than 25 cu. yd., plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd.. One specimen shall be tested at 7 days and two specimens at 28 days; one specimen shall be retained in reserve for later testing if required.



7. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-cured cylinders, current operations shall be evaluated and corrective procedures shall be provided for protecting and curing in-place concrete.

C. Strength of each concrete mix will be satisfactory if average of any 3 consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi (3.4 MPa).

D. Test results shall be reported in writing to Owner’s Representative, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 24 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Pro-ject identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in pour, design compres-sive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests.

E. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Owner’s Representative, but will not be used as the sole basis for approval or re-jection.

F. Additional Tests: Testing agency shall make additional tests of the concrete when test results indicate slump, air entrainment, concrete strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Owner’s Representative. Testing agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by other methods as directed.

G. Remove and replace concrete where test results indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements.

H. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor’s expense, will be performed to determine com-pliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.


HAMPTON INN AND SUITES AT DIA MARTIN/MARTIN PROJECT # 18090.C.10 January 9, 2009 SECTION 02764 - PAVEMENT JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Expansion and contraction joints within cement concrete pavement. 2. Joints between cement concrete and buildings and structures. 3. Surface preparation including primers. 4. Joint backup material.


1. Division 2 Section "Cement Concrete Pavement" for constructing joints in concrete pavement.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.

B. Product Certificates: For each type of joint sealant and accessory, signed by product manufacturer.

C. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer, indicating the following:

1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants.

2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.

D. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for sealants.

E. Warranty: As required by Division 1 – Warranty Section: Contractor agrees to repair or replace joint sealers (including labor, materials, and any necessary associated costs) which fail to perform as watertight joints; or fail in joint adhesion, cohesion, abrasion resistance, weather resistance, extrusion resistance, migration resistance, stain resistance or general durability; or appear to deteriorate in any other manner not clearly specified by submitted manufacturer’s data as an inherent quality of material for exposure indicated. Provide warranty signed by Installer and Contractor.

PAVEMENT JOINT SEALANTS 02764 - 1

HAMPTON INN AND SUITES AT DIA MARTIN/MARTIN PROJECT # 18090.C.10 January 9, 2009 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: Work under this section shall be subject to all applicable provisions of federal, state and local rules and regulations.

B. Applicator: Company specializing in application of sealants with five (5) years minimum experience and be acceptable to manufacturer. Manufacturer’s field representative shall visit site and make suggestions.

C. Adhesion Tests: Prior to any sealant application, perform adhesion tests as directed by sealant manufacturer’s technical representative.

D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single manufacturer.


A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration date, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multi-component materials.

B. Store and handle materials to comply with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes.


A. Install sealant materials in strict accordance with all safety and weather conditions recommended by manufacturer, product literature, or Material Safety Data Sheets. Do not proceed with installation of sealants under adverse weather conditions, or when temperatures are below or above manufacturer’s recommended limitations for installation. Proceed only when forecasted weather conditions are favorable for proper cure and development of high-early bond strength. Wherever joint width is affected by ambient temperature variations, install elastomeric sealants only when temperatures are in lower third of manufacturer’s recommended installation temperature range.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backing materials, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.


HAMPTON INN AND SUITES AT DIA MARTIN/MARTIN PROJECT # 18090.C.10 January 9, 2009 2.2 COLD-APPLIED JOINT SEALANTS

A. Approved Sealants:

For each application, provide the grade of sealant (non-sag, self-leveling, no-track knife grade preformed, etc.) as recommended by the manufacturer for the particular condition of installation (location, joint shape, ambient temperature, and similar conditions), to achieve the best possible overall performance. Grades specified herein are for normal condition of installation.

1. Silicone Sealant: ASTM C-920-79, Type S, Class 25, Grade NS. 2. Two-Component (plus color) polyurethane low-modulus, non-sag sealant: ASTM C920-

79, Type M, Class 25, Grade NS. 3. Two-Component (plus color) polyurethane self leveling sealant: ASTM C920-79, Type

M, Class 25, Grade P.

2.3 HOT-APPLIED JOINT SEALANTS

A. Single-component formulation complying with ASTM D 3405 or D1190.

1. Refer to CDOT Standard Specification, Section 702.06 for hot-poured joint and crack sealant material requirements.

2. Refer to CDOT Standard Specification, Section 408.01-408.03 and 412.18 for joint and crack sealant installation requirements.

2.4 JOINT-SEALANT BACKER MATERIALS

A. General: Provide joint-sealant backer materials that are non-staining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by joint-sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.

B. Round Backer Rods for Cold- and Hot-Applied Sealants: ASTM D 5249, Type 1, of diameter and density required to control sealant depth and prevent bottom-side adhesion of sealant.

C. Backer Strips for Cold- and Hot-Applied Sealants: ASTM D 5249; Type 2; of thickness and width required to control sealant depth, prevent bottom-side adhesion of sealant, and fill remainder of joint opening under sealant.

D. Round Backer Rods for Cold-Applied Sealants: ASTM D 5249, Type 3, of diameter and density required to control sealant depth and prevent bottom-side adhesion of sealant.

2.5 PRIMERS

A. Primers: Product recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from manufacturers recommendations.


HAMPTON INN AND SUITES AT DIA MARTIN/MARTIN PROJECT # 18090.C.10 January 9, 2009 PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-sealant performance.

1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where indicated or where recommended in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

3.3 JOINT DESIGN

A. Sealant depth is measured at the center (thin) section of sealant bead.

B. Install sealants to depths and widths as recommended by sealant manufacturer and as shown on the drawings. Also, conform to the following general limitations if not in conflict with sealant manufacturer’s recommendations.

1. For sidewalks, pavements and similar joints subject to traffic and other abrasion and indentation exposures, fill joints to a depth equal to 75% of joint width, but neither more than 5/8 inch deep nor less than 3/8 inch deep.

2. For normal moving joints not subject to traffic, fill joints to a depth equal to 50% of joint width, but neither more than 5/8 inch deep nor less than ¼ inch deep.

3. Depth of sealant must not exceed width of joint. 4. Sealant joints shall not be less than ¼ inch in width and ¼ inch in depth. 5. Sealant joints shall not exceed 2 inches in width in a single application.

3.4 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. Preparation work shall result in clean surfaces in all areas where sealant is to be adhered. Such surfaces shall be free of any old sealant, contaminants and impurities which are deleterious to bonding or adhesion of primers or sealant.

B. Clean ferrous metals of all rust, mill scale and coatings by wire brush or grinding. Any equipment used to remove rust shall be free of oil contaminants.

C. Wire brush masonry joint surfaces, then blow clean with oil free compressed air.



D. Apply primer per manufacturer’s recommendations. Allow primer to dry prior to applying sealant.

E. Do not caulk joints until they are clean, dry, and free of dust, loose mortar, old sealant, foreign matter or other bond inhibiting materials, and in compliance with requirements of manufacturer of materials, details shown on drawings, and specific requirements of other sections of specifications.

3.5 JOINT BACKING

A. Use joint backing to control depth of joint to specified thickness.

B. Select joint backing size to allow for 25% compression of backing when inserted into joint.

C. Where shown on drawings where depth of joint will not permit use of joint backing, or wherever recommended by sealant manufacturer, install bond-breaker tape to prevent three-sided adhesion.

D. Do not leave voids or gaps between ends of joint backing units.

3.6 APPLICATION/INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANT

A. Apply sealants neatly, in a good and workmanlike manner which meets following minimum requirements or standards. Specific instructions of manufacturer must also be followed.

B. Apply sealant using a gun with proper size nozzles. Use sufficient pressure to fill all voids and joints solid to backup material, with complete wetting of all joint bond surfaces.

C. Applied sealant shall form a full, smooth, uniform bead, free of ridges, wrinkles, sags, air pockets and embedded impurities.

D. After joint has been completely filled with sealant, neatly tool joint sealant to eliminate air pockets or voids, and to provide a smooth, slightly concave, neat appearing finish, with sealant surface slightly below adjoining surfaces. Wetting of finished surface with not be allowed.

E. Where horizontal joints are located between a horizontal surface and vertical surface, fill joint to form a slight cove, so joint will not trap moisture and dirt.

F. Protect adjacent surfaces and systems from sealant material. Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces which otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.

G. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

H. Tooling of Non-Sag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform




beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.

1. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer and that do

not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.

I. Provide joint configuration to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions, unless otherwise indicated.

J. Provide recessed joint configuration for silicone sealants of recess depth and at locations indicated.

3.7 CLEANING

A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.

3.8 PROTECTION

A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately and replace with joint sealant so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from the original work.

3.9 JOB SITE CLEAN-UP

A. Sealant applicator must remove all excess materials from job site.

B. Leave all surrounding areas where joint sealant has been applied free of excess sealant, debris and foreign substances.


TRL 0708 02782-1

SECTION 02782 BRICK PAVING - SETTING BED PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. All exterior brick paving. B. Related Sections: 1. Base Slab: Section 02751Cement Concrete Paving 2. Expansion Joint Sealants: Section 07920. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Samples: Submit total of three (3) individual pieces of each thickness showing extreme

variations in color and texture in accordance with Section 01330. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mock-Up: Install minimum 6 ft. x 6 ft. area including base concrete slab and brick paving

at location as directed by Architect. 1. Use construction methods and materials specified. Use full range paver color and

texture. 2. Accepted Mock-Up: Standard for rest of work. Remove upon completion of

project. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01600. 1. Pavers: a. Handle carefully to avoid chipping and breakage. b. Store on pallets or concrete slab until ready for use. c. Cover and protect against wetting prior to use, allowing air circulation under

stacked units. 2. Other Materials: a. Store cementitious materials off the ground and under cover. B. Acceptance at Site: Inspect pavers upon delivery to insure color match with the

approved samples. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Follow procedures for cold and hot weather protection

specified in Section 04810 Unit Masonry Assemblies.

TRL 0708 02782-2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 BRICK PAVERS A. Manufacturer and Type: Wire cut, high density paver brick complying with ASTM C902,

Grade SW, Class MX, Type II. Color as selected by Architect. B. Sizes: 1. Vehicular Traffic Areas: 7-5/8" long x 3-5/8" wide x 2-3/16" thick. 2.02 MORTAR AND GROUT A. Thick Bed Mortar: 1:3 Portland cement/sand gauged with Laticrete #3701 Admix as

specified under Laticrete Data Sheet 230.6. B. Slurry Bond Coat: Portland cement/sand gauged with Laticrete #4237 admix as

specified under Laticrete Data Sheet 230.6. C. Grout: Laticrete Dry Bond Grout and Joint Filler or approved equal gauged with

Laticrete #3701 Grout and Mortar Admix. Color as selected by Architect. D. Mixing Proportions and Procedures: In accordance with recommendations of Laticrete

Data Sheet 230.6. 2.03 PROTECTIVE COATING A. Coating: Sure Kleen Protectile. B. Coating Remover: Sure Kleen Grout and Tile Cleaner. 2.04 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Expansion Joints: 3/8" extruded polystyrene. Beadboard is not acceptable. B. Sealants: See Section 07920. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Comply with Section 01600: 1. Layout: Verify layout of work before beginning installation. 2. Existing Conditions: Examine substrate before beginning installation. 3. Notification: Notify General Contractor of unsatisfactory conditions in writing with

copy to Architect. B. Acceptance: Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions by installer. 3.02 PREPARATION Clean concrete base slabs to remove all contaminants. Acid etch, if required, to

remove curing compounds and rinse to remove.

TRL 0708 02782-3

3.03 INSTALLATION A. Expansion Joints: Install 3/8" polystyrene at locations indicated and required by Laticrete

Data Sheet 230.6, full depth of setting bed and directly over expansion joints in concrete base slab.

B. Setting: Install pavers according to thick bed setting materials and methods specified in

paragraphs 6.0 and 9.0 of Laticrete Data Sheet 230.6. Back-butter each unit before setting. Install in patterns indicated with 3/8" maximum joints between units. Use full pavers at edges. Locate cut pavers in field.

3.04 CUTTING AND FITTING Employ skilled fitters for necessary cutting as the job progresses. The installer shall

cooperate fully with other trades and shall do such cutting and drilling to accommodate the work of others as may be reasonably implied from the drawings.

3.05 PROTECTION AND GROUTING A. Protection: Roll one coat of Protectile over face of completed surface making sure that

material does not get into open joints. B. Grouting: Grout joints as soon as initial set or setting bed is achieved. Grout joints shall

be pumped full using grout gun or pointing gun and tooled to slightly concave joint. Cure grout by maintaining in damp condition for seven (7) days.

C. Cleaning: Remove protection coating and grout haze with grout and tile cleaner

applied and removed as recommended by the manufacturer. 3.06 SEALING Do not seal brick pavers. 3.07 EXPANSION JOINT SEALANT Joints shall be sealed by the sealant contractor immediately after completion of

installation. END OF SECTION

TRL 0708 02891-1

SECTION 02891 POST-MOUNTED SIGNS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Traffic Control Signs 2. Site Signage for the Handicapped. B. Products Installed But Not Supplied Under This Section: 1. Concrete for Sign Post Bases: Supplied under Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete. C. Related Sections: 1. Temporary Project Sign: Section 01500 Temporary Facilities and Controls. 2. Handicapped Pavement Marking: Section 02565 Pavement Markings 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for approval as specified under Section 01330. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Comply with requirements of all regulatory agencies having jurisdiction. 2. Comply with applicable requirements of Americans With Disabilities Act,

Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG). 3. Comply with applicable regulations of the City of Fort Collins. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Vulcan Signs, Inc. 2. J & S Signs. 3. Colorado Barricade. 4. Midwest Barricade. 5. Signage, Inc. 6. Scott Sign Systems, Inc. 2.02 TRAFFIC CONTROL SIGNS A. Traffic Control Signs: Construct painted traffic control signs of 0.080-inch thickness

aluminum. Provide signs painted by a professional sign painter using one coat of primer and two coats of sign paint.

1. Posts: 12 gage galvanized steel posts with perforations as required for attachment of signage to post.

2. Accessories: Provide fasteners and accessories for mounting of signage on posts. 3. Size and text of lettering as indicated on the Drawings.

TRL 0708 02891-2

2.03 SIGNS FOR THE HANDICAPPED A. Comply with requirements of ADAAG and applicable regulations of the City of Fort

Collins. B. Handicapped Parking Stall Signs: 1. Required locations: At each parking space reserved for the handicapped. 2. Size: See Drawings. 3. Graphics: Reflective vinyl dye cut international symbol of accessibility and text as

indicated on Drawings in Helvetica Medium caps. 4. Colors: Handicapped blue copy on white background. 5. Construct signs of 0.080-inch thickness aluminum. 6. Posts: 12 gage galvanized steel posts with perforations as required for attachment

of signage to post. 7. Accessories: Provide fasteners and accessories for mounting of signage on posts. PART 3 - INSTALLATION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Prior to installation of signs, examine the site conditions and

the work of others insofar as it affects the work and report immediately in writing to the Architect any conditions which interfere with the installation.

B. Begin installing signs only after deficiencies have been corrected in an acceptable

manner. C. Commencement of installation implies acceptance of related work performed by others. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install signs level and plumb or as detailed on the drawings. B. Protective Coating: Coat contacting dissimilar metals with asphaltic compound. C. Sign Posts: Set in concrete as indicated. 1. Traffic Control Signs: Coordinate direction of sign face with Owner prior to setting

posts. D. Handicapped Parking Stall Signs: Center sign at end of parking stalls indicated on

Drawings. 3.03 CLEANING AND TOUCH UP A. Upon completion of installation, clean all sign surfaces and touch up all scratches to

metal surfaces with touch-up paint furnished by sign manufacturer. B. Sign Posts: Touch up or repair support posts as required. END OF SECTION

SECTION 03300 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies cast-in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes, for the following:

1. Footings. 2. Foundation walls. 3. Slabs-on-grade. 4. Suspended slabs. 5. Building walls.


1. Division 02 Section "Earthwork" for drainage fill under slabs-on-grade.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated blast-furnace slag, and silica fume; subject to compliance with requirements.

1.4 SUBMITTALS



1. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site.

C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing, and supports for concrete reinforcement.


D. Formwork Shop Drawings: Prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified professional engineer detailing fabrication, assembly, and support of formwork.

E. Shoring and Reshoring: Indicate proposed schedule and sequence of stripping formwork, shoring removal, and installing and removing reshoring.

F. Welding certificates.

G. Qualification Data: For Installer and testing agency.

H. Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency, indicating compliance with requirements:

1. Aggregates.

I. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers:

1. Cementitious materials. 2. Admixtures. 3. Form materials and form-release agents. 4. Steel reinforcement and accessories. 5. Fiber reinforcement. 6. Waterstops. 7. Curing compounds. 8. Floor and slab treatments. 9. Bonding agents. 10. Adhesives. 11. Vapor retarders. 12. Joint-filler strips. 13. Repair materials.

J. Field quality-control test and inspection reports.

K. Minutes of preinstallation conference.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs on Project personnel qualified as ACI-certified Flatwork Technician and Finisher and a supervisor who is an ACI-certified Concrete Flatwork Technician.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.

1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities."


C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.

1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-01 or an equivalent certification program.

2. Personnel performing laboratory tests shall be ACI-certified Concrete Strength Testing Technician and Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician - Grade I. Testing Agency laboratory supervisor shall be an ACI-certified Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician - Grade II.

D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from one source, and obtain admixtures through one source from a single manufacturer.

E. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.4, "Structural Welding Code--Reinforcing Steel."

F. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents:

1. ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," Sections 1 through 5. 2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials."

G. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures.

H. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination."

1. Before submitting design mixtures, review concrete design mixture and examine procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials. Require representatives of each entity directly concerned with cast-in-place concrete to attend, including the following:

a. Contractor's superintendent. b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures. c. Ready-mix concrete manufacturer. d. Concrete subcontractor.

2. Review special inspection and testing and inspecting agency procedures for field quality control, concrete finishes and finishing, cold- and hot-weather concreting procedures, curing procedures, construction contraction and isolation joints, shoring and reshoring procedures, vapor-retarder installation, anchor rod and anchorage device installation tolerances, steel reinforcement installation, and concrete protection.


A. Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage.


B. Waterstops: Store waterstops under cover to protect from moisture, sunlight, dirt, oil, and other contaminants.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FORM-FACING MATERIALS

A. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.

B. Forms for Cylindrical Columns, Pedestals, and Supports: Metal, glass-fiber-reinforced plastic, paper, or fiber tubes that will produce surfaces with gradual or abrupt irregularities not exceeding specified formwork surface class. Provide units with sufficient wall thickness to resist plastic concrete loads without detrimental deformation.

C. Void Forms: Biodegradable paper surface, treated for moisture resistance, structurally sufficient to support weight of plastic concrete and other superimposed loads.

D. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch (19 by 19 mm), minimum.

E. Rustication Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, kerfed for ease of form removal.

F. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.

1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials.

G. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off metal or glass-fiber-reinforced plastic form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal.

1. Furnish units that will leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch (25 mm) to the plane of exposed concrete surface.

2. Furnish ties that, when removed, will leave holes no larger than 1 inch (25 mm) in diameter in concrete surface.

3. Furnish ties with integral water-barrier plates to walls indicated to receive dampproofing or waterproofing.



B. Low-Alloy-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 706/A 706M, deformed.

C. Plain-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, as drawn.

D. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, plain, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets.


2.3 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES

A. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), plain-steel bars, cut bars true to length with ends square and free of burrs.

B. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater compressive strength than concrete and as follows:

1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports.


A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source, throughout Project:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, See Concrete Mix Matrix for type.

a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F. b. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120.

B. Silica Fume: ASTM C 1240, amorphous silica.

C. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 3S coarse aggregate or better, graded. Provide aggregates from a single source with documented service record data of at least 10 years' satisfactory service in similar applications and service conditions using similar aggregates and cementitious materials.

D. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M.

2.5 ADMIXTURES

A. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.

B. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride.

1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B. 3. Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C 4. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. 5. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F. 6. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M,

Type G.


2.6 FIBER REINFORCEMENT

A. Synthetic Fiber: Monofilament or fibrillated polypropylene fibers engineered and designed for use in concrete pavement, complying with ASTM C 1116, Type III, 1/2 to 1-1/2 inches (13 to 38 mm) long.

2.7 WATERSTOPS

A. Self-Expanding Butyl Strip Waterstops: Manufactured rectangular or trapezoidal strip, butyl rubber with sodium bentonite or other hydrophilic polymers, for adhesive bonding to concrete, 3/4 by 1 inch (19 by 25 mm).

2.8 VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Plastic Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class A. Include manufacturer's recommended adhesive or pressure-sensitive tape.

B. Fine-Graded Granular Material: Clean mixture of crushed stone, crushed gravel, and manufactured or natural sand; ASTM D 448, Size 10, with 100 percent passing a 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) sieve, 10 to 30 percent passing a No. 100 (0.15-mm) sieve, and at least 5 percent passing No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve; complying with deleterious substance limits of ASTM C 33 for fine aggregates.

2.9 CURING MATERIALS

A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete.

B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. (305 g/sq. m) when dry.

C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.

D. Water: Potable.

E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, dissipating.

F. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, nondissipating, certified by curing compound manufacturer to not interfere with bonding of floor covering.

G. Clear, Solvent-Borne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, Type 1, Class A.

H. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, Type 1, Class A.



A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber or ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding cork.

B. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene.

C. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing and bonding to damp surfaces, of class suitable for application temperature and of grade to suit requirements, and as follows:

1. Types IV and V, load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to hardened concrete.

D. Reglets: Fabricate reglets of not less than 0.0217-inch- (0.55-mm-) thick, galvanized steel sheet. Temporarily fill or cover face opening of reglet to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris.

E. Post-installed Mechanical Anchors: Wedge and undercut type with current ICC approval and published ICC Evaluation Report. Complete with required nuts, washers and manufacturer’s installation instructions. Size and manufacturer as indicated on drawings.

1. Interior Use: For use in conditioned environments free from potential moisture, provide carbon steel anchors conforming to ASTM A 307 with zinc plating in accordance with FS 22-Z-235.

2. Exterior or Exposed Use: In exposed or potentially wet environments, and for attachment of exterior cladding materials, provide galvanized or stainless steel anchors. Galvanized anchors shall conform to ASTM A 133. Stainless steel anchors shall be Series 300 stainless steel bolts with Series 300 or Type 18-8 stainless steel nuts and washers.

3. Where anchor manufacturer is not indicated, subject to compliance with requirements and acceptance by the Architect and Structural Engineer, provide one of the following:

a. “Kwik-Bolt TZ” - Hilti Fastening Systems b. “HSL-3” - Hilti Fastening Systems c. “HDA Undercut Anchor” - Hilti Fastening Systems d. “Strong-Bolt” – Simpson StrongTie Fastening Systems

F. Adhesive Anchors: Threaded carbon steel rod conforming to ASTM A 307 complete with required nuts, washers, adhesive system and manufacturer’s installation instructions. Current ICC approval and published ICC Evaluation Report required. Size and manufacturer as indicated on drawings.

1. Exterior or Exposed Use: In exposed or potentially wet environments and for attachment of exterior cladding materials, provide galvanized or stainless steel anchors. Galvanized anchors shall conform to ASTM A 153. Stainless steel anchors shall be Series 300 stainless steel threaded rods with Series 300 or Type 18-8 stainless steel nuts and washers.

2. Where anchor manufacturer is not indicated, subject to compliance with requirements and acceptance by the Architect and Structural Engineer, provide one of the following:

a. “HY150 Max Injection System” - Hilti Fastening Systems b. “RE500” Hilti Fastening Systems c. “Set High Strength Epoxy” – Simpson Strong-Tie Anchor Systems (ICC-ES ESR-

1772)


d. “Acrylic-ie High Strength Anchoring Adhesive”– Simpson Strong-Tie Anchor Systems (ICC-ES ESR-5791)

G. Studrails:

1. Studs: Low Carbon Steel, C1015 in accordance with ASTM A108 with a minimum yield of 50,000 psi and a minimum tensile strength of 60,000 psi and a maximum 20% elongation in 2” as manufactured by Decon and Suncoast. The complete and finished studrail shall be ICBO evaluated and all welding must take place in an ICC approved and audited facility.

2.11 REPAIR MATERIALS

A. Repair Overlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations.

1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219.

2. Primer: Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application.

3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3.2 to 6 mm) or coarse sand as recommended by topping manufacturer.

4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 5000 psi (34.5 MPa) at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M.

2.12 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL

A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301. See Concrete Mix Matrix for requirements.

1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture designs based on laboratory trial mixtures.

B. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement in concrete as follows:

1. Fly Ash: 25 percent. 2. Combined Fly Ash and Pozzolan: 25 percent. 3. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: 50 percent. 4. Combined Fly Ash or Pozzolan and Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: 50 percent

portland cement minimum, with fly ash or pozzolan not exceeding 25 percent. 5. Silica Fume: 10 percent. 6. Combined Fly Ash, Pozzolans, and Silica Fume: 35 percent with fly ash or pozzolans not

exceeding 25 percent and silica fume not exceeding 10 percent. 7. Combined Fly Ash or Pozzolans, Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag, and Silica

Fume: 50 percent with fly ash or pozzolans not exceeding 25 percent and silica fume not exceeding 10 percent.


C. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.06 percent by weight of cement.

D. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use water-reducing, high-range water-reducing or plasticizing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability.


3. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy-use industrial slabs and parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a water-cementitious materials ratio below 0.50.

4. Use corrosion-inhibiting admixture in concrete mixtures where indicated.




A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M and ASTM C 1116, and furnish batch ticket information.


B. Project-Site Mixing: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M. Mix concrete materials in appropriate drum-type batch machine mixer.

1. For mixer capacity of 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m) or smaller, continue mixing at least 1-1/2 minutes, but not more than 5 minutes after ingredients are in mixer, before any part of batch is released.

2. For mixer capacity larger than 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m), increase mixing time by 15 seconds for each additional 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m).

3. Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in the Work, indicating Project identification name and number, date, mixture type, mixture time, quantity, and amount of water added. Record approximate location of final deposit in structure.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FORMWORK

A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such loads.


B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.

C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347R as abrupt or gradual, as follows:

1. Class B, 1/4 inch (6 mm) for rough-formed finished surfaces.

D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar.

E. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical.

1. Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal. 2. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.

F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.

G. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations.

H. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete.

I. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items.

J. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete.

K. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment.

L. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written instructions, before placing reinforcement.

3.2 EMBEDDED ITEMS

A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

1. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."


2. Install reglets to receive waterproofing and to receive through-wall flashings in outer face of concrete frame at exterior walls, where flashing is shown at lintels, shelf angles, and other conditions.

3.3 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS

A. General: Formwork for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work that does not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) for 24 hours after placing concrete, if concrete is hard enough to not be damaged by form-removal operations and curing and protection operations are maintained.

1. Leave formwork for beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements that supports weight of concrete in place until concrete has achieved at least 70 percent of its 28-day design compressive strength.

2. Remove forms only if shores have been arranged to permit removal of forms without loosening or disturbing shores.

B. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form-release agent.

C. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless approved by Architect.

3.4 SHORES AND RESHORES

A. Comply with ACI 318 (ACI 318M) and ACI 301 for design, installation, and removal of shoring and reshoring.

1. Do not remove shoring or reshoring until measurement of slab tolerances is complete.

B. In multistory construction, extend shoring or reshoring over a sufficient number of stories to distribute loads in such a manner that no floor or member will be excessively loaded or will induce tensile stress in concrete members without sufficient steel reinforcement.

C. Plan sequence of removal of shores and reshore to avoid damage to concrete. Locate and provide adequate reshoring to support construction without excessive stress or deflection.

3.5 VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Plastic Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair vapor retarders according to ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Lap joints 6 inches (150 mm) and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape.

B. Granular Course: Cover vapor retarder with fine-graded granular material, moisten, and compact with mechanical equipment to elevation tolerances of plus 0 inch (0 mm) or minus 3/4 inch (19 mm).


1. Place and compact a 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) thick layer of fine-graded granular material over granular fill.


A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement.

1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete.

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that would reduce bond to concrete.

C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars.

1. Weld reinforcing bars according to AWS D1.4, where indicated.

D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.

E. Install welded wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with wire.

3.7 JOINTS

A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.

B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect.

1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements of floors and slabs.

2. Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) into concrete. 3. Locate joints for beams, slabs, joists, and girders in the middle third of spans. Offset

joints in girders a minimum distance of twice the beam width from a beam-girder intersection.

4. Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors, slabs, beams, and girders and at the top of footings or floor slabs.

5. Space vertical joints in walls as needed. Locate joints beside piers integral with walls, near corners, and in concealed locations where possible.

6. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces.


C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of concrete thickness as follows:

1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch (3.2 mm). Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces.

2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- (3.2-mm-) wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks.

D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated.

1. Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished concrete surface, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Terminate full-width joint-filler strips not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) or more than 1 inch (25 mm) below finished concrete surface where joint sealants, specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants," are indicated.

3. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip sections together.

E. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or asphalt coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint.

3.8 WATERSTOPS

A. Self-Expanding Strip Waterstops: Install in construction joints and at other locations indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions, adhesive bonding, mechanically fastening, and firmly pressing into place. Install in longest lengths practicable.


A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed.

B. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to limitations of ACI 301.

1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to mixture.

C. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.


1. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth to not exceed formwork design pressures and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints.

2. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301. 3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators

vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches (150 mm) into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate.

D. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete.

1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.

2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement. 3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations. 4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. 5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured

surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations.

E. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures.

1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) for three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature range required by ACI 301.


3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs.

F. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows:

1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F (32 deg C) at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.

2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.

3.10 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES

A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities.

1. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view.


B. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.

3.11 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS

A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.

B. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings.

1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin-film-finish coating system.

2. Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and an unleveled, freestanding, 10-foot- (3.05-m-) long straightedge resting on 2 high spots and placed anywhere on the surface does not exceed 1/4 inch (6 mm).

3.12 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS

A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures, unless otherwise indicated, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete the Work.

B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and terminations slightly rounded.

C. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations as shown on Drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment at correct elevations, complying with diagrams or templates from manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment.

D. Steel Pan Stairs: Provide concrete fill for steel pan stair treads, landings, and associated items. Cast-in inserts and accessories as shown on Drawings. Screed, tamp, and trowel-finish concrete surfaces.

3.13 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for hot-weather protection during curing.


B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h (1 kg/sq. m x h) before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.

C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for the remainder of the curing period.

D. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces.

E. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods:

1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials:

a. Water. b. Continuous water-fog spray. c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete

surfaces and edges with 12-inch (300-mm) lap over adjacent absorptive covers.

2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches (300 mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape.

a. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings.

b. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive penetrating liquid floor treatments.

c. Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture-retaining cover or a curing compound that the manufacturer certifies will not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project..


a. After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound manufacturer unless manufacturer certifies curing compound will not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project.

4. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial


application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

3.14 LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS

A. Sealing Coat: Uniformly apply a continuous sealing coat of curing and sealing compound to hardened concrete by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.15 POST-INSTALLED ANCHORS

A. Post-installed anchors shall be installed in conformance with all manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Manufacturer shall provide on-site training for all personnel who will be installing post-installed adhesive anchors at the beginning of the work.

3.16 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS

A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval.

B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to two and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing.

C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning.

1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than 1/2 inch (13 mm) in any dimension in solid concrete, but not less than 1 inch (25 mm) in depth. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent.

2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface.

3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and structural performance as determined by Architect.

D. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive and patching mortar.

E. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's approval.



A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage a special inspector and qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Inspections:

1. Steel reinforcement placement. 2. Steel reinforcement welding. 3. Mechanical and adhesive anchors. 4. Headed bolts and studs. 5. Verification of use of required design mixture. 6. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing. 7. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature. 8. Verification of concrete strength before removal of shores and forms from beams and

slabs.

C. Concrete Formwork Inspection: 1. Inspect formwork for size, shape, profile, condition of surfaces and joints and for

attachment of accessories and embedded items before concrete is placed.

D. Steel Reinforcement and Mechanical Anchor Inspection: 1. Reinforcing shall be inspected prior to placing of concrete. Inspect all reinforcing for

conformance with Contract requirements with regard to bar size, grade, placement, splice lengths, clearance from soil or formwork, supports, and attachment of accessories and embedded items. Inspection shall be according to ACI 318 and IBC, chapter 19. Inspect all reinforcing steel that is welded according to AWS D1.4 , IBC chapter 10, and ACI 318.

2. Inspect all bolts and embedded items that will be cast into concrete. Verify size, spacing, embedment length, and location according to IBC chapter 19.

3. Mechanical anchors shall be inspected according to the ICC report for that anchor and not less than the following: a. Observe the installation of the first two splices of each type of connector. b. Visually inspect 100% of all mechanical connectors. c. Load test 1% of all mechanical connectors (minimum of two tests) by pulling to

failure. If any load test fails before reaching 125% of specified yield capacity, test 10% of all remaining connectors.

d. Additional tests may be required at the discretion of the Structural Engineer. 4. Adhesive repairs shall be inspected according to the ICC report for that anchor and not

less than the following: a. Observe complete installation of first four repairs. b. Observe hole for diameter, depth and cleanliness for 10% of all repairs. c. Load test 1% of all adhesive repairs (minimum of two tests) by pulling to failure.

If any load test fails before reaching 125% of specified yield capacity, test 10% of all remaining connectors.

d. Additional tests may be required at the discretion of the Structural Engineer.

E. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements:


1. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one composite sample for each 100 cu. yd. or fraction

thereof of each concrete mixture placed each day.

a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.

2. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change.

3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture.

4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F and below and when 80 deg F and above, and one test for each composite sample.

5. Unit Weight: ASTM C 567, fresh unit weight of structural lightweight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture.

6. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M.

a. Cast and laboratory cure four standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample.

7. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M;

a. One specimen will be tested at 7 days, 2 specimens will be tested at 28 days, and 1 specimen will be retained in reserve for later testing if required.

b. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a set of two specimens obtained from the same composite sample and tested at age indicated.

8. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi.

9. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests.

10. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete.

11. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42/C 42M or by other methods as directed by Architect.



12. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.


SECTION 03381 - UNBONDED POST-TENSIONED CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Furnishing post-tensioning reinforcement and accessories including non-encapsulated prestressing tendons, pocket formers, support bars, bar chairs, and slab bolsters.

2. Installing post-tensioning tendons. 3. Performing post-tensioning operations including stressing and finishing tendons. 4. Finishing tendon ends and patching stressing pockets.


1. Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for cast-in-place concrete, steel reinforcement, studrails, placement of nonprestressed steel reinforcement, and concrete strength testing of laboratory- and field-cured cylinders.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Strand Tail: Excess strand length extending past the anchorage device.

B. Stressing Blockout: Opening created in the slab to allow access to stressing-end anchorages.

C. Stressing Pocket: Void formed by pocket former at stressing-end anchorage to provide required cover over wedges and strand tail.

D. Wedge Cavity: Cone-shaped hole in anchorage device designed to hold the wedges that anchor the strand.

E. Coated Strands: Strands that are shop coated and encased in slippage sheathing to prevent bond, to retard corrosion, and to reduce friction.

F. Tendon: Any single post-tensioning unit used to apply prestress force to the concrete member, usually composed of a strand, slippage sheathing, and anchorages.

G. Stressing End Anchorage: At least one end of the tendon assembly shall have access such that stressing equipment can pull on the exposed post-tensioning strand. Any end of the tendon that has stressing access is called a stressing end (also called live end).

H. Fixed End Anchorage: If the length of the tendon cast within the concrete is less than a specified length, then it is not required for there to be access to both ends of the tendon for stressing. The end that does not have stressing access is the fixed end (also called dead end).

UNBONDED POST-TENSIONED CONCRETE 03381 - 1

I. Structural Engineer: Structural engineer of record.

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Provide a post-tensioning system, which is the product of a manufacturer whose complete sys-tem has been previously approved by International Conference of Building Officials. Alternate systems shall be submitted in detail with test data, complete description, calculations, design drawings, and other supporting information necessary for evaluation and approval.

B. Anchorages shall have cable grippers (also called wedges) to allow the force in the strand to be transferred to the anchorage. Stressing end anchorages shall have removable plastic grom-mets, which shall leave a void to be grouted after stressing.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following if required by the Structural Engineer:

1. Post-tensioning coating. 2. Tendon sheathing. 3. Anchorage devices. 4. Tendon couplers. 5. Bar and tendon supports. 6. Pocket formers. 7. Sheathing repair tape. 8. Stressing-pocket patching material.

B. Pour Schedule: Dates of all concrete slab pours, including pour strips. The Engineer shall be provided with an updated version of the slab pour schedule each time it is revised.

C. Submittal Schedule: Dates of all structural submittals with sufficient detail indicating content of each package. The submittal schedule shall be detailed enough to show each separate package that is submitted. Submittals will not be reviewed until a valid submittal schedule is supplied.

D. Shop Drawings: Installation drawings including plans, elevations, sections, details, and notes prepared by or under the supervision of a registered professional engineer detailing tendon layout and installation procedures, including the following:

1. Numbers, arrangement, and designation of post-tensioning tendons. 2. Tendon profiles and method of tendon support including chair heights and locations.

Show tendon profiles at sufficient scale to clearly indicate all support points, with their associated heights.

3. Construction joint locations, details, pour sequence, locations of anchorages and blockouts required for stressing.

4. Stressing procedures and jacking force to result in final effective forces used in determining number of tendons required.

5. Sealed Calculations prepared showing the predicted elongations and final post-tensioning force supplied by all tendons. Loss calculations shall be in accordance with ACI 318 and shall include the effects of friction, wobble, seating loss, elastic shortening, creep, strand relaxation and concrete shrinkage. Tendon quantities shown on shop drawings shall be based on calculated final post-tensioning force unless otherwise noted on the Contract Drawings. Unless noted, the final post-tensioning force shall be based on the average stress along the length of the tendon.


6. Details for horizontal curvature around openings and at anchorages. 7. Details for corners and other locations where tendon layouts may conflict with one

another or nonprestressed reinforcing steel. 8. Diagrams and notes as necessary for positioning of nonprestressed reinforcement

required for installing post-tensioning tendons including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Support bars. b. Backup bars and studrails or hairpins at anchorages. c. Hairpins at locations of horizontal curvature. d. Supplemental reinforcement at blockouts.

E. Field Use Shop Drawings: Deliver one copy of field use PT shop drawings to the Structural Engineer no later than one week prior to any post-tensioned concrete pour. The General Contractor shall use these drawings to verify all review comments have been addressed.

F. Samples for Verification if requested: For the following products:

1. Each anchorage device assembly with a minimum of 24 inches (610 mm) of coated, sheathed strand.

2. Each coupler assembly with a minimum of 24 inches (610 mm) of coated, sheathed strand.

G. Product Certificates:

1. For each type of anchorage device and coupler, signed by product manufacturer.

H. Qualification Data: For Installer and testing agency. Include resume of individual supervising installation and stressing of post-tensioning tendons.

I. Mill Test Reports: Certified mill test reports for prestressing strand used on Project indicating that strand is low-relaxation and including the following:

1. Coil numbers or identification. 2. Breaking load. 3. Load at 1 percent extension. 4. Elongation at failure. 5. Modulus of elasticity. 6. Diameter and net area of strand.

J. Procedures Statement: Procedures for cutting excess strand tail and patching stressing pocket. 1. Stressing force and required gage pressure. 2. Maximum temporary stressing force. 3. Certified ram calibrations and method of ram identification. Non-calibrated ram and

pump combination shall not be used on the job. 4. Furnish method of burning off tendon tails after anchorage.

K. Stressing Jack Calibration: Calibration certificates for jacks and gages to be used on Project. Calibrate each jack-and-gage set as a pair.

L. Stressing Records: Filled out by testing agency during stressing operation with the following information recorded:

1. Name of Project.


2. Date of approved installation drawings used for installation and stressing. 3. Floor number and concrete placement area. 4. Date of stressing operation. 5. Weather conditions including temperature and rainfall. 6. Name and signature of inspector. 7. Name of individual in charge of stressing operation. 8. Serial or identification numbers of jack and gage. 9. Date of jack-and-gage calibration certificates. 10. Gage pressure to achieve required stressing force per supplied calibration chart. 11. Tendon identification mark. 12. Predicted tendon elongation. 13. Actual tendon elongation. 14. Actual gage pressure.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer whose full-time Project superintendent has successfully completed PTI's Level 1 - Field Fundamentals course or has equivalent verifiable experience and knowledge acceptable to Structural Engineer.

1. Superintendent must have received training from post-tensioning supplier in the operation of stressing equipment to be used on Project.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Fabricating plant certified by PTI according to procedures set forth in PTI's "Manual for Certification of Plants Producing Unbonded Single Strand Tendons."

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.

1. Testing Agency Inspector: Personnel performing field inspections and measuring elongations shall have successfully completed PTI's Level 2 - Field Fundamentals course or shall have equivalent qualifications acceptable to Structural Engineer.

D. Source Limitations: Obtain post-tensioning materials and equipment from the same supplier.

1. Stressing jacks not provided by post-tensioning supplier must be calibrated and approved for use on Project by post-tensioning supplier.

E. ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 423.6, "Specification for Unbonded Single Strand Tendons," unless otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents.

F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to installation and stressing of post-tensioning tendons including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Construction schedule and availability of materials, personnel, and equipment needed to make progress and avoid delays.

2. Storage of post-tensioning materials on-site. 3. Structural load limitations. 4. Coordination of post-tensioning installation drawings and nonprestressed reinforcing steel

placing drawings. 5. Horizontal and vertical tolerances on tendon and nonprestressed reinforcement

placement.


6. Post-tensioning installer’s duties during concrete pour. 7. Marking and measuring of elongations. 8. Submittal of stressing records and requirements for tendon finishing. 9. Removal of formwork. 10. Parties required to attend, but are not limited to:

a. Contractor’s superintendent b. Concrete supplier c. Tendon supplier d. Post-tensioning installer e. Architect f. Architect’s consulting structural engineer g. Plumbing sub-contractor h. Electrical sub-contractor i. Testing and inspections agency representative

11. Contractor shall distribute written minutes of the pre-installation conference to all parties in attendance in accordance with Division 1.


A. Deliver, store, and handle post-tensioning materials according to PTI's "Field Procedures Manual for Unbonded Single Strand Tendons."

B. Inspect tendons and accessory items at time of their delivery to Project site, prior to off-loading. Notify post-tensioning supplier of observed damage prior to off-loading.

C. Keep accurate and current records of materials delivered and used.

D. Immediately remove from Project site any tendons with damaged strand.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Attachments and Penetrations:

1. Attach permanent fixtures such as curtain-wall systems, handrails, fire-protection equipment, lights, and security devices to the slab using embedded anchors. Drilled anchors are not allowed unless authorized in writing by Structural Engineer.

2. Power-driven fasteners are not allowed unless authorized in writing by Structural Engineer.

3. Core drilling for sleeves or other penetrations is not allowed unless authorized in writing by Structural Engineer.

4. Protect penetrations within 18 inches of an anchorage with ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40 steel pipe.

B. Penetrations:

1. All proposed penetrations through the post-tensioned slab shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval a minimum of 6 weeks prior to the concrete placement. Submittals shall include the actual opening diameter and location.

2. Penetrations located within 48” of the face of columns may require additional mild- steel reinforcement or studrails and should be avoided wherever possible.

3. Core drilling for sleeves or other penetrations is not allowed unless authorized in writing by Engineer.

4. Protect penetrations within 18 inches of an anchorage as shown on the drawings.


C. Stressing Access: 1. A minimum access space of 3 feet and 7 inches measured perpendicular to the stressing

edge of any member shall be kept clear of construction material, equipment, or other constructions until stressing operations are completed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRESTRESSING TENDONS

A. Prestressing Strand: ASTM A 416/A 416M, Grade 270 (Grade 1860), uncoated, 7-wire, low-relaxation, 0.5-inch- (12.7-mm-) diameter strand.

B. Post-Tensioning Coating: Compound with friction-reducing, moisture-displacing, and corrosion-inhibiting properties specified in ACI 423.6; chemically stable and nonreactive with prestressing steel, nonprestressed reinforcement, sheathing material, and concrete.

1. Minimum Coating Weight: 2.5 lb (1.14 kg) for 0.5-inch- (12.7-mm-) diameter strand per 100 feet (30 m) of strand.

2. Completely fill annular space between strand and sheathing over entire tendon length with post-tensioning coating.

C. Tendon Sheathing: Comply with ACI 423.6.

1. Minimum Thickness: 0.050 inch (1.25 mm) for polyethylene or polypropylene with a minimum density of 0.034 lb/cu. in. (0.9 g/cu. cm).

2. Continuous over the entire length of tendon and to within 12 inches from the fixed end anchorages to prevent intrusion of cement paste or loss of coating for a non-encapsulated system.

D. Anchorage Device and Coupler Assembly: Assembly of strand, wedges, and anchorage device or coupler complying with static and fatigue testing requirements in ACI 423.6 and capable of developing 95 percent of actual breaking strength of strand.

1. Anchorage Bearing Stresses: Comply with ACI 423.6 for stresses at transfer load and service load.

2. Fixed-End Anchorage Device Assemblies: Plant fabricated with wedges seated at a load of not less than 80 percent and not more than 85 percent of breaking strength of strand.

2.2 NONPRESTRESSED STEEL BARS

A. Support Bars, Reinforcing Bars, Hairpins: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed. Minimum support bar size is 1/2 inch (13 mm).

B. Low-Alloy-Steel Support Bars, Reinforcing Bars, Hairpins: ASTM A 706/A 706M, deformed.

C. Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening tendons and tendon support bars in place. Manufacture bar supports, according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete of greater compressive strength than concrete, and as follows:

1. For uncoated bars, use all-plastic, CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports.


2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Pocket Formers: Capable of completely sealing wedge cavity; sized to provide the required cover over the anchorage and allow access for cutting strand tail.

B. Anchorage Fasteners: Stainless-steel or Galvanized steel nails, wires, and screws used to attach anchorage devices to formwork.

C. Sheathing Repair Tape: Elastic, self-adhesive, moisture proof tape with minimum width of 2 inches (50 mm), in contrasting color to tendon sheathing; nonreactive with sheathing, coating, or prestressing steel.

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Adhesive Tape Products, Inc.; PWT-20. b. 3M; Tape 226. c. Tyco Adhesives; Polyken 826.

2.4 PATCHING MATERIAL

A. Patching Material: One component, polymer-modified, premixed patching material containing selected silica aggregates and portland cement, suitable for vertical and overhead application. Do not use material containing chlorides or other chemicals known to be deleterious to prestressing steel or material that is reactive with prestressing steel, anchorage device material, or concrete.

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Verticoat Supreme. b. Fox Industries, Inc.; FX-228. c. Kaufman Products, Inc.; Patchwell Kit HB. d. Master Builders, Inc.; Emaco R350 CI. e. Sika Corporation, Inc.; SikaMonoTop 612.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FORMWORK

A. Provide formwork for post-tensioned elements as specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete." Design formwork to support load redistribution that may occur during stressing operation. Ensure that formwork does not restrain elastic shortening, camber, or deflection resulting from application of prestressing force.

B. Do not remove forms supporting post-tensioned elements until tendons have been fully stressed and elongations have been approved by Structural Engineer, unless authorized in writing by Structural Engineer.


C. Do not place concrete in supported floors until tendons on supporting floors have been stressed and elongations have been approved by Structural Engineer, unless authorized in writing by Structural Engineer.

3.2 NONPRESTRESSED STEEL REINFORCEMENT PLACEMENT

A. Placement of nonprestressed steel reinforcement is specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete." Coordinate placement of nonprestressed steel reinforcement with installation of post-tensioning tendons.

3.3 TENDON INSTALLATION

A. Install tendons according to approved installation drawings and procedures stated in PTI's "Field Procedures Manual for Unbonded Single Strand Tendons."

B. Tendon Supports: Provide continuous slab bolsters or bars supported on individual high chairs spaced at a maximum of 42 inches (1070 mm) o.c. to ensure tendons remain in their designated positions during construction operations and concrete placement. Support bars for banded tendons in two-way systems shall be minimum #5 bars and shall be supported sufficiently to prevent sagging of support bars.

1. Support tendons as required to provide profiles shown on installation drawings. Position supports at high and low points and at intervals not exceeding 48 inches (1220 mm). Ensure that tendon profiles between high and low points are smooth parabolic curves.

2. Attach tendons to supporting chairs and reinforcement without damaging tendon sheathing.

3. Support slab tendons independent of beam reinforcement.

C. Maintain tendon profile within maximum allowable deviations from design profile as follows:

1. 1/4 inch (6.3 mm) for member depth less than or equal to 8 inches (200 mm). 2. 3/8 inch (10 mm) for member depth greater than 8 inches (200 mm) and less than or

equal to 24 inches (610 mm). 3. 1/2 inch (13 mm) for member depth greater than 24 inches (610 mm).

D. Maintain minimum radius of curvature of 480-strand diameters for lateral deviations to avoid openings, ducts, and embedded items. Maintain a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) of separation between tendons at locations of curvature.

E. Limit tendon bundles to four tendons in slabs. Do not twist or entwine tendons within a bundle. Maintain a minimum distance of 9 inches (225 mm) between center of adjacent bundles.

F. If tendon locations conflict with nonprestressed reinforcement or embedded items, tendon placement governs unless changes are authorized in writing by Structural Engineer. Obtain Structural Engineer's approval before relocating tendons or tendon anchorages that interfere with one another.

G. Deviations in horizontal spacing and location of slab tendons are permitted when required to avoid openings and inserts.

H. Installation of Anchorage Devices:

1. Place anchorage devices at locations shown on approved installation drawings.


2. Do not switch fixed and stressing-end anchorage locations unless authorized in writing by Structural Engineer.

3. Attach pocket formers, intermediate anchorage devices, and stressing-end anchorage devices securely to bulkhead forms. Install stressing-end and intermediate anchorage devices perpendicular to tendon axis.

4. Install tendons straight, without vertical or horizontal curvature, for a minimum of 12 inches (300 mm) behind stressing-end and intermediate anchorages.

5. Embed intermediate anchorage devices at construction joints in first concrete placed at joint.

6. Do not splice reinforcing bars at anchorages. Extend backup bars a minimum of 12 inches past anchorage. Stagger splices a minimum of 60 inches (1500 mm).

7. Place fixed-end anchorage devices in formwork at locations shown on installation drawings. Support anchorages firmly to avoid movement during concrete placement.

I. Maintain minimum concrete cover as follows:

1. From Exterior Edge of Concrete to Wedge Cavity: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). 2. From Exterior Edge of Concrete to Strand Tail: 3/4 inch (19 mm). 3. From Exterior Edge of Concrete to Wedge-Cavity Cap: 1 inch (25 mm). 4. Top, Bottom, and Edge Cover for Anchorage Devices: 1 inch (25 mm).

J. Maintain minimum clearance of 6 inches (150 mm) between tendons and openings.

K. Prior to concrete placement, mark tendon locations on formwork with spray paint.

L. Do not install sleeves within 36 inches (914 mm) of anchorages after tendon layout has been inspected unless authorized in writing by Structural Engineer.

M. Do not install conduit, pipe, or embeds requiring movement of tendons after tendon layout has been inspected unless authorized in writing by Structural Engineer.

N. Do not use couplers unless location has been approved by Structural Engineer.

O. Specially manufactured pocket formers shall be used in locations where the stressing-end anchorages are not perpendicular to the edge of the slab. Field cutting of standard 90-degree pocket formers will not be allowed.

3.4 SHEATHING INSPECTION AND REPAIR

A. Inspect sheathing for damage after installing tendons. Repair damaged areas by restoring post-tensioning coating and repairing or replacing tendon sheathing.

1. Ensure that sheathing is watertight and there are no air voids. 2. Follow tape repair procedures in PTI's "Field Procedures Manual for Unbonded Single

Strand Tendons."

B. Maximum length of exposed strand behind anchorages is as follows:

1. Fixed End: 12 inches (300 mm). 2. Intermediate and Stressing End: 0 inches (0 mm).

a. Cover exposed strand with sheathing repair tape to prevent contact with concrete.

C. Immediately remove and replace tendons that have damaged strand.



A. Do not place concrete until placement of tendons and nonprestressed steel reinforcement has been inspected by special inspector.

B. Provide Structural Engineer and special inspector a minimum of 48 hours notice before concrete placement.

C. Place concrete as specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete." Ensure consolidation of concrete around anchorages.

D. Tendon installer shall provide personnel on the deck being poured during the pour to ensure that position of tendon and non-prestressed steel reinforcement does not change during concrete placement. Reposition tendons and non-prestressed steel reinforcement moved during concrete placement.

E. Ensure that method of concrete placement does not damage tendon sheathing. Do not support pump lines, chutes, or other concrete placing equipment on tendons.

3.6 TENDON STRESSING

A. Calibrate stressing jacks and gages at start of job and at least every six months thereafter and as required by the Structural Engineer. Keep copies of calibration certificates for each jack-and-gage pair on Project site and available for inspection. Exercise care in handling stressing equipment to ensure that proper calibration is maintained.

B. Stress tendons only under supervision of qualified post-tensioning superintendent.

C. Do not begin stressing operations until concrete strength has reached 3000 psi (20.7 MPa) as indicated by maturity meter or compression tests of field-cured cylinders.

D. Complete stressing within 96 hours of concrete placement.

E. If concrete has not reached required strength, obtain Structural Engineer's approval to partially stress tendons and delay final stressing until concrete has reached required strength.

F. Stressing Procedure: For each strand proceed as follows: 1. Clean out the stressing cavity and insert the stressing wedges. 2. Place a mark on the strand tail for use in determining the strand elongation. Consistency

and accuracy in placing this mark is essential. Contractor and Testing Agency shall coordinate marking method to be used and distance of mark from edge of concrete.

3. Stress the strand using a gauge reading determined by the gauge calibration curve. 4. Strands that are to be stressed at both ends shall be stressed to the full gauge reading at

each end and elongations shall be recorded for each end. 5. Seat the stressing wedges. 6. Record the elongation achieved as soon as possible but no later than the end of the

working day.

G. If detensioning and restressing of tendon is required, discard wedges used in original stressing and provide new wedges.

H. Mark and measure elongations according to PTI's "Field Procedures Manual for Unbonded Single Strand Tendons." Measure elongations to closest 1/8 inch (3.2 mm).


I. Elongations of strands shall be recorded on an approved form. Any significant deviations from the predicted elongations shall be noted on the elongation records. Actual elongations of individual tendons shall be within 7 percent of the predicted elongations shown on the approved shop drawings. Elongations of a group of post-tensioning tendons shall be within 3 percent of predicted elongations shown on the approved shop drawings. A group is defined as one band in the banded direction, one bay in the uniform direction, or one beam.

J. Structural Engineer will not review elongation records until construction set of post-tensioning shop drawings has been received in accordance with Part 1. Engineer will not review incomplete elongation records. Contractor shall submit elongation records to engineer immediately upon completion of stressing operations for that pour. No tendon tails shall be burnt off or covered by subsequent concrete pours until Structural Engineer has approved elongation records for that pour.

K. Stressing Sequence:

1. Uniform strands shall be stressed before banded strands. 2. Uniform strands shall be stressed before beam strands. Temperature strands may be

stressed with either uniform or beam strands

3.7 TENDON FINISHING

A. Do not cut strand tails or cover anchorages until stressing records have been reviewed and approved by Structural Engineer.

B. Cut strand tails within 3 working days (for non-encapsulated systems) after approval of elongations. Exposed end anchorages, including strands and stressing wedges, shall be coated with two heavy coats of approved rust preventative on the same day strand tails are cut.

C. Cut strand tail between 1/2 and 3/4 inch (13 and 19 mm) from wedges. Do not damage tendon or concrete during removal of strand tail. Acceptable methods of cutting strand tail include the following:

1. Oxyacetylene flame. 2. Abrasive wheel. 3. Hydraulic shears. 4. Plasma cutting.

D. Install caps and sleeves on intermediate anchorages within one day of stressing.

E. Cut strand tails and install caps on stressing-end anchorages within one day of Structural Engineer's acceptance of elongations.

F. Patch stressing pockets within one day of cutting strand tail. Clean inside surface of pocket to remove laitance or post-tensioning coating before installing patch material. Finish patch material flush with adjacent concrete.


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. The individual performing post-tensioning inspections in the field shall be Level 2 certified by the Post-Tensioning Institute. The reinforcing placing foreman and the general contractor’s foreman overseeing the post-



tensioning work shall also be Level 2 certified by the Post-Tensioning Institute. Cooperate with testing agency to facilitate the execution of its duties.

1. Before concrete placement, special inspector will inspect the following for compliance with post-tensioning installation drawings and the Contract Documents:

a. Location and number of tendons and slab reinforcing. b. Tendon profiles and cover. c. Installation of backup bars, studrails, hairpins, and other nonprestressed

reinforcement shown on post-tensioning installation drawings. d. Installation of pocket formers and anchorage devices. e. Repair of damaged sheathing. f. Connections between sheathing and anchorage devices. g. Observe all placing of concrete. h. Check tendon placement before and during pouring of concrete. Be present

during placement and check for tendons being moved out of position. i. Mark tendons prior to stressing. j. Record tendon elongations after stressing and submit copy of original record to the

Contractor. k. If required by Structural Engineer, testing post-tensioning strands for tensile

strength and elongation at rupture. Two tests shall be made for each reel, heat or lot number. Each size of strand to be shipped to site shall be assigned an individual heat and tagged accordingly.

2. Special inspector will immediately report deviations from the Contract Documents to Structural Engineer.

3.9 PROTECTION

A. Do not expose tendons to electric ground currents, welding sparks, or temperatures that would degrade component.

B. Protect exposed components within one workday of their exposure during installation.

C. Prevent water from entering tendons during installation and stressing.

D. Provide weather protection to stressing-end anchorages if strand tails are not cut within 10 days of stressing the tendons.

3.10 REPAIRS

A. Submit repair procedure to Structural Engineer for evaluation and approval.

B. Do not proceed with repairs requiring removal of concrete unless authorized in writing by Structural Engineer.


TRL 0708 04060-1

DIVISION 4 – MASONRY SECTION 04060 MASONRY MORTAR PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Products Supplied But Not Installed Under This Section:

1. Mortar for Section 04810 Unit Masonry Assemblies. B. Related Requirements: 1. Testing: Section 01450 Quality Control C. Related Sections:

1. Masonry Grout: Section 04070. 2. Joint Reinforcement, Ties and Anchors: Section 04080 Masonry Anchorage and

Reinforcement. 3. Control Joint Material, Embedded Flashing and Weepholes: Section 04090 Masonry

Accessories. 4. Block and Brick: Section 04810 Unit Masonry Assemblies.

1.02 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: See Section 01423. Comply with following: 1. ASTM C270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Mix Designs: Submit mortar design mixes indicating ASTM C270 proportion or property

criteria used for each type of mortar, including Portland cement, lime sand, water and admixture proportions.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mock-Up Panels: Supply mortar for mock-up panels specified for installation under

Section 04810. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Portland Cement for Unit Masonry: ASTM C150, Type I, except Type III may be used for

cold weather construction. 1. Masonry cement not allowed.

B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S. C. Aggregates: ASTM C144.

TRL 0708 04060-2

D. Water: Clean and free from deleterious amounts of acids, alkalies or organic materials. E. Other Admixtures: Not allowed. 1. Antifreeze Compounds: Calcium chloride or other antifreeze agents not allowed. 2. Use of accelerators not allowed. 2.02 MIXES A. Mortar Materials and Proportions: Comply with ASTM C270. B. Unit Masonry Setting Mortar:

1. Above Grade Installation: Type S, 1800 psi average compressive strength in 28 days. 2. Preblended Mortar: Preblended mortar as manufactured by Spec Mix, Inc. may be

provided at Contractor's option. All cementitious materials and aggregate shall be blended in factory under controlled conditions, and the mix shall require only the addition of water and water repellent admixture at the job site.

C. Pointing Mortar: One part Portland cement, 1/8 part hydrated lime or lime putty and two

parts aggregate passing the No. 80 sieve. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION Clean equipment for mixing, transportation and placing mortar before starting work. 3.02 MEASUREMENT AND MIXING A. Measurement Method: 1. Job Site Mixing: By either volume or weight so that specified proportions can be

controlled and accurately maintained. Measurement of sand by shovel not allowed.

2. Spec Mix Option: Use factory blended dry mortar mix materials. B. Mortar Mixing: Mix cementitious materials and aggregate for at least three minutes and

not more than five minutes in mechanical batch mixer, with maximum amount of water to produce workable consistency.

C. Retempering: Retemper mortars that have stiffened because of evaporation of water

from mortar by adding water as frequently as needed to restore required consistency. 1. Use mortar within 2-1/2 hours after initial mixing. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Testing will be conducted by accepted testing laboratory. See Section

01450. 1. Test Reports: Reports of tests will be distributed in accordance with Section 01450. B. Mortar Cube Tests: Mortar cubes will be prepared, cured and tested by accepted

testing laboratory. See Section 01450. 1. Testing: In accordance with ASTM C780 and CMI 201.1. END OF SECTION

TRL 0708 04070-1

SECTION 04070 MASONRY GROUT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Products Supplied But Not Installed Under This Section: 1. Grout for Section 04810 Unit Masonry Assemblies. B. Related Requirements: 1. Testing: Section 01450 Quality Control C. Related Sections: 1. Masonry Mortar: Section 04060. 2. Joint Reinforcement, Ties and Anchors: Section 04080 Masonry Anchorage and


Accessories. 4. Block and Brick: Section 04810 Unit Masonry Assemblies. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: See Section 01423. Comply with following: 1. ASTM C476 Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Test Reports: Reports of tests will be distributed in accordance with Section 01450. B. Grout Mix Designs: 1. Submit in accordance with Product Data provisions of Section 01330 if ready-mix

grout is to be supplied. Mix design submittal is not required for site-mixed grout. 2. Follow provisions of Section 03300 for mix design submittal requirements and

procedures. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency: Testing will be conducted by accepted testing laboratory. See Section

01450. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Portland Cement for Unit Masonry: ASTM C150, Type I, except Type III may be used for

cold weather construction. 1. Masonry cement not allowed. B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S.

TRL 0708 04070-2

C. Aggregates: ASTM C404. D. Water: Clean and free from deleterious amounts of acids, alkalies or organic materials. E. Admixtures: Not allowed. 1. Antifreeze Compounds: Calcium chloride or other antifreeze agents not allowed. 2. Use of accelerators not allowed. 2.02 MIXES A. Site-Mixed Grout for Masonry: 1. ASTM C476. Proportion by volume with sufficient water added to produce

consistency for pouring without segregation. 2. Coarse Grout: Coarse grout may be used only in filled-cell construction 3" or more

in both horizontal dimensions. Coarse grout to be composed of one part Portland cement with not more than one-tenth part hydrated lime or lime putty added, and two and one-fourth to three parts sand, and not more than two parts gravel.

3. Fine Grout: Use fine grout in all locations where coarse grout may not be used. Composed of one part Portland cement, with not more than one-tenth part hydrated lime or lime putty added, and two and one-fourth to three parts sand.

4. Grout shall attain a minimum strength at 28 days of 2,000 psi. B. Ready-Mixed Grout for Masonry: Proportion with sufficient water added to produce

consistency for pouring without segregation. 1. Minimum: 28-day compressive strength: 2,000 psi 2. Aggregate Size: 3/8 inch maximum. 3. Design Slump: 8-inch minimum, 10 inch maximum. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Clean equipment for mixing, transportation and placing grout before starting work. 3.02 MEASUREMENT AND MIXING A. Measurement Method: By either volume or weight so that specified proportions can be

controlled and accurately maintained. Measurement of sand by shovel not allowed. B. Site Mixing of Grout: Mix cement and aggregate for at lease 3 minutes and not more

than 10 minutes in a mechanical mixer with the amount of water required to provide the desired workability.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Grout Tests: Control tests will be conducted by accepted testing laboratory. See Section

01450 and Section 03300 for requirements. B. Ready-Mixed Grout: 1. Compressive strength shall be sampled and tested in accordance with the ASTM

C1019. 2. Testing Agency: Grout tests will be conducted by a testing laboratory selected and

paid by the Owner.

TRL 0708 04070-3

3. Test Specimens: Take grout samples as grout is being placed into the wall. Construct three test specimens in accordance with ASTM C1019 under the observation of the testing agency. Cure, protect, and store specimens on-site for 48 hours. Protect from freezing and variations in temperature until collected by testing agency.

4. Frequency: Minimum of one sample consisting of three specimens shall be built and tested for each 5000 square feet of wall area as masonry construction progresses.

C. Site-Mixed Grout: Compressive strength tests of grout mixed on-site to specified

proportions is not required. END OF SECTION

TRL 0708 04080-1

SECTION 04080 MASONRY ANCHORAGE AND REINFORCEMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Anchors and Ties. 2. Joint Reinforcement. B. Related Sections:

1. Reinforcing Bars: Section 03200 Concrete Reinforcement. 2. Masonry Mortar: Section 04060. 3. Masonry Grout: Section 04070. 4. Control Joint Material, Embedded Flashing and Weepholes: Section 04090 Masonry

Accessories. 5. Block and Brick: Section 04810 Unit Masonry Assemblies.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Dur-O-Wal. 2. AA Wire Products. 3. Heckman Building Products. 4. Masonry Reinforcing Corporation of America. 5. Accepted Substitute 2.02 JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. Horizontal Reinforcement: 1. General: Welded wire units of ASTM A82 cold drawn wire, No. 9 gage deformed

side rods and No. 9 gage plain cross rods. a. Width: Approximately 2" less than width of wall. b. Provide prefabricated corners and tees. 2. Finish: Galvanized. 3. Type: Truss design except provide ladder type at reinforced masonry walls. 2.03 ANCHORS AND TIES A. Masonry Veneer Wall Ties: Dur-O-Wal D/A 213 Adjustable Veneer Anchors. 1. Drywall Screws: Self-tapping, self-drilling, galvanized No. 8 x 1-1/4". Use two screws

per anchor. B. Powder Driven Anchors: "Ramset" or equivalent low or standard velocity driven fasteners.

Minimum 1/8" shank diameter.

TRL 0708 04080-2

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. Masonry Walls: 1. Install joint reinforcement continuously in every second horizontal block course (16"

o.c.) of masonry walls. 2. Lap 6" at splices. 3. Provide one additional piece above and below openings extending 2' minimum

beyond opening. 4. Use prefabricated pieces at corners and tees. B. Control Joints: Do not extend joint reinforcement through control joints. 3.02 WALL TIES A. Masonry Over Stud Walls: 1. Bond masonry to steel studs with wall ties located not more than 16" vertically on

each stud. 2. Space at 8" o.c. vertically and horizontally at perimeter of openings in masonry, and

8" o.c. horizontally at the top and bottom stud wall tracks. 3. Fasten ties through sheathing into steel studs using power driven screws. END OF SECTION

TRL 0708 04090-1

SECTION 04090 MASONRY ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Control joints. 2. Weep holes. 3. Flexible flashing. 4. Cavity weep and mortar dropping protection system. B. Related Sections: 1. Masonry Mortar: Section 04060. 2. Masonry Grout: Section 04070. 3. Joint Reinforcement, Ties and Anchors: Section 04080 Masonry Anchorage and

Reinforcement. 4. Block and Brick: Section 04810 Unit Masonry Assemblies. 5. Sheet Metal Flashing: Section 07600 Flashing and Sheet Metal. 6. Sealing Control Joints: Section 07920 Joint Sealants. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CONTROL JOINTS A. Block Control Joints: ASTM D2000, 2AA-805 rubber with durometer hardness of

approximately 80. B. Brick Control Joints: ASTM D1056, 3/8” thickness closed cell neoprene with adhesive

backing on one side. 3” width. 2.02 FLEXIBLE FLASHING AND WEEP HOLES A. Membrane Flashing: 1. Manufacturers: a. WR Grace. b. Dur-O-Wal. c. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01600. 2. Membrane Flashing: WR Grace Perm-A-Barrier Self adhering wall flashing with Perm-

A-Barrier wall primer and EM 3000 edge sealant. B. Weep Holes: 1. In Brick: 1/4" i. d. PVC tubing. 2.03 CAVITY WEEP AND MORTAR DROPPING PROTECTION SYSTEM A. Manufacturers: 1. Mortar Net USA, Ltd. 2. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01600.

TRL 0708 04090-2

B. Cavity Weep and Mortar Dropping Protection Mesh: Mortar Net or accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01600. High density polyethylene, nylon or polyester open weave mesh fabricated in a dovetail configuration and connected by continuous bottom strip.

1. Thickness: Sized to fit cavities indicated on Drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 CONTROL JOINTS A. Install control joints in masonry walls as indicated on the Drawings. Joints shall be installed

completely through and full height of masonry. 1. Exposed Joints: Sealed under Section 07920. 2. Where not otherwise indicated, space joints at 24 feet maximum on center. 3.02 FLEXIBLE FLASHING AND WEEPS A. Flexible Flashings: Prime all surfaces to receive flashing. Start flashings 1/2” from outside

face of wall. Turn up face of sheathing a minimum of 8” and seal top edge. B. Weep Holes: Install where flashing or waterproofing turns out and terminates in horizontal

mortar joints. Install at 24" o.c. in soft mortar. C. Mortar Net: Comply with manufacturer’s installation recommendations. Install one

continuous row at base of wall and over all wall openings directly on flashing after mortar has set.

END OF SECTION

TRL 0708 04810-1

SECTION 04810 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes:

1. Concrete block masonry walls. 2. Brick veneer. 3. Reinforced masonry construction.

B. Products Installed But Not Supplied Under This Section: 1. Masonry Reinforcing Bars: Section 03200 Concrete Reinforcement. 2. Mortar: Section 04060 Masonry Mortar. 3. Grout: Section 04070 Masonry Grout. 4. Items to be Built-In From Other Sections: a. Bolts and anchors. b. Nailing blocks. c. Inserts. d. Flashing reglets and other sheet metal. e. Steel lintels. f. Mechanical or electrical sleeves or blockouts. g. All other built-in members. C. Related Requirements: 1. Quality Control and Testing: Section 01450 Quality Control. 2. Joint Reinforcement, Ties and Anchors: Section 04080 Masonry Anchorage and


Accessories. D. Related Sections:

1. Water Repellent: Section 07194 Siloxane Water Repellents. 2. Sealing Control Joints: Section 07920 Joint Sealants.

1.02 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: See Section 01423. Comply with following: 1. American National Standards Institute, ANSI/NBS 211 (A41.1), "Building Code

Requirements for Masonry". 2. Uniform Building Code (UBC). Chapter 21 - Masonry. 3. ACI 530.1-99/ASCE 6-99 – Specification for Masonry Structures. 4. National Concrete Masonry Association, NCMA, "A Manual of Facts on Concrete

Masonry" (collection of TEK Bulletins). 5. Portland Cement Association, PCA, "Concrete Masonry Handbook ". 1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance Criteria:

TRL 0708 04810-2

1. Minimum compressive strength, f'm of concrete masonry at the age of 28 days: 1,500 psi.

2. Minimum compressive strength, f'm of solid brick masonry at the age of 28 days: 1,500 psi.

1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01330 for all

reinforced masonry. Include minimum of the following. 1. Fabrication dimensions and locations for placing reinforcing steel and accessories. 2. Details of steel reinforcement, including lap lengths and bends. 3. Grade of reinforcing steel. 4. Masonry lintels.

B. Samples: 1. Face Brick Samples: Submit full size samples of face brick illustrating the full range of

color and texture for acceptance in accordance with Section 01330. 2. Architect will retain one set of accepted samples. 3. Keep one set of accepted samples at site throughout construction period. C. Quality Assurance Submittals: 1. Test Reports: Submit following tests for each class of unit and type of masonry

assemblage two weeks prior to start of construction. Prepare specimens and test in accordance with Uniform Building Code and standards cited therein.

a. Tests made on individual masonry units within last four months. b. Current mortar test including mortar proportions. c. Current grout test including grout proportions. d. Current prism test. 1) Include mortar and grout proportions used in test specimens. 2) Substantiate that each type of masonry assemblage meets or exceeds

required 28 day compressive strength (f'm). 2. Certificates: If requested by the Architect, furnish manufacturer's certification and

test results indicating that concrete masonry units meet specified ASTM requirements.

3. Masonry Subcontractor Qualifications: Masonry bidders shall submit evidence of qualifications along with bid proposals. Include evidence of minimum experience and a list of successfully completed projects with similar materials and complexity.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Masonry Subcontractor Qualifications: Masonry installer shall have a minimum of five

years experience on installations of decorative brick veneer construction of similar size and complexity. The masonry crew shall be fully qualified to install the brick veneer as detailed. See Article 1.04 for qualifications submittal requirements.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Where a fire-resistant classification is indicated, comply with

the applicable building code requirements for materials and installation to achieve the indicated rating.

C. Mock-Up: Construct 4'x 6' wall panel with face brick, and mortar in location as directed

by Architect. 1. Accepted Sample Wall: Standard for rest of work. 2. Remove at completion of project.

TRL 0708 04810-3

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01600. B. Masonry Units: Handle carefully to avoid chipping and protect against wetting prior to

use allowing air circulation under stacked units. C. Do not use salt or calcium chloride to remove ice from masonry surfaces. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Cold Weather Protection during Installation: a. Preparation: Before beginning work, remove ice or snow formed on masonry

bed by carefully applying heat until top surface is dry to touch. Remove frozen or damaged masonry.

b. Air Temperature 40 degrees F to 32 degrees F: Heat sand or mixing water to minimum of 55 degrees F and maximum of 120 degrees F.

c. Air Temperature 32 degrees F to 25 degrees F: Heat sand and mixing water to minimum of 65 degrees F and maximum of 120 degrees F.

d. Air Temperature 25 degrees F to 20 degrees F: Heat sand and mixing water to minimum of 75 degrees F and maximum of 120 degrees F. Use salamander or other sources of heat on both sides of walls under construction. Use windbreaks when wind is in excess of 15 mph.

e. Air Temperature 20 degrees F and Below: Heat sand and mixing water to minimum of 75 degrees F and maximum of 120 degrees F. Provide enclosure and auxiliary heat to maintain air temperature above 32 degrees F. Temperature of units when laid shall be not less than 20 degrees F.

f. Grout: Place grout in masonry at minimum temperature of 70 degrees F and maximum temperature of 120 degrees F. Maintain grouted masonry above 32 degrees F for 24 hours following placement of grout.

g. Admixtures: Mortar admixtures will not be permitted without written acceptance of Architect.

h. Frozen Work: Above paragraphs are designed to permit masonry work to continue during periods of cold temperature. Any frozen masonry work will be prima facie evidence that above requirements have not been complied with. Remove and replace frozen materials as directed by Architect.

2. Cold Weather Protection after Installation: a. Mean Daily Air Temperature 40 degrees F to 32 degrees F: Protect masonry

from rain or snow for 24 hours. b. Mean Daily Air Temperature 32 degrees F to 25 degrees F: Cover masonry

completely for 24 hours; 48 hours for grouted masonry. c. Mean Daily Air Temperature 25 degrees F to 20 degrees F: Cover masonry

completely with insulating blankets for 24 hours; 48 hours for grouted masonry. d. Mean Daily Air Temperature 20 degrees F and Below: Maintain Masonry

temperature above 32 degrees F for 24 hours by enclosure and supplementary heat, by electric heating blankets, infrared heat lamps or other method proven to be satisfactory.

3. Hot Weather Protection During Installation: When air temperature exceeds 99 degrees F in shade, protect freshly laid masonry from direct exposure to wind and sun.

TRL 0708 04810-4

4. Moisture Protection During Installation: Where exposed to weather, Cover top of masonry walls at end of each day's work using waterproof material weighted down to ensure its remaining in place. Maintain such protection until final capping of wall.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MASONRY UNITS A. Lightweight Concrete Block (Less than 105 pounds per cubic foot oven-dry weight of

concrete): ASTM C90. 1. Aggregate: ASTM C331 (Lightweight). 2. Classification: Grade N, Type 1. a. Curing: In moisture controlled atmosphere at normal pressure and

temperature, or in an autoclave, to comply with requirements for Type I units. 3. Nominal Size: Eight inch x 16-inch face size, thickness as indicated. 4. Minimum Net Compressive Strength: 1900 psi over minimum ungrouted net area. 5. Provide lintel blocks, corner blocks, jamb blocks, header blocks and required special

shapes as detailed or required to complete the job. B. Face Brick: ASTM C216, SW Grade, Type FBX. 1. Size: 2-1/4" x 3-5/8" x 7-5/8" modular unless indicated otherwise. 2. Minimum Compressive Strength of Units: 4400 psi over gross area. 3. Color and Finish: See Drawings. 2.02 MORTAR AND ACCESSORIES A. Mortar: See Section 04060. B. Grout: See Section 04070. C. Joint Reinforcement, Ties and Anchors: Section 04080 Masonry Anchorage and

Reinforcement D. Masonry Accessories: See Section 04090. 2.03 REINFORCING STEEL FOR REINFORCED MASONRY A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615, Grade 40 or 60 unless otherwise indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: 1. Bearing Surfaces: Inspect foundations and other bearing surfaces for proper grades

and elevations, freedom from dirt and other foreign material. Report unsatisfactory conditions to General Contractor in writing with copy to Architect.

3.02 PREPARATION A. Cooperation: Check relationship of masonry to work under other sections, cooperate

with others and proceed as desirable for general progress and best interest of project. 1. Anchors: Coordinate installation of dovetail slots cast into concrete.

TRL 0708 04810-5

B. Cleaning: Remove dirt, ice, loose rust and scale from walls, ties and reinforcing prior to installation.

3.03 MASONRY INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Lay masonry plumb, level and true to lines to tolerances indicated. Bond as

indicated on elevations and details. 2. Adjust masonry dimensions and install starter units as required to eliminate small cuts

and to maintain bond. Cut neatly around contacting work. 3. Construct slots, chases, cavities and similar spaces as required for other work. 4. Masonry dimensions for exterior openings are nominal. Lay out masonry openings to

provide 1/4-inch maximum sealant joint at metal frames. B. Solid Units: 1. Use solid units for top course of exterior piers, walls, window sills, etc. as indicated

and required. 2. Use solid units for soldier courses in bearing walls and wherever cores of hollow units

would be exposed to view or weather. C. Mortar Joints: 1. Lay masonry work in shoved manner in full beds of unfurrowed mortar. Completely

fill vertical and horizontal joints and voids with mortar. 2. Joints: Plumb or level. 3. Joint Treatment: a. Tool exposed joints to slightly concave surface well bonded to units. b. Cut unexposed joints flush. 4. Avoid overplumbing and pounding of corners and jambs to fit stretcher units after

being set in position. Where adjustment must be made after mortar has started to harden, remove mortar and replace with fresh mortar.

D. Built-In Items: 1. Cooperate to build-in items of others into masonry as work progresses. 2. Steel Door Jambs: Grout steel door jambs set in masonry full of mortar as wall is built. 3. Lintels: Install lintels furnished under Section 05500 for openings over 16 inches in

width. Install in beds of mortar and do necessary pointing. Fill hollow masonry units full with grout for three courses at lintel bearings.

4. Chases and Recesses: Provide chases in masonry walls as indicated and required for mechanical and electrical work for pipes and conduits. Build recesses as required for accommodation of cases and cabinets, radiators, and unit heaters. Install lintels for recesses over 16 inches in width.

5. Built-in Items: Install sleeves of proper size provided by others, where directed, to permit passage of pipes through walls. Build-in wall sleeves, anchors, plates, and other members provided by others. Properly set built-in items as walls progress and under direction of party providing same.

E. Starting and Stopping: Where fresh masonry joins partially or totally set masonry, clean

exposed surfaces of set masonry and wet lightly to obtain good bond with new work. Remove loose masonry and mortar. If it is necessary to stop off horizontal run of masonry, step back 1/2 masonry unit length in each course. Do not tooth.

F. Cutting: Where cutting of units is necessary, make cuts with motor-driven masonry saw.

TRL 0708 04810-6

G. Accessories: Install joint reinforcement, anchors, ties, control joints, weep holes, flexible flashing and other accessories in accordance with Section 04090.

H. Bracing: Adequately brace masonry until cured and permanently supported. 3.04 CONCRETE BLOCK INSTALLATION A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, lay concrete block in running bond. 1. Install bullnose block at exposed corners and at locations as indicated. B. Installation: 1. Joints: Uniform approximately 3/8 inch wide. 2. Wetting: Do not wet units. Lay dry. 3. Partition Heights: Extend interior masonry walls to structure above unless otherwise

indicated. 3.05 BRICK INSTALLATION A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, lay brick in running bond. 1. Install recessed and soldier courses as indicated. B. Joints: Uniform approximately 3/8 inch wide. C. Wetting: Wet brick having absorption rate greater than 0.025 ounce per square inch per

minute sufficiently so absorption rate when laid does not exceed this rate. 3.06 REINFORCED MASONRY A. General: 1. Where indicated on Drawings, reinforce masonry unit cores with deformed steel

reinforcing bars and grout as indicated. 2. All concrete block below grade shall be grouted solid. B. Layout and Alignment: Build reinforced hollow unit masonry to preserve unobstructed

vertical continuity of cells to be filled. Vertical cells to be filled shall have a vertical alignment to maintain a continuous unobstructed cell area not less than 2 inches by 3 inches.

C. Reinforcement: 1. Hold vertical reinforcement in position at top and bottom and at intervals not

exceeding 192 bar diameters. 2. Laps: 48 bar diameters minimum where spliced. 3. All vertical bar lengths for low lift grouted construction shall be 4'-8" plus required

lap. 4. When a foundation dowel does not line up with the vertical core to be reinforced, it

shall not be bent over, but shall be grouted into a core in direct vertical alignment, even though it is in an adjacent cell to the vertical wall reinforcing.

D. Grouting: 1. All debris and projecting mortar shall be cleaned out before pouring grout. 2. Grout spaces less than two inches in width with fine grout using low lift grouting

techniques. In spaces greater than two inches use coarse grout using high or low lift grouting techniques.

TRL 0708 04810-7

2. Hold mortar in bed joints back 1/4 inch from edges of masonry unit adjacent to grout spaces, bevel back and upward from grout space. Keep mortar droppings out of grout spaces. Head and bed joints shall be shoved at least 1/2 inch into place.

3. When the grouting is stopped for one hour or longer, stop pouring of grout 1-1/2-inches below top of uppermost unit.

4. Grout Consolidation: Consolidate grout by mechanical vibration during placement before loss of plasticity in a manner to fill the grout space. Grout pours greater than 12 inches in height shall be reconsolidated by mechanical vibration to minimize voids due to water loss. Grout pours 12 inches or less in height shall be mechanically vibrated or puddled.

E. Low Lift Grouting: Grout in lifts not exceeding 16 inches and pours not exceeding 4'-0".

Stop pours 1-1/2 inches below the top of a course to form a key at pour joints. F. High-Lift Grouting: Not allowed. 3.07 ALLOWABLE TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1. In lines and surfaces of columns, walls and arises: a. 1/4 inch in 10 feet. b. 3/8 inch in any story or 20 feet maximum. c. 1/2 inch in 40 feet. 2. For external corners, expansion joints and other conspicuous lines: a. 1/4 inch in any story 20 feet maximum. b. 1/2 inch in 40 feet. B. Maximum variation from level or grades for exposed lintels, sills, stripes, parapets,

horizontal grooves and other conspicuous lines: 1. 1/4 inch in any bay or 20 feet. 2. 1/2 inch in 40 feet. C. Maximum variation of linear building line from an established position in plan and related

portions of columns, walls and partitions: 1. 1/2 inch in any bay or 20 feet maximum. 2. 3/4 inch in 40 feet. 3.08 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cutting and Patching: Cut and patch masonry wherever necessary for other trades. Do

such work with experienced mechanics in workmanlike manner. Do not cut and patch work that will tend to injure strength or appearance of finished work. Cutting of finished masonry for purpose of building-in members will not be allowed.

3.09 POINTING AND CLEANING A. Cut out any defective joints and holes in exposed masonry and repoint with mortar. Take

care to match color of exposed joints in masonry that will not be painted or otherwise covered.

TRL 0708 04810-8

B. Daily Cleaning: Make every practical effort to keep masonry work as clean as possible during construction. At a minimum, dry brush masonry surfaces after mortar has set at end of each day's work and after final pointing.

C. Final Cleaning: 1. Clean all mortar, dirt and construction film from masonry using stiff brush and water

when mortar is at least 7 days and not more than 14 days old. Deviations from this procedure must be requested in writing from the Architect prior to starting masonry work. Should the use of commercial brick cleaners be requested, the written request must be accompanied by the following information:

a. Description of cleaning solution proposed including manufacturer's name and descriptive literature.

b. Description of cleaning procedure proposed. c. Written approval from the brick manufacturer for solution and procedures. d. Statement from masonry contractor assuming responsibility for any deleterious

effects to masonry, such as staining, caused as a result of use of said products. 2. Remove efflorescence or other stain in accordance with brick manufacturer's

recommendations. D. No high pressure cleaning of brick will be permitted. Pressure to be 100 psi maximum. E. Acid will not be permitted. F. Upon completion of pointing and cleaning leave the work and surrounding surfaces

clean and free of mortar spots, droppings and broken masonry. 3.10 PROTECTION A. Protection of Completed Work from Physical Damage: Protect projecting masonry liable

to damage after setting by suitable planking well supported. Securely box jambs and sills of openings used for passage.

B. Replacement: Replace masonry work showing damage or disfiguration during progress

of work in its entirety. Patching or hiding of defects not permitted. END OF SECTION

SECTION 05120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Structural steel. 2. Grout.


1. Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements" for independent testing agency procedures and administrative requirements.

2. Division 05 Section "Steel Decking" for field installation of shear connectors. 3. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for steel lintels or shelf angles not attached to

structural-steel frame, miscellaneous steel fabrications and other metal items not defined as structural steel.

4. Division 09 painting Section for surface preparation and priming requirements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Structural Steel: Elements of structural-steel frame, as classified by AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," that support design loads.

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Connections: Provide details of simple shear connections required by the Contract Documents to be selected or completed by structural-steel fabricator to withstand ASD-service loads indicated and comply with other information and restrictions indicated.

1. Select and complete connections using schematic details indicated and AISC's "Manual of Steel Construction, Allowable Stress Design," Part 4.

2. Engineering Responsibility: Fabricator's responsibilities include using a qualified professional engineer to prepare structural analysis data for structural-steel connections not shown on construction documents.

B. Construction: Type 2, simple framing.

STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 05120 - 1

1.5 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components.

1. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. 2. Include embedment drawings. 3. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds,

and show size, length, and type of each weld. 4. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts.

Identify pretensioned and slip-critical high-strength bolted connections. 5. For structural-steel connections indicated to comply with design loads, include structural

analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

C. Welding certificates.

D. Qualification Data: For Installer and fabricator.

E. Mill Test Reports: Signed by manufacturers certifying that the following products comply with requirements:

1. Structural steel including chemical and physical properties. 2. Bolts, nuts, and washers including mechanical properties and chemical analysis. 3. Tension-control, high-strength bolt-nut-washer assemblies. 4. Shear stud connectors. 5. Shop primers. 6. Nonshrink grout.

F. Source quality-control test reports.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Erector, Category CSE.

B. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator who participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Plant, Category Sbd.

C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."

D. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents:

1. AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." 2. AISC's "Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings" and "Supplement No. 2." 3. AISC's "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings--Allowable Stress Design and Plastic

Design”. 4. AISC's "Specification for the Design of Steel Hollow Structural Sections."


5. AISC's "Specification for Allowable Stress Design of Single-Angle Members " 6. RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."

E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination."


A. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel members and packaged materials from erosion and deterioration.

1. Store fasteners in a protected place. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use.

2. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Furnish anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates, instructions, and directions for installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS

A. W-Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M or ASTM A 572/A 572M, Grade 50 (345).

B. Channels, Angles, M , S-Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 572/A 572M, Grade 50 (345).

C. Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

D. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500, Grade B structural tubing. 1. Round HSS: 42 ksi minimum yield strength 2. Rectangular and Square HSS: 46 ksi minimum yield strength

E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or S, Grade B. 1. Finish: Black, except where indicated to be galvanized.

F. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements.


2.2 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS

A. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M) hardened carbon-steel washers.

1. Finish: Plain or Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C.

B. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 490 (ASTM A 490M), Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts or tension-control, bolt-nut-washer assemblies with splined ends; ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M) hardened carbon-steel washers, plain.

1. Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, Type 490 (ASTM F 959M,) Type 10.9, compressible-washer type, plain.

C. Tension-Control, High-Strength Bolt-Nut-Washer Assemblies: ASTM F 1852, Type 1, heavy hex head steel structural bolts with splined ends; ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M) hardened carbon-steel washers.

1. Finish: Plain or Mechanically deposited zinc coating, ASTM B 695, Class 50.

D. Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grades 1015 through 1020, headed-stud type, cold-finished carbon steel; AWS D1.1, Type B.

E. Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, straight.

1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex carbon steel. 2. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel. 3. Washers: ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M) hardened carbon steel. 4. Finish: Plainor Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C, ASTM B 695,

Class 50.

F. Threaded Rods: ASTM A 36/A 36M

1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex carbon steel. 2. Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel. 3. Finish: Plain or Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C.

G. Eye Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A 108, Grade 1030, cold-finished carbon steel.

H. Sleeve Nuts: ASTM A 108, Grade 1018, cold-finished carbon steel.

2.3 PRIMER

A. Primer: Fabricator's standard lead- and chromate-free, nonasphaltic, rust-inhibiting primer.

B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780.


2.4 GROUT

A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive, nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate according to AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and AISC's "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings--Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design."

1. Camber structural-steel members where indicated. 2. Identify high-strength structural steel according to ASTM A 6/ A 6M and maintain

markings until structural steel has been erected. 3. Mark and match-mark materials for field assembly. 4. Complete structural-steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shop-

priming operations.

B. Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible.

1. Plane thermally cut edges to be welded to comply with requirements in AWS D1.1.

C. Bolt Holes: Cut, drill, or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to metal surfaces.

D. Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting bearing loads.

E. Cleaning: Clean and prepare steel surfaces that are to remain unpainted according to SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning or SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."

F. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to AWS D1.1 and manufacturer's written instructions.

G. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for passage of other work through steel framing members.

1. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. Do not thermally cut bolt holes or enlarge holes by burning.

2. Base-Plate Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces.

3. Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items indicated to receive other work.

2.6 SHOP CONNECTIONS

A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified.

1. Joint Type: Snug tightened unless noted otherwise.


B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for welding procedure specifications, tolerances, appearance, and quality of welds and for methods used in correcting welding work.

1. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of axes without exceeding tolerances of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" for mill material.

2.7 SHOP PRIMING

A. Shop prime steel surfaces except the following:

1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded members to a depth of 2 inches (50 mm).

2. Surfaces to be field welded. 3. Surfaces to be high-strength bolted with slip-critical connections. 4. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials. 5. Galvanized surfaces.

B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and standards: 1. SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."

C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces.

1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. 2. Apply two coats of shop paint to inaccessible surfaces after assembly or erection.

Change color of second coat to distinguish it from first.

D. Painting: Apply a 1-coat, nonasphaltic primer complying with SSPC-PS Guide 7.00, "Painting System Guide 7.00: Guide for Selecting One-Coat Shop Painting Systems," to provide a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm).

2.8 GALVANIZING

A. Hot-Dip Galvanized Finish: Apply zinc coating by the hot-dip process to structural steel according to ASTM A 123/ A 123M.

1. Fill vent holes and grind smooth after galvanizing. 2. Galvanize lintels and shelf angles attached to structural-steel frame and located in

exterior walls.

2.9 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Owner will engage an independent testing and inspecting agency to perform shop tests and inspections and prepare test reports.


1. Provide testing agency with access to places where structural-steel work is being fabricated or produced to perform tests and inspections.

B. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents.

C. Bolted Connections: Shop-bolted connections will be inspected according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."

D. Welded Connections: In addition to visual inspection, shop-welded connections will be tested and inspected according to AWS D1.1 and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option:

1. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. 2. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished

weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted. 3. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. 4. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.

E. In addition to visual inspection, shop-welded shear connectors will be tested and inspected according to requirements in AWS D1.1 for stud welding and as follows:

1. Bend tests will be performed if visual inspections reveal either a less-than- continuous 360-degree flash or welding repairs to any shear connector.

2. Tests will be conducted on additional shear connectors if weld fracture occurs on shear connectors already tested, according to requirements in AWS D1.1.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments, with steel erector present, for compliance with requirements.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel, connections, and bracing are in place, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Do not remove temporary shoring supporting composite deck construction until cast-in-place concrete has attained its design compressive strength.


3.3 ERECTION

A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings--Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design."

B. Base Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting base and bearing plates. Clean bottom surface of base and bearing plates.

1. Set base and bearing plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required.

2. Weld plate washers to top of base plate. 3. Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed.

Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of base or bearing plate before packing with grout.

4. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and base or bearing plates so no voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts.

C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."

D. Align and adjust various members forming part of complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent contact with members. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment.

1. Level and plumb individual members of structure. 2. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean

temperature when structure is completed and in service.

E. Splice members only where indicated.

F. Remove erection bolts on welded, architecturally exposed structural steel; fill holes with plug welds; and grind smooth at exposed surfaces.

G. Do not use thermal cutting during erection unless approved by Structural Engineer. Finish thermally cut sections within smoothness limits in AWS D1.1.

H. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts.

I. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to AWS D1.1 and manufacturer's written instructions.


3.4 FIELD CONNECTIONS

A. High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified.

1. Joint Type: Snug tightened unless noted otherwise.

B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for welding procedure specifications, tolerances, appearance, and quality of welds and for methods used in correcting welding work.

1. Comply with AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings--Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design" for bearing, adequacy of temporary connections, alignment, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds.

2. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of axes without exceeding tolerances of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" for mill material.

3.5 PREFABRICATED BUILDING COLUMNS

A. Install prefabricated building columns to comply with AISC's "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings--Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design," manufacturer's written recommendations, and requirements of testing and inspecting agency that apply to the fire-resistance rating indicated.


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to inspect field welds and high-strength bolted connections.

B. Bolted Connections: Shop-bolted connections will be inspected according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."

C. Welded Connections: Field welds will be visually inspected according to AWS D1.1.

1. In addition to visual inspection, field welds will be tested according to AWS D1.1 and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option:

a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on

finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted.

c. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. d. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.

D. In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect field-welded shear connectors according to requirements in AWS D1.1 for stud welding and as follows:



1. Perform bend tests if visual inspections reveal either a less-than- continuous 360-degree flash or welding repairs to any shear connector.

2. Conduct tests on additional shear connectors if weld fracture occurs on shear connectors already tested, according to requirements in AWS D1.1.

E. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents.


A. Repair damaged galvanized coatings on galvanized items with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting are specified in Division 09 painting Sections.


SECTION 05310 - STEEL DECKING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Roof deck.


1. Division 05 Section "Structural Steel Framing" for shop- and field-welded shear connectors.

2. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for framing deck openings with miscellaneous steel shapes.

3. Division 09 painting Sections for repair painting of primed deck.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of deck, accessory, and product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Show layout and types of deck panels, anchorage details, reinforcing channels, pans, cut deck openings, special jointing, accessories, and attachments to other construction.

C. Product Certificates: For each type of steel deck, signed by product manufacturer.

D. Welding certificates.

E. Field quality-control test and inspection reports.

F. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, indicating that each of the following complies with requirements:

1. Power-actuated mechanical fasteners.

G. Research/Evaluation Reports: For steel deck.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.

STEEL DECKING 05310 - 1

B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."

C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where indicated, provide steel deck units identical to those tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

2. Steel deck units shall be identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

D. AISI Specifications: Comply with calculated structural characteristics of steel deck according to AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members."

E. FMG Listing: Provide steel roof deck evaluated by FMG and listed in its "Approval Guide, Building Materials" for Class 1 fire rating and Class 1-90 windstorm ratings.


A. Protect steel deck from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling.

B. Stack steel deck on platforms or pallets and slope to provide drainage. Protect with a waterproof covering and ventilate to avoid condensation.

1. Protect and ventilate acoustical cellular roof deck with factory-installed insulation to maintain insulation free of moisture.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Steel Deck:

a. ASC Profiles, Inc. b. Canam Steel Corp.;The Canam Manac Group. c. Consolidated Systems, Inc. d. DACS, Inc. e. D-Mac Industries Inc. f. Epic Metals Corporation.


g. Marlyn Steel Decks, Inc. h. New Millennium Building Systems, LLC. i. Nucor Corp.; Vulcraft Division. j. Roof Deck, Inc. k. United Steel Deck, Inc. l. Valley Joist; Division of EBSCO Industries, Inc. m. Verco Manufacturing Co. n. Wheeling Corrugating Company; Div. of Wheeling-Pittsburgh Steel Corporation.

2.2 ROOF DECK

A. Steel Roof Deck: Fabricate panels, without top-flange stiffening grooves, to comply with "SDI Specifications and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck," in SDI Publication No. 30, and with the following:

1. Finish: Provide according to the requirements of the Architects fire-rated assembly. Galvanize at areas exposed to weather. a. Prime-Painted Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33, shop

primed with manufacturer's standard shop primer. b. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33

(230), G90 zinc coating. 2. Deck Profile: As indicated . 3. Cellular Deck Profile: As indicated , with bottom plate. 4. Profile Depth: As indicated . 5. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: As indicated . 6. Design Uncoated-Steel Thicknesses; Deck Unit/Bottom Plate: As indicated . 7. Span Condition: As indicated . 8. Side Laps: Overlapped or interlocking seam at Contractor's option.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard accessory materials for deck that comply with requirements indicated.

B. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, low-velocity, power-actuated or pneumatically driven carbon-steel fasteners; or self-drilling, self-threading screws.

C. Side-Lap Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, hexagonal washer head; self-drilling, carbon-steel screws, No. 10 (4.8-mm) minimum diameter.

D. Flexible Closure Strips: Vulcanized, closed-cell, synthetic rubber.

E. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi (230 MPa), not less than 0.0359-inch (0.91-mm) design uncoated thickness, of same material and finish as deck; of profile indicated or required for application.

F. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi (230 MPa), of same material and finish as deck, and of thickness and profile recommended by SDI Publication No. 30 for overhang and slab depth.


G. Column Closures, End Closures, Z-Closures, and Cover Plates: Steel sheet, of same material, finish, and thickness as deck, unless otherwise indicated.

H. Piercing Hanger Tabs: Piercing steel sheet hanger attachment devices for use with floor deck.

I. Weld Washers: Uncoated steel sheet, shaped to fit deck rib, 0.0598 inch (1.52 mm) thick, with factory-punched hole of 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) minimum diameter.

J. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780.

K. Repair Paint: Manufacturer's standard rust-inhibitive primer of same color as primer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine supporting frame and field conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and commentary in SDI Publication No. 30, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section.

B. Install temporary shoring before placing deck panels, if required to meet deflection limitations.

C. Locate deck bundles to prevent overloading of supporting members.

D. Place deck panels on supporting frame and adjust to final position with ends accurately aligned and bearing on supporting frame before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or contract side-lap interlocks.

E. Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting frame without warp or deflection.

F. Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work projecting through or adjacent to deck.

G. Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength, continuity of deck, and support of other work.

H. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used for correcting welding work.

I. Mechanical fasteners may be used in lieu of welding to fasten deck. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to deck manufacturer's written instructions.


3.3 ROOF-DECK INSTALLATION

A. Fasten roof-deck panels to steel supporting members by arc spot (puddle) welds of the surface diameter indicated or arc seam welds with an equal perimeter that is not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) long, and as follows:

1. Weld Diameter: 5/8 inch (16 mm), nominal. 2. Weld Spacing: Weld edge and interior ribs of deck units with a minimum of two welds

per deck unit at each support. Space welds as indicated. 3. Weld Washers: Install weld washers at each weld location.

B. Side-Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening: Fasten side laps and perimeter edges of panels between supports, at intervals not exceeding the lesser of 1/2 of the span or 18 inches (450 mm), and as follows:

1. Mechanically fasten with self-drilling, No. 10 (4.8-mm-) diameter or larger, carbon-steel screws.

2. Mechanically clinch or button punch. 3. Fasten with a minimum of 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) long welds.

C. End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm), with end joints as follows:

1. End Joints: Lapped 2 inches (51 mm) minimum or butted at Contractor's option.

D. Miscellaneous Roof-Deck Accessories: Install ridge and valley plates, finish strips, end closures, and reinforcing channels according to deck manufacturer's written instructions. Weld or mechanically fasten to substrate to provide a complete deck installation.

1. Weld cover plates at changes in direction of roof-deck panels, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Flexible Closure Strips: Install flexible closure strips over partitions, walls, and where indicated. Install with adhesive according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure complete closure.


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Visually inspect deck for condition and installation. Check weld and fastener size and spacing.

C. Testing agency will report inspection results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect.

D. Remove and replace work that does not comply with specified requirements.

E. Additional inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of corrected work with specified requirements.




A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on both surfaces of deck with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Repair Painting: Wire brush and clean rust spots, welds, and abraded areas on top surface of prime-painted deck immediately after installation, and apply repair paint.

1. Apply repair paint, of same color as adjacent shop-primed deck, to bottom surfaces of deck exposed to view.

2. Wire brushing, cleaning, and repair painting of bottom deck surfaces are included in Division 09 Section ".

C. Repair Painting: Wire brushing, cleaning, and repair painting of rust spots, welds, and abraded areas of both deck surfaces are included in Division 09 Section 09900.

D. Provide final protection and maintain conditions to ensure that steel deck is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.


SECTION 05400 - COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Exterior non-load-bearing wall framing. 2. Roof trusses. 3. Roof rafter framing. 4. Ceiling joist framing.


1. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for masonry shelf angles and connections. 2. Division 09 Section "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for interior non-load-bearing,

metal-stud framing and ceiling-suspension assemblies. 3. Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board Shaft Wall Assemblies" for interior non-load-

bearing, metal-stud-framed, shaft-wall assemblies.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Structural Performance: Provide cold-formed metal framing capable of withstanding design loads within limits and under conditions indicated.

1. Design Loads for Roof Trusses: As indicated on construction documents.

2. Deflection Limits for Roof Trusses: Design framing systems to withstand design loads without deflections greater than the following: a. Roof Trusses: Vertical deflection of 1/240 of the span. b. Ceiling Joist Framing: Vertical deflection of 1/240 of the span.

3. Design framing systems to provide for movement of framing members without damage or overstressing, sheathing failure, connection failure, undue strain on fasteners and anchors, or other detrimental effects when subject to a maximum ambient temperature change of 120 deg F (67 deg C).

4. Design framing system to maintain clearances at openings, to allow for construction tolerances, and to accommodate live load deflection of primary building structure as follows:

a. Upward and downward movement of 1 inch (25 mm).

COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400 - 1

B. Cold-Formed Steel Framing, General: Design according to AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - General Provisions."

1. Roof Trusses: Design according to AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Truss Design."

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of cold-formed metal framing product and accessory indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Show layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold-formed metal framing; fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners. Show reinforcing channels, opening framing, supplemental framing, strapping, bracing, bridging, splices, accessories, connection details, and attachment to adjoining work.

1. For cold-formed metal framing indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

C. Welding certificates.

D. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

E. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency, unless otherwise stated, indicating that each of the following complies with requirements, based on evaluation of comprehensive tests for current products:

1. Steel sheet. 2. Expansion anchors. 3. Power-actuated anchors. 4. Mechanical fasteners. 5. Vertical deflection clips. 6. Miscellaneous structural clips and accessories.

F. Research/Evaluation Reports: For cold-formed metal framing.


A. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings, design calculations, and other structural data by a qualified professional engineer.

B. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of cold-formed metal framing that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM E 329 to conduct the testing indicated.


D. Product Tests: Mill certificates or data from a qualified independent testing agency indicating steel sheet complies with requirements, including base-metal thickness, yield strength, tensile strength, total elongation, chemical requirements, ductility, and metallic-coating thickness.

E. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code--Steel," and AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."

F. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where indicated, provide cold-formed metal framing identical to that of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

G. AISI Specifications and Standards: Comply with AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members" and its "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - General Provisions."

1. Comply with AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Truss Design."

H. Comply with AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Prescriptive Method for One and Two Family Dwellings."

I. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination."


A. Protect cold-formed metal framing from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling.

B. Store cold-formed metal framing, protect with a waterproof covering, and ventilate to avoid condensation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering cold-formed metal framing that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide cold-formed metal framing by one of the following:

1. Allied Studco. 2. AllSteel Products, Inc. 3. California Expanded Metal Products Company. 4. Clark Steel Framing. 5. Consolidated Fabricators Corp.; Building Products Division. 6. Craco Metals Manufacturing, LLC. 7. Custom Stud, Inc.


8. Dale/Incor. 9. Design Shapes in Steel. 10. Dietrich Metal Framing; a Worthington Industries Company. 11. Formetal Co. Inc. (The). 12. Innovative Steel Systems. 13. MarinoWare; a division of Ware Industries. 14. Quail Run Building Materials, Inc. 15. SCAFCO Corporation. 16. Southeastern Stud & Components, Inc. 17. Steel Construction Systems. 18. Steeler, Inc. 19. Super Stud Building Products, Inc. 20. United Metal Products, Inc.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with an average recycled content of steel products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than 25 percent.

B. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of grade and coating weight as follows:

1. Grade: As required by structural performance for roof trusses, as indicated for others. 2. Coating: G60 (Z180), A60 (ZF180), AZ50 (AZ150), or GF30 (ZGF90).

C. Steel Sheet for Vertical Deflection Clips: ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural steel, zinc coated, of grade and coating as follows:

1. Grade: 50 (340), Class 1 or 2. 2. Coating: G90 (Z275).

2.3 EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING

A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows:

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated. 2. Flange Width: As indicated. 3. Section Properties: As indicated.

B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, and as follows:

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: Matching steel studs. 2. Flange Width: 1-1/4 inches (32 mm).


C. Vertical Deflection Clips: Manufacturer's standard bypass clips, capable of accommodating upward and downward vertical displacement of primary structure through positive mechanical attachment to stud web.

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Dietrich Metal Framing; a Worthington Industries Company. b. MarinoWare, a division of Ware Industries. c. SCAFCO Corporation d. The Steel Network, Inc.

D. Single Deflection Track: Manufacturer's single, deep-leg, U-shaped steel track; unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, of web depth to contain studs while allowing free vertical movement, with flanges designed to support horizontal and lateral loads and transfer them to the primary structure, and as follows: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

2. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated. 3. Flange Width: 1 inch (25 mm) plus twice the design gap for other applications.

E. Drift Clips: Manufacturer's standard bypass or head clips, capable of isolating wall stud from upward and downward vertical displacement and lateral drift of primary structure.

2.4 ROOF TRUSSES

A. Roof Truss Members: Manufacturer's standard-shape steel sections or C-shaped steel sections, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with stiffened flanges.

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As required. 2. Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches (41 mm), minimum. 3. Section Properties: As indicated.

2.5 ROOF-RAFTER FRAMING

A. Steel Rafters: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel sections, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows:

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated. 2. Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches (41 mm), minimum. 3. Section Properties: As indicated.


2.6 FRAMING ACCESSORIES

A. Fabricate steel-framing accessories from steel sheet, ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of same grade and coating weight used for framing members.

B. Provide accessories of manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration, unless otherwise indicated, as follows:

1. Supplementary framing. 2. Bracing, bridging, and solid blocking. 3. Web stiffeners. 4. Anchor clips. 5. End clips. 6. Foundation clips. 7. Gusset plates. 8. Stud kickers, knee braces, and girts. 9. Joist hangers and end closures. 10. Hole reinforcing plates. 11. Backer plates.

2.7 ANCHORS, CLIPS, AND FASTENERS

A. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36/A 36M, zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 123/A 123M.

B. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, threaded carbon-steel hex-headed bolts and carbon-steel nuts; and flat, hardened-steel washers; zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C.

C. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 5 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

D. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

E. Mechanical Fasteners: ASTM C 1513, corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-tapping steel drill screws.

1. Head Type: Low-profile head beneath sheathing, manufacturer's standard elsewhere.

F. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards.

2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20 or DOD-P-21035.


B. Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I; and clean, natural sand, ASTM C 404. Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand, by volume, with minimum water required for placement and hydration.

C. Nonmetallic, Nonshrink Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage-compensating agents, and plasticizing and water-reducing agents, complying with ASTM C 1107, with fluid consistency and 30-minute working time.

D. Shims: Load bearing, high-density multimonomer plastic, nonleaching.

E. Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick, selected from manufacturer's standard widths to match width of bottom track or rim track members.

2.9 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened, according to referenced AISI's specifications and standards, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section.

1. Fabricate framing assemblies using jigs or templates. 2. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 3. Fasten cold-formed metal framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch

fastening, or riveting as standard with fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted.

a. Comply with AWS D1.3 requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, with screw penetrating joined members by not less than three exposed screw threads.

4. Fasten other materials to cold-formed metal framing by welding, bolting, or screw fastening, according to Shop Drawings.

B. Reinforce, stiffen, and brace framing assemblies to withstand handling, delivery, and erection stresses. Lift fabricated assemblies to prevent damage or permanent distortion.

C. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate assemblies level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1:960) and as follows:

1. Spacing: Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm) from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials.

2. Squareness: Fabricate each cold-formed metal framing assembly to a maximum out-of-square tolerance of 1/8 inch (3 mm).


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine supporting substrates and abutting structural framing for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach continuous angles, supplementary framing, or tracks to structural members indicated to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials.

B. After applying sprayed fire-resistive materials, remove only as much of these materials as needed to complete installation of cold-formed framing without reducing thickness of fire-resistive materials below that are required to obtain fire-resistance rating indicated. Protect remaining fire-resistive materials from damage.

C. Install load bearing shims or grout between the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and the top of foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations to ensure a uniform bearing surface on supporting concrete or masonry construction.

D. Install sealer gaskets to isolate the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and the top of foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations.

3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Cold-formed metal framing may be shop or field fabricated for installation, or it may be field assembled.

B. Install cold-formed metal framing according to AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - General Provisions" and to manufacturer's written instructions unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

C. Install shop- or field-fabricated, cold-formed framing and securely anchor to supporting structure.

1. Screw, bolt, or weld wall panels at horizontal and vertical junctures to produce flush, even, true-to-line joints with maximum variation in plane and true position between fabricated panels not exceeding 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).

D. Install cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened.

1. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 2. Fasten cold-formed metal framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch

fastening, or riveting. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted.


a. Comply with AWS D1.3 requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, and complying with requirements for spacing, edge distances, and screw penetration.

E. Install framing members in one-piece lengths unless splice connections are indicated for track or tension members.

F. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads comparable in intensity to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place, undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent connections to framing are secured.

G. Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with cold-formed metal framing. Independently frame both sides of joints.

H. Install insulation, specified in Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation," in built-up exterior framing members, such as headers, sills, boxed joists, and multiple studs at openings, that are inaccessible on completion of framing work.

I. Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's standard punched openings.

J. Erection Tolerances: Install cold-formed metal framing level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1:960) and as follows:

1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm) from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials.

3.4 EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL INSTALLATION

A. Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor to supporting structure as indicated.

B. Fasten both flanges of studs to bottom track, unless otherwise indicated. Space studs as follows:

1. Stud Spacing: As indicated.

C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or warped surfaces and similar requirements.

D. Isolate non-load-bearing steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of vertical loads while providing lateral support.

1. Install single-leg deflection tracks and anchor to building structure. 2. Install double deep-leg deflection tracks and anchor outer track to building structure. 3. Connect vertical deflection clips to bypassing studs and anchor to building structure.


E. Install horizontal bridging in wall studs, spaced in rows indicated on Shop Drawings but not more than 48 inches (1220 mm) apart. Fasten at each stud intersection. 1. Top Bridging for Single Deflection Track: Install row of horizontal bridging within 18

inches (450 mm) of single deflection track. Install a combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated and stud or stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness matching studs. Fasten flat straps to stud flanges and secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges.

2. Bridging: Cold-rolled steel channel, welded or mechanically fastened to webs of punched studs.

3. Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated and stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness to match studs. Fasten flat straps to stud flanges and secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges.

4. Bridging: Proprietary bridging bars installed according to manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including stud kickers, web stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, fasteners, and stud girts, to provide a complete and stable wall-framing system.

3.5 TRUSS INSTALLATION

A. Install, bridge, and brace trusses according to Shop Drawings and requirements in this Section.

B. Truss Spacing: As indicated.

C. Do not alter, cut, or remove framing members or connections of trusses.

D. Erect trusses with plane of truss webs plumb and parallel to each other, align, and accurately position at spacings indicated.

E. Erect trusses without damaging framing members or connections.

F. Align webs of bottom chords and load-bearing studs or continuously reinforce track to transfer loads to structure. Anchor trusses securely at all bearing points.

G. Install continuous bridging and permanently brace trusses as indicated on Shop Drawings and designed according to LGSEA's Technical Note 551e, "Design Guide for Permanent Bracing of Cold-Formed Steel Trusses."


A. Testing: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Field and shop welds will be subject to testing and inspecting.

C. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect.

D. Remove and replace work where test results indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements.



E. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.


A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed cold-formed metal framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure that cold-formed metal framing is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.


TRL 0708 05500-1

SECTION 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Steel railings and guardrails. 2. Handrail brackets and handrails. 3. Steel ladders including elevator pit ladder. 4. Elevator sill support angles. 5. Steel gates at trash enclosure. 6. Drilled-in Anchors 7. All other miscellaneous angles, channels, tubes and plates as indicated and

required. B. Products Supplied But Not Installed Under This Section: 1. Anchor bolts and weld plates for anchoring metal fabrications installed under

Section 03100 Concrete Forms and Accessories and Section 04810 Unit Masonry Assemblies

2. Steel angle lintels installed under Section 04810 Unit Masonry Assemblies 3. Railing sleeves installed under Section 03100 Concrete Forms and Accessories. 4. Steel bollards. C. Related Sections: 1. Structural Steel: Section 05120 Structural Steel 2. Field Painting: Section 09900 Paints and Coatings. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: See Section 01423. Comply with following: 1. Detailing, Fabrication and Erection of Steel: AISC Specification for Structural Steel

Buildings, 1989 Edition. 2. Fabrication, Delivery and Erection of Steel: AISC Code of Standard Practice for

Steel Buildings and Bridges. 3. Fabrication, Erection, and Dimensional Tolerances for Architecturally Exposed

Structural Steel: AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges, Section 10.

4. Welding: AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code - Steel. 5. Painting: SSPC Paint Application Specification No. 1 Shop, Field and Maintenance

Painting. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals in General: Comply with Section 01330. B. Product Data: Submit product data for all manufactured stock items specified under this

Section, including the following. 1. Expansion bolts. 2. Adhesive anchors.

TRL 0708 05500-2

C. Shop Drawings: Submit for all custom fabricated items under this Section. Include loose steel lintels, plates and welded steel opening frames.

1. Shop drawings shall clearly indicate the following: a. Profiles, sizes, spacing, and locations of members. b. Connections, attachments, and anchorages. c. Size and type of fasteners d. Finishes, coatings and shop painting. 2. Include erection drawings, elevations and details where applicable. 3. Indicate weld lengths and sizes. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welder Qualifications: Welding shall be performed only by certified welding operators

currently qualified in accordance with the testing procedures of AWS D1.1 for the weld types and positions required for the fabrications and installations indicated.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01600. 1. Store metals above ground on platforms, skids, or other supports. Protect metals

from corrosion. 2. Store other materials in weathertight and dry place, until ready for use. B. Materials to be installed by others: 1. Deliver anchor bolts and other anchorage devices that are embedded in cast-in-

place concrete or masonry construction to project site in time to be installed before start of cast-in-place concrete operations and masonry work.

2. Provide setting drawings, templates, and directions for installation of anchor bolts and other devices.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Steel Shapes, Bars and Plates: ASTM A36. B. Steel Pipe and Tubing: ASTM A53, Grade B, or A500, Grade B, minimum wall thickness 11

gage. C. Fasteners and Anchors: 1. Bolts: ASTM A307. 2. Nuts: ASTM A563. 3. Washers: ASTM F436. 4. Hooked Anchor Bolts and Threaded Rod Anchors: ASTM A36. 5. Expansion Bolts and Adhesive Anchors: Comply with Section 05100. D. Welding Materials for Steel: 1. Filler Metals for Welding: Meet requirements of AWS D1.1. a. Strength level: In accordance with AISC and AWS specifications for base

metals joined, weld type, and direction of applied load to weld. 2. Welding Electrodes: AWS 5.1 or A 5.5.

TRL 0708 05500-3

E. Headed Anchor Stud Connectors: Conform to ASTM A108. Studs shall be manufactured by Nelson Division of TRW, or approved substitute.

F. Shop Paint: 1. Steel Items to Receive Painted Finish or To Be Concealed in Completed Structure:

Steel Structures Painting Council Specification SSPC 11. 2.02 PIPE BOLLARDS A. Bollards: Six-inch diameter steel pipe, standard weight, Schedule 40 black iron. 1. Concrete Base and Fill: Supplied under Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete and

installed with concrete rounded at top under Division 2 Site Construction. 2. Size, Height and Embedment: As indicated on Drawings. 2.03 STEEL LINTELS A. Steel Lintels: All masonry openings 16" in width and over shall have lintels. Provide loose

steel lintels except where masonry lintels are indicated on Drawings. 1. Sizes and Bearing Lengths: See Lintel Schedule on Structural Drawings. 2. Weld or bolt members together where indicated to form complete assembly.

Where welds will be exposed in the completed installation, provide continuous welds and grind flush.

2.04 DRILLED-IN ANCHORS A. Expansion Anchors: Wedge type, complete with required nuts, washers and

manufacturer's installation instructions. Sizes as indicated on Drawings. 1. Interior Use: For use in conditioned environments free from potential moisture

provide carbon steel anchors conforming to ASTM A510 with zinc plating in accordance with ASTM B633.

2. Exterior or Exposed Use: In exposed or potentially wet environments and for attachment of exterior cladding materials, provide stainless steel anchors. Stainless steel anchors shall be Series 300 stainless steel bolts with Series 300 or Type 18-8 stainless steel nuts and washers.

3. Where anchor manufacturer is not indicated, subject to compliance with requirements and acceptance by the Architect, provide one of the following:

a. Hilti Inc. Kwik-Bolt II. b. ITW Ramset/Red Head Red Head Wedge Anchor. c. Powers Rawl Fastening Systems Power-Bolt. d. Approved substitute in accordance with Section 01600. B. Adhesive Anchors: Threaded steel rod, complete with required nuts, washers, epoxy or

ester-based adhesive system and manufacturer's installation instructions. Type and size as indicated on Drawings.

1. Interior Use: For use in conditioned environments free from potential moisture provide threaded carbon steel rods conforming to ASTM A36.

2. Exterior or Exposed Use: In exposed or potentially wet environments and for attachment of exterior cladding materials, provide stainless steel anchors. Stainless steel anchors shall be Series 300 stainless steel threaded rods with Series 300 or Type 18-8 stainless steel nuts and washers.


TRL 0708 05500-4

a. Hilti Inc. HAS or HIT threaded rods. HVA or HIT HY-150 Adhesive Anchorage System for anchorage to concrete or stone. HIT HY-20 Adhesive system for anchorage to brick or concrete masonry.

b. Powers Rawl Fastening Systems Straight Cut Anchor Rod with Power-Fast Cartridge System.

c. Approved substitute in accordance with Section 01600. C. Drop-In Anchors: Flush or shell type, complete with required nuts, washers and




a. Hilti Inc. HDI Anchors. b. Approved substitute in accordance with Section 01600. D. Sleeve Anchors: Flush or shell type, complete with required nuts, washers and




a. Hilti Inc. Sleeve Anchors. b. Approved substitute in accordance with Section 01600. 2.05 FABRICATION A. Shop Assembly: Fabricate custom metal fabrications as indicated, scheduled or listed in

Article 1.01. 1. Fabricate in accordance with details and accepted shop drawings. 2. Provide miscellaneous items of metal work indicated or as necessary to complete

work. 3. Materials: New stock of types and sizes indicated. 4. Make cuts clean and sharp with wire edges ground smooth. Provide straight, rigid,

and tight work, free from defects. 5. Close exposed ends of steel pipe or tubing with welded caps. 6. Verify dimensions on site prior to shop fabrication. 7. Fabricate items with joints neatly fitted and properly secured. 8. Fit and shop assemble, in largest practical sections, for delivery to site. 9. Exposed mechanical fastenings shall be flush, countersunk screws or bolts,

unobtrusively located, consistent with design of structure, except where specifically noted otherwise.

10. Make exposed joints flush butt-type, hairline joints where mechanically fastened. 11. Supply components required for proper anchorage of metal fabrications. Fabricate

anchorage and related components of same material and finish as metal fabrication, unless otherwise specified or detailed.

12. Welding: AWS D1.1. Miter and cope intersections and weld all around. Remove splatter, grind exposed welds to blend and contour surfaces to match those adjacent.

13. Substitutions: Where exact sizes and weights called for are not available, secure Architect's acceptance of suitable sizes prior to proceeding.

TRL 0708 05500-5

B. Steel Railings: 1. Material: 1-1/2" i.d. round pipe unless otherwise indicated. 2. Fabricate to lines, levels and patterns as indicated. 3. Joints: Cut, miter and weld all joints. Fill and grind smooth. 4. Insert into steel sleeves or epoxy mortar at Contractor's option. C. Steel Ladders: 1. Comply with ANSI 14.3. 2. Provide 1/2" x 2-1/2" continuous structural steel flat bar side rails with eased edges

spaced 18" apart. Provide 3/4" diameter solid structural steel bar rungs with non-slip finish, spaced 12" o.c. Fit rungs in centerline of side rails, plug weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces.

3. Support ladder at top and bottom and at intermediate points not over 5' o.c. with welded steel brackets with minimum of 7" clearance from wall to centerline of rungs. Extend rails 42" above top rung or maximum surrounding structure allows and return rails to wall. Provide fasteners appropriate to substrate.

D. Trash Enclosure Gates: 1. Framing: Fabricate of steel pipe, tubes, plates and sheet panels as indicated. 2. Posts: Four inch square by 1/4-inch thick steel tubes. Fill tube with concrete after

installation. 3. Pickets: See Section 06200 Finish Carpentry 3. Hardware Materials: Galvanized steel or malleable iron shapes to suit gate size. 4. Hinges: Structurally capable of supporting gate leaf and live load of 200 lbs applied

at end of leaf cantilever. Allow opening and closing without binding. The hinges shall not twist or turn under the action of the gate. The gate shall be capable of being opened and closed easily by one person. Install in such a manner as to prevent removal of gate by lift-off manner.

5. Double Gates: Provide locking device and padlock eyes as an integral part of latch, requiring one padlock for locking both leaves.

a. Padlock: By Owner. b. Locking device shall be constructed so that the center drop rod or plunger bar

cannot be raised when locked. 6. Field Finish: Field paint in accordance with Section 09900. 2.06 SHOP FINISHES A. Shop Priming: 1. Surface Preparation: After fabrication and shop assembly, clean off all loose rust,

loose mill scale and weld spatter, slag or flux deposits in accordance with SSPC procedures as follows:

a. Surfaces to be concealed in the Completed Structure: SP-3 power tool cleaning.

b. Surfaces to be exposed in the Completed Structure: SP-6 commercial blast cleaning.

2. Paint Application: Shop coat fabricated items with shop paint in accordance with SSPC-PA-1.

a. Omit shop paint on surfaces to be enclosed in concrete and surfaces to be field welded.

b. Shop Paint Thickness: 2.5 dry film mils. B. Galvanizing: ASTM A653, G90 Class minimum. Provide corrosion resistant galvanized

coating on indicated or specified steel items after fabrication and shop assembly.

TRL 0708 05500-6

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Weld or bolt items securely in place or otherwise fasten as indicated on the drawings or

accepted shop drawings. Include items indicated, scheduled or listed in Article 1.01. B. Install items square and level, accurately fitted and free from distortion or defects. C. Field Welds: Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1. 1. Painted Fabrications: Grind smooth and touch up with compatible primer. 2. Galvanized Fabrications: After installation, grind and touch-up field welds and

scratched and damaged galvanized surfaces. Use a primer recommended for galvanized surfaces.

D Drilled-In Anchors and Inserts: Install drilled-in anchors and inserts in accordance with

manufacturer's recommendations in accurately drilled holes of required diameter and depth.

1. Adhesive Anchors: Thoroughly clean drill hole of all debris and drill dust prior to installation of insert and adhesive.

2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until material has achieved full design strength.

E. Steel Gates: 1. Gate posts: Embed posts in concrete as indicated. Check each post for vertical

and top alignment and maintain in position during placement and finishing operations.

2. Install gates plumb, level and secure for full opening without interference. 3. Attach hardware securely and to prevent unauthorized removal. 4. Adjust hardware for smooth operation. 3.02 CLEANING A. Aluminum: 1. After installation is completed, wash thoroughly using clean water and soap. Rinse

with clean water. 2. Do not use acid solution, steel wool or other harsh abrasives. 3.03 ADJUSTMENTS A. Repair of Defective Work: Remove stained or otherwise defective work. Replace with

new material. END OF SECTION

TRL 0708 05511-1

SECTION 05511 METAL STAIRS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Pan tread channel stringer stairs and ships ladders. 2. Pre-engineered steel stairs. B. Related Sections: 1. Concrete Pan Fill: Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete. 2. Miscellaneous Metals: Section 05500 Metal Fabrications. 3. Field Finish: Section 09900 Paints and Coatings. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards. See Section 01423. Comply with following: 1. Steel: AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges,

Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel. 2. Welding: AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code - Steel. 3. Stairways: Standard construction details of "Metal Stairs Manual" of the National

Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers, latest edition. 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design Criteria: 1. Steel Stairs: Capable of carrying indicated live loads. 2. Stair Fabricator: Responsible for structural design of members as required to carry

live and dead loads. 3. Structural Calculations: Available to Architect on request. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Section 01330. B. Certificates: Submit certification that specified surface preparation and primer have

been applied to steel items to receive high performance coating under Section 09900. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welder Qualifications: Currently qualified according to AWS D1.1. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01600.

TRL 0708 05511-2

B. Materials to be installed by others: 1. Deliver anchor bolts and other anchorage devices that are embedded in cast-in-

place concrete or masonry construction to project site in time to be installed before start of cast-in-place concrete operations and masonry work.

2. Provide setting drawings, templates, and directions for installation of anchor bolts and other devices.

C. Delivery and Storage: 1. Store metals above ground on platforms, skids, or other supports. Protect steel from

corrosion. 2. Store other materials in weathertight and dry place, until ready for use. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. General: Comply with Section 05500. 2.02 STEEL STAIRS A. Pan Tread Channel Stringer Stairs: Shop fabricated. 1. Design Criteria: Engineered by the fabricator to carry 100 psf live load. 2. Reference Standard: Construct in conformity with standard construction details of

Metal Stairs Manual, National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers, latest edition.

3. Stair Components: Stair runs and platforms as indicated. 4. Tread and Platform Pans: 10 gage steel. 2.5 lb. minimum self-furring lath tack

welded to pans immediately before concrete fill is placed. 5. Risers: 10 ga steel closed type. 6. Concrete Fill: See Section 03300. 7. Handrails: As indicated and in compliance with Section 05500. 2.03 PRE-ENGINEERED STEEL STAIRS (CONTRACTOR’S OPTION) A. Manufacturers: 1. The Sharon Companies LTD. 2. Metal Service Co. Stairco 3. American Stair Speed Stair 4. Accepted Substitute B. Design Criteria: Engineered by the fabricator to carry 100 psf liveload. C. Construction: Standard manufacturer's components. 1. Stringers: Steel channel. 2. Treads: Pan type for concrete fill. 3. Risers: Closed 4. Landings: Pan type for concrete fill. 5. Concrete Fill: See Section 03300. 6. Handrails: As indicated by stair manufacturer.

TRL 0708 05511-3

2.04 PAINTING A. Materials: 1. Primer: 10-99. No substitutes. B. Preparation: 1. Steel Structures Painting Council SSPC-SP3 Power Tool Cleaning. C. Shop Painting: 1. Spray-apply to uniform dry film thickness of 2.0-3.0 mils, free of runs, sags or other

defects. Omit shop primer within 2" of field-welded connections, compression joint surfaces, steel embedded in concrete and steel to be covered by spray on fireproofing.

D. Field Painting: Following grinding of field welded connections to exposed steel work,

field apply primer of same type and thickness as shop primer. Touch up all primer removed or damaged during erection.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: Weld or bolt items securely in place or otherwise fasten as indicated on the

drawings or accepted Shop Drawings. 1. Field Welds: Grind smooth and touch up with red primer. B. Stairs: Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. END OF SECTION

TRL 0708 06100-1

DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes:

1. Roofing and flashing blocking. 2. Partition blocking. 3. Miscellaneous blocking and supports. 4. Miscellaneous wood sheathing. 5. Rough hardware. 6. Fire-retardant treatment.

B. Products Supplied But Not Installed Under This Section: 1. Anchors Cast into Concrete or Masonry for Anchorage of Wood: Install under

Section 03100 Concrete Forms and Accessories or Section 04810 Unit Masonry Assemblies.

C. Related Sections:

1. Finish Carpentry: Section 06200. 2. Custom Cabinets: Section 06410. 3. Gypsum Sheathing: Section 09253. 4. Mechanical and Electrical Blockouts: Division 15 Mechanical and Division 16

Electrical. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards. See Section 01420. Comply with the following: 1. Wood Framing: Comply with requirements of the 2003 International Building Code

and ANSI/AF&PA NDS-2001 National Design Specification for Wood Construction, as published by the American Wood Council of the American Forest and Paper Association.

2. Lumber: Grading Rules for Lumber, latest edition, as published by Western Wood Products Association.

3. Plywood: U.S. Department of Commerce Product Standard PS 1-95 - Construction and Industrial Plywood.

4. Performance Rated Wood Sheathing Panels: a. APA PRP-108 - Performance Standards and Policies for Structural-Use Panels. b. U.S. Department of Commerce Product Standard PS 2-92 – Performance

Standard for Wood-Based Structural-Use Panels. 5. Treatment: a. AWPA C20 – Structural Lumber – Fire-Retardant Treatment by Pressure Process. b. AWPA C27- Plywood – Fire-Retardant Treatment by Pressure Process.

TRL 0708 06100-2

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Grade Stamps: 1. Lumber: Each piece shall be WWPA or WCLIB grade stamped. 2. Wood Sheathing: Each panel shall be identified with the grade trademark of the

APA. B. Treatment Labels: Label each piece of treated lumber. 1. Fire Treated Lumber: UL labels. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General Requirements: Comply with Section 01600. B. Storage: Stack all materials minimum of 6 inches above ground to ensure proper

ventilation and cover with waterproofing covering. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 WOOD MATERIALS A. General Requirements: 1. Lumber: Sound, thoroughly seasoned, surfaced four sides, well manufactured and

free from warp not correctable by bridging, blocking or nailing. 2. Moisture Content: Provide dry lumber as defined by the American Softwood

Lumber Standard PS 20, with moisture content limited to maximum 19 percent moisture content, graded S-DRY, KD or KD-HT, as documented by grade stamp.

3. Dimension Lumber Noted on Drawings to be Non-Combustible: Fire retardant treated with chloride salts.

B. Blocking, Furring and Miscellaneous Dimension Lumber: Douglas Fir-Larch. Standard

Grade or Better. 1. Blocking in Contact with Roofing Membrane: Pressure treated with preservative. 2. Seasoning (Up to Two Inches): 19% or less moisture content. 3. Interior Blocking: Fire retardant treated with chloride salts. C. Sheathing: APA Rated Sheathing EXP 1. 1. Thickness: As indicated. 2.02 TREATMENT A. Preservative Treatment of Dimension Lumber: All blocking in contact with roof

membrane, exterior plates, posts embedded in concrete, and blocking and plates in contract with concrete or masonry shall be pressure preservative treated.

1. Acceptable Products: Osmose NatureWood Preservative or accepted substitute. 2. Type: Waterborne, alkaline copper quaternary preservative system with co-biocide,

registered by EPA as a non-restricted use pesticide. 3. Minimum Preservative Retention: a. Plates and Blocking: 0.40 lbs of preservative per cubic foot of wood. 4. Water Repellent Additive: Required. 5. Treated Wood: Kiln-dried after treatment.

TRL 0708 06100-3

B. Fire Retardant Treated Plywood: All sheathing required to be fire retardant-treated shall be pressure-treated in accordance with AWPA Standard C27.

1. Each panel shall be labeled or marked by an approved independent testing agency.

2. After treatment, plywood shall be dried to an average moisture content of 15 percent or less.

2.03 FASTENERS, ANCHORS AND HARDWARE A. General: Provide necessary bolts, screws, nails, clips, plates, straps, hangers, etc.

necessary for completion of rough carpentry. Provide correct material of proper size and strength for purpose intended conforming to specifications, drawings and applicable building codes. Supply anchors to be cast into concrete and masonry for anchorage of wood for installation under other Sections.

B. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A307. C. Exterior Applications: Provide fasteners hot dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM

A153. D. Fasteners for Use in Pressure Treated Wood: One of the following: 1. Stainless steel. 2. Steel, hot-dip galvanized to G185 in accordance with ASTM A653. 3. Steel, Batch/Post Hot-Dip Galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153. 4. Steel, mechanically galvanized to Class 55 or greater in accordance with ASTM

B695. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Verify that surfaces to receive rough carpentry are prepared

to required grades and dimensions. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Perform in substantial manner consistent with accepted standards of carpentry

trade. 2. Framing: Erect plumb, level and true and rigidly anchor in place. Cut framing

square on bearings, closely fit, accurately set to required lines and levels. 3. Nail or spike members in accordance with IBC and General Structural Notes on

drawings. 4. Framing: 16" o.c. unless otherwise indicated. 5. Shims: Do not use shims for leveling on wood or metal bearings. Use steel shims with

full bearing on masonry or concrete. 6. Metal Framing Anchors: Install where required for proper connections in

accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Anchors: Unless otherwise indicated, bolt plates firmly to concrete or masonry with 3/8" x

12" (3" horizontal leg) anchor bolts, 2'-0" o.c. or use powder-actuated fastening system. 1. Size and Spacing: Accepted by Architect.

TRL 0708 06100-4

C. Sheathing: Install panels continuous over two or more spans with face grain perpendicular to supports with end joints supported. Stagger ends of adjacent sheets four feet where possible.

3.03 WOOD BLOCKING AND MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER REQUIRED FOR WORK OF OTHER

SECTIONS A. General: Cooperate with other trades. Provide required grounds, blocking, wood

backing and framing. Perform necessary cutting and patching of rough carpentry work as required.

B. Interior Blocking: Install blocking of size required for support of handrails, toilet and bath

accessories, wall-mounted door stops, wall cabinets and other wall-mounted accessory items. Set true to line, level or plumb well secured in stud wall and flush with back of drywall or other wall finish.

C. Roof Curbs: Install blocking and framing as indicated for curbs at roof openings and

rooftop mechanical units. END OF SECTION

TRL 0708 06200-1

SECTION 06200

FINISH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Interior: a. Wood trim. b. Shelf and rod in living unit closets. B. Related Sections: 1. Blocking: Section 06100 Rough Carpentry. 2. Cabinets and Casework: Section 06410 Custom Cabinets. 3. Wood Doors: Section 08210 Wood Doors. 4. Finish: Section 09900 Paints and Coatings. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: See Section 01423. Comply with following: 1. Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) – Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards,

7th edition, Version 1.2, 1999. a. Comply with Custom Grade if not otherwise specified. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Finish Carpentry: Woodwork requiring smooth finish and exposed to view but not

considered as cabinets or casework. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Section 01330 Submittals. 1. Include conformance to required reference standard. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with: 1. Wood Ceiling: Class 1 material, 0-25 flame spread, Kopper's exterior fire treatment. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01600. 1. Do not deliver material until building or storage area is enclosed and sufficiently dry

to prevent damage from excessive changes in moisture content.

TRL 0708 06200-2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 INTERIOR MATERIALS A. Trim Material: Ponderosa pine, select kiln-dried. 1. Grade: C Select or Better. 2. Moisture Content: 15% or less. B. Shelf and Rod for Closets: 1. Support: K&V #1195. 2. Rod: K&V #770-1. 3. Shelf: Plywood with wood edge, AWI Custom Grade 4. Finish: Painted finish under Section 09900. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Comply with Section 01600: 1. Layout: Verify layout of work before beginning installation. 2. Blocking: Ensure proper blocking provided under Section 06100. 3. Existing Conditions: Examine substrate before beginning installation. 4. Notification: Notify General Contractor of unsatisfactory conditions in writing with

copy to Architect. B. Acceptance: Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions by installer. 3.02 INTERIOR MATERIALS INSTALLATION A. General: All installations AWI Custom Grade unless otherwise specified. B. Interior Finish: AWI Custom Grade: 1. Lengths: Wherever possible, provide single piece for each length of finish. Butt joints

not allowed except for long pieces or room molds that may be in two or more sections. When butt joints are necessary, bevel joints.

2. General: Install interior finish level, plumb and true. 3. Securing: Tightly secure to bracing with nails, screws, glue, etc. Blind nail wherever

possible. Where surface nailing is necessary, use finish nails carefully set with nail punch.

4. Trim Finishing Against Walls or Ceiling: Mill with extra width and scribe to wall or ceiling at job.

5. Edges: Except where molded, mill trim with perfectly square edges. After erection, slightly round exposed edges by sanding as directed.

6. Interior Finish: Hand smooth ready for finish under Section 09900 free from machine or tool marks or any roughness.

7. Replacement: Replace any interior finish bearing hammer marks, splits, cracks, mars or defects of any nature.

C. Shelf and Rod: AWI Custom Grade. Install as indicated and in accordance with

manufacturer's recommendations. END OF SECTION

TRL 0708 06410-1

SECTION 06410 CUSTOM CABINETS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Lavatory Counters 2. Cabinets and Countertops B. Related Sections: 1. Wood Blocking: Section 06100 Rough Carpentry. 2. Wood Trim: Section 06200 Finish Carpentry. 3. Wood Doors: Section 08210. 4. Rubber Base: Section 09650 Resilient Flooring. 5. Job Finish: Section 09900 Paints and Coatings. 6. Plumbing Fixtures: Division 15. 7. Stone Countertops: Section 09384. 8. Cultured Marble Countertops: Section06416. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: See Section 01423. Comply with following: 1. Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) – Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards,

7th edition, Version 1.2, 1999. a. Comply with custom grade if not otherwise specified. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Architectural Woodwork: Custom fabricated cabinets and casework. Other woodwork

not considered as cabinets and casework is considered finish carpentry and is specified under Section 06200.

1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Section 01330. B. Samples: Submit complete set of plastic laminate samples for color selection in

accordance with Section 01330. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01600. 1. Do not deliver material until building or storage area is enclosed and sufficiently dry

to prevent damage from excessive changes in moisture content.

TRL 0708 06410-2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Plastic Laminate: 1. Manufacturers: a. Formica Corp. b. Wilsonart c. Nevamar d. Pionite e. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01600. 2. Type: Formica General Purpose Grade 10/HGS. a. Vertical Surfaces: May be Vertical Grade 55VGS. 3. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s standards. B. Particleboard: Matte formed wood particleboard, 40-45# density industrial grade with

sealer and lacquer finish. 1. Cabinet Interiors: Willamette Industries Kortran II Cabinet Liner, acrylic coated 45-

47# density industrial particleboard. C. Trim Material: Red or white birch, select kiln-dried vertical grain. 1. Grade: AWI Custom Grade. 1. Grade: C Select or Better. 2. Moisture Content: 15% or less. D. Plywood: Medium density overlay for paint finish. E. Cabinet Hardware Manufacturers: 1. Hinges: a. Blum b. Grass c. Hettich d. Mepla e. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01600. 2. Pulls and Catches: a. Stanley b. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01600. 3. Drawer Glides: a. Accuride b. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01600. 4. Adjustable Shelf Hardware: a. Knape and Vogt b. Stanley c. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01600. F. Cabinet Hardware: Furnished and installed by the cabinet supplier: 1. Schedule:

TRL 0708 06410-3

Type Manufacturer Catalog No. Finish Hinges Blum Modul 90 176° Nickel Plated Hinges Stanley 332 26D Pulls Stanley 4483 26D Catches Stanley SP46 28 Heavy Duty Drawer Glides

Accuride No. 2832 full extension slide with latch (100 pounds/pair)

Zinc

Regular Drawer Glides Accuride No. 2632 full extension slide (50 pounds/pair)

Zinc

Brackets for Shelves Knape & Vogt 256 Zinc Standards for Shelves Knape & Vogt 255 Zinc

2. Locks: Provide disc tumbler cam type locks for all drawers and doors. Key alike or

differently as selected by Architect, master keyed. Provide two keys per lock. 2.02 FABRICATION A. AWI Grade: Construct counters and cabinets as indicated on drawings and as required

for AWI Custom Grade work. B. Construction: Frame counters in substantial manner with necessary blocking, braces,

etc. 1. Supports Under Countertops: Sufficiently heavy to carry weight of 200# man without

sagging. 3. Frames: Pinned, glued, or screwed together in accordance with AWI Custom

Grade standards. 4. Provide full subtops under stone countertops.

C. Countertops Covered with Plastic Laminate: Constructed of particleboard. Provide

backsplashes and self-edge all exposed edges. D. Cabinets: 1. Provide and install hardware as specified. 2. Construct shelving, counters, cabinets and casework with plastic laminate covered

particleboard. Use Kortran at interiors. 3. Frame cabinets and casework in a substantial manner with necessary blocking,

braces, bottoms, etc. a. Cross Supports Under Countertops: Sufficiently heavy to carry weight of 200#

man without sagging. b. Frames: Pinned, glued or screwed together in accordance with AWI Custom

Grade Standards. 4. Construction Type: Flush overlay (not lipped). 5. Cabinet Doors: Types, sizes and thicknesses indicated. 6. Cabinet Backs Not Exposed to View: Hardboard.

TRL 0708 06410-4

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Comply with Section 01600: 1. Layout: Verify layout of work before beginning installation. 2. Blocking: Ensure proper blocking provided under Section 06100. 3. Existing Conditions: Examine spaces and substrate before beginning installation. 4. Notification: Notify General Contractor of unsatisfactory conditions in writing with

copy to Architect. B. Acceptance: Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions by installer. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Counters: Construct supports for counters as indicated. 1. Securely attach counters to walls plumb and level. 2. Sinks and Trim: Provided and installed under Division 15. B. Cabinets: 1. Bases: Construct cabinet bases for cabinets as indicated and securely anchor to

floor. 2. Cabinets: Securely attach cabinets to bases and walls with cabinets plumb and

level and hardware operating properly, ready for finish under Section 09900. 3. Rubber Base: Provided on base cabinets under Section 09650 after cabinets are set

in place. 4. Sinks and Trim: Provided and installed under Division 15. END OF SECTION

TRL 0708 06416-1

SECTION 06416 LAVATORY COUNTERTOPS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Cultured marble guest room and suite lavatory countertops including integral

countertop, back and end splashes. B. Related Sections: 1. Plumbing Trim and Sinks: Division 15 Mechanical. 2. Casework: Section 06410. 3. Stone Countertops: Section 09384. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing full size details, sections, dimensions,

jointing, bonding, anchoring, connections to other work and other pertinent details and notes.

B. Samples: Sample sections 12" square shall be submitted to Architect. Samples shall show

color, shading and variation, and only lavatory countertops equal to or exceeding standard samples will be accepted as determined by the Architect.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: All lavatory countertops shall be in accordance with Cultured

Marble Institute Standards IS2-76. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Comply with Section 01600. Deliver and store in original crates under cover. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 LAVATORY COUNTERTOPS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Mathews Marble, Inc., Bridgeville, PA 2. Approved Substitute All lavatory countertops produced by a single manufacturer. B. Materials and Fabrication: 1. Lavatory countertops shall be molded of reconstituted (synthetic) marble, and shall

be complete with openings for plumbing fixtures, backsplash, large end splashes and aprons.

2. Aprons shall be molded of same material as, and shall be factory assembled to, lavatory countertops. Method of assembly shall be manufacturer's standard;

TRL 0708 06416-2

however, screws and other devices used in assembly shall not show in finish surfaces exposed to view.

3. Surfaces exposed to view shall have smooth polished finish with Gel Coat Finish. C. Color: Selected by Architect from manufacturer’s standard. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install all lavatory countertops plumb, level and true in accordance with the drawings

and approved shop drawings ready for connection by other trades. Supporting construction for all components will be furnished by other trades.

B. Mastic, as indicated on the drawings, shall be a two (2) part epoxy, compatible with a

synthetic marble and the mixing ratio shall be one to one (1 to 1). C. The patching or hiding of defects will not be permitted and components with chips,

stains, blemishes, cracks, pits, etc. shall be corrected by redressing, cleaning or replacing with new material.

D. See plumbing drawings and Section 06100 Rough Carpentry. Where lavatory

backsplashes and sides contact walls, apply silicone antibacterial caulking. 3.02 CLEANING Lavatory countertops and components, after installation, shall be completely cleaned in

accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION

TRL 0708 07111-1

DIVISION 7 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION SECTION 07111 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Dampproofing on outside of exterior concrete foundation walls. Extend

dampproofing from bottom of footing to 6" below finish grade. 2. Dampproofing on outside of elevator pit walls. Extend dampproofing from bottom

of walls to bottom of main floor slab. B. Related Sections: 1. Backfilling: Section 02300 Earthwork. 1.02 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01600. Deliver in manufacturer's original unopened

containers and store at a temperature of 50°F. 1.03 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: Do not apply if air temperature or surface temperature is

below 40° F. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 DAMPPROOFING A. Products: 1. Karnak No. 100 2. Sonneborn-Contech Hydrocide 600 3. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01600. B. Primer: ASTM D41-78 C. Mastic: Heavy bodied bituminous compound. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Comply with Section 01600. 1. Existing Conditions: Examine substrate before beginning installation. 2. Surfaces: Verify substrate is smooth, free of major defects, cured and dry. 3. Notification: Notify General Contractor of unsatisfactory conditions by applicator.

TRL 0708 07111-2

B. Acceptance: Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions by applicator.

3.02 PREPARATION A. Surfaces to be Dampproofed: Clean and smooth. Brush down surfaces to remove loose

scale, fins, dust, etc. 1. Prime surface and fill holes with mastic. 2. Penetrations Such as Pipes: Waterproof as follows: a. Pack space between pipe and pipe sleeve with mineral wool to within 1" of

face of wall. b. Fill 1" space with mastic. c. Place fiberglass membrane over opening and embed in suitable coating.

Carefully cut to fit around pipe and extend at least 6" onto solid material. d. Trowel coat over membrane patch with dampproofing. 3. Construction and Expansion Joints: a. Apply heavy coating of dampproofing. b. Follow with two plies of waterproof fiberglass membrane extended 6" each

side of joint with pronounced buckle or wrinkle in membrane over joint to permit movement without breaking membrane.

c. Follow with two heavy coats of dampproofing. 3.03 APPLICATION A. Brush or spray two coats of dampproofing at rates and by methods as recommended by

manufacturer to provide uninterrupted and impervious seal. Allow first coat to dry before applying second coat.

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Review: Provide ample notice for Architect to review completed installation before

covering. END OF SECTION

TRL 0708 07133-1

SECTION 07133 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET WATERPROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Membrane waterproofing at the following locations: 1. Under all sheet metal roofing. Cover all surfaces including ridges and valleys. 2. Elsewhere as indicated on the Drawings. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit in accordance with Section 01330. B. Quality Assurance Submittals: 1. Certificates: Submit manufacturer's written certification that applicator is approved

by manufacturer. 2. Manufacturer's Instructions: Submit in accordance with Section 01600. a. Submit one copy for Architect's information. b. Maintain one copy on site until completion of waterproofing installation. C. Quality Control Submittals: 1. Manufacturer’s Field Reports: See Article 3.04 MANUFACTURER’S FIELD SERVICES 2. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance: Submit in accordance with Section

01330. Certify application in accordance with Manufacturer’s instructions and specifications.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator: Company specializing in waterproofing. 1. Applicator: Manufacturer approved. 2. Experience: Continuously applied waterproofing in State of Colorado for three

years. B. Regulatory Requirements: Products shall be certified to meet the following. 1. VOC compliant with all applicable federal, state and local regulations. C. Pre-Installation Conference: 1. Roof Waterproofing Underlayment: Hold conference with General Contractor’s

Superintendent, roofing contractor, Manufacturer’s Representative, and waterproofing contractor’s foreman. Notify Architect of meeting at least 10 days in advance.

2. Discuss all matters pertaining to waterproofing, including detailing, surface preparation, application techniques and procedures, phasing and scheduling.

3. Take minutes and distribute to attending parties and Architect. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver materials to the site until ready for use. Deliver bonding adhesive and lap

sealant in manufacturer's original unopened containers.

TRL 0708 07133-2

B. Manufacturer's Recommendations: Comply with the following: 1. Store membrane no more than two pallets high off the ground. Provide cover on

top and sides, allowing for adequate ventilation. 2. Store only as much material at point of use as required for each day's work. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Do not install membrane waterproofing when air and

surface temperature is below 40 degrees F unless manufacturer's recommended special materials and methods are used.

1.06 WARRANTY A. Warranty: Provide two year written warranty covering material and installation in

accordance with Section 01780. 1. Warranty: Include watertight condition. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Self-Adhered Modified Bitumen Waterproofing Membrane Underlayment under Ten

Sheet Metal Roof: ASTM D1970-01. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers and Systems: a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing, Inc. – CCW WIP 403HR heat resistant roofing

underlayment. b. Grace Construction Products - Grace Ultra high temperature self-adhered

roofing underlayment system. c. Approved substitute in accordance with Section 01600. 2. Membrane: a. Grace Ultra high temperature, self-adhered roofing underlayment or approved

substitute by other acceptable manufacturer. b. Material: High strength polyethylene film coated on one side with a layer of

butyl rubber adhesive and inter-wound with a disposable release sheet. c. Nominal Thickness: 30 mils minimum. 3. Primer: Grace WP3000 primer or other VOC compliant primer by acceptable

waterproofing manufacturer. a. Cold Weather Primer: Grace B2 Primer or accepted substitute as

recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Comply with Section 01600: 1. Existing Conditions: Examine substrate before beginning installation. 2. Surfaces: a. Sheathing: Verify sheathing is clean, dry and ready for waterproofing

installation. b. Wood Blocking: Verify blocking is clean, dry and ready for waterproofing

installation. 3. Notification: Notify General Contractor of unsatisfactory conditions in writing with

copy to Architect.

TRL 0708 07133-3

B. Acceptance: Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions by installer. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: Remove projections, general surface dirt and other foreign

materials to leave surfaces in clean condition suitable for application of membrane. 1. Cleaning: Clean surfaces with high-pressure air to remove dust, loose stones and

debris. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. General: Apply in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Priming: 1. Prime surface at coverage of 250 to 350 sq. ft. per gallon. Apply with lambswool

roller. 2. Prime only area to be covered with membrane in one working day. 3. Allow primer to dry one hour or until tack free. 4. Reprime areas not covered with membrane within 24 hours. C. Corners: 1. Outside Corners: Double cover outside corners with initial strip of sheet membrane

11 inch minimum width centered on axis of corner. a. Completely cover this strip by regular application of sheet membrane. b. Outside Corners: Free of sharp edges. Inspect surfaces adjacent to corners

and repair if necessary to provide smooth dense surface. 2. Inside Corners: Provide fillet formed with epoxy mortar or latex modified cement

mortar and double coverage of membrane. Do not use fiber or wood cant strips. a. Alternate Method: Form fillet with liquid membrane Bituthene Liquid

Membrane and apply layer of sheet membrane. 3. Apply Bituthene Mastic over membrane seams within 12" of corners. D. Roof Application: 1. Apply membrane from low points to high points across fall line so that laps shed

water. Stagger end laps. 2. Roll entire membrane firmly and completely as soon as possible with linoleum roller

or standard water-filled garden roller less than 30" wide. Protect face of roller with resilient material such as 1/2" plastic foam or two wraps of indoor-outdoor carpet.

3. Seal end laps and T-joints at end of each workday. 4. Apply double thickness of membrane over properly sealed expansion, construction

and control joints. E. Drains and Protrusions: 1. Projections: Apply double layer of membrane around projections at least 6" in all

directions and seal terminations with Bituthene Mastic. 2. Drains: Apply double layer of membrane around drains and place bead of

Bituthene Mastic between top layer and clamping rings and at terminations. F. Terminations: Terminate by pressing very firmly to wall and finish with troweled bead of

Bituthene Mastic.

TRL 0708 07133-4

G. Sealing Seams: 1. Overlap seams at least 2-1/2". Apply succeeding sheet with minimum 2-1/2" overlap

and roll entire membrane firmly and completely as soon as possible to minimize bubbles caused by outgassing of air or water vapor from concrete.

2. Fishmouths: Slit and overlap flaps, repair with patch, press or roll to make seal, and seal edges of patch with troweled bead of Bituthene Mastic.

3. Misaligned or Inadequately Lapped Seams: Patch with sheet membrane. 4. Seal laps within 12" of corner details with troweling of Bituthene Mastic. 5. For vertical applications, use heavy hand pressure and seam roller on laps. 3.04 PROTECTION A. recommended by manufacturer. 3.05 MANUFACTURER’S FIELD SERVICES A. Field Services: Manufacturer’s representative shall be present during application of deck

and roof membrane. B. Manufacturer’s certification and warranty are required before final acceptance of

application. See Paragraph 1.02 C Quality Control Submittals. END OF SECTION

TRL 0708 07194-1

SECTION 07194 SILOXANE WATER REPELLENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Water repellent sealer on all exposed exterior face brick. B. Related Sections: 1. Face Brick: Section 04810 Unit Masonry Assemblies. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit in accordance with Section 01330 manufacturer's product

literature and specifications. B. Manufacturer's Application Instructions: Submit in accordance with Section 01600. 1. Submit one copy for Architect's information. 2. Maintain one copy on site until completion of water repellent application. C. Quality Control Submittals: 1. Manufacturer's Field Reports. See Article 3.04 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES. 2. Manufacturer's Certificate of Compliance: Submit in accordance with Section

01330. Certify application in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions and specifications.

3. Proof of Purchase: Applicator shall submit copies of purchasing documents indicating products and quantities for application on this project.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: Waterproofing contractor with minimum 2 years experience in

waterproofing applications. B. Regulatory Requirements: Product shall be certified to meet the following. 1. VOC compliant with all applicable federal, state and local regulations. C. Job Mock Up: Apply sealer to a selected 5-foot square area after masonry cleaning.

Confirm acceptable penetration on dense substrate surfaces. Obtain Architect's approval before proceeding.

1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver sealer materials in manufacturer's unopened containers and store at a

temperature of at least 50° F. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: 1. Do not apply if air temperature or temperature of surface to receive sealer is below

40 degrees F or above 95 degrees F.

TRL 0708 07194-2

2. Do not apply in rainy conditions. B. Sequencing/Scheduling: No sealer shall be applied until cleaning work is completed

and inspected and approved by the Architect. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Statement of Warranty: Submit in accordance with Section 01780.

Manufacturer shall warrant that product will prevent moisture penetration or seepage where applied in accordance with Manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Warranty period: Minimum 5 years. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. ProSoCo. 2. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01600. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Water Repellent Sealer: ProSoCo, Inc. Sure Klean Weather Seal Siloxane PD (Predilute) or

approved substitute. 1. Clear, non-staining. 2. Active Substance: Emulsion of silanes and oligomeric alkyl alkoxysiloxanes. 3. Total Solids and Active Ingredients by Weight: 7 percent. 4. VOC: Less than 200 grams per liter. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Comply with Section 01600. 1. Examine wall surfaces following cleaning to assure conditions are satisfactory for

application. 2. Existing Conditions: Examine before beginning installation. Verify that masonry joints

found unsound, hollow or otherwise defective have been raked out and pointed with mortar. Verify that cracks that exceed 1/64 inch wide have been filled with pointing mortar or sealant.

3. Notification: Notify General Contractor of unsatisfactory conditions in writing with copy to Architect.

B. Acceptance: Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions by installer. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Protect all adjacent surfaces from overspray. B. In hot, dry weather, apply light spray of water prior to application of sealer.

TRL 0708 07194-3

3.03 APPLICATION A. Apply using methods recommended by the Manufacturer. 1. Apply in two coats, saturating substrate from bottom of wall up, using low-pressure

airless spray equipment. 2. Apply sufficient material to create a 4-inch to 8-inch rundown below the spray

contact point. B. Coverage Rate: 1. Face Brick: Apply at 100 to 250 square feet per gallon. 3.04 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES A. Field Services: Manufacturer's representative shall test completed application for water

penetration resistance. In case of unsatisfactory test results, reapply sealer in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations. Manufacturer's certification and warranty are required before final acceptance of application. See Paragraph 1.02 B Quality Control Submittals.

END OF SECTION

TRL 0708 07210-1

SECTION 07210 BUILDING INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Rigid insulation at foundation perimeter. 2. Blanket Insulation as indicated. B. Related Sections: 1. Sound Insulation in Partitions: Section 09263 Gypsum Board Partitions and Walls. 2. Sound Insulation in Ceilings: Section 09264 Gypsum Board Ceilings. 1.02 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01600. Store insulation under cover to prevent weather

damage. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 RIGID INSULATION A. Foundation Insulation: ASTM C578, Type IV Rigid Extruded Polystyrene Insulation: 1. Products: a. Dow Styrofoam SM b. UC Industries Foamular 250 c. DiversiFoam Products CertiFoam d. PACTIV Building Products GreenGuard. e. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01600. 2. Thickness: 2" 3. Adhesive: As recommended by manufacturer. 2.02 BLANKET INSULATION A. Manufacturers: 1. Owens-Corning 2. Johns-Manville 3. CertainTeed Corp. 4. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01600. B. Insulation: Fiberglass blankets. 1. Thickness and R-Value: As indicated. 2. Width: As required to fit framing. 3. Facing: Foil faced. 4. Vapor Barrier: Four-mil polyethylene sheeting. C. Exposed Insulation: Insulation not installed substantially against the inside face of finish

materials shall not have combustible coverings. Exposed insulation shall be foil faced with flame spread rating of 25 or less in accordance with ASTM E84.

TRL 0708 07210-2

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Comply with Section 01600: 1. Existing Conditions: Examine before beginning installation. 2. Notification: Notify General Contractor of unsatisfactory conditions in writing with

copy to Architect. B. Acceptance: Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions by installer. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Rigid Insulation: Install insulation board in as large sections as possible in order to minimize

joints. Apply board to backing using adhesive methods recommended by manufacturer.

B. Blanket or Batt Insulation: Install insulation according to manufacturer's

recommendations. Fit tight to adjoining work and adjoining insulation so that completely tight enclosure free from open joints, holes, cracks and voids is achieved. Attach insulation in place in manner insuring stability and to eliminate sagging.

1. Faced Blankets: Secure flanges to framing for leak free barrier. END OF SECTION

TRL 0708 07240-1

SECTION 07240 EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Cement board stucco system. B. Related Sections: 1. Gypsum Sheathing: Section 09253. 2 Calking: Section 07920 Joint Sealants. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit in accordance with Section 01330. Include manufacturer's

specifications and application instructions. B. Samples: Submit 2'x 2' samples of each type of color and texture for acceptance in

accordance with Section 01330. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: Factory approved and trained. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01600. 1. Delivery: Deliver materials in original unopened containers and store off ground and

under cover. 2. Storage: Store at temperatures not less than 40°F. 3. Storage: Protect metal accessories from rusting during storage. 4. Rusted and water damaged materials subject to rejection. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Cold Weather Protection: a. Do not apply materials to surfaces frozen or containing frost. Do not use frozen

materials. b. If artificial heat is used, locate heater to prevent concentration of heat or

fumes on finish surface. c. Do not apply if ambient temperature is less than 40°F. Maintain this

temperature 48 hours prior to application, during application, and for 24 hours after application.

d. Provide temporary heat and enclosure if necessary. 2. Hot Weather Protection: Protect against uneven or excessive evaporation during

dry hot weather and from strong blasts of dry air, either natural or artificial.

TRL 0708 07240-2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SYNTHETIC STUCCO SYSTEM A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Senergy, LLC 2. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01600. B. System: Senergy Cement-Board Stucco 500 system. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Cement Board: 7/16" Wonderboard or 1/2" USG Durock. B. Base Coat: Senerflex Alpha Genie 100% acrylic base coat. C. Reinforcing Mesh: Senerflex Self Adhering Mesh. 1. Corners: Senerflex Corner Grid. D. Finish: Senerlastic Plus.

1. Texture: Fine. 2. Color: Selected by Architect.

E. Cement: ASTM C150-85 Portland cement Type I. F. Water: Clear and potable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Comply with Section 01600: 1. Existing Conditions: Examine substrate before beginning installation. 2. Notification: Notify General Contractor of unsatisfactory conditions in writing with

copy to Architect. B. Acceptance: Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions by

applicator. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Protection: Provide drapes, drop cloths and other protection required to protect

adjacent surfaces from damage during finish operations. B. Cement Board: Apply over gypsum sheathing using mechanical fasteners spaces as

recommended by cement board manufacturer. C. Tape joints as recommended. No joints allowed at corners of windows or other openings.

Cut from one piece around corners..

TRL 0708 07240-3

3.03 INSTALLATION A. General: Install base coat, reinforcing mesh, trim and finish coat in accordance with

manufacturer's recommendations. B. Base Coat: Apply 1/16" coat of adhesive and immediately embed reinforcing mesh into

wet adhesive and smooth surface until mesh is not visible. Lap mesh edges 2-1/2". Allow to dry 24 hours.

C. Finish Coat: Apply with clean stainless trowel in continuous operation without cold joints

in color and texture to match accepted sample. 1. Form to special shapes and lines as indicated. 3.04 CLEANING A. Cleaning: Clean adjacent surfaces splattered with synthetic plaster. END OF SECTION

TRL 0708 07261-1

SECTION 07261 UNDERSLAB VAPOR RETARDER PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Continuous vapor retarder under interior slabs on grade. 2. Granular protection layer over vapor retarder in crawl space. B. Related Sections: 1. Subgrade Preparation and Compaction of Granular Base: Section 02300 Earthwork. 2. Concrete Floor Slabs-on-Grade: Section 03300 Cast-in-Place Concrete. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: See Section 01423. Comply with following. 1. ASTM E1643-98 – Standard Practice for Installation of Water Vapor Retarders Used in

Contact with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs. 2. ASTM E1745-97 (2004) – Standard Specification for Water Vapor Retarders Used in

Contact with Soil or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs. B. Guide References and Standard Practices: 1. ACI 302.1R-04 Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals for Review: Submit the following in accordance with Section 01330 Submittal

Procedures: 1. Product Data: Submit copies of manufacturer's current catalog literature covering

all materials and accessories. Include installation instructions. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Contractor Qualification: Applicator shall have a minimum of two years experience on

equivalent projects. 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01600. B. Delivery: Deliver vapor retarder in original unopened manufacturer's containers with

labels intact. C. Storage: Protect vapor retarder from damage and keep dry.

TRL 0708 07261-2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 UNDERSLAB VAPOR RETARDER A. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products:

1. Floor Seal Technology, Inc., www.floorseal.com – TruBarrier, 12 mil virgin resin, co-extruded laminating, high density backing system with low-density white surface.

2. Fortifiber Corporation, www.fortifiber.com - Moistop Plus, consisting of a non-woven geo-textile laminated to a polymer film.

3. Raven Industries, Inc., - Dura-Skrim 8, consisting of a heavy-duty scrim reinforced vapor retarder laminated between two layers of polyethylene. 8-mil thickness.

4. Reef Industries, Inc., www.reefindustries.com - Griffolyn Type T-65, three-ply laminate consisting of two layers of polyethylene with a high strength cord grid reinforcement.

5. Stego Industries, LLC, www.stegoindustries.com - Stego Wrap Vapor Barrier, extruded 10-mil thickness polyolefin membrane manufactured with virgin resins.

6. W. R. Meadows, Inc., www.wrmeadows.com – Sealtight Vapor-Mat, 10-mil thickness polyethylene film.

B. Vapor Permeance: Maximum 0.10 perms, measured in accordance with ASTM E96,

Procedure A. C. Puncture Resistance: Minimum 475 grams when measured in accordance with ASTM

D1709, Method B. D. Joint Tape: Manufacturer's standard for vapor retarder product used. 2.03 GRANULAR PROTECTION LAYER OVER VAPOR RETARDER A. Compactible Granular Base Material For Placement Over Vapor Retarder: Clean, fine-

graded crusher fines or manufactured sand, having a uniform distribution of particle sizes ranging from the No. 4 through the No. 200 sieve, with 10 percent to 30 percent of particles passing a No. 100 sieve, and not contaminated with clay, silt or organic material.

B. Moisture Content: Minimum moisture content to meet compaction requirements. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Where vapor retarder is installed over grade, take care to obtain smooth level surface. B. If vapor barrier is to be placed over a rough granular soil or fill, place approximately ½

inch thickness of fine-graded base material over subgrade. Roll or compact to provide smooth and level surface without jagged material protruding that could puncture vapor retarder.

3.02 INSTALLATION A. Place vapor retarder under all new interior slabs on grade. Use widest practical width of

film.

TRL 0708 07261-3

B. Where laps are required, lap not less than 6 inches. Tape all seams in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. Carefully fit around service openings. Cut film around pipes and conduit piercing

retarder, and apply pressure sensitive tape to insure maximum barrier effectiveness. 3.03 ADJUSTMENT AND PROTECTION A. Floors: Repair any damage to film prior to placing concrete. END OF SECTION

TRL 0708 07270-1

SECTION 07270 AIR BARRIERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Continuous air infiltration barrier over gypsum sheathing at all areas behind brick

veneer. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit to the Architect copies of manufacturer's specifications covering

all materials and accessories. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Contractor Qualification: Applicator shall have a minimum of two years experience on

equivalent projects. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01600. Deliver in original unopened manufacturer's

containers with labels intact. Store in way protect from damage and keep dry. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturer: 1. DuPont Construction Products 2. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01600. B. Description: DuPont Tyvek Commercial Polyethylene reinforced Olefin Fabric. C. Joint Tape: As recommended by the manufacturer. D. Fasteners: Staples. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine substrate prior to beginning application to assure

that previous work is free from conditions that will adversely affect the execution and quality of work. Do not start work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

TRL 0708 07270-2

3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install sheets horizontally in shingle fashion. Staple to sheathing to hold in place. Lap all

joints as recommended by manufacturer and cut tight around all penetrations. B. Tape all joints and edges and around all penetrations to form a leak free barrier. END OF SECTION

TRL 0708 07538-1

SECTION 07538 FULLY ADHERED EPDM MEMBRANE ROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Rigid insulation. 2. Fully adhered EPDM single membrane roofing and base flashings. 3. Bonding adhesives, lap sealants, fasteners and other accessories. B. Related Sections: 1. Structural Roof Deck: Section 03300 Cast-in-Place Concrete. 2. Perimeter Nailer: Section 06100 Rough Carpentry. 3. Metal Flashing: Section 07600 Flashing and Sheet Metal. 4. Sheet Metal Roofing: Section 07610. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: See Section 01423. Comply with the following. B. American Society for Testing and Materials Standards: 1. ASTM C1289 – Specification for Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal

Insulation Board. 2. ASTM D1079 – Terminology Relating to Roofing, Waterproofing, and Bituminous

Materials. 3. ASTM D4637 – Specification for Vulcanized Rubber Sheet Used in Single-Ply Roof

Membrane. 4. ASTM E108 – Test Methods for Fire Tests of Roof Coverings. C. Factory Mutual Reference Standards: 1. FM 4470 – Approval Standard - Class 1 Roof Covers. 2. Loss Prevention Data 1-28 – Wind Loads to Roof Systems and Roof Deck

Securement, June 1998 edition. 3. Loss Prevention Data 1-29 – Above-Deck Roof Components, June 1998 edition. D. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Reference Standards: 1. UL Standard Specification 790 – Test Standard for Determining the Fire Retardancy

of Roof-covering Materials. 2. Roof Materials and Systems Directory. 3. Fire Resistance Directory. Volume 1. 1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide watertight, leak free roofing system capable of withstanding thermally induced

movement and exposure to weather without failure. B. Wind Uplift Resistance Capacity: Meet both of following criteria as a minimum 1. Provide fully adhered system meeting FM windstorm Class 1-90.

TRL 0708 07538-2

2. Provide fully adhered system sufficient to resist wind uplift pressures calculated for indicated building height using 85 mph basic wind speed and Exposure C.

1.04 SUBMITTALS A. General: Comply with Section 01330 Submittal Procedures. B. Product Data: Include manufacturer's specifications covering roofing system materials

and methods proposed. Include manufacturer's standard details for seaming and flashing.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate layout of insulation boards, individual membrane sheets and

fastener spacings. 1. Include details of penetrations and perimeter. 2. Indicate flashing details. 3. Include tapered roof insulation thickness and layout. D. Samples: 1. Submit 1'-0" x 1'-0 minimum size sample of membrane. 2. Submit sample of each type of fastener proposed for installation. E. Quality Assurance Submittals: 1. Credentials: Prior to starting the roofing, submit credentials from roofing

manufacturer of applicator approval. 2. Wind Uplift Report: Submit copies of testing reports indicating roofing system has

been tested and approved for wind uplift criteria specified. 3. Fastener Certification: Manufacturer's certification identifying maximum uplift

pressure resisted by fastener when tested in accordance with FM 4470. 4. Design and Specification Approval: Submit Drawings, this Section, related Sections,

and proposed roofing and insulation system to Manufacturer for review prior to submittal of shop drawings. Prior to starting roofing, submit a signed statement by membrane manufacturer that the roofing design and specifications are proper for this particular project.

5. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit one copy for Architect's information. Maintain one copy on site until completion of roofing system installation.

F. Quality Control Submittals: Submit in accordance with Section 01450. 1. Manufacturer's Field Reports: a. Submit written report from manufacturer's representative after inspection of

roof deck to verify deck is satisfactory for installation of system. b. Submit additional report indicating roof has been installed in accordance with

manufacturer's requirements. G. Contract Closeout Submittals: Submit in accordance with Section 01780. 1. Record of Work: Submit written records indicating temperature and moisture

conditions and the type and location of work being done during each day of roofing operations.

2. Warranty. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Roofing manufacturer licensed installer.

TRL 0708 07538-3

B. Fire Resistance Requirements: 1. External Fire Resistance: UL Class A. C. FM Listing: Membrane, base flashings and other components of system shall meet FM

4470 as part of roofing system listed in FMRC Approval Guide for Class 1 for noncombustible construction, as applicable.

D. Pre-Installation Conference: 1. Before beginning roofing installation, hold conference with General Contractor’s

Superintendent, roofing contractor, roofing manufacturer’s representative, and metal flashing contractor’s foreman. Notify Architect of meeting at least 10 days in advance.

2. Discuss all matters pertaining to roof system installation, including detailing, preparation, coordination between trades, installation techniques and procedures, phasing and scheduling.

3. Take minutes and distribute to attending parties and Architect. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01600. B. Delivery: 1. Membrane Sheets 20 Feet to 30 Feet in Width: Deliver non-reinforced membrane

sheets to site with single fold. C. Handling: Handle insulation and rolled goods to prevent damage to edges or ends. D. Storage: 1. Store off the ground and keep covered with waterproof covering. Materials that

become wet will be subject to rejection. 2. Store all materials in a dry area and at a temperature between 60 degrees and 80

degrees F. 3. Replace damaged materials. 4. Do not leave insulation exposed to weather. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Do not expose membrane and accessories to a constant temperature in excess of

180 degrees F. 2. Follow manufacturer's recommendations during cold weather. 3. Adhesive Application: Temperature shall be minimum 40 degrees F and rising. B. Adjacent Materials: Do not use oil based or plastic roof cement. Do not allow waste

products (petroleum, grease, oil, solvents, vegetable or mineral oil, animal fat) or direct steam venting to come in contact with membrane roofing system.

1.08 WARRANTY A. Provide a manufacturer's written total system warranty against defects in materials and

workmanship in roofing system for a period of ten (10) years in accordance with Section 01780.

TRL 0708 07538-4

B. Submit contract documents to Manufacturer for review and verification of Manufacturer's minimum warranty requirements prior to submittal of shop drawings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable EPDM Sheet Manufacturers: 1. Carlisle SynTec, Inc. 2. Firestone Building Products Company. 3. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01600. B. Acceptable Roofing Systems: 1. Carlisle SynTec Inc. Sure-Seal FR fully adhered EPDM system. 2. Firestone Rubbergard EPDM Fully-Adhered System. 3. Approved substitute by accepted manufacturer. 2.02 ROOFING MEMBRANE MATERIALS A. EPDM Sheet Material: ASTM D4637, Type 1. Vulcanized elastomeric terpolymer of

ethylene, propylene and diene. 1. Thickness, Grade and Class: 60 mils, nominal, Grade 1 and Class U, unreinforced. 2. Non-Reinforced EPDM Sheet Size: 25-foot maximum width by 100 foot maximum

length. 3. Exposed Face Color: Black. B. Sure-Seal System Materials: 1. Membrane: Carlisle Sure-Seal FR or Firestone Rubbergard FR, non-reinforced, .060"

minimum thickness, black EPDM rubber sheet. 2. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard water-based bonding adhesive. a. Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC): Maximum 50 grams VOC's per liter. 3. Splicing Cement: Roof membrane Manufacturer's standard product. a. Carlisle Splicing Cement. b. Firestone SA-1065 Splice Adhesive. 4. Splice Cleaner, Lap Sealant, In-seam Sealant, Water Cut-offs and Miscellaneous

Accessory Materials: Roof membrane Manufacturer's standard products. 5. Pre-cleaned Membrane: Contractor's option. 2.03 ROOF INSULATION A. General: Provide insulation board and fastening system approved and fully warrantable

by roofing manufacturer for use with fully adhered single ply membrane system. B. Tapered Insulation: Provide factory-tapered rigid isocyanurate to provide consistent

surface slopes indicated. 1. Minimum slope 1/4 inch per foot and maximum ½ inch per foot to drains. C. Insulation Fasteners: Fully coated with manufacturer's standard fluoropolymer paint for

corrosion resistance. Provide type approved by FM 4470 and warrantable by manufacturer for roofing insulation and wind uplift criteria.

D. Insulation Adhesive: Carlisle FAST 100 Adhesive.

TRL 0708 07538-5

E. Underlayment Board: Oriented Strand Board (OSB) with a phenolic resin binder, supplied and warranted by roofing manufacturer.

1. Thickness: ½ inch unless indicated otherwise. 2.04 FLASHING A. Flashing: Carlisle Sure-Seal or Firestone Rubbergard, 0.060" thick, or equal of other

acceptable manufacturer. 1. Walls, Parapets and Curbs: Cured EPDM membrane flashing with reinforced

securement strip. 2. Metal Edging: Cured or semi-cured EPDM membrane flashing as recommended by

manufacturer. 3. Penetrations, Corners and Other Locations Where Flashing Membrane Must Be

Formed: Elastoform uncured neoprene. 4. Provide cured and uncured flashing sheet in accordance with manufacturer's

standard flashing details. B. Cant Strips: ASTM C208, Class 2. High-density wood fiber manufactured cant strip

approved by membrane manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Verify that work of other trades that penetrates roof deck has

been completed. Examine surfaces for inadequate anchorage, drainage, foreign material, moisture and unevenness that would prevent the execution and quality of application of roofing system as specified. Report unsatisfactory conditions to the General Contractor.

B. Acceptance: Do not proceed until the surface to be covered is acceptable. Beginning

of work means acceptance of substrate. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Surfaces: Dry and broom clean before beginning work. Clean roof drains and collection

boxes as indicated and reset if drains and boxes are not at the proper level to drain the finished roof.

B. Protection. Protect paving and building walls adjacent to hoist prior to starting work.

Lap suitable protective materials at least 6". Secure protective coverings against wind. Leave protective covering in place for duration of roofing work.

3.03 INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Tapered Insulation: Install tapered insulation top layer in accordance with accepted

shop drawings. Attach to insulation layer with adhesive as required to prevent shifting or blow-off prior to placement of membrane.

B. Underlayment Board: Cover insulation with underlayment board.

TRL 0708 07538-6

C. Mechanically fasten insulation to wood roof sheathing as required to meet specified wind uplift requirements and in accordance with roofing system manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations.

3.05 EPDM MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A. Installation: Install membrane fully adhered over insulation. Apply, lap and splice using

methods and materials recommended by the manufacturer. B. Membrane Bonding: Install membrane in manner that allows temporary sealing on

down-slope surface at end of each workday. 1. Unroll membrane and remove backing sheet in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions. 2. Position membrane with clean side down at location where it will be adhered. 3. Fold sheet back past factory seam to expose half of sheet. 4. Apply membrane-bonding cement to substrate only at rate and using methods

recommended by the manufacturer 5. Allow adhesive to dry to tacky stage and roll folded half of membrane evenly into

adhesive. 6. Brush or roll bonded half of sheet to fully bond sheet to substrate. 7. Repeat bonding procedure with other half of sheet. C. Tape Splicing: 1. Clean and dry surfaces to be spliced with cleaning agents and wipes

recommended by manufacturer. Apply primer. 2. Form splices in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Apply tape to

bottom membrane sheet. Press tape onto sheet using hand pressure. 3. Overlap tape roll ends a minimum of 1 inch. 4. Roll splices to fully bond laps. 5. Install a 6-inch wide section of Pressure-Sensitive Flashing or Elastoform Flashing over

all field splice intersections and overlapped tape ends and seal edges with Lap Sealant.

D. Perimeter Attachment: Secure with manufacturer's recommended mechanical

fasteners and rubber nailing strips at roof perimeter and roof penetration curbs and nailers.

E. Flashing: Apply, lap and splice using methods, materials and details recommended by

the manufacturer. Flash around penetrations using factory prefabricated pipe seals where possible. Field fabricated seals may be used where necessary using manufacturer's standard details.

F. Terminations: Make terminations according to manufacturer's standard details and as

indicated. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Services: A representative of the manufacturer shall make an

inspection upon completion to ascertain that the entire system has been installed according to manufacturer's specifications and details.

TRL 0708 07538-7

B. Record of Work: Keep a record indicating temperature and moisture conditions and the type and location of work being done during each day of roofing operations. Submit in accordance with submittals article in Part 1.

3.07 CLEANING Upon completion, remove surplus materials and debris from the site.

END OF SECTION

TRL 0708 07600-1

SECTION 07600 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Sections Includes: 1. Flashing and Counterflashing 2. Parapet Flashing Cap 3. Pourable Sealer Pockets 4. Other sheet metal flashing related to the above, indicated on the drawings and not

specified elsewhere. B. Related Sections: 1. Wood Blocking and Nailers: Section 06100 Rough Carpentry. 2. Roofing and Filling Pourable Sealer Pockets: Section 07538 Fully Adhered EPDM

Membrane Roofing. C. Related Requirements: 1. Sealants: Section 07920 Joint Sealants. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: See Section 01423. Comply with following: 1. "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual," latest edition, as published by Sheet Metal and

Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA). 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Section 01330. Include: 1. Overall layout of sheet metal work. 2. Type, thickness, and details of sheet metal components. 3. Joints, expansion joints, attachment and anchoring of sheet metal components. B. Quality Control Submittals: 1. Warranty: Submit in accordance with Section 01780. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Design Criteria: Comply with: 1. Wind Resistance: Factory Mutual Class 1-90. B. Pre-Installation Conference: Attend conference with roofing installer, roofing

manufacturer's representative, General Contractor and Architect in accordance with Sections 01600 and 07538.

1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Before fabricating sheet metal, verify shapes and dimensions of

surfaces to be covered.

TRL 0708 07600-2

1.06 WARRANTY A. Warranty: Provide two year written warranty covering materials and installation for sheet

metal in accordance with Section 01780. 1. Include that system shall be watertight and weatherproof. B. Finish: Provide manufacturer's warranty against cracking, peeling, chalking and fading

for a period 20 years in accordance with Section 01780. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SHEET METAL A. Galvanized Iron: ASTM A526 commercial quality sheet steel, ASTM A653, G90

commercial hot-dip galvanizing. Provide gages as indicated and specified, 24 gage minimum.

1. Finish: Coil stock coated with PPG Duranar fluoropolymer coating finish produced with Kynar 500 resin. Finish and Colors: Match that of Sheet Metal Roofing Section 07610.

2.02 ACCESSORY MATERIAL A. Clips or Cleats: Same material and gage as sheet metal being installed. B. Nails and Fasteners: Same metal as metal being installed or other non-corrosive metal as

recommended by sheet manufacturer. Match finish of exposed heads with material being fastened.

B. Nails and Fasteners: Hard copper, brass or bronze nails shall be flat head, barbed wire

slating nails, not less than NO. 12 gauge, one inch long. C. Screws and Bolts: Round heads D. Roofing Felt: ASTM D266, #15 asphalt saturated felt. E. Solder: ASTM B32, composition 50% tin and 50% lead. Use muriatic acid killed with zinc or

soldering flux. F. Sealant: Approved type of polyurethane; see Section 07920. Roofers mastic is not

acceptable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Comply with Section 01600: 1. Layout: Verify layout of work before beginning installation. 2. Examine surfaces to receive flashing or sheet metal. Surfaces shall be smooth,

sound, clean and dry and fabric flashing in place before work is started. 3. Notification: Notify General Contractor of unsatisfactory conditions in writing with

copy to Architect. B. Acceptance: Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions by installer.

TRL 0708 07600-3

3.02 PREPARATION A. Coordination: Coordinate work of this section with work of other sections. Verify

placement of wood blockings, inserts, nailing strips, cants, etc. Coordinate with Section 07538.

B. Protective Coating: Coat contacting dissimilar metals with asphaltic compound. 3.03 WORKMANSHIP A. Reference Standards: See Section 01423. Unless indicated otherwise on drawings,

workmanship and details shall comply with NRCA Manual, SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, and FM Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49.

B. Edges: 1. Edges: Hem all exposed edges, 1/2" unless otherwise indicated. 2. Drips: Angle bottom edges of vertical surfaces to form drips. C. Joints: Make joints watertight and allow for expansion. 1. Reinforce sheet metal corners as required. 2. Reinforcement: Conceal within finished assembly. D. Fastenings: Use concealed hook strips and fasteners. Exposed hook strips and fasteners

not acceptable. E. Expansion and Contraction: 1. Provide for thermal expansion and contraction and building movement in

completed work. 2. Make watertight and weathertight throughout. 3. Unless otherwise indicated, provide expansion joints at maximum of 20 feet and not

more than 4 feet from corners. Seal joints with sealant in accordance with Section 07920.

3.04 SHEET METAL A. Flashing and Counterflashing: As detailed of 24 gage galvanized iron. Lock and solder

joints and hem exposed edges. B. Parapet Flashing Cap: As detailed of 24 gage galvanized iron similar to SMACNA Figure

3-1. Cover blocking with roofing felt. Miter, seam and seal corners. Use Figure 3-2, Alternate No. 4 seams, sealed.

C. Pourable Sealer Pockets: Provide where several or irregular shaped items penetrate

roofing membrane as required. Fabricate of 24 gage galvanized iron as indicated, approved by roofing manufacturer and similar to SMACNA Figure 4-16E. Seam and seal joints. Hem edges. Pocket filled under Section 07538.

END OF SECTION

TRL 0708 07610-1

SECTION 07610 SHEET METAL ROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Standing seam sheet metal roofing. 2. All adjacent flashings at eaves, gables, ridges, top of slope, etc. B. Related Section: 1. Metal Deck: Section 05310 Steel Deck. 2. Galvanized Iron Flashing: Section 07600 Flashing and Sheet Metal. 3. Sealants: Section 07920 Joint Sealants. 4. Membrane Underlayment: Section 07133 Modified Bituminous Sheet Waterproofing. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings and Product Data: Submit in accordance with Section 01330. Indicate

panel layout, flashings, accessories, and attachments. B. Samples: Submit color samples for selection and acceptance in accordance with

Section 01330. C. Quality Control Submittals: 1. Warranty: Submit in accordance with Section 01780. 2. Design Calculations: Submit system design calculations stamped by professional

engineer indicating compliance with specified wind speed criteria. Indicate fastener pull out strength and performance of clips, anchors and other accessories.

3. Certification: Submit written certification, stamped by same professional engineer who prepared design calculations indicating system design meets specified wind speed/exposure classification criteria.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer: Company specializing in installation of metal roofs. 1. Installer: Manufacturer approved. 2. Experience: Company that has continuously installed metal roofing in State of

Colorado for five years. B. Design Criteria: 1. Wind speed and Exposure Classification: Metal roofing and flashing system shall be

designed to withstand ground wind speed of 100 mph, Exposure B, in accordance with International Building Code.

2. Fastening Details and Spacings: Designed by system manufacturer to meet specified wind speed criteria.

TRL 0708 07610-2

1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01600. 1. Deliver and store panels and accessories in dry place to avoid condensation and

contact with materials which might cause staining, such as lime, cement, fresh concrete or chemicals.

1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Before fabricating, verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be

covered. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Warranty: Provide two year written warranty covering materials and installation for metal

roofing system in accordance with Section 01780. B. Manufacturer's Finish Warranty: Provide manufacturer's 20 year warranty that finish will

not crack, peel, chalk, or fade in accordance with Section 01780. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PANEL SYSTEM A. Manufacturers: 1. AEP Span 2. Berridge Manufacturing Company. 3. Englert. 4. Accepted Substitute in accordance with Section 01600. B. System: Berridge Tee Panel Metal Standing Seam Panels. 1. Material: 24 gage hot-dipped galvanized steel. 2. Finish: PPG Duranar Fluoropolymer coating finish produced with Kynar 500 resin. 3. Color: Selected by Architect from manufacturer's standards. 4. Panels: One-piece form rolled. 5. Seams: 12-3/4" o.c. 6. Clips: Manufacturer's standard. C. Underlayment: See Section 07133. D. Accessory Material: 1. Flashing Caps and Fascias: Match panel system. 2. Nails and Fasteners: Galvanized or cement coated, size and type as required. 3. Sealant: Polyurethane in accordance with Section 07900. Roofers mastic is not

allowed. E. Snow Guards: Real-Tool Inc. Snow Guards, RT-300. Cast aluminum or bronze as selected

by Architect.

TRL 0708 07610-3

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Comply with Section 01600: 1. Layout: Verify layout of work before beginning installation. 2. Existing Conditions: Examine substrate before beginning installation. 3. Surfaces: Smooth, sound, clean and dry and fabric flashing in place before work is

started. 4. Notification: Notify General Contractor of unsatisfactory conditions in writing with

copy to Architect. B. Acceptance: Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions by installer. 3.02 PANEL INSTALLATION A. Underlayment: Apply to substrate in accordance with manufacturer's

recommendations. B. General: Install metal roofing on felt in accordance with manufacturer's

recommendations and accepted shop drawings. 1. Start erection of panels so sheets may be held true to line. Hold horizontal lines

straight and level and vertical lines plumb. 2. Exposed fasteners not allowed. 3. Calk seams with sealant. C. Snow Guards: Install mounted on each seam in locations directed, using manufacturer’s

non-penetrating stainless steel set screws. END OF SECTION

TRL 0708 07720-1

SECTION 07720 ROOF ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes:

1. Roof hatch. B. Related Sections: 1. Low Slope Roofing: Section 07538 Fully Adhered EPDM Membrane Roofing. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit in accordance with Section 01330. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s current catalog literature for each product

supplied under this Section. Indicate details, accessories and attachments. C. Samples: Submit 3 full size snow guard samples. 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01600. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ROOF HATCH A. Manufacturers: 1. Bilco. 2. Babcock Davis. 3. Inryco 4. O'Keeffe's Inc. 5. Accepted Substitute in accordance with Section 01600. B. Description: Bilco Type S-20, 30 inch x 36 inch, paint bond galvanized steel. 1. Safety Post: Bilco Ladder-Up Safety Post. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Roof Accessories: Securely install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to

produce watertight assembly in coordination with roofing installer. 1. Coordinate installation of components of this Section with installation of roofing

materials and base flashings.

TRL 0708 07720-2

2. Coordinate installation of sealants and roofing cements with work of this section to ensure water tightness.

END OF SECTION

TRL 0708 07840-1

SECTION 07840 FIRESTOPPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Firestopping and Smokeseals as indicated on the Drawings as well as the following

areas: a. All openings in fire-rated floors and walls both empty and those

accommodating penetrating items such as cables, conduits, pipes, ducts, etc. b. Openings at each floor level in shafts or stairwells. B. Related Sections: 1. Cast-In-Place Concrete: Section 03300. 2. Unit Masonry: Section 04810 Unit Masonry Assemblies. 3. Gypsum Drywall Partitions and Ceilings: Sections 09263 and 09264. 4. Joint Sealers: Section 07920. 5. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Division 15 and 16. 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Types of firestop to be used for each condition shall be the responsibility of the installer

and shall comply with all specified regulatory requirements. Firestop materials in exposed areas shall be compatible with specified finishes.

1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit Manufacturer's printed product data indicating product

characteristics, performance and limiting criteria for each product proposed for use. B. Installation Instructions: Submit Manufacturer's installation instructions for each type of

firestop required by the project. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Firestopping shall be performed by a contractor trained or

approved by firestop manufacturer. Equipment used shall be in accordance with firestop manufacturer's written installation instructions.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Firestopping materials proposed for use on this project shall

conform to both Flame (F) and Temperature (T) ratings as tested by nationally accepted test agencies per ASTM E-814 or UL 1479 firetests. The F rating and T rating must be a minimum of one (1) hour but not less than the fire resistance rating of the assembly being penetrated. The fire test shall be conducted with a minimum positive pressure differential of 0.03 inches of water column.

C. Mockup: Prepare job mock-up of each system proposed for use in the project as

directed by Architect. Approved mock-ups may be left in place as part of the finished project and will constitute the standard for remaining work.

TRL 0708 07840-2

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver all materials in original unopened packages fully identified with Manufacturer's

name, trade name and UL label. B. Materials shall be stored off the ground and protected from environmental conditions as

required by Manufacturer. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Conform to Manufacturer's printed instructions for installation and when applicable,

curing in accordance with temperature and humidity. Conform to ventilation and safety requirements.

1.07 WARRANTY A. Firestop Installer shall warrant that firestopping systems used meet firestopping

requirements as herein specified. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FIRE STOP SYSTEMS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. The Rector Seal Corp. (Metacaulk) 2. 3M Fire Protection Products 3. Tremco Tremstop 4. Hilti Firestop Systems 5. STI Specseal 6. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01600. B. Materials: 1. Materials shall be free of asbestos. 2. Materials shall provide a Flame (F) and Temperature (T) rating of at least one (1)

hour but not less than the fire resistance rating of assembly being penetrated, as tested per ASTM E-814.

3. Materials shall conform to all applicable governing codes. 4. Use pillow type firestopping or intumescent firestop blocks at cable trays and other

large openings through fire-rated walls and floors. 5. All materials shall be compatible with the material penetrating the fire assembly. C. Accessories: Furnish all accessory materials such as fire safing batts, sleeves, sheet metal,

sealants, etc. necessary to complete fire stopping systems unless furnished by others. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Existing Conditions: 1. Contractor shall inspect and verify that the surface and condition of the substrates

and all sleeves or blockouts furnished by others have no defects or errors that would interfere with the installation of the firestopping materials.

TRL 0708 07840-3

2. Notify Architect in writing of any defects or errors in workmanship. Do not proceed with work until all unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

B. Acceptance: Start of installation of firestopping shall constitute the Contractor's

acceptance of surfaces and conditions of substrates, sleeves and blockouts. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces and substrates of dirt, oil, loose materials and other foreign materials that

may affect the proper bond or installation of the firestops in strict accordance with Manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Provide primers as required which conform to Manufacturer's recommendations for

various substrates and conditions. C. Do not apply firestops to surfaces previously painted or treated with a sealer, curing

compound, water repellant or other coating unless tests have been performed to ensure compatibility of materials. Remove coatings as required in compliance with Manufacturer's instructions.

D. Mask where necessary to protect adjoining surfaces. Remove excess material and stains

on surfaces as required. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install in strict accordance with Manufacturer's printed instructions to provide a Flame (F)

and Temperature (T) rating of at least one (1) hour but not less than the fire resistance rating of the assembly being penetrated.

B. Ensure that all accessories such as anchoring devices, back-up materials, clips, sleeves,

supports and other materials used in the actual fire test are installed. C. Install firestops with sufficient pressure to properly fill and seal openings to ensure an

effective smokeseal. D. Tool or trowel exposed surfaces. Remove excess firestop material promptly as work

progresses and upon completion. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Firestop Contractor shall immediately notify the Architect if the firestopping systems

herein specified cannot meet the requirements of the specification. B. Firestop Contractor shall examine firestops to ensure proper installation and full

compliance with this specification. C. All areas of work must be accessible until inspection by the applicable Code authorities. D. Correct unacceptable firestops and provide additional inspection to verify compliance

with this specification at no additional cost.

TRL 0708 07840-4

3.05 CLEANING A. When finished work will be visible, clean adjacent surfaces in accordance with

Manufacturer's printed instructions. B. If visible in the finished work, remove temporary dams after initial cure of firestops. C. Correct staining and discoloring on adjacent surfaces. D. Remove all debris and excess materials entirely from site and leave work in a neat and

clean condition. END OF SECTION

TRL 0708 07920-1

SECTION 07920 JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Providing all calking and sealant indicated on Drawings, specified

herein, and not specified under other sections. In general, seal all openings indicated on Drawings and at other locations requiring sealant to seal visually and against infiltration from air and water, including but not limited to following:

1. Expansion joints in concrete paving and sidewalks. 2. Expansion joints and control joints in exposed interior concrete floor slabs. 3. Flashing reglet and retainers. 4. Exterior wall joints. 5. Masonry control joints 6. Isolation joints, between structure and other elements. 7. Joints at penetrations of walls, decks and floors by piping and other service and

equipment (excepting fire and smoke seal). 8. Joints between items of equipment and other construction. 9. Joints between door and window frames and adjacent materials, exterior and

interior. 10. Bedding for door thresholds. 11. Open joints between dissimilar materials as required to close and conceal jointing of

the work. 12. Construction and expansion joints, joints between dissimilar materials; joints around

windows, door frames, louvers, and other penetrations and openings in the exterior wall; interior walls as detailed or specified.

13. Other joints as indicated. B. Related Sections: 1. Sealants Related to Roofing: Section 07538. 2. Glazing Sealants: Section 08800 Glazing. 3. Acoustical Sealants: Section 09263 Gypsum Board Partitions and Walls. 4. Fire and Smoke Seal: Section07840. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit in accordance with Section 01330 for each material and location

of application. B. Samples: Submit in accordance with Section 01330 for each type of sealant for color

selection. C. Quality Control Submittals: 1. Warranty: Submit in accordance with Section 01780.

TRL 0708 07920-2

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer: Company specializing in sealant application. 1. Experience: Continuously installed sealants in State of Wyoming for five years. B. Manufacturer's Technical Representative: Obtain materials only from manufacturers who

will, if required, send qualified technical representative to project site, for purpose of advising installer of proper procedures and precautions for use of materials.

1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01600. Deliver in original unopened containers and store

in area not subject to extreme heat or cold. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: Do not apply exterior sealants during wet weather or when

outside temperature is below 40°F or apply interior sealants when inside temperature is below 60°F.

1.06 WARRANTY A. Warranty: Provide three year written warranty covering materials and installation for

sealants in accordance with Section 01780. 1. Warranty: Require installer, at no cost to Owner, to repair or replace sealants which

fail to perform as airtight and watertight joints; or fail in joint adhesion, cohesion, abrasion resistance, weather resistance, extrusion resistance, migration resistance, stain resistance, color retention, or general durability; or appear to deteriorate in any manner not clearly specified as inherent quality of material by submitted manufacturer's data.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 JOINT BACKING MATERIAL A. General: Size joint backing material for minimum 30% compression when inserted in joint.

Material: Round rod or semi-circular type. B. Manufacturers: 1. Dow Chemical Company, Ethafoam. 2. Sonneborn, Sonofoam. 3. Schlegel Manufacturing Company, Schlegelfoam. 4. Denver Foam. 5. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01600. 2.02 SEALANT MATERIAL A. Manufacturers: 1. DAP Incorporated. 2. Parr, Inc. 3. Pecora Corporation. 4. Sika Corporation 5. Sonneborn Building Products.

TRL 0708 07920-3

6. Tremco Manufacturing Company. 7. Mameco International. 8. Accepted Substitute in accordance with Section 01600. B. Silicone Sealant Manufacturers: 1. General Electric. 2. Dow Corning. 3. Accepted Substitute in accordance with Section 01600. C. Acceptable Materials: 1. Interior and Under Thresholds: Latex acrylic, ASTM C834-00e1. 2. Exterior: Two-component polyurethane, ASTM C920, Type M, Grade NS, non-sag. 3. Primer: As recommended by sealant manufacturer. 4. Sealant at Concrete Paving and Interior Floor Slabs: Two-component self-leveling

polyurethane, ASTM C920, Type M, Grade P, pourable type. 5. Sealant at Lavatories, Tubs and Showers: Silicone tub sealant. 6. Colors: As selected by Architect from standard colors. 2.03 BOND BREAKER TAPE A. Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape as recommended by sealant

manufacturer to be applied to sealant-contact surfaces where bond to substrate or joint filler must be avoided for proper performance of sealant. Provide self-adhesive tape wherever applicable.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Comply with Section 01600: 1. Inspect joints to be sealed to application of any work under this section. 2. Notification: Notify General Contractor of any joints which cannot be put into

proper condition to receive sealants in writing with copy to Architect. B. Acceptance: Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions by installer. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Preparation of Surfaces: 1. Clean surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Mask edges, if required, to protect adjoining surfaces and produce a straight finish

line. 3. Clean joint surfaces immediately before installation of sealant. Remove dirt, insecure

coatings, moisture and other substances that would interfere with bond of sealant. 4. Do not proceed with installation of sealant over joint surfaces that have been

painted, lacquered, waterproofed or treated with water repellent or other treatment of coating. Remove coating or treatment joint surfaces before installing sealant.

5. Etch concrete masonry joint surfaces to remove excess alkalinity unless sealant manufacturer's printed instruction indicated that alkalinity does not interfere with sealant bond and performance. Etch with 5% solution of muriatic acid, neutralize with diluted ammonia solution, rinse thoroughly with water and allow to dry before sealant installation.

TRL 0708 07920-4

B. Priming: If required, prime surfaces which are to be sealed with manufacturer's recommended or standard primer, after surfaces have been prepared as specified. Before use, check primers for discoloration and dirt pick-up on adjacent surfaces. If staining occurs, after exposure, take adequate measures to prevent primer from being applied over face of adjacent porous materials by masking or other suitable measures.

C. Joint Backing: 1. Joints: Depth necessary to provide for specified allowable thickness of sealant and

also required backing where and as specified. Provide backing of extent and type as specified and required to provide for allowable depth of sealant.

2. Back-up Materials for Sealants: Non-staining, compatible with sealant and primer. resilient nature, and as recommended by manufacturer of sealant.

a. Size and Shape: As required by width of joint and specified. b. Do not use materials impregnated with oil, solvents or bituminous materials. 3. Compress backing material minimum of 30% when inserted in joint. Backing material

for upper portion of joints shall be round rod or semi-circular in cross-section where in contact with sealant.

D. Bond Breaker Tape: Install where indicated and as required by manufacturer's

recommendations to ensure that sealants will deform properly. 3.03 APPLICATION A. Exterior Metal Window Sills: Set in full bed of polyurethane sealant. B. Exterior Thresholds: Set in full bed of latex acrylic sealant. C. Seal Joints: 1. Apply sealants in continuous beads without open joints, voids or air pockets, using

ratchet hand gun or mechanical powered gun. 2. Confine sealants to joint areas with masking tapes or other precautions. Apply

compounds in concealed compression joints accurately so that excess compound will not extrude from joints.

3. Remove excess compound or sealant promptly as work progresses, and clean adjoining surfaces.

4. In rough surfaces or joints of uneven widths, install sealant well back into joint. Recess equal to width of joint, or 3/8" minimum at masonry.

5. Use anti-tack agent where necessary to protect freshly applied sealant from public traffic and dirt.

6. Slightly recess joints to facilitate painter's line. Handtool and finish joints throughout construction.

7. Comply with manufacturer's specifications and recommendations. D. Concrete Expansion and Control Joints: Blow clean with compressed air. Pour full but do

not over-fill. E. Sinks, Lavatories and Showers: Fill joints between dissimilar materials with silicone sealant. F. Workmanship: Employ only proven installation techniques, which will ensure that sealants

will be deposited in uniform, continuous ribbons without gaps or air pockets, with complete "wetting" of joint bond surfaces equally on opposite sides.

1. Except as otherwise indicated, fill sealant rabbet to slightly concave surface, slightly below adjoining surfaces.

TRL 0708 07920-5

2. Where horizontal joints are between horizontal surface and vertical surface, fill joint to form slight cove, so that joint will not trap moisture and dirt.

G. Joint Sizes: Install sealants to depths as indicated or, as recommended by sealant

manufacturer but within following general limitations: 1. For normal moving joints sealed with elastomeric sealants but not subject to traffic,

fill joints to depth equal to 50% of joint width, but not more than 1/2" deep or less than 1/4" deep.

2. For joints sealed with non-elastomeric sealants and calking compounds. fill joints to depth in range of 75% to 125% of joint width.

H. Spillage: 1. Do not allow sealants or compounds to overflow or spill onto adjoining surfaces, or

to migrate into voids of adjoining surfaces. Use masking tape or other precautionary devices to prevent staining of adjoining surfaces, by either primer/sealer or sealant.

2. Remove excess and spillage of compounds promptly as work progresses. Clean adjoining surfaces by whatever means may be necessary to eliminate evidence of spillage. Do not damage adjoining surfaces or finishes.

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Samples: Where directed by Architect, cut out and remove total of three samples

consisting of undisturbed sealant and back-up material from joint. Samples shall be 6" in length. Reseal cut out areas with same materials.

3.05 CURING, PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Curing: Cure sealants and calking compounds in compliance with manufacturer's

instructions and recommendations, to obtain high early bond strength, internal cohesive strength and surface durability.

B. Protection: 1. Advise General Contractor of procedures required for protection of sealants during

construction period, so that they will be without deterioration or damage (other than normal weathering) at time of acceptance.

2. Protect surfaces from damage. Clean soiled surfaces immediately. Replace any damaged material that cannot be cleaned with new material. END OF SECTION

TRL 0708 08110-1

DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS SECTION 08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Hollow metal doors. 2. Hollow metal frames. B. Related Sections: 1. Wood Doors: Section 08210. 2. Access Panels: Section 08310 Access Doors and Panels. 3. Hardware including Thresholds and Weatherstripping: Section 08710 Door

Hardware. 4. Field Finish: Section 09900 Paints and Coatings. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: See Section 01423. Comply with following: 1. NAAMM Standard HMMA 861 or ANSI A250.8. 2. ANSI A115 Specifications for Door and Frame Preparation for Hardware. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Section 01330. B. Templates: Hardware templates for hardware mounted on hollow metal work shall be

submitted under Section 08710 directly to hollow metal manufacturer immediately after acceptance of hardware schedule. Report failure to receive templates with reasonable promptness to General Contractor.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Fire Rating: Provide fire rating label acceptable to local building code authority

on doors and frames indicated on the door schedule. If any door or frame scheduled to be fire-rated cannot qualify for appropriate labeling because of its design, hardware or any other reason, advise Architect prior to submission of bids.

2. NFPA Standard No. 80. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01600. Store frames in manner to prevent twisting. Doors

with dimples or dents will be rejected.

TRL 0708 08110-2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 DOOR AND FRAME MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: 1. North Central Supply 2. Curries Manufacturing 3. Elco Metal Products 4. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01600. 2.02 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES A. General: Frames for hollow metal and wood doors, entrances, windows and borrowed

lights, etc. indicated to be hollow metal shall be of design sections as detailed and assembled as indicated.

B. Gages: 16 gage steel. C. Construction: 1. Joints and Connections: Welded and ground and entire assembly reinforced and

braced as required to ensure absolute rigidity. 2. Do not use exposed screws except where specifically accepted. D. Accessories: 1. Reinforcement for Hardware: Machine frames for attachment of hardware,

including mortising, reinforcing, drilling and tapping for hinges. a. Butt Hinges: Seven gage, 12" long, full width of frame profile or equivalent. b. Closers: 10 gage, 12" long, full width of frame or equivalent. c. Strikes, Flush Bolts and Other Surface Mounted Hardware: 12 gage or

equivalent. 2. Anchors: Furnish anchors of type and number required for anchoring frames to

structure, partitions, etc. as follows: a. Three jamb anchors on seven foot high jamb. b. Four jamb anchors on jambs over seven feet. Wire anchors will not be allowed. Provide such installation instructions as are

necessary to ensure proper installation of anchors. 3. Silencers: Drill stop of lock jamb of each interior frame for installation of pneumatic

rubber door silencers. Silencers shall be furnished under Section 08710, numbers as indicated on schedule.

E. Hinges: Install mortar protection box behind each hinge cut. 2.03 HOLLOW METAL DOORS A. General: Doors indicated to be hollow metal shall be hollow metal, flush, swing type

doors of types indicated. B. Construction: Construct hollow metal doors from 16 gage steel, fully welded, ground

smooth and completely sound and fire insulated. Provide thermal insulation in exterior doors. Manufacture hollow metal doors and panels with flush tops, sides and bottoms. Plastic inserts are not acceptable. All vertical seams shall be fully welded. Lock seams or epoxy filled seams are not acceptable.

TRL 0708 08110-3

C. Labels: Provide fire rated construction and UL labels where listed in door schedule. D. Hardware: Mortise and reinforce doors to receive hardware. 1. Hinges: Seven gage steel plate, 9", welded to continuous 16 gage interior edge

channels or equivalent. Drill and tap. Use of coined or extruded holes not acceptable.

2. Locks, Latches, Push/Pulls and Panic Devices: 12 gage steel spot welded to 16 gage interior edge channels or equivalent and designed to provide adequate support and reinforcement for required hardware.

3. Closers: Not less than 12 gage internal reinforcement. Provide special attention to reinforcing doors where closers are to be bolted through door.

E. Insulation: Foam or batt type. Honeycomb core is not acceptable. 2.04 FINISH A. Cleaning and Primer: 1. Thoroughly clean surfaces of grease, rust and scale to insure paint adherence.

Apply filler to doors where required to produce a smooth surface. 2. Doors and Frames to be painted: Apply one coat of baked on factory primer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Frames: 1. Set steel frames accurately in accordance with details, straight and free of twist

with head level and jambs plumb. Rigidly anchor to walls and partitions and securely brace until surrounding work is completed. Provide deflection clearances at frame heads where indicated.

2. Fire-Rated Openings: Place frames and provide clearances in accordance with NFPA Standard No. 80.

3. Field Welds: Make welds full length of joints. Remove splatter and grind exposed welds to match adjacent surfaces. Provide Architect with ample notice to review welds before finish operations begin.

4. Wherever possible leave spreader bars in place until frames are securely anchored.

5. Jambs shall be filled with grout under Section 04810 where frames occur in masonry walls.

B. Doors: Apply hardware in conformance with hardware manufacturer's templates and instructions. Hang doors to be free of binding with hardware functioning properly.

1. Clearance Tolerances: a. Head: 1/8" maximum. b. Jamb: 1/8" maximum. c. Between Doors (Pair): 1/8" maximum. d. Sill without Threshold: 1/2" maximum. 3.02 ADJUSTING A. Adjustment: At completion of job, adjust doors and hardware as required and leave in

proper operating condition. END OF SECTION

TRL 0708 08210-1

SECTION 08210 WOOD DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Interior hardboard faced panel and flush doors. 2. Factory prefitting and premachining. B. Related Sections: 1. Hardware: Section 08710 Door Hardware. 2. Field Finish: Section 09900 Paints and Coatings. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: See Section 01410. Comply with following: 1. Basic Hardboard Product Standard ANSI/AHA 135.4-1982 and NWWDA I.S.1.1-86, Sec.

3.7.3 (B) 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Section 01330. Indicate location, size,

elevation, details of construction, hardware blocking, factory preparation requirements for each door type.

B. Templates: Hardware templates for hardware mounted on wood doors will be submitted

under Section 08710 directly to wood door manufacturer immediately after acceptance of hardware schedule. Report failure to receive templates with reasonable promptness to General Contractor.

C. Closeout Submittals: 1. Warranty: Submit in accordance with Section 01780. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01600. B. Delivery: Do not deliver doors to building until it is entirely enclosed, drywall and concrete

work is completed and humidity in the building has reached average relative humidity of locality.

C. Storage: Stack doors flat and off floor. Do not drag doors across one another. D. Protection: Protect doors during transit, storage and handling to prevent damage, soiling

and deterioration.

TRL 0708 08210-2

1.05 WARRANTY A. Interior Door Warranty: Provide manufacturer's standard written warranty in accordance

with Section 01780. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PANEL DOORS A. Manufacturers: 1. Masonite Corp. 2. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01600. B. Interior Solid Core Flush Doors: 1. Thickness: 1-3/4" unless otherwise indicated. 2. Faces: Craftmaster Colonist hardboard, panels as indicated. 2.02 FACTORY PREFITTING AND PREMACHINING A. Doors: Prefit and premachine doors at factory. 1. Take accurate field measurements of hardware mortised in metal frames to verify

dimensions and alignment before proceeding with machining in factory. 2. Machine doors for hardware requiring cutting of doors. 3. Comply with accepted hardware schedules and doorframe shop drawings with

hardware templates to ensure proper fit of doors and hardware. B. Tolerances: Comply with NWWDA tolerance requirements for prefitting. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Comply with Section 01600: 1. Before installation, verify that frames are proper size and type for door and are installed

as required for proper installation of doors. 2. Notification: Notify General Contractor of unsatisfactory conditions in writing with copy

to Architect. B. Acceptance: Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions by installer. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Conditioning: Condition doors to average humidity in installation area prior to hanging. B. Prefitting: Prefit doors to frames and machine for hardware to whatever extent not

previously work at factor as required for proper fit and uniform clearance at each edge. C. Sealing: Before installation of hardware. Brush-apply exterior seal coat to all job site cut or

planed surfaces. 1. Sealer: Type recommended by manufacturer.

TRL 0708 08210-3

3.03 INSTALLATION A. General: Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 1. Installation: By skilled finish carpenters or factory authorized installers. 2. Installer: Thoroughly familiar with the requirements of the manufacturer's door warranty

as currently in effect and assure compliance with all provisions. B. Hanging: 1. After sizing doors, fit for hardware as scheduled. Before installation of hardware, brush-

apply an exterior seal coat to job site cut surfaces. Use sealer recommended by door manufacturer.

2. Hang doors to be free of binding with hardware functioning properly. 3.04 ADJUSTING AND PROTECTION A. Adjustment: At completion of job, adjust doors and hardware as required and leave in

proper operating condition. B. Protection: Advise General Contractor of proper procedures required to protect installed

wood doors from damages or deterioration until acceptance of entire project. C. Replacement: Refinish or replace doors damaged during installation. 1. Causes for Rejection: Include chips, scratches or gouges. END OF SECTION

TRL 0708 08310-1

SECTION 08310 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Access doors into pipe and utility spaces. B. Related Sections: 1. Furnishing Access Doors as Specified in This Section for Mechanical Equipment:

Division 15 Mechanical. 2. Furnishing Access Doors as Specified in This Section for Electrical Equipment: Division

16 Electrical. 3. Installation of Access Doors: Appropriate sections. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCESS DOORS A. Located in Masonry, Tile, Concrete, Gypsum Drywall: 1. Milcor Style M 2. MM Systems Boico Style C 3. Karp Model DSC-214M 4. JL Industries Model TM 5. Nystrom Building Products NW 6. Williams Brothers WB-GP 7. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01600. B. Fire-Rated Access: 1. Milcor Fire-Rated Access Door 2. MM Systems Boico Fire Rated Access Door Series F 3. Karp Model KRP-150 FR 4. JL Industries Model FD 5. Nystrom Building Products IW 6. Williams Brothers WB-FR 7. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01600. C. Description: 1. Sizes: As indicated on drawings or as required to properly service mechanical or

electrical equipment. 2. Locking Devices: Key operated cam locks. 3. Finish: a. Toilet Rooms and Baths and Food Service Areas: Stainless steel. b. All Others: Prime for painted finish under Section 09900.

TRL 0708 08310-2

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Mechanical or Electrical Access: Access doors required for access to mechanical or

electrical equipment shall be provided under Division 15 or Division 16 and installed by the trade responsible for the material in which door is located.

B. General Access: Furnish access door indicated on drawings for general access to be

installed by trade responsible for material in which door is located. END OF SECTION

TRL 0708 08348-1

SECTION 08348 MIRRORED CLOSET DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Mirrored sliding closet doors. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings and Product Data: Submit shop drawings and manufacturer's catalog

data as specified in Section 01330. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SLIDING CLOSET DOORS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Acme General Corp. 2. Approved Substitute B. Manufacturer and Type: Acme 4250 Two Panel Sliding Mirrored Closet Doors or equal of

other acceptable manufacturer: 1. Frame, Track and Channel: Baked enamel. 2. Rollers: Bottom rolled on 1-1/2" nylon ball bearing and adjustable wheels. 3. Mirror: Plate mirror with shatter resistant backing. 4. Trim Finish: As selected by Architect. 5. Swing Doors where indicated. Provide hinges and magnetic catches. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install according to manufacturer's instructions and approved shop drawings. Adjust to

work freely with all hardware functioning properly. Re-adjust at completion of job if directed.

END OF SECTION

TRL 0708 08411-1

SECTION 08411 ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Aluminum entrance framing. 2. Aluminum doors. 3. Aluminum door hardware. 4. Aluminum window frames with integral aluminum louvers. B. Products installed but not Furnished Under This Section: 1. Cylinders: Section 08710 Door Hardware. C. Related Sections: 1. Final Cleaning of Glass: Section 01741 Final Cleaning. 2. Sealing Joints: Section 07920 Joint Sealants. 3. Automatic Entrance Doors: Section 08460. 4. Glazing: Section 08800. 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design Requirements: 1. Wind Load: Fabricate and install framing systems to withstand wind forces

calculated in accordance with UBC for basic wind speed and exposure required by local code with maximum deflection of 1/175 of span. Reinforce framing systems as required to meet criteria.

2. Air Infiltration: Not exceed 0.06 CFM/sq. ft. of fixed area in accordance with ASTM E283.

3. Water Infiltration: No water penetration at test pressure of 6.24 psf in accordance with ASTM E331.

1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit in accordance with Section 01330. B. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Section 01330. 1. Calculations: Include calculations for review indicating framing meets design

criteria. C. Samples: Submit three samples of aluminum finish for acceptance in accordance with

Section 01330. 1. Make samples on 12" long extrusions or 6" square sheets of alloy to be used for

system. 2. Architect's Review: For color and texture only. D. Quality Control Submittals: 1. Warranty: Submit in accordance with Section 01780.

TRL 0708 08411-2

E. Templates: Hardware templates for hardware mounted in aluminum doors and frames shall be submitted under Section 08710 directly to aluminum door and frame supplier immediately after acceptance of hardware schedule. Report failure to receive templates with reasonable promptness to General Contractor.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer: Company specializing in aluminum entrance and storefront fabrication and

installations. 1. Experience: Continuously fabricated and installed entrances and storefront for five

years. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01600. Store frames and doors in positions necessary to

prevent twisting. Do not install frames or doors with dimples or dents. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Warranty: Provide five year written warranty covering materials and installation for

entrances and storefront in accordance with Section 01780. 1. Warranty to include watertight condition. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 DOOR AND FRAMES A. Manufacturers: 1. Traco 2. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01600. B. System: Traco Thermal Barrier Framing System, type as shown on Drawings. 1. Provide aluminum frame sections in sizes and shapes indicated. 2. Minimum Wall Thickness: 0.093" 3. Reinforcement: If required as determined by manufacturer, add concealed steel

reinforcement to meet design requirements. 4. Hardware Reinforcement: Provide 3/16" concealed steel reinforcement for

hardware including door hinges, closers, panic devices, etc. 5. Accessories: Provide necessary fittings and accessories for a complete, functional

and watertight frame installation. Provide matching aluminum brake metal, closures, etc. where detailed or required.

6. Automatic Entrance Door Frames: 1/8" minimum wall thickness. C. Glazed Doors: See Drawings. D. Finish: Kynar 500, color as selected by Architect. 2.02 HARDWARE A. Cylinders: Furnished under Section 08710 and installed under this section. B. Other Hardware: Provide hardware including pivots, locks, push, pull, threshold and

weatherstripping as scheduled in hardware schedule. See Section 08710.

TRL 0708 08411-3

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Comply with Section 01600: 1. Layout: Verify layout of work before beginning installation. 2. Existing Conditions: Examine openings for aluminum framing to determine that they

are proper size, plumb, square and level before installation of frames is started. 3. Notification: Notify General Contractor of unsatisfactory conditions in writing with

copy to Architect. B. Acceptance: Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions by installer. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Frames: Securely install frames according to manufacturer's recommendations and

accepted shop drawings. Coat ferrous metals in direct contact with aluminum with zinc chromate primer as electrical insulator.

B. Doors: Apply hardware in conformance with hardware manufacturer's templates and

recommendations. C. Adjustment: Hang and adjust doors to work freely with hardware functioning properly.

Re-adjust at completion of project if directed by Architect. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Water Tests: Water test entrance and storefront system upon completion in presence of

Architect. Conduct test using hose without nozzle and thoroughly wet entire glass surface. Retest until watertight.

3.04 PROTECTION A. Protection: Cover aluminum doors and framing during spray painting, drywalling or other

construction operations that might cause damage. Complete cleandown of masonry prior to installation.

3.05 CLEANING A. Cleaning: Leave aluminum doors and framing in clean condition. 1. Final Cleaning of Glass: Under Section 01741. B. Touch Up: Touch up damaged finished surfaces. END OF SECTION

TRL 0708 08460-1

SECTION 08460 AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Automatic sliding entrance doors. B. Products Installed But Not Supplied Under This Section: 1. Cylinder: Section 08710 Door Hardware. C. Related Sections: 1. Glazing: Section 08800. 2. Electrical Wiring: Division 16 Electrical. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: Comply with: 1. ANSI A156.10 – Power Operated Pedestrian Doors, 1999 edition. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings and Product Data: Submit in accordance with Section 01330. Indicate

all elements including recess and electrical requirements. B. Manufacturer's Maintenance Instructions: Submit in accordance with Section 01780. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01600. 1.05 WARRANTY A. Provide two year written warranty for material and installation in accordance with

Section 01780. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Horton Automatics 2. Approved Substitute B. Manufacturer and Type: Horton Series 2000, Type 2010, bi-parting, O-SX-SX-O, linear

drive, automatic sliding entrance doors with electric operator and mat switch. Include header and track, jambs, sliding door, threshold and side lights.

1. Swing slide breakout panels in door; non-breakout slide panels with sidelites.

TRL 0708 08460-2

C. Description: 1. Aluminum Sections: 6063T-5 alloy not less than.125" thick. 2. Header Section: Conceal operator mechanism, track and wheels. 3. Sliding Panels: Supported by four ball bearing wheels on nylon covered support

track. 4. Concealed Guides: Stabilize bottom of door 5. Anti-derailing: Continuous extrusion full length of door travel. 6. Track: Replaceable without removing operator 7. Weatherstripping: Double mohair. 8. Door Panels: T&G key fitted gusset construction. 9. Finish: Kynar coated, color as selected. 10. Hardware: Sliding panel shall have Adams Rite maximum-security lock MS 1853A

505 31/32". 1-5/32" standard size cylinder provided under Section 08710. 11. Operator: All electric header mounted and concealed with a securely attached,

removable cover. It shall have a time delay adjustable from 1 to 28 seconds. The opening speed, closing speed, back check and latch check shall be fully and independently adjustable. Braking or checking shall be an integral function of the operator for deceleration of the moving panel. For protection in case of electrical power failure, operator shall include automatic pressure relief to prevent closing on pedestrians and there shall be no springs or mechanisms to prevent free manual operation of the door. A power ON and OFF switch shall be located on the inside of the header and shall serve a second function as "hold open" for door

12. Switch: Overhead sensors. Provide complete with trim. D. Electrical Connections: Under Division 16. E. Glazing: Under Section 08800. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Inspect to verify existing conditions are satisfactory for

installation. Report unsatisfactory conditions to the General Contractor. B. Acceptance: Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Coordinate size and location of recess and electrical rough-in. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. The sliding door package shall be installed by factory authorized and trained personnel

in strict compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations and according to approved shop drawings. Coordinate installation with adjacent frames installed under Section 08411.

B. Set units of plumb, level and true to line without warp or rack of frames or sash. C. Anchor frames solidly to surrounding construction to prevent distortion or misalignment.

TRL 0708 08460-3

D. Apply protective coating to separate aluminum from galvanically incompatible materials.

E. Instruct Owner's representative in proper operation of units. F. Make necessary electrical connections for full operation of doors. 3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust moveable units to operate smoothly and to be weathertight when closed. B. Lubricate hardware and moving parts. C. Clean aluminum surfaces and remove excess sealants. D. Leave units in closed position to protect against dirt and elements. END OF SECTION

TRL 0708 08710-1

SECTION 08710 DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Door Hardware 2. Key Box B. Related Sections: 1. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Section 08110 Steel Doors and Frames. 2. Wood Doors: Section 08210. 3. Cabinet Hardware: Section 06410 Custom Cabinets. 4. Threshold Sealant: Section 07920 Joint Sealants. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Hardware Schedule: 1. Within 20 days after receipt of order for finish hardware, prepare complete schedule

and submit in accordance with Section 01330. 2. Do not order hardware until accepted copy of schedule is returned to supplier

bearing stamps of Contractor and Architect. 3. Include catalog cut of each different hardware item on hardware schedule. 4. Schedule: Indicate following details: DOOR NUMBERS FRAME MATERIALS Location Hand of Door Size and Thickness of Door Degree of Opening Door Material Type of Attachment As well as any other pertinent information regarding door and quality and type of

hardware to be furnished. B. Templates: Within 10 days after receipt of accepted hardware schedule, submit four sets

of templates and schedules to: 1. Hollow metal door and frame supplier. 2. Wood door supplier. 3. Aluminum door and frame supplier. C. Quality Control Submittals: 1. Warranty: Submit in accordance with Section 01780. D. Contract Closeout Submittals: 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit in accordance with Section 01780.

Include printed sheets from manufacturer covering hardware furnished. Include following information:

a. Name, address and telephone number of hardware suppliers. b. Maintenance instructions and parts list for each type of operating hardware

including: (1) Locks (2) Exit Devices (3) Closers

TRL 0708 08710-2

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Supplier Qualifications: Hardware supplier shall have in his employ regular member, in

good standing, of American Society of Architectural Hardware Consultants, who shall be responsible for detailing, scheduling and ordering of finish hardware.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Provide Underwriters Laboratory listed hardware for fire or

accident hazard where scheduled or required to maintain rating of opening. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01600. 1. Delivery: Deliver hardware to job site only after proper provisions for storage have

been made. 2. Labels: Properly package and label each item to indicate exact location for which

intended. 3. Check-In: Hardware supplier shall authorize his representative to be present when

finish hardware is delivered to site and shall check in each item and turn over to Contractor for storage in secure place under lock and key.

1.05 WARRANTY A. Warranty: Provide following written warranties covering hardware in accordance with

Section 01780. 1. Warranty against mechanical failure of door closers for five-year period. 2. Warranty against failure of parts for hardware except door closers for two-year

period. Warranty shall include cylinder locks. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 KEYING, KEYS AND MASTER KEYS A. Keying Schedule: Key all cylinders alike or different as directed by Owner. Be responsible

to schedule meeting with Owner to obtain Owner's keying requirements. B. Construction Keys: All exterior cylinders shall be construction master keyed. At time of

Owner occupancy, make construction keys inoperative. C. Master Key: Cylinders shall be master keyed. Provide total of six building master keys. D. Keys: Provide two keys for each interior cylinder keyed. Stamp keys and cylinders with

door number. E. Key Delivery: 1. Master Keys and Submaster Keys and Identified Change Keys: Delivery direct from

factory by registered mail in safety envelopes directly to Owner 2. Other Keys: Mail other keys to General Contractor at his office. 2.03 KEY BOX A. Key Box: Provide one Knox Company, Model 3200 Knox Box, recessed mount. 1. Finish: Black 2. Provide location stickers as required.

TRL 0708 08710-3

2.04 GENERAL MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS A. Fasteners: Furnish necessary screws and bolts for proper installation. Provide suitable

sizes, type and finish to harmonize with hardware. 1. Hardware Attached to Metal: Templated and fastened with machine screws long

enough to penetrate 1/2" thick reinforcing. B. Silencers: Provide rubber silencers for doors installed in interior metal frames. Provide

three silencers for each door and two for each pair of doors. C. Cylinders: Furnish cylinders of same keyway unless otherwise specified. D. Stops: Provide wall-mounted stops where possible. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: Provide factory hardware technician to be present to assist and instruct those

applying finish hardware. B. Fastening: Furnish items of hardware with attachment screws, bolts, nuts, etc. as

required to attach hardware to type of material involved and with finish to match adjacent hardware.

1. Make attachments to metal by template machine screws. 2. Through-bolt hardware such as door closers, forearm shoes of closers, holding

devices and panic hardware mounted on doors or panels. 3. Attach hardware to masonry or concrete with expansion bolts or similar drilled

anchors to develop full strength of attached device. Set expansion anchors in solid masonry not mortar joints.

C. Weatherstripping and Thresholds: 1. Weatherstripping and Soundstripping: Run full height of both jambs and full width of

head. 2. Thresholds and Door Bottoms: Run full width of opening. Install thresholds with

continuous threshold anchors cast into slab and set in sealant under Section 07920. D. Mounting Heights (Unless Otherwise Indicated): Dimensions given are from floor to center

line of hardware item. 1. Door Knobs and Levers: Standard - 40 Inches 2. Pushplates: Standard - 46 Inches 3. Pullplates: Standard - 46 Inches 4. Exit Devices Cross Bar: Standard - 36 Inches Note: a. Mount pull on opposite side of panic device to coincide with exit device

template. b. Install pushplate to conceal through bolts of pull. 3.02 KEY BOX A. Install in locations directed by Architect. Properly tag and install keys in key cabinet.

TRL 0708 08710-4

3.03 PROTECTION A. Painting: Do not install door silencers, kickplates, pushplates, door bottoms and wall

stops until after painting is complete. Loosen locksets and panic hardware prior to painting and retighten after painting is complete. Mask hardware or otherwise protect during painting operation.

3.04 ADJUSTMENT A. Adjusting by Hardware Manufacturer's Representative: Prior to final inspection, inspect

and adjust door closers, locks and items requiring close adjustment and regulation and check keying.

3.05 HARDWARE SCHEDULE A. See Schedule on Drawings.

END OF SECTION

TRL 0708 08800-1

SECTION 08800 GLAZING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Glass and Glazing For: a. Hollow Metal Frames and Doors: Section 08110. b. Wood Doors: Section 08210. c. Aluminum-Framed Storefronts: Section 08411. d. Automatic Entrance Doors: Section 08460. 2. Frameless Mirrors. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards - See Section 01423. Comply with: 1. Glazing Association of North America (GANA) Glazing Manual, 1997 edition. 2. Flat Glass Marketing Association (FGMA) Glazing Sealing Systems Manual, 1990

edition. 3. Sealed Insulated Glass Manufacturing Association (SIGMA) Glazing Guidelines, 1997

edition. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Samples: Submit samples of each type of glass in accordance with Section 01330. Cut

glass sizes as requested by Architect. 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Performance Requirements; 1. General: Provide glazing systems that are produced, fabricated, and installed to

withstand normal thermal movement, wind loading, and impact loading (where applicable), without failure including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; and other defects in construction.

2. Glass Design: Glass thicknesses indicated in contract documents are for detailing only. Confirm glass thicknesses by analyzing Project loads and in-service conditions. Provide glass lites for the various size openings in the thicknesses and strengths (annealed or heat-treated) to meet or exceed the following criteria:

a. Minimum glass thickness, nominally, of lites in exterior walls is 6.0 mm (0.23 inch). b. Tinted and heat-absorbing glass thicknesses for each tint indicated are the

same throughout Project. c. Minimum glass thicknesses of lites, whether composed of annealed or heat-

treated glass, are selected so the worst-case probability of failure does not exceed the following:

1) 8 lites per 1000 for lites set vertically or not over 15° off vertical and under wind action. Determine minimum thickness of monolithic annealed glass according to ASTM E1300-00. For other than monolithic annealed glass,

TRL 0708 08800-2

determine thickness per glass manufacturer's standard method of analysis including applying adjustment factors to ASTM E1300-00 based on type of glass.

3. Normal thermal movement results from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures acting on glass-framing members and glazing components. Base engineering calculation on materials' actual surface temperatures due to both solar heat gain and nighttime sky heat loss.

a. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg.° (67 deg. C), ambient; 180 deg.° (100 deg. C), material surfaces.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Safety Glass and Glazing: Comply with State Statutes, UBC and ANSI Z97.1. B. Certifications: 1. Insulating Glass: IGCC certified to Level A. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01600. 1. Delivery: Schedule delivery to coincide with glazing schedules so minimum handling

of crates is required. Do not open crates except as required for inspection for shipping damage.

2. Storage: Store cases according to printed instructions on case, in areas least subject to traffic or falling objects. Keep storage area clean and dry.

3. Handling: Unpack cases following printed instructions on case. Stack individual windows on edge leaned slightly against upright supports with separators between each.

1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Field measure openings before ordering tempered glass products.

Be responsible for proper fit of field-measured products. 1.07 WARRANTY A. All insulated glass in the vertical positions shall be warranted against seal failure for a

period of ten years. B. All glass with Low E coating shall be warranted against hazing of the coating for a period

of ten years. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GLASS A. Manufacturers/Fabricators: 1. PPG Industries, Inc. 2. AFG Industries, Inc. 3 Libby-Owens-Ford Co. 4. General Glass Corporation. 5. Guardian Industries.

TRL 0708 08800-3

6. Viracon. 7. Visteon Float Glass Operations. 8. Accepted Substitute in accordance with Section 01600. B. Labels: Each Individual Piece of Glass: Bear label designating type, thickness and

quality. Do not remove labels until reviewed by Architect. C. Glass Types: Provide glass of following types as indicated: TYPE DESCRIPTION A One-inch nominal thickness double sealed insulating glass. 1/2-inch air space.

Inside face 1/4 inch clear. Outside face 1/4 inch clear. Low E. B One-inch nominal thickness double sealed insulating glass. 1/2-inch air space.

Inside face 1/4 inch tempered clear. Outside face 1/4 inch tempered clear. Use at safety locations and as indicated. Low E.

C 1/4 inch thickness clear Tempered Safety Glass. Use at safety locations and as

indicated. 2.02 GLAZING MATERIALS A. Glazing Gaskets: Aluminum framing system manufacturer's standard EPDM or neoprene

extrusions. B. Setting Blocks, Shims and Glazing Clips: Size and type as recommended by glass

manufacturer. C. Preshimmed Glazing Tape: 1. Acceptable Products: a. Bostik Chem-Tape 60. b. Pecora Shim-Seal Tape. c. Tremco Preshimmed 440 Tape. d. Approved substitute. 2. Description: Preformed, adhesive, elastomeric butyl/polyisobutylene glazing tape

with continuous built-in EPDM shim, designed for pressure sealing of glazing units in framing system.

3. Sealant Compatibility: Provide tape compatible with silicone glazing sealant and curtain wall or window wall perimeter sealants.

D. Spacers: Neoprene, 40-50 durometer hardness, compatible with sealants used. E. Compressible Filler Rod: Closed cell or waterproof jacketed rod stock of synthetic rubber

or plastic foam proven to be compatible with sealants used, flexible or resilient with 5-10 psi compressive strength for 25% deflection.

F. Cleaners, Primers and Sealers: Type recommended by sealant gasket manufacturer. G. Silicone Glazing Compound: GE Silglaze N or accepted substitute in accordance with

Section 01600.

TRL 0708 08800-4

2.03 MIRRORS A. Mirrors: 1/4-inch thickness polished plate, mirror-glazing quality with polished edges. 1. Sizes: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Adhesive: As recommended by Mirror Glass Manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Verification of Conditions: Comply with Section 01600: 1. Layout: Verify layout of work before beginning installation. 2. Existing Conditions: Before glazing, verify that frames are plumb and square with

metals stops set for proper glass-to-stop face clearance. 3. Notification: Notify General Contractor of unsatisfactory conditions in writing with

copy to Architect. B. Acceptance: Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions by installer. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Protection: Completely cover glass during spray painting, texturing or other construction

operations that might cause damage to glass. 1. Cleandown of Masonry: Completed prior to glass installation. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Stops: 1. Hold glass with metal stops as detailed. a. Stops: Furnished under other sections. 2. Carefully remove any stop already in place as necessary to permit glazing. 3. Handle stops carefully and install to avoid damage. B. Glazing in Metal Frames: 1. Tape entire opening to prevent glass from touching frame in any direction. 2. Center glass in glazing rabbet to maintain recommended clearances at all four

sides, inside and out. 3. Rest glass on setting blocks as recommended by the glass manufacturer. 4. Install shims or use shim tape as recommended to maintain clearance between

stops and face of glass. 5. Install glazing tape and stop in with specified stops. 6. Cover top of tape with silicone sealant on both sides of frame. 7. Cut all glass with smooth, straight edges of full size required by the openings. Edge

clearances shall comply with flat Glass Marketing Association Standards. 8. Leave sealant smooth and clean. Remove sealant from adjoining surfaces without

damaging the finish. C. Glazing in Aluminum Windows and Doors: Install glass on setting blocks as

recommended by the window or door manufacturer. Dry glaze using glass retainers providing resilient clamping grip on glass or glaze with elastic glazing compound as required.

TRL 0708 08800-5

D. Allowable Tolerances: Maintain glazing tolerances between glass and frame or stops as recommended by the FGMA.

1. 1/4 Inch Thickness Glass: Maintain 1/8-inch clearance between glass face and metal stops.

3.04 MIRRORS A. Mirrors: Install with approved adhesive. 3.05 CLEANING A. Cleaning: Leave glass in job clean condition with glazing compound and putty carefully

removed from glass and adjoining surfaces. 1. Final Cleaning of Glass: Under Section 01741. B. Breakage: Unless responsibility can be assessed to another contractor, be responsible for

glass broken during shipment, storage and installation. END OF SECTION

TRL 0708 09253-1

DIVISION 9 FINISHES SECTION 09253 GYPSUM SHEATHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Gypsum sheathing on exterior walls. B. Related Sections: 1. Wood Framing: Section 06100 Rough Carpentry. 2. Interior Gypsum Board: Section 09263 Gypsum Board Partitions and Walls. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit in accordance with Section 01330. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GYPSUM SHEATHING A. Manufacturers: 1. Georgia-Pacific 2. Accepted Substitute in accordance with Section 01600 B. Sheathing Panels: 5/8" Thick Georgia-Pacific Dens-Glass Gold Firestop, Type X Gypsum

sheathing, 4' wide x 8' length. C. Fasteners: USG Type "S" screws or equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Comply with Section 01600: 1. Existing Conditions: Examine framing to receive sheathing before beginning

installation. 2. Notification: Notify General Contractor of unsatisfactory conditions in writing with

copy to Architect. B. Acceptance: Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions by installer. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Gypsum Sheathing: Apply gypsum sheathing panels of maximum practical length with

long dimensions at right angles to studs. 1. Secure with drywall screws spaced 12" o.c. in the field of board and 8" o.c. along

abutting edges.

TRL 0708 09253-2

2. End Joints: Occur over supports with end joints staggered. 3. Properly support panels around cutouts and openings. 4. Joint finishing is not required. END OF SECTION

TRL 0708 09263-1

SECTION 09263 GYPSUM BOARD PARTITIONS AND WALLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes:

1. Metal Stud and Gypsum Board Partitions. 2. Structural Metal Studs and Gypsum Board as Indicated. 3. Shaftwall System. 4. Sound Insulation and Sealants. 5. Accessories and Finishing. 6. Backer Board for Wall Tile in showers and tub recesses. 7. Backer board for interior stone wall finish.

B. Products installed but not Furnished Under This Section: 1. Access Doors and Panels: Section 08310. C. Related Sections: 1. Gypsum Sheathing: Section 09253. 2. Blanket Insulation: Section 07210 Building Insulation. 3. Drywall Ceilings: Section 09264 Gypsum Board Ceilings and Soffits. 4. Painting: Section 09900 Paints and Coatings. 5. Structural Metal Studs: Section 05400 Cold Formed Metal Framing. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: See Section 01423. Comply with following: 1. ASTM C645-95 Standard Specification for Non-Load Bearing (Axial) Steel Studs,

Runners (Tracks), and Rigid Furring Channels for Screw Application of Gypsum Board.

2. ASTM C754 Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum Board.

3. GA 216 Recommended Specifications for the Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board.

4. AISI Specifications for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members. 5. ANSI A108.11 Interior Installation of Cementitious Backer Units. 6. ANSI A118.9 Test Methods and Specifications for Cementitious Backer Units. 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design Requirements: 1. Gypsum Board Partitions: Partitions listed and labeled for fire protective ratings

where indicated. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit copies of manufacturer's specifications covering all materials with

all materials and accessories plainly identified. See Section 01330 Submittal Procedures.

TRL 0708 09263-2

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: Steel studs, runners and accessories shall be certified by manufacturer of

gypsum board as acceptable integral components of its gypsum board system. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: During gypsum panel application and finishing, maintain

temperatures within building within range of 55 degrees to 70 degrees F. Provide adequate ventilation to carry off excess moisture.

B. Pre-Rocking: Any gypsum drywall installation prior to complete weather enclosure of the

building shall be done with weather resistant faceboards. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GYPSUM BOARD FOR DRYWALL PARTITIONS A. Manufacturers: 1. United States Gypsum (USG) 2. Georgia-Pacific 3. National Gypsum Co. (Gold Bond) 4. BPB Celotex 5. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01600. B. Faceboards: 1. Size: 5/8 inch thick unless specifically indicated otherwise. 48 inch wide x length to

allow for vertical installation without cross joints. 2. Type: USG tapered edge Firecode (Type X) or Regular Gypsum Panels as required. 3. Water Resistant: USG W/R tapered edge Firecode (Type X) Gypsum Panels. 2.02 DRYWALL STUDS AND RUNNERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Unimast Incorporated. 2. American Studco, Inc. 3. Clark Steel Framing Systems. 4. Dale Industries, Inc. 5. Dietrich Industries, Inc. 6. Harrison Manufacturing Co. 7. National Gypsum Co. 8. Marino\Ware. 9. Western Metal. 10. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01600. B. Interior Non-Load Bearing Steel Studs: Unimast ST 25 gage No. 358ST25 (3-5/8 inch). Use

other sizes where specifically called for. 1. Provide Unimast CW 20 gage No. 358CW20 studs both sides of door frames. 2. Provide Unimast CW 20 gage No. 358CW20 studs for walls supporting cementitious

board. C. Steel Stud Runners: Unimast CR 25 gage Runner No. 362CR25 (3-5/8 inch) to match studs.

Provide long leg runners for slip joint at structure above where indicated.

TRL 0708 09263-3

2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Manufacturers: 1. United States Gypsum Company (USG). 2. Beadex. 3. Dale Industries. 4. Georgia Pacific. 5. National Gypsum Company. 6. Unimast Incorporated. 7. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01600. B. Fasteners: One-inch Type S drywall screws. Use proper type for gage of stud. C. Corner Bead: USG Sheetrock No. 103 Dur-A-Bead, 1-1/4" x 1-1/4". D. Metal Trim: USG Sheetrock No. 200B. E. Control Joint: USG Sheetrock Zinc Control Joint No. 093. F. Finishing Materials: Gypsum board manufacturer's standard products equivalent to the

following: 1. Joint Tape: USG Sheetrock Joint Tape. G. Sound Isolation Materials: 1. Sound Attenuation Blankets: USG Thermafiber Sound Attenuation Blankets. Three

inches thick unless otherwise indicated. 2. Acoustical Sealant: USG Acoustical Sealant. 3. Ductwork Penetrations Packing: Low density fiberglass. H. Resilient Furring Channels: USG resilient furring channels. 2.04 BACKER BOARD A. Manufacturers and Type: 1. Custom Building Products WonderBoard. 2. USG Durock. 3. Georgia-Pacific Dens-Shield. B. Thickness: 1/2 inch unless indicated otherwise. 2.05 SHAFTWALL SYSTEM A. 3-3/4" total thickness, 2-hour label with components as follows: 1. Studs: 2-1/2" C-H studs or equal. 2. Faceboards: 2 layers 5/8" fire rated drywall. 3. Liner Board: 1" Gypsum shaftwall liner. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 ERECTION OF DRYWALL STUD PARTITIONS A. Reference Standard: Erect steel framing in accordance with ASTM C754.

TRL 0708 09263-4

B. Layouts: Align partition studs accurately according to partition layout. C. Anchoring: Anchor runner channels to concrete slabs with concrete stub nails or power-

driven anchors at 24 inches o.c. Anchor runner channels to ceiling grid where applicable with stove bolts. Install headers where required to receive runners where studs extend above ceiling system.

D. Studs: Position studs vertically in runners. Anchor studs located adjacent to openings or

partition intersections and corners to runners with USG metal lock fastener or with 1/2-inch Type S pan head screws.

1. Space studs 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated. 2. Corners and Intersections: Locate studs no more than two inches from abutting

partitions, corners, etc. 3. Openings: Locate studs not more than two inches from opening frames. Anchor

studs to frame anchor clips by bolt or screw attachment. Install headers over openings as recommended by the manufacturer.

a. Wood Doors and Hollow Metal Doors: Provide two studs at jambs. 4. Wood Blocking: See Section 06100. E. Bracing: Provide diagonal bracing at head of studs that terminate above the ceiling

level. Bracing shall consist of metal studs bent to V-shape and extending at 45 degrees from partition head to structure above. Locate bracing 48 inches maximum o.c.

3.02 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING A. General: Provide necessary framing for special framing at recesses; specialty items; wall

mounted casework, shelving and equipment; etc. Frame around columns as indicated. Provide necessary framing and suspension for offsets, verticals, recessed and all other gypsum drywall surfaces not provided under Section 09262 Gypsum Board Ceilings.

3.03 INSULATION A. Sound Attenuation Blankets: Place in partitions tight within spaces, around cut openings,

behind and around electrical and mechanical items within partitions and tight to items passing through partitions.

1. Ductwork Penetrations: Provide one-inch wide clearance around ductwork and pack with fiberglass ready for calking.

3.04 INSTALLATION OF GYPSUM DRYWALL A. Reference Standard: Apply and finish gypsum board in accordance with GA 216. B. Layout: Apply gypsum wallboard panels vertically with abutting ends and edges

occurring over stud flanges or furring. Horizontal installation is not allowed. 1. Joints on Opposite Sides of Partitions: Shall not occur over same stud. 2. Two Layer Construction: Stagger joints between layers. C. Fasteners: Apply board to studs or furring with drywall screws spaced 12 inches o.c. in

field of board and eight inches o.c. staggered along vertical abutting edges. 1. Use Type S-12 screws for attaching to structural studs. D. Layers: Install multiple layer drywall as indicated.

TRL 0708 09263-5

E. Water Resistant: Use where indicated or specified. F. Backer Board: Apply over steel studs as recommended by manufacturer. 1. Install as back up for ceramic tile in showers and tub recesses. 2. Install as back up for interior stone wall finish. G. Corner Bead: Apply as recommended by manufacturer at exposed out corners. H. Trim: Apply as recommended by manufacturer, where gypsum board abuts other

materials, and as indicated. I. Tolerances: Gypsum board surface plane within +/- 1/8" in 10'. J. Finishing: Apply joint treatment at horizontal and vertical joints, corner bead, trim,

penetrations and fastener dimples as recommended by manufacturer. 1. Prefill open joints and rounded or beveled edges, if any, using setting-type joint

compound. 2. Apply joint tape at joints between gypsum boards except at trim accessories. 3. Apply joint compounds in 3 coats. Sand smooth between coats and after last coat. a. Embedding and first coat: Setting-type joint compound. b. Fill coat: Setting-type joint compound. c. Finish coat: Ready-mix drying-type all-purpose or topping compound. K. Acoustical Sealant: Apply at perimeter and at all penetrations of gypsum board in single

bead. 1. Locations: Apply at partitions with sound attenuation blankets. 2. Caulk ductwork penetrations. 3. Caulk both sides of partitions edges with continuous bead. 3.05 SHAFTWALL SYSTEM A. Erect shaftwall system as recommended by manufacturer and as required to meet

specified fire rating. Use manufacturer's standard details for corners and wall junctions. Finish faceboards as specified under Article 3.04. Add additional faceboards where indicated on drawings. Provide horizontal installation where indicated.

END OF SECTION

TRL 0708 09264-1

SECTION 09264 GYPSUM BOARD CEILINGS AND SOFFITS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Metal Suspension and Gypsum Board Ceilings and Soffits. 2. Accessories and Finishing. B. Products installed but not Furnished Under This Section. 1. Access Doors and Panels: Section 08310. C. Related Sections: 1. Drywall Partitions: Section 09263 Gypsum Board Partitions and Walls. 2. Painting: Section 09900 Paints and Coatings. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards - See Section 01423. Comply with following: 1. ASTM C754 Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw-Attached

Gypsum Wallboard. 2. GA 216 Recommended Specifications for the Application and Finishing of Gypsum

Board. 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design Requirements: 1. Fire Rating: All gypsum board ceilings listed and labeled for one hour fire protective

rating. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit copies of manufacturer's specifications covering all materials to

be used with all materials and accessories plainly identified. See Section 01330 Submittal Procedures.

B. Samples: Submit 2 foot x 2 foot sample of texture for Architect's approval. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver all material in original, unopened containers and store in a clean, dry area until

ready to use. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: During gypsum panel application and finishing, maintain

temperatures within building within range of 55 degrees to 70 degrees F. Provide adequate ventilation to carry off excess moisture.

TRL 0708 09264-2

B. Pre-Rocking: Any gypsum drywall installation prior to complete weather enclosure of the building shall be done with water-resistant faceboards.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Drywall, Metal Suspension System, and Accessories: 1. USG Interiors, Inc. 2. Georgia-Pacific 3. National Gypsum Co. (Gold Bond) 4. BPB Celotex 5. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01600. 2.02 METALS A. Runner Channels: USG Donn Rigid X System, RMX 12, 1-1/2", minimum 16 gage cold

rolled channels, black asphaltum painted. B. Cross Channels: USG Donn Rigid X System, 7/8 inch RCX 4 or 1-1/2 inch DXL 424. C. Furring Channels: USG DWC-25 metal furring channels. D. Steel Studs: Unimast ST 25 gage. Size as indicated. E. Hanger Wire: No. 9 gage galvanized wire. F. Tie Wire: No. 16 gage galvanized wire. 2.03 DRYWALL AND RELATED MATERIALS A. Faceboards: 1. Size: 5/8" thick unless specifically indicated otherwise 48" wide x length to minimize

cross joints. 2. Type: USG Firecode tapered edge gypsum panels. B. Fasteners: One inch USG Type S drywall screws. Use proper type for gage of metal

framing. C. Accessories: 1. Corner Bead: USG Sheetrock No. 103 Dur-A-Bead, 1-1/4" x 1-1/4" 2. Metal Trim: USG Sheetrock No. 200B. 3. Control Joint: USG Sheetrock Zinc Control Joint No. 093. 4. Adhesives: a. USG Durabond multi-purpose adhesive. b. USG Sheetrock Setting Type Durabond. D. Finishing Materials: 1. Joint Tape: USG Sheetrock Joint Tape. 2. Adhesive: USG Sheetrock Setting Type Durabond Joint Compound. 3. Texture: USG texture.

TRL 0708 09264-3

2.04 EXTERIOR SOFFIT MATERIAL A. Faceboards: USG 1 Hour Fire Rated Exterior Gypsum Ceiling Board, 5/8" thickness. B. Fasteners: USG Type S drywall screws or equal. C. Metal Trim: USG No. Sheetrock 200C or equal of acceptable manufacturers. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GRILLAGE ERECTION A. Reference Standard: Erect steel framing in accordance with ASTM C574. B. Hangers: Install wire hangers spaced not over 48" o.c. in direction of 1-1/2" main runner

channels and within 6" of ends of main runners or interruptions of ceiling continuity. Hang from structure above. Install hangers 24" o.c. at gypsum drywall ceilings supporting wood or metal ceilings or other secondary ceiling systems.

C. At light troffers or other openings, reinforce grillage with 3/4" cold rolled channels wired

atop and parallel to main runner channels. D. Erect grillage as recommended by the manufacturer. Provide all necessary framing and

suspension for offsets, verticals and decorative recesses, etc. Use drywall studs where indicated or required. See Section 09263 for type. Install 1- 1/2" main runner channels 24" o.c. at ceilings supporting wood or metal ceilings or other secondary ceiling systems.

3.02 INSTALLATION OF GYPSUM DRYWALL A. Apply gypsum board of maximum practical length with long dimensions at right angles

to furring channels and fasten with drywall screws spaced 12" o.c. in the field of the board and 8" o.c. along abutting edges. All end and edge joints shall occur over furring channels with end joints staggered. Properly support gypsum board around cutouts and openings.

B. Apply metal trim as recommended by the manufacturer and wherever gypsum drywall

abuts other materials. C. Finishing: Apply joint treatment at side and end joints, trim, penetrations and fastener

dimples as recommended by manufacturer. 1. Prefill open joints and rounded or beveled edges, if any, using setting-type joint

compound. 2. Apply joint tape at joints between gypsum boards except at trim accessories. 3. Apply joint compounds in 3 coats. Sand smooth between coats and after last coat. a. Embedding and first coat: Setting-type joint compound. b. Fill coat: Setting-type joint compound. c. Finish coat: Ready-mix drying-type all-purpose or topping compound. D. Apply texture as directed following application of primer. Application of primer by

painting subcontractor.

TRL 0708 09264-4

3.03 INSTALLATION OF EXTERIOR SOFFITS Apply soffit boards using methods specified for interior ceilings and with minimum of

joints. Finish joints, trim, and fasteners as recommended by manufacturer. Finish smooth with no texture.

END OF SECTION

TRL 0708 09300-1

SECTION 09300 TILE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes:

1. Ceramic floor tiling. 2. Ceramic wall tiling. 3. Ceramic tile base. 4. Porcelain tile and trim. 5. Natural stone wall tiling. 6. Quarry tile and base. 7. Tile mortar and grout. 8. Shower and bath surround waterproofing. 9. Crack isolation membrane. 10. Other tiling accessories.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Concrete Floor Slab Finishing and Curing: Section 03300 Cast-in-Concrete. 2. Tile Backer Board: Section 09263 Gypsum Board Partitions and Walls. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: Comply with the following standards: 1. Tile Council of North America, Inc. (TCNA): 2008 TCNA Handbook for Ceramic Tile

Installation. 2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) - ANSI A108-1999 - American National

Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile: ANSI A108.1A-1999: Installation of Ceramic Tile in the Wet-Set Method with

Portland Cement Mortar ANSI A108.5-1999 Ceramic Tile Installed with Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar

or Latex-Portland Cement Mortar ANSI A108.17-2005 Installation of Crack Isolation Membranes for Thin-set

Ceramic Tile and Dimension Stone 3. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Material Specifications / Test Methods:

ANSI A118-1999. ANSI A118.4-1999 Latex-Portland Cement Mortar ANSI A118.6-1999 Ceramic Tile Grouts 4. ANSI A137.1-1988 Ceramic Tile 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals for Review: Submit the following in accordance with Section 01330 Submittal

Procedures: 1. Product Data: Submit catalog data for all setting, grouting and miscellaneous

materials. 2. Shop Drawings: Indicate tile patterns, colors, locations, and widths of expansion,

contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile substrates and finished tile surfaces.

TRL 0708 09300-2

a. Locate precisely each joint and crack in tile substrates by measuring, record measurements on shop drawings, and coordinate them with tile joint locations.

b. Submit jointing layout based on field dimensions of existing conditions. 3. Samples: Submit complete samples of tile and grout to Architect for color and

texture selection or verification. a. Each type and composition of tile and for each color and texture required, at

least one full size sample for each tile specified. b. Trim for Ceramic Tile: 6 inches long. c. Provide samples keyed according to specifications. B. Submittals for Information: 1. Certifications: a. Submit "Master Grade Certificate" for each type of tile in accordance with

requirements of ANSI A137.1. b. Submit manufacturer's certifications that mortars, adhesives, and grouts are

suitable for intended use. 2. Manufacturer's Representative's quality control report. C. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following in accordance with Section 01780. 1. Maintenance Data: Include cleaning methods, cleaning solutions recommended,

stain removal methods, and polishes and waxes recommended. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Flooring subcontractor must have at least five (5) years

experience in the installation of ceramic tile flooring projects. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General Requirements: Comply with Section 01600. 1. Protect materials from contamination, dampness, freezing, or overheating in

accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Broken, cracked, chipped, stained, or damaged tile will be rejected, whether built-

in or not. 3. Protect mortar and grout materials against moisture, soiling, or staining. B. Labeling: Comply with ANSI A137.1. C. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer's unopened containers, fully identified with

name, brand, type, and grade. D. Storage: Store materials in a clean, dry area. 1. Store cementitious materials off the ground and under cover. 2. Store admixtures in original unopened containers. 3. Protect liquid admixtures from freezing. E. Handling: Handle tile that has temporary protective coating on exposed surfaces to

prevent coated surfaces from contacting backs or edges of other units. If coating does contact bonding surfaces of tile, remove coating from bonding surfaces before setting tile.

TRL 0708 09300-3

1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Ambient Environmental Conditions: Comply with requirements of referenced standards

and recommendations of material manufacturers for environmental conditions before, during, and after installation.

1. Do not begin installation until building is completely enclosed and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and humidity conditions consistent with "after occupancy" conditions for a minimum of 2 weeks.

2. Do not install tile set in Portland cement mortar when the ambient temperature is below 50 degrees F. Comply with minimum temperature requirements of bonding and grouting materials manufacturers.

3. Maintain continuous and uniform building temperatures of not less than 50 degrees F during installation nor more than 100 degrees F.

4. Ventilate spaces receiving tile in accordance with material manufacturers' instructions.

1.07 MAINTENANCE A. Maintenance Materials: Provide the Owner 3 percent of each size and color of tile and

grout used at completion of the Project. B. Store in location as directed by Owner. C. Ensure materials are boxed and identified by manufacturer, type, and color. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR TILE A. ANSI Standard for Ceramic Tile: Comply with ANSI A137.1 for types, compositions, and

grades of tile indicated. 1. Furnish tile complying with "Standard Grade" requirements unless otherwise

indicated. B. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: Where manufacturer's standard products are indicated for

tile, grout, and other products requiring selection of colors, surface textures, patterns, and other appearance characteristics, provide specific products or materials complying with the following requirements:

1. Match color, texture, and pattern indicated by reference to manufacturer's standard designations for these characteristics.

2. Provide tile trim and accessories that match color and finish of adjoining flat tile unless noted otherwise.

C. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within the ranges selected during

sample submittals, blend tile in factory and package accordingly so that tile units taken from one package show the same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved samples.

D. Provide ¾ inch bullnose tile pieces at all outside corners, exposed edges and top of

wainscot as detailed on the Drawings.

TRL 0708 09300-4

2.02 INTERIOR CERAMIC AND PORCELAIN TILE A. Acceptable Manufacturers - Ceramic Wall and Floor Tile and Base: See Schedule on

Drawings. 1. Dal-Tile Corporation - American Olean; www.aotile.com. 2. Dal-Tile Corporation; www.daltile.com - Daltile. 3. Florida Tile, Inc.; www.floridatile.com. 4. United States Ceramic Tile Company; www.usctco.com. 5. Approved substitute. B. Acceptable Manufacturers - Porcelain Tile: See Schedule on Drawings. C. Ceramic Wall Tile: Buff body, approximately 5/16-inch thickness, cushion edges with

bright glaze or matte glaze finish as selected. See Schedule on Drawings. D. Ceramic Floor Tile: Approximately 1/4-inch thickness, unglazed, factory mounted sheets. 1. Size: See Schedule on Drawings. 2. Cove Base: Where no wall tile is present, provide bullnose at top of base. 3. Colors: See Schedule on Drawings. E. Porcelain Floor Tile: See Schedule on Drawings. F. Accessory Pieces: 1. Provide ¾ inch bullnose ceramic tile pieces at all outside corners, exposed edges

and top of wainscot as detailed on the Drawings. 2. Shower Soap Holder: Ceramic tile with recessed soap dish at each shower. 2.03 QUARRY TILE A. Acceptable Manufacturers - Quarry Tile: See Schedule on Drawings. 1. Dal-Tile Corporation - American Olean; www.aotile.com. 2. Dal-Tile Corporation; www.daltile.com - Daltile. 3. Summitville Tiles, Inc.; www.summitville.com. 4. Approved substitute. B. Size: See Schedule on Drawings. C. Flush Cove Base: 6 inches wide by 5 inches high to match floor tile. Where no wall tile is

present, provide bullnose at top of base. D. Colors: See Schedule of Drawings. 2.04 SETTING AND GROUTING MATERIALS A. Acceptable Manufacturers – Ceramic, Porcelain, and Natural Stone Tile Setting and

Grouting Materials: 1. Bostik/Hydroment. 2. C-Cure Chemical Co., Inc. 3. Custom Building Products 4. Davco. 5. Laticrete International, Inc. 6. Mapei. 7. Approved substitute

http://www.aotile.com/�

www.daltile.com�

http://www.floridatile.com/�

http://www.usctco.com/�

http://www.aotile.com/�

www.daltile.com�

http://www.summitville.com/�

TRL 0708 09300-5

B. Portland Cement Mortar: 1:3 Portland cement/sand gauged with C-Cure Latex Admix or approved substitute. Mix as recommended by manufacturer.

1. Bond Coat: Neat Portland cement gauged with C-Cure Crete or approved substitute.

C. Mortar Bed Reinforcing Mesh: ANSI A108.1A. Galvanized metal lath, 2.5 lbs/cu. yd. D. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar for Thin-Set Interior Applications: 1. For Installation on Walls and Slab-on-Grade: ANSI 118.4. C-Cure Crete and C-Cure

Crete Powder. 2. Flexible Latex-Portland Cement Mortar for Floor Installations Above Grade Concrete

Slabs: Tile Manufacturer's designated mortar for above-grade structural wood floors, capable of withstanding substrate deflection up to 1/240 of span without loss of bond or cracking.

E. Grout: 1. Colors: As selected by Architect. 2. For Installation on Walls and Concrete Slabs on Grade: ANSI A118.6. C-Cure M-P

Grout. Cement grout. 3. For Floor Installations Over Structural Framing: Tile Manufacturer's designated grout

for above-grade structural floors. 4. Mixes as recommended by manufacturer. 2.05 EXPANSION JOINT SEALANT A. Joint Sealant: 1. Floors: Two component polyurethane sealant, ASTM C920, Type M (self leveling) for

horizontal joints, Type II (non sag) for vertical joints as specified in Section 07920. 2. Walls: Silicone to match grout. 3. Color: Match grout. 4. Ensure sealant is chemically compatible with tile, mortar, and grout. 5. Ensure sealant can physically and chemically withstand environmental conditions

normally expected at installation areas. B. Joint Backing: Closed cell foam polyethylene. 2.06 WATERPROOFING MATERIALS A. Sheet Waterproofing at Shower Floors: ASTM D4068. Noble Company Chloraloy 240

Shower Pan Liner. 1. Material: Chlorinated polyethylene (CPE) thermoplastic sheet membrane. 2. Nominal Thickness: 40-mils. 3. Accessories: a. Sealant for Drains, Penetrations, Terminal Edges and Seams: NobleSealant 150 b. Seaming Cement: NobleWeld 100. c. Preformed outside corners. d. Cap strips. 2.07 FLOORING TRANSITION ACCESSORIES A. Tile/Carpet Transition: Schluter Systems, Reno-TK-AETK100. B. Tile/Vinyl Flooring Transition: Johnsonite, Adaptor CTA-49-K.

TRL 0708 09300-6

C. Tile/Concrete Floor Transition: Johnsonite, Transition CTA-49-P. 2.08 MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Crack Isolation Membrane: ANSI A118.12. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. The Noble Company; www.noblecompany.com. b. Accepted substitute. 2. Membrane: NobleSeal CIS or accepted substitute. B. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile

and grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout manufacturers.

C. Grout Sealer: Manufacturer's standard silicone product for sealing grout joints that does

not change color or appearance of grout. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: a. Bonsal, W. R., Company - Grout Sealer. b. Bostik - CeramaSeal Grout Sealer. c. C-Cure - Penetrating Sealer 978. d. Custom Building Products - Surfaceguard or Tilelab Grout Sealer. e. MAPEI Corporation: 1) KER 003, Silicone Spray Sealer for Cementitious Tile Grout. 2) KER 004, Keraseal Penetrating Sealer for Unglazed Grout and Tile. f. Summitville Tiles, Inc. - SL-15, Invisible Seal Penetrating Grout and Tile Sealer. g. TEC Specialty Products Inc. - TA-256 Penetrating Silicone or TA-257 Silicone

Grout Sealer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Before proceeding, examine surfaces to receive tile, setting

beds or accessories for defects or conditions adversely affecting quality and execution of the installation. Report unsatisfactory conditions to the General Contractor in writing with copy to Architect. Verify locations of all expansion and control joints in substrate for compliance with Article "Expansion And Control Joint Installation".

B. Acceptance: Beginning of installation means acceptance of substrates. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within the ranges selected during sample

submittals, verify that tile has been blended in factory and packaged accordingly so that tile units taken from one package show the same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved samples. If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing.

B. Cleaning and Surface Preparation: Clean substrates. Prepare surfaces in strict

accordance with instructions of waterproofing manufacturer. 1. Clean concrete base slab to remove dust, dirt and loose material. a. Acid Based Cleaners: Use not permitted.

http://www.noblecompany.com/�

TRL 0708 09300-7

2. Scarify concrete substrates with blast track equipment if necessary to completely remove curing compounds or other substances that would interfere with proper bond of waterproofing materials. Clean and maintain substrate in condition required by waterproofing manufacturer.

3. Do not seal substrate unless required by manufacturer. C. Porcelain Tile: Clean porcelain tile before installation, removing factory-applied

protective coating that inhibits bond. D. Waterproofing: Install on shower floors, over gypsum underlayment to receive tile, and

exterior balcony decks to receive tile according to manufacturer's written data sheets. 1. Extend up walls a minimum of 6 inches behind wall finish. 2. Extend up counter backsplashes and sidesplashes. 3. Reinforce all corners, joints and penetrations with flashing unit. E. Crack Isolation Membrane: Install according to manufacturer’s directions under all thin

set floor tile. 3.03 TILE INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Install tile materials in accordance with ANSI A137.1, other referenced ANSI and TCNA

specifications, and TCNA "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation", except for more stringent requirements of manufacturer or these Specifications.

B. Cut and fit tile tight to protrusions and vertical interruptions and treat with a compatible

sealant as specified in Section 07920. Form corners and bases neatly. C. Work tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. Make

joint watertight, without voids, cracks, excess mortar, or grout. D. Prepare surface, fit, set, bond, grout and clean in accordance with applicable

requirements of ANSI standards and Tile Council of North America. E. Layout: 1. Lay out work to pattern indicated so that full tile or joint is centered on each wall

and no tile of less than half width need be used. Do not interrupt pattern through openings. Lay out tile to minimize cutting and to avoid tile less than half size.

2. For heights stated in feet and inches, use courses of full tile to produce nearest attainable heights without cutting tile.

3. No staggered joints will be permitted. 4. Align joints in tile in both directions. 5. Align joints between floor and base tile. 6. File edges of cut tile smooth and even. 7. Cut and fit tile at penetrations through tile. Do not damage visible surfaces.

Carefully grind edges of tile abutting built-in items. Fit tile at outlets, piping and other penetrations so that plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.

8. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures, to form complete covering without interruptions, except as otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.

9. Accurately form intersections and returns.

TRL 0708 09300-8

C. Installing Tile 8x8 and Larger: 1. Apply only as much mortar as can be covered within allowable setting windows as

recommended by mortar or adhesive manufacturer or while surface is still tacky. 2. Apply mortar with flat edge of notched trowel sized to facilitate proper coverage

using scraping motion to key the mortar into surface to be covered. Comb with the notched side of the trowel in one direction only, horizontally and side to side. Maintain 100 percent coverage on back of tile and fully bed all corners.

3. Trowel mortar onto back of each tile or sheet of tiles. 4. Firmly press tiles into the mortar and move them perpendicularly across the ridges,

forward and back approximately 1/8-inch to ¼-inch, to flatten the ridges and fill in the valleys.

5. Beat or rap tile to ensure proper bond and also to level surface of tile. 6. Align tile to show uniform joints and allow to set until firm. 7. Clean excess mortar or adhesive from surface of tile with wet cheese cloth (not a

sponge) while mortar is fresh. 8. Sound tile after setting. Replace hollow sounding tiles. 9. Periodically remove and check a tile to verify 100 percent coverage is being

attained. 3.04 INTERIOR FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION A. General: Select from the following methods, remaining consistent with requirements of

Interior Finish Schedule and with requirements indicated on Drawings for flooring thickness and transitions to adjacent flooring materials.

B. Shower Tile Floors - Portland Cement Mortar Bed Installation Over Structural Concrete:

Install grout, clean, protect and cure in conformance with TCNA Handbook Method F111-05 and ANSI A108.1A.

1. Mortar Bed Thickness: Uniform. Minimum 1¼-inch, maximum 2-inch. 2. Install tile-reinforcing mesh in mortar bed. 3. Install Portland cement grout in accordance with ANSI A108.10. C. Shower Tile Floors - Portland Cement Mortar Bed Installation On Interior Concrete Slabs-

on-Grade: Install grout, clean, protect and cure in conformance with TCNA Handbook Method F112-05 and ANSI A108.1A.

1. Mortar Bed Thickness: Uniform 1¼-inch. 2. Cracks in Concrete Slab: Patched before installation of mortar bed. 3. Install Portland cement grout or polymer modified cement grout in accordance

with ANSI A108.10. D. Tile Floors - Thin Set Installation On Interior Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Install, grout, clean,

protect and cure in conformance with TCNA Handbook Method F113-05 and ANSI A108.5 using latex-Portland cement mortar. Slab shall be free of curing compound or other contaminates before proceeding.

E. Tile Floors - Thin Set Installation on Above-Grade Concrete Floors: Install, grout, clean,

protect and cure in conformance with TCNA Handbook Method F113 and ANSI A108.5 using flexible latex-Portland cement mortar and latex-Portland cement grout designated by the manufacturer for structural floor installations.

TRL 0708 09300-9

3.05 INTERIOR WALL TILE INSTALLATION A. Wall Tile and Base – Typical Installation Over Moisture Resistant Gypsum Board: Install wall

tile using the thin set method. Install, grout, clean, protect and cure in conformance with TCNA Handbook Method W243-05 and ANSI A108.5 using latex-Portland cement mortar.

B. Wall Tile and Base – Interior Installation Over Gypsum Board Not in Wet or Humid Areas:

Install wall tile using the thin set method. Install, grout, clean, protect and cure in conformance with TCNA Handbook Method W243-05 and ANSI A108.5 using latex-Portland cement mortar.

3.06 SHOWER AND BATHTUB RECESS TILE INSTALLATION A. Tile Walls in Bathtub Recesses and Interior Shower Walls and Tub Recesses: Install, grout,

clean, protect and cure in conformance with TCNA Handbook Method B412-05 over cementitious board backup.

1. Showers: Coordinate with shower receptor waterproofing, providing waterproof seal at joint with shower pan.

3.07 EXPANSION AND CONTROL JOINTS A. General: Comply with all requirements of TCNA Handbook Method EJ171. B. Locations: 1. Ceramic Floor Tile: At intersection of all ceramic floor tile and cove base, install and

caulk ¼-inch wide expansion joint. 2. Other Locations: Directly over all expansion and control joints in concrete slab

below and all other locations required by EJ171. 3.08 CLEANING AND SEALING A. Just prior to occupancy of the building, clean unglazed ceramic tile with sulfamic acid

and flush with clean water. When tile and joints are completely clean of cement, scum and dirt, apply manufacturer-approved sealer to floors only. In showers or other wet areas, seal grout but do not apply sealer to floor tile.

B. Apply sealer according to manufacturer's recommendations in sufficient coats to

produce an even glaze over entire floor area. Exercise care to avoid damage to adjoining surfaces.

C. Clean all other floor and wall tile according to tile manufacturer's recommendations. 3.09 PROTECTION A. Protection of Completed Work from Physical Damage: 1. Protect all flooring after setting by suitable covering. 2. Replace any work showing damage or disfiguration during the progress of work in its

entirety. No patching or hiding of defects will be permitted. END OF SECTION

TRL 0708 09384-1

SECTION 09384 STONE COUNTERTOPS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Stone countertops. 2. Related stone shelves and splashbacks. B. Related Sections: 1. Casework under Countertops: Section 06410 Custom Cabinets. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Section 01330. Include layout, anchoring,

jointing and sink and trim openings. B. Samples: Submit 12"x 12" sample of each type of stone illustrating full range of color for

acceptance in accordance with Section 01330. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in cut stone and tile installation. 1. Experience: Continuously installed cut stone and tile in State of Wyoming for five

years. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01600. 1. Delivery and Handling: Carefully packed and loaded for delivery. Do not use

packing material that may stain or discolor stone. 2. Handling and Storage: Carefully handle and store vertically to avoid chipping and

discoloration. Protect from weather by means of non-staining waterproof covering. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Maintain materials and surrounding air to minimum 40°F

prior to, during, and 48 hours after completion of work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 STONE A. See Drawings. 2.02 SETTING AND GROUTING MATERIALS A. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI 118.4, 1:1 Portland cement/sand gauged

with Laticrete 4237 tile setting liquid.

TRL 0708 09384-2

B. Grout: Laticrete drybond grout and joint filler gauged with Laticrete 3701 admix. Mix as recommended by manufacturer. Color as selected by Architect.

C. Cleaner: Laticrete TC-500. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Comply with Section 01600: 1. Layout: Verify layout of work before beginning installation. 2. Existing Conditions: Examine substrate before beginning installation. 3. Notification: Notify General Contractor of unsatisfactory conditions in writing. B. Acceptance: Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions by installer. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Coordinate installation of sinks and sink trim. B. Cooperation: Check relationship of stone to work under other sections, cooperate with

others and proceed as desirable for general progress and best interest of project. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Stone Countertops - Thin Set Installation: Install, grout, clean, protect and cure in

conformance with TCA Handbook Method F113 and ANSI A108.5 using latex Portland cement mortar. Joints shall be 1/8" wide.

B. Grouting: Fill joints with a grout gun and strike flush with surface. C. Sinks and Trim: Coordinate installation of sinks and trim by plumbing subcontractor. 3.04 CLEANING A. Stone: Keep face of stone free of mortar at all times. 1. After joint pointing, carefully clean with Laticrete TC-500 applied according to

manufacturer's instructions. 2. Use of wire brushes or of acid not allowed. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protection of Completed Work from Physical Damage: Protect counter tops after setting

by suitable boxing. Do not use lumber that may stain or deface stone. B. Replacement: Replace countertops showing damage or disfiguration during progress of

work in its entirety. Patching or hiding of defects not permitted. END OF SECTION

TRL 0708 09510-1

SECTION 09510 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Suspended Acoustical Grid 2. Lay-in Panels B. Related Sections: 1. Drywall Ceilings: Section 09264 Gypsum Board Ceilings [and Soffits]. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards, see Section 01423. Comply with: 1. ASTM C635-86 - Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel

Ceilings. 2. ASTM C636-86 - Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile

and Lay-In Panels. 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Performance Requirements: 1. Acoustical: a. Lay-in panels shall have a minimum noise reduction coefficient (NRC) as

indicated in Article 2.01. b. The completed suspended acoustical grid ceiling system shall have a sound

transmission class (STC) rating as indicated in Article 2.01. 2. Fire: a. Panels and suspension system shall be listed and labeled for one hour fire rating

where indicated. b. The completed fire rated assembly shall comply with fire resistance ratings test

conducted by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. or other recognized testing laboratory. Test results and fire rating certification shall be available to the Architect on request.

1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's catalog data indicating all systems proposed for

installation. Include details of light fixture protection (if any) required to comply with Paragraph 1.03 A. If Fixture protection is not required, submit manufacturer's written data so indicating. Also submit specific requirements for holddown clips (if any).

B. Samples: Submit samples of each type of lay-in panel and ceiling grid meeting the

requirements of this specification to the Architect.

TRL 0708 09510-2

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01600. Deliver in manufacturer's original unopened

containers and store in a clean, dry area until ready for use. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Do not install acoustical ceilings until dust-generating activities are completed, wet

work has dried and overhead mechanical work is completed. 2. Maintain minimum of 60°F during and after installation of acoustical ceilings. 1.07 MAINTENANCE A. Extra Materials: Provide Owner with 1% of gross area installed, maximum of two cases, of

each type of ceiling panel used. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACOUSTICAL PANELS A. Manufacturers: 1. Armstrong World Industries 2. USG Interiors, Inc. 3. Celotex 4. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01600. B. Public Areas: 1. Manufacturer and Type: Armstrong Cirrus 589 2. Size: 3/4" x 2'-0" x 2'-0" with beveled tegular edge. 3. NRC: 0.60 4. CAC: 35 5. Color: White 6. Grid: 9/16" face. C. Back of House Areas: 1. Manufacturer and Type: Armstrong Fine Fissured 1729. 2. Size: 5/8" x 2'-0" x 4'-0" 3. NRC: 0.55 4. CAC: 35 5. Color: White 6. Grid: 15/16" face. D. Kitchen Area: 1. Manufacturer and Type: Armstrong Ceramaguard non-perforated 605.

5. Size: 5/8" x 2'-0" x 4'-0" 6. Color: White. 7. Grid: 15/16" face.

TRL 0708 09510-3

2.02 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Manufacturers: 1. Armstrong 2. Chicago Metallic Corporation 3. Donn/USG 4. Approved substitute in accordance with Section 01600. B. Suspension Systems: 1. Systems: a. Fire Rated: Chicago Metallic Fire Front 250 Snap-Grid System b. Non-Fire Rated: Chicago Metallic 200 c. Narrow Front: Armstrong Suprafine d. Color: As selected by Architect. 2. Edge Molding: Standard with specified grid system, color to match grid. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. General: Install suspension systems in accordance with ASTM C636 and manufacturers

recommendations. 1. Install metal edge molding wherever the suspended grid abuts walls, columns and

other vertical surfaces. 2. Frame around openings as required. 3. Suspend grid with hanger wires from structure above. Install hanger wires at all four

corners of lay-in light fixtures and as required to provide maximum deflection of 1/360 of span and level within 1/8" in 12'.

B. Exposed Grid Suspension System: 1. Install main T-runner on 48" centers. 2. To complete a 24" x 48" grid, install 48" cross T-splines 24" o.c. at right angles to main

T-runners. Install additional cross T-splines to form 24" grid. 3. Lock T-spline intersecting moldings in place. All main T-runners and cross T-splines

shall be straight in alignment and flush at intersections. 4. Avoid use of less than half width units at borders. 5. Install edge molding at all intersections with dissimilar vertical surfaces. End joints for

edge moldings shall occur only at T-Runners or Cross T-splines and shall have riveted connections.

6. Set edge moldings in thin bed of latex acrylic sealant to completely seal joint between edge molding and wall. Where wall irregularities occur, shim edge molding to a straight line.

C. Reflected Ceiling Plan: Follow reflected ceiling plan on drawings in layout of grid. Any

deviation must be accepted by Architect. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF LAY-IN PANELS A. Panels: Install panels in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Where

required, cut units to fit. 1. Lay-In Panels: a. Install panels flush in grid.

TRL 0708 09510-4

b. Where panels run continuous over tops of drywall partitions or where required for specified fire rating, provide holddown clips so panels fit tight to tops of partitions.

3.03 LIGHT FIXTURE PROTECTION If required for fire resistance assembly specified and by manufacturer's design number

install box, tent or flat cover fixture protection as applicable to the assembly being installed.

3.04 FINAL APPEARANCE A. Panels: On completion, acoustical panels shall be free from defects, clean and lying flat

in metal grid. Remove and replace dirty, defaced, scarred or otherwise defective panels. Touch up of scarred panels not acceptable.

END OF SECTION

TRL 0708 09650-1

SECTION 09650 RESILIENT FLOORING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Vinyl Composition Tile Flooring (VCT). 2. Rubber Base. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Samples: Submit in accordance with Section 01330, a full set of samples of the brand of

floor tile, treads and base to be used. Samples shall be complete and up to date. Colors will not be selected until samples are received. At the option of the Architect, full size samples may be required.

1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01330. B. Temperature: Store materials in original containers at not less than 70° F for not less than

24 hours immediately before installation. 1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Maintain temperature in space to receive tile between 70°

F and 90° F for not less than 24 hours before and 48 hours after installation. Following 48-hour period maintain minimum temperature of 55° F until completion of building.

1.05 MAINTENANCE A. Extra Materials: Provide the Owner at the completion of the project the following items: 1. Floor tile in the amount of 1% of each color used. 2. One case base and stair treads of each type and color used. 3. One gallon of each type of adhesive used. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FLOOR TILE A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Armstrong 2. Azrock Floor Products 3. Mannington 4. Approved Substitute B. Tile (VCT): 12" x 12" x 1/8" See Schedule on Drawings.

TRL 0708 09650-2

2.02 RUBBER BASE A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Azrock Floor Products 2. Flexco Division of Textile Rubber Co., Inc. 3. Johnson Rubber Company 4. R. C. Musson Rubber Company 5. Roppe Rubber Corporation 6. Burke Industries 7. VPI 8. Approved Substitute B. Base: 1/8" thickness x 4" high unless other sizes are indicated. Provide pre-formed

external corners. Job-formed internal corners may be used at Contractor's option. Use straight carpet base at all carpet. Use topset cove base at all other locations. See Schedule on Drawings.

C. Vinyl Edging: Furnish at exposed edges of resilient floor tile, vinyl edging 1" wide, 1/8"

thick. Colors as selected by Architect. 2.04 ADHESIVE A. Adhesive: As recommended by the manufacturer of the material being installed.

Adhesive for vinyl edging and base shall be a type not affected by heat. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine substrate for excessive moisture content and

unevenness that would prevent execution and quality of resilient flooring as specified. Report unsatisfactory conditions to the General Contractor with copy to Architect.

B. Acceptance: Do not proceed with installation of resilient flooring until defects have been corrected except where correction is indicated under Preparation. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing substrate.

3.02 PREPARATION A. Leveling: Level major uneven concrete floor joints or other irregularities by bush

hammering or grinding and filling with latex type underlayment. Leveled areas shall be sanded to provide a surface level +1/4" in 10'. Leveled areas shall be inspected by the Architect before flooring work may proceed.

B. Cleaning, Patching and Priming: Thoroughly clean concrete floors before applying floor

coverings. Remove rough spots and any foreign matter that might be evident through the floor covering. Patch minor rough areas, voids and defects with compatible leveling compound. Prime concrete floors as recommended by the manufacturer of the flooring.

3.03 APPLICATION OF ADHESIVES A. General: Mix and apply adhesives in accordance with manufacturer's instruction.

Provide safety precautions during mixing and applications as recommended by

TRL 0708 09650-3

adhesive manufacturer. Cover only that amount of area that can be covered by flooring material within the recommended working time of the adhesive.

B. Application: Apply adhesive uniformly over surfaces with notched trowel or other

suitable tool. Clean trowel and rework notches as necessary to insure proper application of adhesive.

C. Cleaning: Remove any adhesive that dries or films over. Do not soil walls, bases, or

adjacent areas with adhesives. Promptly remove spillage. 3.04 INSTALLATION A. Tile Flooring: 1. General: Install in accordance with the recommendations and specifications of the

tile manufacturer. Make joints straight, tight, and flush. Tightly cement to floor. 2. Layout: Work out patterns for each floor area and cuts against walls so cuts on

opposite sides of the area are of same width. In order to eliminate small cuts against walls, layout each area to determine whether pattern should start with a joint or center of a tile on the centerline of the area each direction. Where tile with a directional pattern is used, confer with Architect for direction of pattern.

3. Layout: Work out patterns for each floor area and cuts against walls so cuts on opposite sides of the area are of same width. In order to eliminate small cuts against walls, lay out each area to determine whether pattern should start with a joint or center of a tile on the centerline of the floor.

B. Base: Tightly cement base to wall with butt joints 1/16" or less in width. Install base in toe

space of cabinets. Install base in carpeted areas, after carpet has been installed. 3.05 CLEANING A. Cleaning: Upon completion, remove loose, cracked, chipped, stained or otherwise

defective tile, or base and replace in a satisfactory manner. Clean surfaces using only cleaners approved by the manufacturer. Remove mastic cement from adjoining work with particular care to not damage such work.

B. Buffing: Dry mop and buff flooring. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Protection: Protect finished work from damage by subsequent construction operations.

Where possible, lock rooms following installation and cleaning. END OF SECTION

TRL 0708 09680-1

SECTION 09680 CARPET WITH STRETCH PAD PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Floor Carpeting and Pad in hotel units. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Contractor Qualifications: Carpet installer must have a minimum of five years

experience on installations of similar size and complexity The installation crew must be fully qualified to install the type of carpet to be furnished.

1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Seaming Diagram: Before starting installation, submit a layout indicating all seams in

accordance with Section 01330. B. Installation Instructions: Before beginning installation, submit manufacturer's written

recommended installation procedures for particular carpet and pad and installation conditions.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01600. Store under cover in well ventilated spaces as

soon as delivered. Protect from damage, dirt, stains and moisture. Protect adhesives from freezing.

1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: Carefully check dimensions and other conditions and be responsible

for proper fitting of carpet and pad in areas designated. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Provide written one-year warranty for material and installation in accordance with

Section 01780. Upon demand, correct any condition due to faulty material or installation during the warranty period.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Pad: Furnished by Owner for installation by Contractor. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: B. Carpet: Furnished by Owner for installation by Contractor.

TRL 0708 09680-2

C. Tackless Strip: Kintrim standard tackless strip or equal. D. Edging: 1. Approved Manufacturers: a. Mercer Plastics Company Inc. b. Johnson Rubber Company (Johnsonite). c. Roppe Rubber Corporation. d. Approved Substitute. 2. Exposed Carpet Edge: Mercer Imperial sized for carpet and pad thickness. 3. Carpet/Resilient Tile Transition: Mercer Tile and Carpet Joiner. 4. Colors: Selected by Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Inspection: Examine substrate for excessive moisture content and unevenness that

would prevent execution and quality of carpeting as specified. Report unsatisfactory conditions to the General Contractor with copy to Architect.

B. Acceptance: Do not proceed with installation of carpeting and pad until defects have

been corrected except where correction is indicated under Preparation. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing substrate.

3.02 PREPARATION A. Leveling: Leveling of major uneven concrete floor joints or other irregularities by bush

hammering or grinding and filling with latex type underlayment shall be accomplished under Section 03300. Leveled areas shall be sanded to provide a surface level +1/4" in 10 feet. Leveled areas shall be inspected by the Architect before carpeting work may proceed.

B. Cleaning and Patching: Thoroughly clean concrete floors before applying carpeting.

Remove rough spots and any foreign matter that might be evident through the carpeting. Repair minor rough areas, voids and defects with compatible leveling compound.

3.03 INSTALLATION A. Layout: Lay out sheet goods so that wherever possible seams are eliminated or held to a

minimum in high traffic areas. B. General: Install carpet and pad in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

Unsatisfactory installation resulting from work performed which is not in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations shall be the responsibility of the carpet installer and may result in the removal and re-laying of carpet and pad at the expense of the installer. Particular attention should be paid to recommendations for application of floor pad, carpet and seaming.

C. Seams: Butt carpet material tightly together for seams without gaps. D. Edging: Install carpet edging at all exposed carpet edges. Locate under doors where

carpet stops in door openings.

TRL 0708 09680-3

3.04 CLEANING A. After installation is complete, clean up dirt and debris and clean carpet of spots with

cleaning agents recommended by the manufacturer. Remove loose threads with sharp scissors then clean with vacuum cleaner.

B. Remove rubbish, wrapping paper, selvages, etc. from the job site. 3.05 COMPLETION SERVICES A. Maintenance Manual: Submit in accordance with Section 01780. Include manufacturer's

recommended maintenance program for this project. 3.06 EXTRA STOCK A. Maintenance Materials: Provide Owner with all usable carpet scrap over four feet

square. END OF SECTION

TRL 0708 09681-1

SECTION 09681 CARPET WITH GLUED DOWN PAD PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Direct Glue Down Carpet Installation in corridors, lobby and public areas. 2. Direct Glue Down Pad 3. Accessories. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Seaming Diagram: Before starting installation, submit a layout indicating all seams in

accordance with Section 013300. B. Installation Instructions: Before beginning installation, submit manufacturer's written

recommended installation procedures for particular carpet and pad and installation conditions.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Contractor Qualifications: Carpet installer must have a minimum of five years

experience on installations of similar size and complexity. The installation crew must be fully qualified to install the type of carpet to be furnished.

1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01600. Store under cover in well ventilated spaces as

soon as delivered. Protect from damage, dirt, stains and moisture. Protect adhesives from freezing.

1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: Carefully check dimensions and other conditions and be responsible

for proper fitting of carpet in areas designated. Do not begin installation until ceilings and finish work are completed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CARPET A. Furnished by Owner for installation by Contractor. 2.02 PAD A. Direct glue-down pad furnished by Owner for installation by Contractor.

TRL 0708 09681-2

2.03 ADHESIVES A. Adhesive System: Sponge Cushion, Inc. Dub-L-Stik System or approved substitute. 1. Type: Pressure sensitive release glue acceptable to SCI. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Edging: 1. Approved Manufacturers: a. Mercer Plastics Co., Inc. b. Johnson Rubber Co. (Johnsonite) c. Roppe Rubber Corp. d. Approved Substitute 2. Exposed Carpet Edge: Mercer Imperial sized for carpet thickness. 3. Carpet/Resilient Tile Transition: Mercer tile and carpet joiner. 4. Colors: Selected by Architect PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Clean floors of dust, dirt solvents, oil, grease, paint and other substances that would be

detrimental to the proper performance of adhesive and carpet. Allow floors to dry thoroughly.

B. Ensure floors are level with maximum surface variation of ¼" in 10', noncumulative. C. Ensure concrete floors are free from scaling and irregularities and exhibit neutrality

relative to acidity and alkalinity. D. Use approved cementitious filler to patch cracks, small holes and for leveling. E. Vacuum clean substrate. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF UNDERLAY A. Install pad using maximum sized pieces. Adhere securely to subfloor. Lay out so that

carpet seams will not fall directly over seams in pad. Install according to manufacturer's instructions.

B. Butt edges together firmly and tight to edge of carpeted area. C. Remove air pockets and ridges. Adhere securely around projections and contours. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF CARPET A. Do not install until after all wall and ceiling finishes are completed. B. Lay out rolls of carpet full for Architect's approval. C. Check matching of carpet before cutting and ensure there is not visible variation

between dye lots.

TRL 0708 09681-3

D. Cut carpet, where required, in a manner to allow proper seam and pattern match. Ensure cuts are straight, true and unfrayed. Tape or sew adjoining sections to insure pattern match.

E. Where possible and practical locate seams in areas of least amount of traffic. Locate

according to seaming diagram. F. Lay carpet on floors with run of the pile in same direction of anticipated traffic. G. Do not change run of pile in any one room or from one room to next. H. Cut and fit carpet neatly around projections through floor and to walls and other vertical

surfaces. Fit carpet snugly to walls or other vertical surface leaving no gaps. I. Apply adhesive over pad in quantity recommended by pad manufacturer to ensure

proper adhesion over full area of installation. Apply only enough adhesive to permit proper adhesion of carpet before initial set.

J. Entire carpet and pad installation is to be laid tight and flat to subfloor, well fastened at

edges and is to present a uniform pleasing appearance. Ensure monolithic color, pattern and texture match within any one area.

K. Install edging strips where carpet terminates at other floor coverings. Use full-length

pieces only. Butt tightly to vertical surfaces. Where splicing cannot be avoided, butt ends tight and flush.

3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Take adequate care to protect all adjacent work from damage or marring as a result of

the work of this section. B. Clean the carpet of all spots with a spot remover as recommended by the

manufacturer. C. Cut all loose threads with a sharp scissors. D. Carefully and thoroughly vacuum clean the entire floor surface with an upright beater

bar type vacuum cleaner. E. Remove all debris resulting from the work of this section from the site. F. Leave all usable pieces of carpet not necessary to complete the work on the job site

and place in an orderly manner in an area designated by the Owner. G. Cover with non-staining paper or polyethylene. Leave cover in place until final

inspection. END OF SECTION

TRL 0708 09720-1

SECTION 09720 WALL COVERING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Vinyl Wall Covering 2. Adhesives B. Related Sections: 1. Gypsum Drywall: Section 09263 Gypsum Board Partitions and Walls. 2. Drywall Primer: Section 09900 Paints and Coatings. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Samples: Submit full set of samples of selected material for Architect's color selection. 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. All materials shall be delivered in unopened containers and stored in a dry area. 1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: Maintain minimum room temperature of 60° F during

application of vinyl wall covering. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 WALL COVERING A. Vinyl Wall Covering: Corridors and Public Areas: 190-036 oz./lin. yd., as selected by

Owner. B. Vinyl Wall Covering: Room Interiors: 15 - 28 oz./in. yd., as selected by Owner. 2.02 ADHESIVE Mildew and vermin resistant as recommended by the wall-covering manufacturer.

Starch or wheat paste shall not be used. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION OF SURFACES A. Gypsum drywall shall be taped and sanded smooth by the drywall subcontractor as in

preparation for painting and primed by the painting Subcontractor. Prior to hanging, surfaces shall be smooth and all dust, dirt, oil, tar, crayon marks, etc. shall be completely removed. Marking of surface shall be with lead pencil only.

TRL 0708 09720-2

3.02 APPLICATION A. Apply wall cover using regular paper hanging methods and in accordance with

manufacturer's specifications. B. Cut wall covering on a table using a straight edge and butt all seams without gaps. C. Excessive paste shall be immediately cleaned from surface with clean cloth dampened

with warm water as each butted joint is completed. D. The finished installation shall be secure, smooth, clean, all air bubbles eliminated and in

good contact with under surface without gaps or overlaps. END OF SECTION

TRL 0708 09900-1

SECTION 099000 PAINTS AND COATINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Paint all exterior surfaces not specifically excluded. 2. Paint all interior surfaces not specifically excluded. B. Exclusions: In addition to material obviously not requiring paint such as glass, floor, tile,

etc. do not paint or finish: 1. Surfaces indicated by the finish schedule to remain unfinished. 2. Factory finished surfaces unless otherwise specified. C. Related Sections: 1. Project Sign: Section 01500 Temporary Facilities and Controls. 2. Pavement Markings: Section 02752. 3. Piping Identification: Division 15 Mechanical. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Color Schedule: See Drawings for paint colors selected. Color selections will be made

by the Architect from color systems of recognized paint company. If materials of other manufacturers are used, colors must match those selected.

B. Paint Samples: If requested by Architect, prepare and submit paint samples. Remake

samples until accepted. C. Material List: Immediately after award of the contract submit a letter listing the

manufacture and product name of each different material for use on the project. Materials list shall be accepted by the Architect before ordering materials.

D. Substitutions: See Section 01600. Requests for substitutions must be on company

letterhead and signed by an authorized representative of the manufacturer. Letters from sales representatives or retailers will not be acceptable.

1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01600. B. Delivery: Deliver materials required for painting in unbroken packages bearing the brand

and name of manufacturer. Order materials sufficiently in advance to be on the job when needed and deliver at the building in sufficient quantities so the work will not be delayed. No claim by the Contractor concerning unsuitability of any material specified or his inability to produce first-class work with the same, will be entertained unless such claim is made, in writing, with the material list submittal.

TRL 0708 09900-2

C. Storage and Mixing: Painter will be assigned a room or space in which to mix or store material. Provide galvanized mixing pans for this paint room or space in which paints shall be mixed. No mixing of paint shall be done except in these pans. Empty containers bearing the name or brand of any manufacturer shall not be brought upon the premises for mixing of paint unless labels are canceled and containers are closely marked as to contents.

D. Inspection: The paint storage area shall be open for periodic inspection by the Architect

to insure only approved materials are being used. 1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: Spaces must be clean before finishing is started. Do not finish rooms

or spaces where rubbish has accumulated or while rubbish is being removed. Finishing will not be allowed in dusty rooms. Do not remove rubbish while finish is fresh. Surfaces to which finish is to be applied shall be dry and clean.

B. Environmental Requirements: Do not finish outside surfaces in extreme cold, frosty, foggy,

or damp weather. In winter weather, finish only when the temperature is 50�F or over and surfaces are absolutely dry. Exterior painting shall not be allowed while dust is blowing.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: The best quality materials as manufactured by any of the

following manufacturers will be acceptable: (Paint Only): 1. For Brush, Roller or Spray work: a. Pittsburgh b. Sherwin-Williams c. Benjamin Moore d. Devoe Paints e. Fuller O’Brien f. ICI Dulux g. Kelly-Moore h. Diamond Vogel i. Kwal j. Approved Substitute 2. Primer Under Vinyl Wallcovering: William Zinsser & Co., Inc. or approved substitute

acceptable to wallcovering manufacturer. B. Quality: All products not specified by name shall be “best grade” or “first line” products

or acceptable manufacturers. See Part 3 Execution for materials required for this project. Where possible, materials shall be of a single manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine surfaces scheduled to receive paint and finishes for

conditions that will adversely affect execution, permanence or quality of work and which cannot be put into an acceptable condition through preparatory work as included

TRL 0708 09900-3

under Preparation. Report unsatisfactory conditions to the General Contractor in writing with copy to the Architect.

B. Acceptance: Beginning of application means acceptance of existing surfaces. 3.02 PREPARATION A. General: 1. Sand finishes on wood and metal surfaces between coats to assure smoothness and

adhesion of subsequent coats. Use extra fine sandpaper to avoid cutting the edges when sanding. Apply putty or spackling compound after surfaces are primed and primer is dry. Bring material flush with adjoining surfaces.

2. Surfaces shall be perfectly dry, clean and smooth before starting work. Fill cracks, holes or checks full and make smooth before finish is applied to surfaces. Fill any cracks, etc., which occur after walls are sized.

B. Interior Wood Surfaces to be Painted: Remove sap on surface by solvent-wiping. Touch-

up resinous areas and knots with an approved sealer. Fill voids with a high quality, lead-free Paste Wood filler after primer is dry.

C. Ferrous Metal: Remove foreign material from unprimed metal with wire brush and dust

clean. D. Shop Primed Metals: Touch-up shop primed metals with a primer similar to the existing.

Sand shop primer on hollow metal work immediately before painting to remove grease and dirt film from surfaces.

E. Zinc Coated Metal (Galvanized Surfaces): Solvent clean with mineral spirits or other

acceptable solvent in accordance with SSPC-SP1 to remove all residue oil, grease or other contamination. Prime as specified.

F. Protection: Furnish and lay drop cloths or mask off areas where finishing is being done to

protect floors and other work from damage during the execution of work. Where it becomes necessary to remove temporary coverings placed by others, replace same in proper manner.

G. Remove oily rags and waste from the building every night. Do not allow to accumulate. H. Damage to Work of Others: Be responsible for any damage done to the work of other

trades, repairing same to the satisfaction of the Architect. Replace any materials damaged to such an extent that they cannot be restored to their original condition.

3.03 WORKMANSHIP A. Existing Surfaces: If the surfaces are not in proper shape for painting, repair, rebuild or

refinish before proceeding with the work. Be responsible for any poor work caused by improper surfaces. The application of the first coat does not relieve the responsibility for the base. Do not apply any coats on either damp or wet surfaces and in no case until the preceding coat is dry and hard.

B. Application: Spread materials evenly without runs or sagging of materials and thoroughly

brush out. Sand work between coats.

TRL 0708 09900-4

C. Wood Doors: Finish the upper and lower edges of wood doors the same as the face. Do this work after doors have been fitted and are ready for final hanging.

D. Colors: Finish coat shall be color as selected by Architect. Tint primers to match finish

coat. E. Roller Application: Where paint or enamel is rolled on, use a fine nap roller so a nearly

flat or orange peel texture is obtained. 3.04 COATING SYSTEM - INTERIOR Minimum of the Following: A. Woodwork and Wood Doors - Painted: First Coat Suitable Primer Second Coat Enamel Undercoat Third Coat Semi-Gloss Enamel B. Ferrous, Zinc Coated or Factory-Primed Metals - Painted: First Coat Suitable Primer or Factory-Prime Coat Second Coat Enamel Undercoat Third Coat Semi-Gloss Enamel C. Hollow Metal Frames and Doors - Painted: First Coat Factory-Prime Coat (Sanded) Second Coat Enamel Undercoat Third Coat Semi-Gloss Enamel D. Block - Painted: First Coat Block Filler Second Coat Latex Enamel, Semi-Gloss Third Coat Latex Enamel, Semi-Gloss E. Drywall - Painted: Baths: First Coat Suitable Primer Second Coat Latex Enamel, Semi-Gloss Third Coat Latex Enamel, Semi-Gloss F. Drywall – Painted: All other: First Coat Suitable Primer Second Coat Latex, Eggshell Third Coat Latex, Eggshell G. Drywall - Under Vinyl Wallcovering: Primer Shieldz Universal Pre-Wallcovering Primer 3.05 COATING SYSTEM - EXTERIOR Minimum of the Following: A. Metal Doors, Frames and Ferrous Metals - Painted: First Coat Factory Prime Coat or Suitable Primer Second Coat Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel, Exterior Third Coat Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel, Exterior

TRL 0708 09900-5

B. Zinc Coated Metal (Galvanized) - Painted: First Coat Galvanized Iron Primer Second Coat Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel, Exterior Third Coat Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel, Exterior C. Block – Painted: First Coat Flood coat of Okon W-2 Waterproof Sealer Second Coat Exterior Acrylic Latex Mixed with Okon Paint Booster Third Coat Exterior Acrylic Latex Mixed with Okon Paint Booster 3.06 MISCELLANEOUS REQUIREMENTS A. Mechanical Piping and Ductwork: Wherever insulated pipe or ductwork occurs in rooms

where walls are finished, cover canvas jacket with one coat sealer and two coats flat wall paint. Wherever uninsulated piping or ductwork occurs in rooms where walls are finished or elsewhere as called for, finish pipes as called for under ferrous zinc coated, or factory primed metals. See Division 15 for identification markings.

B. Grilles, Registers and Louvers: Prime coated grilles, registers and louvers, except those

built permanently into masonry, will be delivered to this contractor by the party furnishing same. They shall be spray painted in colors as directed thoroughly covering all surfaces visible after installation and returned to the supplier for installation. After installation, do such touch up of screws and scuffed spots or repainting as required to achieve a uniform paint job.

C. Boiler Stacks: Paint steel stacks with heat resistance stack paint. D. Objects on Roof: Paint all metal objects on the roof including, but not limited to, rooftop

mechanical units, flashings, roof drains, vents, exhaust fans, air intake hoods, roof hatches, etc. as specified under ferrous, zinc coated metals.

E. Electrical Wiremold: Paint to match wall on which installed. 3.07 CLEAN UP A. Final Clean-Up: At the completion of work, remove all surplus materials, staging, rubbish;

clean off all paint, varnish, stains from floors, glass, walls, hardware; and leave the premises in clean condition.

3.08 EXTRA STOCK A. Extra Paint: At the completion of painting, deliver to the Owner one full gallon of each

paint color and type used along with the color number or formula for each type. END OF SECTION

TRL 0708 09943-1

SECTION 09943 TEXTURED CEILING COATINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Furnish and Install: 1. Surface preparation. 2. Textured spray-on coating on exposed interior drywall ceilings. A. Painting: Section 09900 Paints and Coatings. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit in accordance with Section 01330. Include manufacturer's printed

installation instructions. B. Samples: Provide 1'-0" x 1'-0" sample of spray-on finish indicating color and texture to be

expected in finish work. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery: Deliver materials to job site in original containers with manufacturer's label and

seals intact. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain temperatures within spaces to receive textured coating at a minimum of 55° F

for a period of 24 hours before, during, and 24 hours after coating application. B. Provide ventilation in spaces where textured coating is being applied. Provide exhaust

fans or other means if natural ventilation does not facilitate the free movement of air. C. Proceed with application as late in the work schedule as is practicable. Apply coating

only after the building is weathertight. D. Mask and protect adjacent surfaces and fixtures not scheduled to receive coating. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Acceptable Products - Interior Use: 1. National Gypsum Co., Gold Bond Quick Spray. 2. US Gypsum Co., Imperial QT Texture Finish. 3. Approved Substitute B. Characteristics: 1. Texture: Medium to fine.

TRL 0708 09943-2

2. Color: White. C. Sealer: Spray applied; paint as specified in Section 09900. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine substrate to insure surface conforms with

manufacturer's tolerances prior to applying finish. B. Acceptance: Beginning of application indicates acceptance of substrate by

Contractor. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Concrete Surface: Concrete surfaces shall have fins removed and honeycomb, voids

and holes patched prior to application. Make sure concrete curing compounds and form release agents have been removed prior to beginning application.

B. Job Mock-Ups: Prepare sample panel on a part of the work schedule to receive textured

coating. Sample shall be not less than 100 sq. ft. and shall indicate proposed texture, workmanship and finished appearance. Reapply mock-up until approved by the Architect. Maintain approved mock-up until textured coating application is approved. Approved sample panel may form a portion of work.

3.03 INSTALLATION A. Remove oil, grease, loose and foreign materials, fins and other projections. Apply touch-

up paint to any rust spots or other surface stains. Prime exterior drywall as recommended by the manufacturer.

B. Spray apply textured coating in accordance with manufacturer's printed

recommendations to provide uniform surfaces throughout the work. Match approved mock-up. Finished applications shall cover substrate imperfections and irregularities.

C. Clean adjacent surfaces of overspray as work progresses. Remove coating before material sets to prevent damage to surfaces.

D. Protect finished applications until Date of Substantial Completion. Repair or replace

damaged work. E. Sealing: Seal with spray applied paint in accordance with Section 09900. END OF SECTION

TRL 0708 10210-1

DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES SECTION 10210 WALL LOUVERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Metal Wall Louvers B. Related Sections: 1. Louvers built into aluminum window frames: Section 08411 aluminum framed

storefronts. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Section 01330. Indicate details, accessories

and attachments. 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01600. Deliver and store louvers and accessories in a dry

place to avoid condensation or contact with materials that might cause staining such as lime, cement, fresh concrete or chemicals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 LOUVERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Construction Specialties, Inc. 2. Airolite 3. Accepted Substitute B. Manufacturer and Type: Construction Specialties Model 4105. Provide necessary

accessories, braces and supports to withstand specified wind load. Provide for expansion, if required, by size of louver. All fastenings to be stainless steel or aluminum. Furnish all louvers with 1/2" mesh bird screen in removable aluminum frames.

C. Aluminum Finish: Kynar 500 painted finish. Color as selected by Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install louvers as recommended by the manufacturer and as indicated on reviewed

Shop Drawings. END OF SECTION

TRL 0708 10262-1

SECTION 10262 CORNER GUARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Clear plastic corner guards. B. Related Sections: 1. Drywall Partitions: Section 09263 Gypsum Board Partitions and Walls. 2. Wall Covering: Section 09720. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit in accordance with Section 01330. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 WALL AND CORNER GUARDS A. Corridors: Tri-Guards Clear Corner Protectors, 1" x 1", 4 feet high. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install over corners using installation instructions provided by manufacturer. See Drawings

for location. Butt bottom of corner guard to top of base. END OF SECTION

TRL 0708 10310-1

SECTION 10310 FIREPLACE SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes prefabricated fireplace insert, steel flue and accessories at the following

locations: 1. Registration/Dining. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings and Product Data: Submit shop drawings and product data on

fireplaces and all accessories as specified under Section 01330 Submittals. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: Fireplaces and accessories must be listed and

approved by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. and the International Conference of Building Officials. Units, flues and installation shall meet building code requirements referenced in Division 1.

B. Reference Standards: Comply with NFPA Standard No. 211. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Deliver and store in original crates and under cover until ready for installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FIREPLACE SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Majestic 2. Approved substitute B. Fireplace Insert: Majestic #UVSTR36 ventless, two-sided, zero clearance type non-

recirculating, flat black finish with refractory brick hearth and lining. Sealed glass front and back complete with gas log and remote ignition.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install fireplace, flue and accessories according to approved shop drawings and

product data manufacturer's installation instructions. Maintain all required clearances to combustible materials.

B. Gas Service: By Mechanical Contractor. END OF SECTION

TRL 0708 10350-1

SECTION 10350 FLAGPOLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Flagpoles B. Related Sections: 1. Concrete Bases: Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Section 01330. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FLAGPOLES A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. American Flagpole 2. Babcock-David 3. Baartol Company, Inc. 4. Eder Flag Pole Co. 5. Concord Industries 6. Accepted Substitute B. Description: Three (3) required. 1. Flagpoles: 30 ft. exposed length cone tapered aluminum, clear anodized finish. 2. Overall Pole Length: 33 ft. with setting depth of 3 ft. Wall thickness shall be .188",

butt 6" diameter. 3. Accessories: Standard revolving truck with one aluminum sheave and one wire

cable, one set chrome-plated snap hooks, 6" aluminum ball, and steel setting tube. Provide ground rod as detailed. Provide black anodized flashing collar.

4. Halyard System: Interior system with removable handle and key operated door. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install pole in foundation tube with self-centering bottom plate and lightning protector

ground spike. Provide pole with standard flashing collar. See base detail on the drawings

END OF SECTION

TRL 0708 10520-1

SECTION 10520 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Fire Extinguisher Cabinets 2. Fire Extinguishers B. Related Sections: 1. Wood Blocking: Section 06100 Rough Carpentry. 2. Drywall Openings: Section 09263 Gypsum Board Partitions and Walls. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit in accordance with Section 01330 Submittals. Indicate types and

locations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Larsens' Manufacturing Company 2. J.L. Industries 3. Norris Industries 4. Seco Manufacturing, Inc. 5. Standard Fire Hose Company 6. Elkhart Brass Manufacturing Company 7. General Fire Extinguisher Corporation 8. Alenco 9. Potter-Roemer 10. Accepted Substitute B. Cabinets: Larsen Model 2409-6R duo-panel door with semi-recessed 18 gage steel box.

Key lock with breakaway plastic face to open door. Provide fire rated cabinets where located in fire rated partitions.

C. Extinguishers: 10# multi-purpose A-B-C type with pressure gage. Furnish wall bracket for

wall hung extinguishers.

TRL 0708 10520-2

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Cabinets: Install cabinets according to manufacturer's instructions. Provide necessary

wood blocking. B. Extinguishers: Install in cabinets or on wall brackets and leave fully charged.

END OF SECTION

TRL 0708 10810-1

SECTION 10810 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Toilet and bath accessories as indicated and specified. 2. Wrap for exposed pipes under lavatories.

B. Related Sections: 1. Toilet Partitions: Section 10160 Metal Toilet Compartments. 1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit in accordance with Section 01330. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Grab Bars, Accessories and Lavatory Pipe Wrap: Comply with standards of ADAAG. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES

A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. A&J Washroom Accessories 2. American Specialties, Inc. (ASI) 3. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 4. Bradley Corporation 5. General Accessory Mfg. Co. (Gamco). 6. McKinney/Parker

6. Accepted Substitute

B. Accessory Type Schedule: Provide and install the accessories indicated in the Toilet Accessories Schedule on the Drawings or equal items by other acceptable manufacturers.

2.02 LAVATORY PIPE WRAP

A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Brocar Products, Inc. 2. Plumberex Specialty Products, Inc. 3. Truebro, Inc. 4. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01600.

B. Wrap For Exposed Pipes Under Lavatories: Brocar Products TrapWrap or accepted

substitute.

TRL 0708 10810-2

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Accessories: Fasten accessories rigidly and securely to walls using methods and materials recommended by manufacturer.

B. Pipe Wrap: Install in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations.

1. Insulate all hot water and drain pipes under lavatories unless otherwise configured to protect against contact with users.

2. Sharp or Abrasive Surfaces: Not allowed under lavatories. 3.02 ADJUSTMENT

A. Before final inspection, inspect each accessory installation for rigid and secure installation. Take action necessary for rigid and secure installations.

END OF SECTION

TRL 0708 10823-1

SECTION 10823 SHOWER DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Shower doors. B. Related Sections: 1. Toilet and Shower Accessories: Section 10810 Toilet Accessories. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit product data for all shower doors, PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SHOWER DOORS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Ace Shower Door Co., Inc. 2. Keystone Shower Doors 3. Approved Substitute B. Description: Ace #740 Door and Panel Combination. 1. Size: 36" x 70" 2. Glass: Obscure Tempered. 3. Finish: Chrome PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION Install according to manufacturer's instructions and approved shop drawings. Adjust to

work freely with all hardware functioning properly. Readjust at completion of job if directed by the Architect.

END OF SECTION

TRL 0708 13157-1

DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION SECTION 13157 SWIMMING POOL AND WHIRLPOOL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Pool contractor shall design, furnish and install all equipment and materials required

for the following, complete and functioning in compliance with drawings, these specifications and all applicable codes and regulations.

1. Swimming pool. 2. Whirl pool (spa). B. Section includes the following work by pool contractor: 1. Excavation to shape required to receive gunite concrete and removal of

excavated material from the site. 2. Design and placement of steel reinforcing. 3. Placement of gunite concrete. 4. Trimming, finishing and curing of gunite concrete. 5. Cutouts for steps, inserts, lights and mechanical equipment. 6. Interior plaster swimming pool finish, tile depth markers, waterline tile and coping. 7. Ceramic tile interior finish for whirlpool. 8. Deck equipment. 9. Complete filter systems including filter, water treatment system, pumps, valves,

vacuum cleaner, connections to heater, connecting pool piping to filter, and all necessary pipe and fittings for filter and pool equipment for swimming pool and whirlpool. Provide all start up chemicals.

10. Gas fired pool heaters. 11. Dewatering of pool excavation during pool construction. 12. Gravel sub-base, drain tile under pool and pipe to daylight outlet. 13. Pool lights for swimming pool and whirlpool. 14. Hydrojets and pump for whirlpool. C. Related Sections: 1. Compacted Fill and Other Earthwork Preceding Pool Excavation: Section 02305

Earthwork. 2. Concrete Pool Deck: Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete. 3. Pool Deck Sealants: Section 07920 Joint Sealants. 4. Pool Drainage Connection: Division 15 Mechanical. 5. Pool Fill Connection: Division 15 Mechanical. 6. Electrical Equipment and Connection: Division 16 Electrical. D. General Contractor Responsibility: 1. Layout, location and elevations for pool excavation.

TRL 0708 13157-2

E. Work by Other Contractors: 1. Concrete Decks: After the guniting operation is completed, pour and finish

concrete deck in accordance with Section 03300. 2. Caulking: All expansion and caulk joints as required and shown and between pool

deck and roll out rim in accordance with Section 07920. 3. Pool Equipment Room: Construct pool equipment room as shown on drawings. F. Work by Mechanical Contractor: 1. Furnish and install water service to filter room, pool fill line and to other equipment in

pool area as shown on drawings. 2. Install gas service and connect to pool heaters. 3. Install vent stacks for pool water heaters and connect to heaters. 4. Furnish and install sumps, pumps, piping for waste removal from filter room and pool

area as shown on drawings. 5. Provide fill water for pool and whirlpool. G. Work by Electrical Contractor: 1. Electrical Service: Provide electrical service to filter room and pool as required,

including all conduit, wiring, junction boxes, switches, panels, motor starters, start/stop stations, GFI protection system, wiring to all motors and equipment.

2. Grounding: Perform all grounding required for pool and pool components, rebar, filter room equipment, all outlets in accordance with NEC Section 680, state and local codes.

3. Furnish temporary power to pool contractor as required. 1.02 SYSTEM DESIGN A. Pool Data: Design pumping and filtration system for 6 hour turnover for pool and 30

minute turnover for whirlpool or as required by code. 1.03 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: Unless specified otherwise, follow recommendations of the

following: 1. Detailing, Fabrication and Placement of Reinforcing Steel: ACI 301, 315 and 318. 2. Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete: ACI 304. 3. Application of Concrete by Pneumatic Pressure: ACI 805. 4. Recommended Practice for Shotcreting: ACI 506R-90(95) – Guide to Shotcrete.. 5. Specification for Shotcrete: ACI 506.2-95. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit with proposal in accordance with Section 01330. See Document

00200. Include all equipment and accessories. B. Design Drawings: Submit to General Contractor. C. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Section 01330. 1. Prepared by and stamped by professional engineer registered in State of Wyoming. 2. Working Stresses: Based upon predetermined ultimate strengths of materials used

with safety factor of not less than 2-1/2.

TRL 0708 13157-3

D. Permits and Fees: 1. Prepare and submit drawings and other documents for pools as required to obtain

building permits and state and county health permits. 2. Obtain and pay for all required inspections, permits and fees. Provide notices as

required by governmental authorities. E. Testing Reports: Reports of all control tests, special tests or core tests specified under Field

Quality Control shall be distributed by the testing laboratory as listed under Section 01450 Quality Control.

F. Previous Test Reports: The concrete supplier shall have on record and available for

Architect's review the following: 1. Reports of compliance tests of aggregate made during the last six months. 2. Reports of compression tests made on samples taken from similar mix designs. G. Samples: Submit samples for all items requiring color selection. H. Contract Closeout Submittals: 1. Operating and Maintenance Data: Submit in accordance with Section 01785.

Include manufacturer's literature and drawings covering requirements and recommendations for proper operation, maintenance, and service availability of all pool equipment and system. Include preventative maintenance schedule for total system.

2. Warranty: Submit in accordance with Section 01780. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Pool Designer and Installer: Company specializing in design, engineering, fabrication

and installation of swimming pool systems. 1. Experience: Continuously designed and installed pools of similar size and

magnitude in State of Wyoming for five years. B. Contractor Qualifications: 1. The pool contractor shall have a minimum of five years experience as a contractor

specializing in the placement of wet process gunite for swimming pools and shall have sufficient equipment in good working condition on the job site to secure the placement rate necessary.

2. Only experienced foremen, gunmen and nozzlemen shall be employed. C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with all provisions of applicable standards, whether or

not such provisions and standards are referenced in Contract Documents. D. Testing Agency: All testing shall be done by an approved testing laboratory selected

and paid by the pool contractor. See Field Quality Control. E. Record of Work: A record shall be kept by the pool contractor listing the time and date

of placement of all concrete for the structure. Such record shall be kept until the completion of the project and shall be available to the Architect for examination at any time.

TRL 0708 13157-4

1.06 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Sequencing and Scheduling: Schedule and coordinate swimming pool earthwork,

concrete work, plumbing work and electrical work with General Contractor and work of other contractors as required for expeditious completion of pool work.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Hauling Time: Discharge all concrete transmitted in a truck mixer, agitating or other

transportation device within 1-1/2 hours after the mixing water has been added. B. Extra Water: Deliver concrete to the job in exact quantities required by the design mix.

Any additional water added to the mix after leaving the batch plant shall be indicated on the truck ticket and signed by the person responsible. Where extra water is added to the concrete it shall be mixed thoroughly for 40 revolutions of the drum or 3-1/2 minutes at mixing speed, whichever is greater.

1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Cold Weather Placement: When depositing concrete after the first frost or when

the mean daily temperatures are below 40° F, follow recommendations of ACI 306. Maintain concrete temperature at a minimum of 50° F for not less than 72 hours after depositing. The concrete may not contain calcium chloride. Maintain forms in place for a minimum of 72 hours after depositing concrete. High early strength cement may be used. Do not place concrete without approval of the Architect on days when the temperature at 9 AM is below 30°F until, in the opinion of the Architect the Contractor has taken all necessary precautions and supplied all the necessary equipment to prevent the concrete from freezing.

2. Hot Weather Placement: When depositing concrete in hot weather, follow recommendations of ACI 305. The optimum temperature of concrete at time of placement shall not exceed 85°F. Protect to prevent rapid drying. Start finishing and curing as soon as possible. When the air temperatures are expected to exceed 90°F., the Contractor shall obtain approval from the Construction Manager on the procedures to be used in protecting, depositing, finishing, and curing of concrete. Pozzolith Retarder, as manufactured by Master Builders CO., Cleveland, Ohio, Or approved substitute, may be used. The use of continuous fog sprays may be required by the Architect for 24 hours after depositing or the work restricted to evening or nights, especially in times of low humidity.

1.09 WARRANTY A. Shell of pool and whirlpools including all related work, warranted against cracking or

failure to hold water for a period of 3 years from date of completion provided the pool is: Kept full except for a period of ten (10) days per year for maintenance; the water table is not above the lowest point of the pool, the structure is not damaged by earthquake, earth or earthfill movement, or conditions not occasioned by the contractor.

B. Plaster surfaces warranted for two years against delamination, but not against

discoloration. C. Equipment installed by pool contractor warranted by equipment manufacturer and

installer per manufacturer standards for a minimum of one year.

TRL 0708 13157-5

D. Owner must maintain pool water according to a chemical program set up by the Contractor. Should such a program not be maintained the warranties shall become void.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GUNITE A. General: Complete pool tank for swimming pool and whirlpool is to be constructed by

the wet gunite system and conform to ACI 506.2. Pool structure shall be designed as a monolithic unit and all pneumatically applied concrete shall be placed so far as possible in one continuous operation. Dry type gunite process is unacceptable.

B. Cement: Type V Portland cement. C. Gravel: 3/8" diameter, well rounded, washed clean of all impurities. Crushed stone or

gravel chips are unacceptable. D. Sand: Clean, hard, sharp particles. Moisture content not to exceed 5% by weight. Sand

shall be graded within these limits: Passing Through 3/8" Screen Percent by Weight #4 Mesh 100 #8 " 98-100 #16 70-95 Passing Through 3/8" Screen Percent by Weight #30 " 45-65 #50 " 15-35 #100 " 0 E. Proportions: Premixed concrete shall have the following proportions per yard: 80% Sand 20% Pea Gravel 10% Water 3 Oz. Pozzolith Compound 8-1/2 Bags Portland Cement 3-1/2 Oz. Air Entrainment Compound F. Strength: Minimum 4000 psi at 28 days. G. Slump: Maximum 3" slump. 2.02 REINFORCING STEEL A. Standard sizes of deformed bars equal to requirement of "Standard Specifications for

Billet Steel, Concrete Reinforcement", intermediate grade, Serial Designation A615 as adopted by ASTM, or rail steel reinforcing bars, equal to requirements of Serial Designation GR40 adopted by ASTM.

TRL 0708 13157-6

2.03 POOL FINISH A. White Marsite plaster swimming pool finish with tile at waterline for swimming pool. B. Interior of whirlpool shall be fully lined with 1"x 1" or 2"x 2" thickset ceramic tile. 2.04 POOL COPING A. Precast terrazzo pool coping around swimming pool and whirlpool. Provide mitered and

radius corners as required. Color as selected by Architect. 2.05 CERAMIC TILE A. Includes depth markers and 18" high waterline tile by pool contractor. All tile by

American Olean Tile Co. Also includes whirlpool. B. Exterior Tile: Frostproof, acidproof and stain resistant porcelain tile. 1. Pool Tile: 6"x 6" installed as continuous band at water line. 2. Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect. Submit samples for acceptance. 2.06 PIPE, FITTINGS AND APPURTENANCES A. Pipe: Schedule 40 PVC, Type II permanently marked with manufacturer's name, PVC

2116, nominal size, and NSF approval. 1. Size so that velocities do not exceed 8 FPS. 2. Fittings: Schedule 40 white PVC, Type I. B. Skimmers: 1. Equip skimmers with vacuum trim and equalizer fittings. 2. Minimum Through Rate: 30 GPM. 3. Number: Provide minimum of three (3). 4. Locations: As required per Regulatory Requirements. C. Return Line Fittings: Provide a minimum of: Four (4). D. Drains: 1. Provide one (1) at deep end of swimming pool and one in whirl pool. E. Inlets: Combination of floor and side wall inlets. 2.07 UNDERWATER LIGHTS A. Swimming Pool Light Fixtures: 1. Lights: 500 watt lamp enclosed in stainless steel housing cast into pool wall. 2. Equip light with nickel-chrome plated bronze face ring. 3. Swimming Pool: Provide total of four. 4. Whirl pool: One in whirlpool. 2.08 HEATING, FILTRATION CHLORINATION AND MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT A. Filter: Single filter or separate filters for swimming pool and whirlpool. 1. Type: Rapid sand type, 50 psi maximum working pressure, fiberglass reinforced

plastic tank.

TRL 0708 13157-7

B. Circulation Pumps: As required. 1. Pumps: Equipped with oversize hair and lint strainers. C. Flow Meter: 1. Provide with rate-of-flow indicators on pump discharge line leading to filters,

calibrated for measuring both water for filtration and backwash. Install activating element creating pressure differential for indication of flow with adequate clear distance upstream and downstream to obtain reasonable degree of accuracy.

2. Rate Indicator: Calibrated for and provided with scale reading in gpm and with range of 10% below established filtration rate and 10% above backwash rate established.

D. Heaters: Provide gas fired pool heater for swimming pool and whirlpool as required to

maintain temperature for outside swimming in winter. E. Chlorinators: Tablet type feeder. 2.09 STAIR RAILS AND LADDERS A. Deck Mounted Stair Rails for Swimming Pool and Whirlpool: 1. Material: Type 304 stainless steel tube. 2. Provide at locations as indicated. 3. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Swan b. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01600. 2.10 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT A. Pool Fittings: Non-corrosive material. B. Safety and Rescue Equipment: Provide as required by state and county regulations for

pool, equipment, and chlorine storage. 1. Submit product data to Architect for acceptance. C. Chemical Testing Equipment: 1. Provide as required for monitoring of pool chemical and pH levels for minimum

period of one year from pool acceptance. D. Cleaning Equipment: Provide vacuum cleaner, wall brush, hose, leaf nets, etc. E. Whirlpool Hydro Jets and Pump: Provide as required. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 POOL EXCAVATION AND GRADING A. Layout work and elevations by General Contractor. B. Pool contractor shall provide all labor and necessary equipment for rough machine

excavation of pool areas and removal of excess soil from the site. Pool contractor also to furnish all necessary labor and equipment required for hand trimming of pool and be fully responsible for directing all excavation operations in order to obtain proper depths and contours of the pool.

TRL 0708 13157-8

C. Rough excavation and hand trim shall be carried on as one operation to aid in eliminating over excavation. Over excavate pool depth by a minimum of 1'-0" deep. In order to obtain an even wall line, the excavation shall be cut to exact shape of vertical and curved portion of wall and checked in vertical position with carpenter's level. Floor area shall be fine graded by placing of screeds at intervals.

D. Any voids that may occur due to over excavation shall be filled with a lean mixture of

concrete or granular fill compacted to 95% Standard Proctor density, ASTM D698. E. A tolerance of 1" shall be allowed in excavation subgrade. F. All excavated material shall be disposed of off site as directed by General Contractor. G. After completion of pool excavation, to prevent movement during shooting of

pneumatically applied concrete. 1" thick strips shall be nailed to top of forms, the ends of which shall denote interior face of pool shell. A taut ground wire shall be anchored to the end of these strips. Purpose of this wire is to act as a cutting line for interior face of pool shell.

3.02 SUB-BASE AND DRAIN TILE A. Place 4" diameter "ADS" type, perforated flexible drain line down the middle of the

swimming pool and extend to daylight drain as required. Install cross connecting drains spanning the pool at 6 ft. centers.

B. Cover entire swimming pool bottom and sides with a minimum depth fill of eight (8) of

clean gravel sloped to drain into drain lines. Install 30 mil minimum impervious membrane with all joints taped or otherwise sealed under gravel.

3.03 PLACING REINFORCING STEEL A. Place before concrete placing is started. Steel shall be new, free from dirt, oil, paint and

mill scale in position and sizes indicated on drawings; secure by not less than 16 gauge annealed tie wire. Metal chairs or concrete blocks shall be used to insure proper spacing.

3.04 PLACING FITTINGS A. Pool contractor shall place, before beginning the concrete work, all piping, all special

pool and equipment anchors, receptacles, or mounting shells for underwater lights that are to be embedded in concrete and shall be responsible for their positioning in accordance with drawings.

3.05 PLACING OF GUNITE A. General: Apply structural gunite against thoroughly compacted earth that will not yield

during application of gunite. Entire surface of pool excavation shall be dampened with a fine water spray just prior to start of gunite operation. Where gunite is applied against existing concrete, the concrete surface shall be thoroughly cleaned and drenched with water at least twice on the day before placing gunite. Surfaces upon which gunite is to be applied shall be sufficiently damp to prevent excessive absorption of water content in the gunite mix, but not so wet as to overcome suction. Gunite deposited on vertical surfaces shall be shot at right angels to surface, starting at the bottom and continuing

TRL 0708 13157-9

upward. Build up in layers of thickness that will not slump, allowing sufficient time between the placing of layers for initial set to take place. All loose, fine aggregate or rebound shall be removed from the surface before placing the succeeding layers and whenever possible, the first layer shall entirely cover the reinforced steel in order to secure it in its proper position.

B. Quality of Finished Gunite: Pools shall be free from cracks, honeycombs, spalls, voids and

other surface defects. Surface shall be of adequate roughness and levelness to provide for proper bond for tile and plaster finish.

C. Curing: All structural gunite shall be kept continuously wet for a period of five days, or

the entire pool shall be covered with plastic film. No curing compound allowed. 3.06 INSTALLATION OF ROLLOUT COPING, WATER LINE TILE, DEPTH MARKERS AND WHIRLPOOL

TILE A. Submit shop drawings for approval before ordering tile. Show elevations and sections of

pool tank with detail of coping showing layout of individual tiles. Indicate also locations of all the markings and lettering, showing exact locations and positions of individual tiles.

B. Deliver all products to job in manufacturer's unopened containers with grade seals

unbroken and intact. Maintain temperature at 50°F minimum during tile work and for seven days after completion. Supply extra 2% of each color of each shape and size tile in clean marked cartons for Owner's use.

C. For materials for setting bed and grout, follow recommendations of Tile Council of

America Specification #P431. D. Before tiling, check tank shell for acceptability as follows: 1. Tank wall surface medium-rough texture. 2. All surfaces to be tiled free of dust, rust, paint, from oil or other release coatings. 3. Provision for grab bar ladders, lights at proper locations. 4. Plane of concrete set back average of 1-1/2" from finished tile face with 1/4"

maximum additional deviation all owed. 5. Concrete shall be true to line, level, plumb and curvature. 6. Width, depth and length shall permit finished accuracy of markings and dimensions. E. Align all joints to give uniform grout lines. Use products in strict accordance with

recommendations and directions of manufacturer. Proportion all mixes in accordance with latest ANSI Standard Specifications. Smooth all exposed edges. Use Portland cement mortar bed. 1-1/2" minimum on concrete. Follow ANSI A108.1 (Reference TCA P431) using dry set mortar bond coat on cured bed.

F. Clean tile surface as thoroughly as possible on completion of grouting. Delay acid

cleaning for at least 10 days following completion of grouting. G. Before acid cleaning, saturate with clean water all grout joints in areas to be cleaned. H. Use 1 part muriatic acid to 9 parts water for cleaning off grout film. As soon as cleaning is

done. Hose down thoroughly to completely remove all traces of residual acid.

TRL 0708 13157-10

3.07 APPLICATION OF PLASTER FINISH A. General: 1. Swimming pool shell shall be free from cracks, honeycombing, spalls, voids, and

other defects. Surfaces shall have adequate roughness and levelness in order to provide a proper surface for ceramic tile and plaster. Contractor to roughen with bush hammer if directed by Architect.

2. Provide complete preparation and finish for floors and walls of pool tank interior. Perform this work by a specialist having provided finish for a minimum of at least 10 pools.

3. Coordinate with tile installer to assure proper completion of pool edge coping and lane markers.

4. Protect tile, deck, deck equipment, fittings and other items by suitable coverings. B. Preparation: 1. Check alignment of surfaces and their suitability to receive the finish. If the finish

thickness will be more than 3/8" thick or more than 20% of the area will be 1/8" thick for true surfaces, apply leveling coat to true up the substrate.

2. Neutralize concrete with 1:8 muriatic acid solution brushed over all surfaces and rinse thoroughly with clean water.

3. Apply leveling coat if needed. C. Mixing: Mix leveling coat (if needed) and finish coat in mechanical batch mixer as

follows: 1. Leveling Coat: 1 Part Portland Cement 3 Parts Sand 1 Qt. Anti-Hydro Per Sack of Cement 2. Finish Coat: 1 Sack White Portland Cement Plus 1 No. 2 Shovelful 2 Sacks White Marble Sand 1 Oz. Air Entraining Agent 1 Gal. Hydrated Lime 1 Qt. Anti-Hydro D. Application: 1. Trowel on leveling coat (if needed) to bring surfaces within specified tolerances.

Moist cure 48 hours and allow to dry 7 days. 2. Apply finish coat to minimum 1/8" thickness, 3/8" maximum thickness and 1/4"

average. 3. Apply finish coat with pneumatic plaster pump. Scratch in and double back before

scratch coat has taken up. Steel trowel minimum of two times and as required to produce smooth, hard, uniform finish free of blemishes. Furnish sufficient experienced craftsmen to complete entire tank finish in one day. Start at deep end and proceed in continuous operation. Immediately on completion of finish, start filling of pool and bring up to full level without interruption.

4. If work must extend over more than one day, provide moist curing and continue the following day.

TRL 0708 13157-11

3.08 POOL AND FILTER ROOM PIPING A. Furnish and install all piping, fittings, valves from the pool system to filter room, connecting

to all equipment at pool and in the filter room. Plumbing installation to be complete within the limits of the pool work.

B. Pool contractor is to provide all trenching and backfill. Support all horizontal runs on pipe

on a gravel fill. Comply with compaction requirements of Section 02300 Earthwork. C. Support all piping on a minimum of 8 ft. centers. D. Plumbing Pressure Testing: Pressure test all piping, including buried piping. Pressure-test

all plumbing to fixtures cast in pool prior to placement of gunite. 1. Pressure Testing: Performed in presence of Architect. 2. Flush lines, cap, and pressurize to 80 psi and hold for 12 hours. 3. Repair and repeat testing of failed lines until successful test. a. Repair leaks by removing and replacing damage parts. 4. Provide testing equipment as required. 3.09 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A. General: Install equipment in locations as indicated and in accordance with

manufacturer's recommendations. Provide vents, drains, valves, fittings, and appurtenances as required for proper operation.

B. Electrical: Provide electrical hook-up of equipment and other electrical work as

indicated on drawings. 1. Comply with applicable state and local codes and with National Electrical Code.

Bond pool to comply with National Electrical Code. C. Start-Up: 1. Filling: Fill with water. 2. Chemicals: Provide chemicals required for initial chemical treatment and as

required for first 30 days of operation. Install in pool as required to comply with State and County water quality standards.

3. Testing: Operate and test all equipment. Make repairs and adjustments required for proper system operation.

4. Start-Up: Start-up system to operating condition. Make adjustments for proper operation.

3.10 DEMONSTRATION A. Demonstration: Instruct Owner's personnel on proper operation and maintenance of

pool equipment and facility in accordance with Section 01800. Post written operational instructions in conspicuous locations within pool equipment room.

3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Concrete Testing: 1. The pool contractor shall employ and pay an independent testing laboratory

approved by the Architect to perform control testing of compressive strength of the gunite concrete in accordance with ACI 506.2. Make unreinforced test panels at least 1" square and 3" thick with gunned shotcrete as work progresses and as

TRL 0708 13157-12

specified herein. Extract cores or cubes from the test panels for compressive tests in accordance with ASTM C39. Make visual inspection of the shotcrete to check for uniformity, lamination or separation and other visual defects.

2. The number of and frequency of tests shall be determined by the Architect prior to any placement of concrete by pool contractor. Two cylinders or cubes shall be furnished for each of the following conditions:

1) Each day's pour. 2) Each type of concrete. 3) Each change of supplies or source. 41 Each 50 cubic yards of concrete and

fraction thereof. B. Test Procedures: 1. Obtain samples of concrete in accordance with ASTM C172. Take all test samples

at point of placement. 2. One cylinder or cube shall be broken at 7 days and the other at 28 days. 3. A slump test in accordance with ASTM C143 shall be made and reported for each

cylinder group. 4. Test results shall be reported as specified under Section 01450 Quality Control. 5. If, at any time, the concrete control test specimens shown a compressive strength of

28 days or less than that required, the Contractor shall, at his own expense, have sufficient core tests taken, the number and location to be approved by the Architect on such portions of the work as may have been affected to determine the actual condition of the concrete. The securing, preparing and testing shall be in accordance with C42. Should the tests reveal that the concrete does not meet the requirements of this specification, the Contractor shall, at his own expense, replace the entire section involved and/or make all corrections deemed necessary by the Architect.

END OF SECTION

TRL 0708 14210 - 1

DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT SECTION 14210 ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Gearless traction machine room-less (MRL) elevators. B. Products Supplied But Not Installed Under This Section: 1. Hoist Beam. Coordinate with shop drawings. 2. Pit Ladder. Coordinate with shop drawings. C. Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 – General Requirements: a. Temporary lighting, include in hoistway for machine space with switch

located in hoistway on the strike jamb side of top landing door. b. Removable barricades at all hoistway openings, in compliance with OSHA 29

CFR 1926.502 and local code requirements. c. Lifeline attachments capable of withstanding 5000 lb load in accordance

with OSHA 29 CFR 1926.502. Provide a minimum of 2 at the top, front of each hoistway.

2. Division 08 – Openings: a. Access Doors: As required for access to governor and machine. Access door

shall be self-closing, self-locking if necessary and operable from the inside without a key.

3. Division 09 - Finishes: a. Cab flooring. 4. Division 23 – Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning: a. Hoistway ventilation. 5. Division 26 - Electrical: a. Electrical connections. b. Electrical service to main disconnect in elevator machine room. c. Electrical power for elevator installation and testing. d. Electrical-disconnecting device to elevator equipment prior to activation of

sprinkler system. e. Electrical service for machine room. f. Machine room and pit receptacles with ground-fault current protection. g. Lighting in machine room and pit; wiring for telephone service to machine

room. h. Emergency generator for elevator operation. i. Fire and smoke detectors and interconnecting devices; fire alarm signal lines

to contacts in the machine room. j. ADAAG-required emergency communications equipment. k. Pit Lighting: Fixture with switch and guards. Provide illumination level equal to

or greater than that required by ASME A17.1/CSA B44 2000, or applicable version.

6. Divider Beams: 05120 Structural Steel.

TRL 0708 14210 - 2

1.02 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: Comply with applicable building codes and elevator codes at

the Project site, including but not limited to the following: 1. ADAAG - Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities. 2. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 3. ANSI/NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows. 4. ASME/ANSI A17.1 - Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators. 5. ICC/ANSI A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities. 1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate construction of entrance walls with installation of door frames and

sills. Maintain front wall opening until elevator equipment has been installed. a. Ensure adequate support for entrance attachment points at all landings. 2. Coordinate wall openings for hall push buttons, signal fixtures and sleeves. Each

elevator requires sleeves within the hoistway wall. 3. Coordinate emergency power transfer switch and power change pending

signals as required for termination at the primary elevator signal control cabinet in each group.

4. Coordinate interface of elevators and fire alarm system. 5. Coordinate interface of dedicated telephone line. B. Preinstallation Meeting: See Section 01312. Prior to beginning work of this Section,

attend a pre-installation meeting. Owner, Architect, and contractors with adjacent or related work shall be invited to attend.

C. Sequencing: Guide rail brackets attached to steel shall be installed prior to

application of fireproofing. 1.04 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Procedures: Submit for review, acceptance and return in accordance with Section

01330. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product literature for each proposed system.

Include: 1. Cab design, dimension and layout 2. Finishes, accessories and available options. 3. Controls, signals and operating system. 4. Color selection charts for cab and entrances. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate: 1. Clearances and travel of car, 2. Clear inside hoistway and pit dimensions. 3. Location and layout of equipment and signals. 4. Car, guide rails, buffers and other components in hoistway. 5. Maximum rail bracket spacing. 6. Maximum loads imposed on building structure. 7. Hoist beam requirements. 8. Location and sizes of access doors. 9. Location and details of hoistway door and frames.

TRL 0708 14210 - 3

10. Electrical characteristics and connection requirements. 1.05 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Procedures: Submit for information and verification in accordance with Section

01330. B. Test Reports: 1. Operating Test Report: Submit written report of required operations test at

completion of the Project. See Article “Site Quality Control.” 1.06 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01780. 1. Manufacturer's operation and maintenance manuals. 2. Inspection Certificates and Permits. 3. Manufacturer Warranty. 4. Maintenance-Agreement: Submit the required maintenance agreement at

completion of the Project. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer: Provide elevators manufactured by a firm with a minimum of 10

years experience in the fabrication, installation and service of elevators. 2. Installer: Elevator shall be installed by the manufacturer. B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with most stringent requirements of the following: 1. Building Codes and Standards: a. State and local codes, ordinances and laws. b. ANSI/ASME A17.1 Safety Code for Elevators. c. NFPA 101 Life Safety Code. d. AWS Structural Welding Code. 2. Permits: Obtain and pay for all permits, inspections and certifications required to

install and operate the elevator. 3. Inspection and Testing: In accordance with requirements of local jurisdiction,

obtain required permits, inspections and tests. 4. Accessibility: Elevator shall be designed in response to Americans With Disabilities

Act Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG). a. Signals: Comply with NEII handicapped provisions. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. General Requirements: Comply with Section 01600 and the manufacturer's

recommendations. B. Delivery: Schedule delivery of elevator equipment to occur after completion of

hoistway construction and when construction is sufficiently complete to allow installation to commence without delay.

C. Storage: Store elevator materials in protected environment in accordance with

manufacturer recommendations.

TRL 0708 14210 - 4

1.09 WARRANTY A. Warrant that the materials and workmanship of the apparatus installed under these

specifications are first class in every respect; make good any defects, not due to ordinary wear and tear or improper use, which may develop within one year from Date of Final Acceptance of the total building Project by the Owner.

B. Replace, repair or adjust any equipment found defective and covered by warranty

prior to expiration of warranty period. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SOURCE REQUIREMENTS A. Basis of Design Manufacturer and Products: KONE, Inc.; www.kone.com –

MonoSpace traction elevator: 1. Equipment Control: Microprocessor KCM831 control system. B. Other Acceptable Machine Room-Less Products: 1. Otis Elevator Co. – Gen2. 2. Schindler Elevator Corp.- 400A. C. Substitution Requests: In accordance with Section 01600. 2.02 SYSTEM A. Work Results: Provide a complete installation of AC gearless traction elevator system. 1. Include the controls and accessory items listed. 2. Include materials and work as indicated on Drawings and specified. 3. Where a device or part of the equipment is referred to in the singular number,

such reference shall apply to as many such devices as are required to complete the installation.

B. Design Criteria, Capacities, and Characteristics: 1. Quantity and Elevator Numbers: 2 2. Rated Capacity: See Drawings 3. Rated Speed: 200 fpm 4. Number of Landings: See Drawings 5. Openings: See Drawings 6. Travel: 50'-0". Field verify. 7. Hoistway Dimensions: See Drawings 8. Platform Clear Inside Dimensions: See Drawings 9. Door Size: 3’-6” wide by 7’-0” high, side opening 10. Cab Height: 8’-0" 11. Main Power Supply: Verify voltage 12. Operation: Selective collective C. Performance Requirements: 1. Car Performance: a. Car Speed: Within 5 percent of contract speed under any loading condition

or direction of travel.

TRL 0708 14210 - 5

b. Car Capacity: Safely lower, stop and hold (per code) up to 125 percent of rated load.

2. System Performance: a. Vertical Vibration (maximum): 15 to17 mg. b. Horizontal Vibration (maximum): 10 to12 mg. c, Jerk Rate (maximum): 3.3 to 5.25 ft/sec3. d. Acceleration (maximum) 1.6 to 2.6 ft/sec2. e. In Car Noise: Maximum 55 dB(A). f. Leveling Accuracy: Within 3 mm. g. Starts Per Hour (maximum): 240 each elevator. 2.03 CONTROL COMPONENTS A. Controller: 1. Provide microprocessor-based control system with AC Drive to perform the

functions of safe elevator motion. Included shall be all of the hardware required to connect, transfer and interrupt power, and to protect the motor against overloading. The system shall also perform car and duplex operational control.

2. Each controller cabinet containing memory equipment shall be properly shielded from line pollution. The microcomputer system shall be designed to accept reprogramming with minimum system down time.

3. All high voltage (110V or above) contact points inside the controller cabinet shall be protected from accidental contact in a situation where the controller doors are open.

B. Auto-transformer: Provide auto-transformer to adjust the main-line supply to the 400V

required by the controller and drive C. Drive: Provide Variable Voltage Variable Frequency drive system to develop high

starting torque with low starting current. D. Controller Location: Locate controller{s} adjacent to the hoistway in an integral

space. 2.04 HOISTWAY COMPONENTS A. Machine: AC gearless machine, with permanent magnet synchronous motor, direct

current electro-mechanical disc brakes and integral traction drive sheave, mounted to the car guide rail at the top of the hoistway.

B. Governor: Friction type over-speed governor rated for the duty of the elevator

specified. C. Buffers: Car and counterweight. D. Hoistway Operating Devices: 1. Emergency stop switch in the pit. 2. Terminal stopping switches. 3. Emergency stop switch on the machine. E. Positioning System: System consisting of magnets and proximity switches F. Guide Rails and Attachments: Steel rails with brackets and fasteners.

TRL 0708 14210 - 6

G. Hoistway Entrances 1. Frames: Sheet steel, bolted construction. 2. Sills: Extruded aluminum. 3. Doors: Hollow metal construction with vertical internal channel reinforcements. 4. Fire Rating: Entrance and doors shall be UL fire-rated for 1-1/2 hour. 5. Entrance Finish: Baked enamel. 6. Entrance Markings Jamb Plates: Provide standard entrance jamb tactile

markings on both jambs, at all floors. 2.05 CAR COMPONENTS A. Car Frame: Provide car frame with adequate bracing to support the platform and car

enclosure. B. Car Safeties: Device will be provided and mounted under the car platform, securely

bolted to the car frame. The safety shall be actuated by a centrifugal governor mounted at the top of the hoistway. The safety shall designed to operate in case the car attains excessive descending speed.

C. Platform, Heavy Loading Type: The car platform shall be arranged to accommodate

one-piece loads weighing up to 25 percent of the rated capacity. D. Car Guides: Guides shall be provided and mounted to the top and bottom of both

the car and counterweight frame. Each roller guide assembly shall be arranged to maintain constant contact on the rail surfaces. Provide retainers in areas with seismic design requirements.

E. Canopy: Reinforced 16-gauge milled steel. White baked enamel finish. F. Steel Cab 1. Panels: Non-removable vertical panels, plastic laminate selected from standard

manufacturer’s catalog of choices. Trim and base plate to be aluminum with brushed finish.

2. Car Front Finish: #4 stainless steel. 3. Car Door Finish: #4 stainless steel. 4. Ceiling: Suspended ceiling shall consist of white translucent polycarbonate

panels set in frame of extruded natural satin finish with fluorescent lighting fixtures. 5. Handrail: Round tube metal handrail of 3/8-inch thick by 2 inches tall. Material to

be matte aluminum. Rails to be located on rear of car enclosure. 6. Flooring: Division 09. 7. Threshold: Aluminum F. Emergency Car Signals 1. Emergency Siren: Siren mounted on top of cab that is activated when the alarm

button in the car operating panel is engaged. Siren shall have rated sound pressure level of 80 dB(A) at a distance of three feet from device. Siren shall respond with a delay of not more than one second after activation of alarm button.

2. Emergency Car Lighting: Provide emergency power unit employing a 12-volt sealed rechargeable battery and totally static circuits shall illuminate the elevator car and provide current to the alarm bell in the event of building power failure.

TRL 0708 14210 - 7

G. Ventilation: Integral (Natural) ventilation. 2.06 SIGNAL DEVICES AND FIXTURES A. Car Operating Panel: Provide car operating panel with all push buttons, key switches,

and message indicators for elevator operation. 1. Provide integral car operating panel. Panel shall contain bank of round,

mechanical, illuminated buttons marked to correspond to landings served, emergency call button, door open button, door close button, and key switches for lights, inspection, and exhaust fan. Buttons shall have amber illumination (halo) and shall be flush with panel. All buttons to have raised text and Braille marking on left hand side. The car operating display panel shall be a 7-segment amber display. All texts, when illuminated, shall be amber. The car operating panel shall have a brushed stainless steel finish.

2. Additional features of car operating panel shall include: a. Car Position Indicator within operating panel (amber). b. Elevator Data Plate marked with elevator capacity and car number on car

top. c. Help button with raised markings. d. In car stop switch per local code. e. Firefighter’s hat. f. Firefighter’s Phase II Key-switch. g. Call Cancel Button. h. Emergency Two Way Communication Device. i. Independent Service. j. Firefighter’s Phase II emergency in-car operating instructions. B. Hall Fixtures: Wall mounted hall fixtures shall be provided with necessary push buttons

and key switches for elevator operation. 1. Hall fixtures shall feature round, mechanical, illuminated buttons in raised fixture

housings. Hall fixtures shall correspond to options available from that landing. C. Emergency Two Way Communication Device: A Emergency Two Way

Communication device shall be furnished in the car-operating panel. Necessary wires for the device shall be included and connected to the car traveling cable.

1. Provide ADA compliant communication device. Communications equipment and connections to the building service system shall be furnished and installed by others.}

D. Car Lantern and Chime: A directional lantern visible from the corridor shall be

provided in the car entrance. When the car stops and the doors are opening, the lantern shall indicate the direction in which the car is to travel and a chime will sound. The chime will sound once for up and twice for down.

2.07 ELEVATOR OPERATION AND CONTROLLER A. Elevator Operation 1. Simplex Collective Operation: Using a microprocessor-based controller, operation

shall be automatic by means of the car and hall buttons. If all calls in the system have been answered, the car shall park at the last landing served.

B. Standard Operating Features to include: 1. Full Collective Operation.

TRL 0708 14210 - 8

2. Fan and Light Control. 3. Car-Stall Protection. 4. Load Weight Bypass. 5. Independent Service. 6. Ascending Car Uncontrolled Movement Protection 7. Top of Car Inspection Station. 8. Firefighters' Service Phase I and Phase II. C. Elevator Control System for Inspections and Emergency 1. Provide devices within controller to run the elevator in inspection operation. 2. Provide devices on car top to run the elevator in inspection operation. 3. Provide within controller an emergency stop switch to disconnect power from the

brake and prevents motor from running. 4. Provide the means from the controller to mechanically lift and control the

elevator brake to safely bring car to nearest available landing when power is interrupted.

5. Provide the means from the controller to reset the governor over speed switch and also trip the governor.

6. Provide the means from the controller to reset the emergency brake when set because of an unintended car movement or ascending car over speed.

2.08 DOOR OPERATOR AND CONTROL A. Door Operator: A closed loop permanent magnet PWM high-performance door

operator shall be provided to open and close the car and hoistway doors simultaneously. Door movement shall be cushioned at both limits of travel. Electro-mechanical interlock shall be provided at each hoistway entrance to prevent operation of the elevator unless all doors are closed and locked. An electric contact shall be provided on the car at each car entrance to prevent the operation of the elevator unless the car door is closed.

B. The door operator shall be arranged so that, in case of interruption or failure of

electric power, the doors can be readily opened by hand from within the car, in accordance with applicable code. Emergency devices and keys for opening doors from the landing shall be provided as required by the local code.

C. Doors shall open automatically when the car has arrived at or is leveling at the

respective landings. Doors shall close after a predetermined time interval or immediately upon pressing of a car button. A door open button shall be provided in the car. Momentary pressing of this button shall reopen the doors and reset the time interval.

D. Door hangers and tracks shall be provided for each car and hoistway door. Tracks

shall be contoured to match the hanger sheaves. The hangers shall be designed for power operation with provisions for vertical and lateral adjustment. Hanger sheaves shall have polyurethane tires and pre-lubricated sealed-for-life bearings.

E. Electronic Door Safety Device. The elevator car shall be equipped with an electronic

protective device extending the full height of the car. When activated, this sensor shall prevent the doors from closing or cause them to stop and reopen if they are in the process of closing. The doors shall remain open as long as the flow of traffic continues and shall close shortly after the last person passes through the door opening.

TRL 0708 14210 - 9

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Prior to beginning the installation of elevator equipment,

examine the following to verify that no irregularities exist that would affect the quality of execution or work as specified:

1. Verify hoistway is in accordance with shop drawings. Dimensional tolerance of hoistway from shop drawings: -0 inches +2 inches. Do not begin work of this section until dimensions are within tolerances.

2. Verify projections greater then 2 inches (4 inches if ASME A17.1/CSA B44 2000 applies) must be beveled not less then 75 degrees from horizontal.

3. Verify landings have been prepared for entrance sill installation. 4. Verify elevator pit has been constructed in accordance with requirements, is dry

and reinforced to sustain vertical forces, as indicated in approved submittal. 5. Verify that sumps or sump pumps located within pit will not interfere with installed

elevator equipment. 6. Prior to start of Work, verify control space has been constructed in accordance

with requirements, with access coordinated with elevator shop drawings, including sleeves and penetrations.

7. Verify installation of GFCI protected 15-amp in pit and adjacent to each signal control cabinet in control space.

B. Notification: Notify Contractor in writing with copies to Architect and Owner if

unsatisfactory conditions are identified. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

C. Acceptance: Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Coordinate installation of anchors, bearing plates, brackets and other related

accessories. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. General: Install equipment, guides, controls, car and accessories according to

manufacturer's instructions, reference standards and approved shop drawings. B. Properly locate guide rails and related supports at locations in accordance with

manufacturer’s recommendations and approved shop drawings. Anchor to building structure using isolation system to minimize transmission of vibration to structure.

C. All hoistway frames shall be securely fastened to fixing angles mounted in the

hoistway. Coordinate installation of sills and frames with other trades. D. Lubricate operating system components in accordance with manufacturer

recommendations. E. Perform final adjustments and necessary service prior to substantial completion 3.04 SITE QUALITY CONTROL

TRL 0708 14210 - 10

A. Running Test: In addition to the other requirements, inspections, tests and remedies herein provided upon completion of the elevator installation and before final inspection make, in the presence of the Architect, a running speed test with full maximum load on each elevator car to determine whether the elevator equipment as installed meets the speed, capacity and other requirements of the specifications.

B. Replacement: In the event the equipment does not meet requirements of the

specifications, promptly remove from the premises work condemned by the Architect as failing to conform to the specifications, and promptly replace and re-execute work in accordance with the specifications without expense to the Owner. Bear expense of making good work of other contractors destroyed or damaged by such removal or replacement.

3.05 DEMONSTRATION A. The elevator contractor shall make a final check of each elevator operation with the

Owner or Owner’s representative present prior to turning each elevator over for use. The elevator contractor shall demonstrate that control systems and operating devices are functioning properly.

B. Instruct Owner’s Representative on the proper function and required daily

maintenance of elevators. Instruct personnel on emergency procedures, 3.06 MAINTENANCE A. Provide maintenance service consisting of examinations and adjustments of the

elevator equipment for a period of 12 months after date of Substantial Completion. B. Maintenance service shall be provided by elevator manufacturer recommended

service personnel. Manufacturer recommended parts and supplies shall be used in maintenance service as in the original manufacture and installation.

C. Maintenance service be performed during regular working hours of regular working

days and shall include regular time call back service. D. Maintenance service shall not include adjustments, repairs or replacement of parts

due to negligence, misuse, abuse or accidents. END OF SECTION

TRL 0708 14564-1

SECTION 14564 LAUNDRY AND LINEN CHUTE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Laundry chute with all required accessories. B. Related Sections: 1. Flushing and Sprinkler Head Connections: By Mechanical Contractor. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: Provide UL label on intake and discharge doors.

Provide sprinkler heads as required by code. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings as specified under Section 01330. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Deliver and store in original crates and under cover until ready for installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 LAUNDRY CHUTE A. Acceptable Chute: 1. Cutler-Federal, Inc. 2. Midland-Metalcraft Corp. 3. Wilkinson Chutes, Inc. 4. or Approved Substitute B. Chute: 24" diameter, 16 gauge aluminized steel with grid type floor frames. All joints

welded or lock seamed tight. Intake doors to be bolted in place on throats formed into the chute tube. All chute sections shall flash inside the sections below and there shall be no bolts, clips or other projections inside the chute. Discharge hopper shall be reinforced and separately supported at the impact area. Provide expansion joints as required for length of chute.

C. Intakes: 21" x 21" stainless steel full opening, self-closing, sided hinged, hand-operated

doors bearing 1-1/2 hour 650 degrees F UL B label. D. Discharge: Stainless steel 1-1/2 hp UL B labeled hopper as required for discharge into

linen cart. Discharge door to have hold open with 165 degree fusible link. Hopper Supported on pipe pedestal.

TRL 0708 14564-2

E. Vent: Chute extended full diameter through roof to metal top vent explosion cap 4'-0" above roof level.

F. Accessories: 3/4" IPS flushing spray head and 1/2" IPS sprinkler head above top intake.

Additional 1/2" sprinkler heads as required by local codes. 2" IPS drain flange at discharge hopper.

G. Access Doors: Provide fire rated access doors as required for access to valves, controls,

etc. See Section 08310 for type. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 ERECTION Assemble chute in place, align and anchor as recommended by the manufacturer and

according to approved shop drawings. Plumbing contractor will make connections to sprinkler and flushing heads and small connect drain fitting to drain.

END OF SECTION

HAMPTON INN AND SUITES AT D.I.A. - Superior...

Documents

Transcript of HAMPTON INN AND SUITES AT D.I.A. - Superior...